Home

Global Mapper User's Manual

1. F Global Mapper User s Manual V Track Opens Towards Start of Null Line C Track Opens Towards End of Line ae ee ae ee es E a C Track Opens Towards Start of Line 2223 2 2 3 ee a 293 Arrow Track Points Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards End of Line V Track Opens Towards End of Solid Line V Track Opens Towards Start of Solid Line Solid with Xs through Line Solid with Diamonds along Line Solid with Empty Diamonds along Line Solid with Circles along Line Solid with Empty Circles along Line Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start Solid with Arrow Pointing to End Solid with Empty Circle at Start Solid with Empty Circle at End Solid with Black Edges Point Styles Using the Point Styles panel users can configure what symbol will be used to display points of a given type In addition the Show Labels for Points of This Type option allows a user to turn point labels off on a type by type basis The Custom Symbols section allows users to create new symbols from their own bitmap and icon files which they can then use as the symbol to display for a given type Global Mapper s Point Type Features are listed in the Global Mapper Point Type Features table Symbols are listed in the Global Mapper Symbols table Global Mapper recognizes two field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of a Point Type They are GM TYPE Address Label POINT SYMBOL Dot Red Point Type Featu
2. _ _ Light Hil Shading Highlight from Direct Light 0 None ES White 3 Water Display Show Water on Hevation Data Water Level tie Water Transparency 128 ear Opaque The Shader selection box allows for the selection of the algorithm used to color and shade any loaded elevation data The following shading algorithms are available e The Atlas Shader is the default shader It generally provides good results for any loaded elevation data e The Color Ramp Shader displays ramps color from blue for low elevations to red for the highest elevations by default e The Daylight Shader colors all elevations the same and is only useful when hill shading is turned on e The Global Shader is designed for shading elevation data sets covering large areas of the earth such as Terrain Base and GTOPO30 The results are quite stunning for data sets such as these e The Gradient Shader moderates the color with elevation between the low elevation and the high elevation The actual colors ramped between can be selected on the Shader Options panel e The HSV Shader maps the elevations onto the HSV hue saturation value color space The mapping can be configured on the Shader Options panel e The Slope Shader colors loaded terrain data by the slope of the terrain rather than the absolute elevation This shader allows you to identify the portions of the terrain that are relatively flat vs those that are relatively steep
3. NzGD2000 S oa esoo S Built in Datums 389 2 5 7 1 1 4 Global Mapper User s Manual OMAN no a POINTE NOIRE 1948 CONGO oe cake 880 POSGAR94 ARGENTINA 66 IGRS1980 POTSDAM 1983 GERMANY FERRO 6746 Bessel1841 POTSDAMPHDN GERMANY NURRO Unknown fpesehlsti pron eens cease Oo REYKJAVIK 19006659 Danish 1876 S ROF93 tt GS 980 RGFG95 GUYANE 624 osio S RGM04 MAYOTTE Unknown GRS1980 RGNC91 93 NEW CALEDONIA 67 9 GRSs1980 RGR92 REUNION 6 7 Rss S RGSPMO6 ST PIERRE ET MIQUELON Unknown GRS1980 RTO E S 42 PULKOVO 194 68 Krassovsky S S 42 ALBANIA aa Kasoy S S 42 AZERBANAN GEORGIA 6284 Krassovsky S 42 CZECHOSLOVAKIA 6284 Krssovsky S S 42 ESTONIA 6284 Kasoy S S 42 GERMANY 6284 Kasoy S S 42 HUNGARY o Kasoy S S 42 KAZAKHSTAN 6284 Kaswsy S o Krassovsky S S 42 LATVIA 6284 Krassovsky S 42 LITHUANIA 6284 Krassovsky o Built in Datums 390 Ww r 5 Global Mapper User s Manual S 42POLAND 6284 Krassovsky S 42ROMANIA 6284 Krassovsky S 42RUSSIA 6284 Krassovsky S JTSK CZECH REPUBLIC 6156 Bessel i84i 5 SAOBRAZ Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 2 SCHWARZECK NAMIBIA 693 Beseisa SIRGAS 2000 S ooa osoo S SOLOMON 1968 GUX 1 ASTRO 6718 Intemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 2 SOUTHEASTBASE Unknown intemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 4 SOUTHWESTBASE Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 SWEREF99 SWED
4. Configuration z B Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles m Render 7 r Select Fom r Filter Penk F Aea W Lines iW Paints W Paints r Vector Map Detail Less m Vector Layer Ordering During Draw Order Vector Features by Type Before Layer Order f Vector Data Will Aways Draw on Top of Loaded Raster Layers This is the Default Setting Order Vector Features by Layer Order First Then Type Within a Layer This Allows Raster Layers to Overay Vector Data Set Default Font Face Set Default Font Character Set Render Area and Line Vertices Shit V Always Render Vertices for Selected Features Render Dots at Line Endpoints _ Render Deleted Features iw Draw Feature Labels Always Display All Labels Render Line Direction Arow Hide Extra Label Text Displayed Under Road Icons Jnly Highlight Border of Selected Area Features The Render section contains the settings for which types of vector features areas lines or points are to be displayed when loaded You can use these settings to turn off an entire class of features all at once For a finer degree of control see the Filter section described below The Select From section contains the settings which determine which vector object types 1 e areas lines points the Pick Tool will consider when selecting objects The Filter section allows you to s
5. Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 336 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Arrow Small Aqua Geology Arrow Small Black eter peppy GOOCHNUNGESS Geology Arrow Small Green Geology Arrow Small Red Geology Cleavage Medium Aqua Geology Cleavage Medium Black Geology Cleavage Medium Green Geology Cleavage Medium Red Geology Cleavage Small Aqua Geology Cleavage Small Black Geology Cleavage Small Green Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 337 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Cleavage Small Red Geology Dip Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Dip Bedding Medium Black Geology Dip Bedding Medium Green Geology Dip Bedding Medium Red Geology Dip Bedding Small Aqua Geology Dip Bedding Small Black Geology Dip Bedding Small Green Geology Dip Bedding Small Red Geology Dip Overturned Medium Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Medium Black Booeoeo0oeo tlele HHE Ee Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 338 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Dip Overturned Medium Green Geology Dip Overturned Medium Red Geology Dip Overturned Small Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Small Black Geology Dip Overturned Small Green Geology Dip
6. The Display Labels section allows you to control if you want feature display labels included in the DWG files and if so whether you want them represented as TEXT entities in their own layer called FEATURE LABEL or as DWG attributes The default is to have them included as attributes associated with each feature As some software packages cannot handle attributes in DWG files you may have to switch to a different option with the associated loss of information to get your exported DWG files to work with some software packages If you would like line features to have rotated labels running along the line associated with them you have to use the option to Include Display Labels as Separate Text Layer The Layer Names section allows you to control how the layer names used in the exported DWG file are generated You can choose to use the feature description feature display label or feature source filename as the layer name in the exported file If you choose to use the display label as the layer name any features that do not have a display label will use the feature description as the layer name in the exported file If selected the Generate Projection PRJ File option causes a projection file describing the ground reference system of the DWG file to be generated in addition to the DWG file itself The PRJ file will have the same Table of Contents 61 Global Mapper User s Manual name as the DWG file with the prj extension If selected
7. Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Grd Display Shit No Grd Lat Lon Grid Curent Projection Grid arid Spacing j Show All Grid Lines Regardless of Zoom Scale Extend Grid Lines Beyond Loaded Data Bounds Distance Scale Display Units Shit 5 C No Scale Display Scale Using Distance Units Hevation Legend Display Units Shit L f NoLegend Metric meters Statute feet Position Display Format Lat Lon dd mm ss ssss h Area Measure Units Acres Distance Measure Units Metric im km Miscellaneous Advanced Options Prefer World File TFYV Coordinates for Gea TIFF Files Maintain Export Bounds Instead of Sample Spacing Export Old Format PRJ Files IBIL Format Ask if 16 bit Files are Imagery bd ee m Restore Default Settings Cancel Bool Help Table of Contents 122 Global Mapper User s Manual The Grid Display options allow for the control of whether or not grid lines are displayed and if so what projection they will be in The No Grid option is the default and causes no grid lines to be displayed or exported The Lat Lon Grid options causes a grid to be displayed along even latitude and longitude lines The Global Projection Grid option causes a grid to be displayed in the currently selected global i e display projection which can be modified on the Projection ta
8. County Park Boundary Solid Processing Closure Line 0 255 0 Dash 128 128 128 Dash Dot 128 128 128 Solid 255 255 255 Railroad 0 0 0 Railroad Class 1A Railroad 0 0 0 Railroad Class 1B Railroad 0 0 0 Ramp Solid 0 255 255 p lt Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 63 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid _ Residential Road 128 128 128 River lt 20 km Solid 0 0 211 River gt 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 100 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 20 50 km Solid 0 0 211 River 50 100 km Solid 0 0 211 Solid Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View pk 0 0 211 River Unknown Length 2550 0 0 0 0 0 255 0 255 1 0 0 211 0 0 0 ee 64 Global Mapper User s Manual Unclassified Line Feature Unknown Line Type 128 128 128 Global Mapper Drawing Styles se MS a S a es a peg ee Ee Unpaved Road Drawing Styles st e C mno O T m e C etme rennon et on Ronon r r cin ity Sp any ct is Sony o cin ing to any Senne er ss Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 365 Global Mapper User s Manual ak oe oy a ent Oe ony me C sawaman ee es ee ee O e sai gta Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 366
9. Horizontal Hatch Vertical Hatch Sand_ Pattern Intermittent_Water_Pattern Salt_ Pattern Coral_ Pattern Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 352 Global Mapper User s Manual Black _Cross_ Pattern Black Dot_Pattern Area Border Styles Global Mapper Border Styles Border Style Dash Dot Dot Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 353 Global Mapper User s Manual Comb Left Only Comb Right Only Comb Long Teeth Left Only Comb Long_Teeth Right Only Comb Widely Spaced Left Only Comb Widely Spaced Right Only Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 354 Global Mapper User s Manual Comb Long amp Short Teeth Left Only Cy Comb Long amp Short Teeth Right Only cu Comb Double Teeth Left Only EG Comb Double Teeth Right Only Ea Comb Triplet Left Only EG Comb Triplet Right Only co EG Co EG Rake Narrow Spaced Left Only Rake Narrow Spaced Right Only Rake Widely Spaced Left Only Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 355 Global Mapper User s Manual Rake Widely Spaced Right Only Solid with Minus Signs on Left fo Solid with Minus Signs on Right Solid with Plus Signs on Left Solid with Plus Signs on Right a a o o o F F F H oo Cy
10. e Specify Individual Grid Cell Width and Height Allows the user to specify the desired width and height in ground units that they wish each grid cell tile to be Every tile will have that width and height which means that the right most column and bottom most row of tiles could go beyond the specified export bounds If you specify negative cell width and or height values the grid cells will be snapped to the right and or bottom edge s of the export bounds rather than the top left e Specify Individual Grid Cell Pixel Size Allows the user to specify the desired width and height in pixels that they wish each grid cell tile to be Every tile will have that width and height in pixels which means that the right most column and bottom most row of tiles could go beyond the specified export bounds This option is not available for vector based exports since it does not make sense for Table of Contents 100 Global Mapper User s Manual those export types e Use Selected Area Feature s for Grid Cells This option will export a file for each area feature selected with the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools When you select this feature you will be prompted to select how to name the files based on each area You can choose from using the display label of the area the filename of the file that the area was loaded from an attribute value of the area or just a simple sequential numbering scheme You will also be prompted to choose whether eac
11. 46 56 S460 Ww G27 Gb 425216 N 2bdfe m 08 21703 08 1437 1 6 km h 0 0 TO 46 56 3460 Ww Se S56 43 1712 N 116 66 m 08721703 08 13 35 24 7 km h 0 0 00 00 58 110 46 56 3460 Ww a2 Gb 46 9504 No 44 Adem 08721703 08 13 52 19 1 km h 40 OO 01 15 110 46 56 7920W Se Sb 465028 NO 3375m 08721703 08 14 01 8 4 km h og 4 00 01 24 110 46 56 40160 W 327 GR 48 6576 N 53161m 08721703 08 14 05 273kmh 1137 00 01 25 110 46 54 0ER Ww Se Gb A7 o0S0 N 1442m 08721703 08 14 12 482kmh 113 0 00 01 35 110 46 45 7604 wo Se GB 46 4896 N 15379m 08721703 08 14 23 554km h 107 17 00 01 46 110 46 44 12200 Ww se Sb 44 0208 N 3304A m 08 21703 08 14 33 50 9 kmh ra 00 01 56 110 46 404 4 w se ab 44192 Naeem 08721703 08 14 40 38 2 kmh Ate ka 00 02 03 110 46 39 sf44 W ae Gb 45 2592 N 31 93m 08 21703 08 14 43 28 7 kmh 6 6 00 02 06 110 46 38 330p Ww Se Sb 45 9992 N 13851m 08721703 08 14 47 16 6 km h ae 00 02 10 110 46 SF S056 Ww Se SB 46 0692 N 13851m 08721703 08 14 50 12 5 km h ERN 00 02 13 110 46 374000 Ww Se Gb 46 5592 N F660 m 08 21703 08 14 54 35 3 kmh 61 0 o He TF 110 46 34 E5200 Ww Se ab A540 N 11492m 08721703 08 15 02 50 8 kmh arb TO 46 P0O2 Ww a2 Sb 4 fade N Tasdam GeT Eatme ES 110 46 2504200 Ww Se Gb 450740 N 24am 08721703 08 15 20 547kmh 118 6 110 46 16 655200 Ww S26 420912 N 13767m 08721703 08 15 36 45 1 km h 108 17 11046118347 S256 407016 N 229 73 m 08 21703 08 15 47 551km h 108 7 TO 46 3 4096 W a Sb 20 3076 N 10
12. Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View Global Mapper User s Manual 2x Sym Details me amen A nee eal ec oe Tea e SR Tem e e Cee eE me o Teee A JENE a a 2 Ce Global Mapper Built In Symbols 333 Global Mapper User s Manual Deer Diag Crosshair Red xe Diag Crosshair Yellow bod Dot Dot Blue Dot Green Dot Red Dot White Dot Yellow Elevation Shaded Fish Fuel Geyser Golf Hospital Library Lighthouse x fel el el el fel nn Little Blue X Lodging Marina Mine we Ee ace peers ESAO ELAn _Benionsicse pone e pom el cme a a iat Ooue E cone totes gt Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 334 Global Mapper User s Manual No Symbol Park Picnic Area Post Office Resturant Restroom Rock Scenic View School Shopping Skiing Spot Elevation Stadium Stream Origin Summit Swimming Area nese elalolmiml aloe Tower Waterfall Weigh Station a Bo Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 335 Global Mapper User s Manual wane a gopoooggg eiemel Symbols Geology Global Mapper Built In Symbols Symbol _ 2X Sym Details Geology Arrow Medium Aqua a Geology Arrow Medium Black Geology Arrow Medium Green Geology Arrow Medium Red
13. B2 Green 3 B1 B3 4 Blue 3 B1 B3 4 The Pseudo Natural Color blend mode combines the color channels within a single image using a common algorithm for generating natural color imagery from CIR imagery The Color to Grayscale blend mode converts a color image to grayscale Table of Contents 156 Global Mapper User s Manual The Transparent option allows a particular color or colors to be displayed transparently making it possible to see through a layer to the layers underneath For example when viewing a DRG on top of a DOQ making the white in the DRG transparent makes it possible to see much of the DOQ underneath Pressing the Set Transparent Color button allows the user to select the color or multiple colors for palette based files to treat as transparent in the selected overlay s as well as save the palette for palette based files to a color palette pal file The slider below the transparency option contros how similar to the selected transparent color s that a color in the image has to be before it is also treated as transparent The Exact side means that only exact matches on color will be treated as transparent whereas moving the slider towards the fuzzy side makes progressively less similar colors be treated as transparent The checkbox that used to be on this dialog to control this corresponded to a value of 16 This is useful for getting rid of colors in lossy formats like JPG and ECW where the colors are not
14. GENERATE CONTOURS INTERVAL 50 ELEV_UNITS FEET Export the contours to a new DXF file The created file will have 3D polyline features for the contours EXPORT VECTOR FILENAME SDIR SSFNAME WO_EXT S_CONTOURS DXF TYPE DXF GEN _PRJ_FILE YES Export the contours to a 3D shape file EXPORT_VECTOR FILENAME SDIRS SFNAME WO_EXT _CONTOURS SHP TYPE SHAPEFILE SHAPE TYPE LINES GEN_3D_LINES YES GEN_PRJ_FILE YES Unload the loaded data UNLOAD ALL End the loop DIR_LOOP_END Edit Vector Features Based on an Attribute and Display Label GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 Import the file to modify IMPORT FILENAME C Temp export test tiger_wyandotte_sample gmp Assign the type railroad to all features with a CFCC attribute with a value of A41 and a display label with 74 in it somewhere EDIT VECTOR LINE_TYPER RATLROAD COMPARE STR CFCC A41 COMPARE STR lt Feature Name gt 7 74 Assign the name Burlington Northern Railroad to all features with a CFCC attribute with a EDIT VECTOR ATTR_VAL lt Feature Name gt Burlington Northern Railroad COMPARE STR CFCC A41 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View Home Contactus Purchase Global Mapper Purchase Blue Marble Download Global Mapper Download Blue Marble Copyright 2011 Blue Marble Geographics Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 303 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN A
15. Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Area Type Right Click for More Options Unknown Area Type View Shed Coverage Area WaterStorage Tanks Water Tank Storage Wooded Area WTP 30 New Type Edit Type Delete Type Attributes F Fill Pattem Solid Fill Color Add Custom Fill Pattem Delete Fill Pattem T Border Style Null Width 1 pigel Color i z Transparency How See Through is the Area 100 0 i Show Labels for Areas of This Type Select Label Font Restore Default Style Restore Default Style For All Types Line Styles REFERENCE GUIDE ALERT Built In Line Types and Styles A graphical reference guide to the line types and drawing styles built in to Global Mapper The Line Styles panel pictured below allows the user to configure how lines of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper The line style width color and label font can be modified on a type by type basis When selecting a line width you can choose a fixed width in screen pixels which means that the line will draw the same width regardless of your zoom level or you can choose the option to specify the line width as a New Fixed Width in Meters When you do that your line will be drawn at a given number of meters in width which means it will get thicker as you zoom
16. If selected the Generate Projection PRJ File option causes a projection file describing the ground reference system of the DXF file to be generated in addition to the DXF file itself The PRJ file will have the same name as the DXF file with the prj extension If selected the Create 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data option will cause any underlying elevation data like DEMs to be used to retrieve elevation values for 2D features being exported and generate new 3D Table of Contents 59 Global Mapper User s Manual features in the exported DXF file The units used by the elevation values are determined by the Elevation Display Export Units setting on the Vertical Options tab of the Configuration dialog If selected the Generate ECEF Coordinates option will cause the exported DXF file to use Earth Centered Earth Fixed ECEF X YZ coordinate values rather than XY values in the current export projection If selected the Generate Zero Width Lines option causes and line features created in the DXF file to be marked as having zero width Use this option if you intend to use the resulting DXF file with a product such as MicroStation which has problems with lines of non zero thickness Note that if you export features of the TIN Face Area area type they will be exported as 3D Face features in the generated DXF file rather than 3D polylines allowing you to easily get a usable TIN surface for use in other applications like 3DS Max Note
17. SET_LOG_FILE The SET_LOG_FILE command sets the name of the file to log status warning and error messages to If the log file specified already exists the messages will be appended to the end of it The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to log file to write messages to Table of Contents 298 Global Mapper User s Manual SET_VERT_DISP_OPTS The SET_VERT_DISP_OPTS command allows you to modify the options used when rendering elevation layers such as the shader to use if any as well as the lighting and water setup The following parameters are supported by this command e ENABLE_HILL_SHADING this setting controls whether or not hill shading i e lighting shadowing will be done Use YES to enable hill shading and NO to disable hill shading e SHADER_NAME this sets the name of the shader to use when rendering elevation data This must be one of the names displayed in the shader drop down in Global Mapper such as Atlas Shader or Global Shader or the name of a custom shader e AMBIENT_LIGHT_LEVEL this sets the ambient lighting level The valid range of values is 0 0 1 0 with smaller numbers meaning completely black i e no light and 1 0 being full lighting e VERT_EXAG this sets the vertical exaggeration to use when rendering elevation overlays This effects the hill shading The valid range of values is 0 0 100 0 e LIGHT_ALTITUDE this sets the altitude angle of the light sou
18. e You will be unable to work with map catalogs e You will be unable to download data from WMS OSM and TMS map servers You will be unable to save rectified imagery to fully rectified files Table of Contents 5 Global Mapper User s Manual e You will be unable to join attribute files to loaded spatial data e You will not be able to print to a specific scale i e 1 1000 You will have to endure a nagging registration dialog everytime that you run the program You will not be eligible for free email support CLICK HERE TO REGISTER your copy of Global Mapper and obtain access to all of its powerful features Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual 2 MENUBAR AND TOOLBAR This section briefly reviews the menus and commands in order to understand the basic purpose of each The toolbar is displayed across the top of the application window below the menu bar The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in Global Mapper To hide or display the toolbars or to switch to the old Toolbar display which some users prefer use the View menu commands for the toolbar Menu Headings e File Menu e Edit Menu e View Menu e Tools Menu e Search Menu e GPS Menu e Help Menu File Menu The File menu offers the following commands e Open Data File s Command e Open Spatial Database Command e Open Generic ASCII Text File s Command e Open All Files in a Directory Tree Command e Open Data File at Fixed
19. Feature Measurement Information Selected Feature Information Feature Name gt lt Feature Type gt lt Enclosed4rea gt lt Lenath Pernmeter gt PRACTICE FAIRWAYS TA Practice Practice 13 67 acres 1 139 km Fairway Fairways 0 1085 acres 64 4 rm 0 Fairway Fairways 0 0758 acres rE m 0 Tees Tees 0 3705 acres 154 5 m Tees Tees 0 4027 acres 157 1 m Bunkers Bunkers 0 04637 acres 63 2 m Total Enclosed Area 15 17 acres Total LengthPermeter 2 446 km Export to CS File i Cancel Automatically Inserting Vertices at Line Intersections If two of more line features are selected the Insert Vertices and or Split at Intersections of Selected Features option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will find all intersections between selected line features and allow you to insert new vertices in the selected lines at the intersection locations if there are not already vertices at the intersection and or split the lines at any intersection or only existing at vertex intersections This is a very powerful command allowing you to make a line network have node to node connectivity and even make sure that lines terminate at intersections if required for your application This is commonly used for making routable street maps Finding Non Connected Line Endpoints i e Connectivity Checks If two of more line features are selected the Find Non Connected Line Endpoints option will appear when right clicking Select
20. Geology Joint Closed Medium Green DODGE ROEoooOn DUUGOGOUULU Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 341 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Joint Closed Medium Red Geology Joint Closed Small Aqua Geology Joint Closed Small Black Geology Joint Closed Small Green Geology Joint Closed Small Red Geology Joint Open Medium Aqua Geology Joint Open Medium Black Geology Joint Open Medium Green Geology Joint Open Medium Red Geology Joint Open Small Aqua Geology Joint Open Small Black Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Joint Open Small Green Geology Joint Open Small Red Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Black Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Green Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Red Geology Vertical Bedding Small Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Small Black Geology Vertical Bedding Small Green Geology Vertical Bedding Small Red SEET efits feel tle pe Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 343 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN AREA LINE AND POINT TYPES This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Area Styles Area Types Area Fill
21. Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper UNREGISTERED fle View Took Search GPS Help aT tbe SIRS fos BB 80 E FLEE i maak Ae Aii a a TM Ts pF En r att Ser TENE on A EnF Paras NE dges eathere dik mi alt i a b m JE a t RiGH 266 177 134 EGAS TESTL TIF LTT MADE i 664615 755 TOAL 225 6 Loe A 115 17 Color Grade Tab The Color Grade tab pictured below allows you to apply complex color correction to a loaded raster file You can setup the input range for each color channel and what output range to map it to as well as specify a saturation value Table of Contents 164 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Palette Feathering Color Grade Projection Red Color Channel Grading Input Range 65 to 211 oo Output Range Oto 255 _ Green Color Channel Grading Input Range Oto 255 lt Output Range 94 to 138 Blue Paine Channel Grading Input Range Oto 255 e a Output Range 0 to 55 Elevation Data Options Selecting the Options button while only gridded elevation overlays are selected displays the Elevation Options dialog The Elevation Options dialog consists of two tabs one for controlling the display of the overlay s and the other for modifying the elevation values within the overlay s The Display tab pictured below c
22. Global Mapper User s Manual If one or more area features are selected the Advanced Feature Creation Options gt Create Flatten Terrain from Selected Area Feature s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will allow you to create a new elevation grid covering the selected area features that has all points within the selected area feature s set to the elevation of those area features Any portions of the new elevation grid outside of the area features will be set to invalid allowing any underlying terrain to show through If you also select the option that elevations are relative to the height of any underlying terrain the new terrain surface will have heights equal to the original height of the terrain at each sample location within the area offset by the elevation value of the area feature This functionality is useful for adjusting all elevation values within an area by some amount the area elevation This feature provides a very easy way to do things like flatten an area like a lake in underlying terrain layers Just assign an ELEVATION attribute to your area feature then select it and choose this option to flatten everything inside that area to the elevation attribute value This is also a nice way to create an elevation grid representing a city scape from building outlines with ELEVATION attributes Adding Address Information to Points from Nearby Road Features If one or more point features are selected the Add Add
23. If you choose to create new range rings at selected point locations and those points have a RING_RAD_M attribute that attribute value will be interpreted as the ring radius in meters and used rather than what is specified in the dialog described below After selecting the center of your range ring s the Select Range Ring Parameters dialog pictured below appears and allows you to setup how many range rings you would like to create and how far apart you would like to create them You can choose to create rectangles with the specified range as the radius rather than a ring if you would like You can also choose to create a multi ring Checking this box will delay the actual range ring creation until you have added additional range rings and unchecked the box Then all rings in the multi ring will be combined if possible to build nice looking combined range rings Once you have completed have completed creating the range ring s the Digitizer Tool will remain in the range ring creation mode so you can simply left click to create additional range rings centered on another location or right click to choose a different mode select Range Ring Parameters Enter the number of range ring areas to create as well as how far apart each range ng should be You can also modify the range ring center Ponce coordinate if you d like i Create Paint at Center of Range Rings Create Rectangle s Instead of Ringla Number of Range Rings 3 Range Ring
24. Minor 1 1 Bathymetric Contour Solid 132 130 255 Supplementary Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 321 Global Mapper User s Manual City Boundary Solid 0 0 0 Collector Road Solid 255 128 0 Solid 128 64 0 Contour Line Intermediate Contour Line Major Solid 128 64 0 Contour Line Minor Solid 128 64 0 Contour Line Supplementary Aog 128 64 0 County Route Solid 255 0 255 Deleted Line Dash Striped 192 192 192 Digitizer Tool Line 255 255 0 Dry Stream or River Dot 0 0 211 Ferry Route Solid Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 255 128 0 128 128 128 22 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Grid Line Major 128 128 128 Grid Line Minor Solid 128 128 128 Intermittent Stream or River Dash 0 0 211 International Political Boundary nee Interstate Solid 132 130 255 Invisible Boundary Dot 192 192 192 Major Political Boundary State Solid 128 128 128 Major US Highway Solid 255 64 64 Marine Route Solid Measurement Striped 255 255 0 Minor Political Boundary Solid County Park Boundary Solid 0 255 0 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 23 Global Mapper User s Manual Dash 128 128 128 Processing Closure Line Railroad Class 1A fosmid Railroad Railroad Class 1B oor Railroad Ramp Solid Dash Dot 128 128 1
25. Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to perform batch conversions Print Command The Print command allows the user to print the contents of the current view window When selected the Print dialog picture below is displayed which allows the user to set up the print process Print Options General Print Bounds Header BlsisieMa ilar Select Font Footer Total Len 27 7 km Total Brg 110 9 En Select Font Print in Black and White M Use White Background Color M Printto Scale 1 1500 Extra Margin Around Printout o inches Print To File Print to an Image File Rather Than to a Printer m Format f BMP C JPG C PNG C TIF f you are having trouble printing on your system a good workaround is to print to a graphics file like a Windows BMP file then print that using some other software like Microsoft Paint that works with your printer The Header field allows the user to specify text to be displayed above the printed map image This text will be printed centered above the map image on the printout The Footer field allows the user to specify text to be displayed below the printed map image This text will be printed centered below the map image on the printout The footer text will default to the text displayed on the status bar for the active tool such as the measurement information for the current measurement in the Measure Tool Table of Contents 86 Global Mapper User s Manual Se
26. The Cancel button quits the process of opening a spatial database The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Spatial Database Import Options The Spatial Database Import Options dialog is used to choose the table or tables to be loaded from a spatial database Global Mapper displays this dialog after you have chosen a spatial database connection a Spatialte database an Esri file geodatabase an Esri personal geodatabase or an Esri ArcSDE geodatabase connection file Table of Contents 112 Global Mapper User s Manual Spatial Database Import Options Table Selection best_fit_input fronds bob_geotranslate continental_us_ capitals continental_ us highways continental_us_ states The table list contains the names of the tables in the spatial database Put a check next to one or more table s to indicate which tables you want to load Click the Check All button to place select all of the tables in the list Click the Clear All button to remove the check mark from all of the tables in the list Once you have marked the tables to be loaded click the OK button to load the tables The Cancel button quits the process of opening a spatial database The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Table of Contents 113 Global Mapper User s Manual Table Selection Raster r Hevation Options Vertical Unit 0 Sie If the spatial database being opened contains
27. The Coordinate Delimeter section allows the user to specify what character the coordinates are separated by on coordinate lines If the Auto Detect option is selected Global Mapper will attempt to automatically determine the coordinate delimeter This option will usually work and should probably be used unless you have trouble The Coordinate Line Prefix section allows the user to specify whether coordinates start at the beginning of the line or if coordinate lines start with some other sequence of characters For example some formats may start coordinate lines with the sequence XY The Rows to Skip at Start of File setting controls how many lines to skip at the start of the file before trying to extract data This is useful if you have some header lines at the start of your file that you want to skip over The Feature Classification section allows the user to specify what feature type to assign to area line and point features imported from the file If the Include attributes from lines with coordinate data option is selected any text found AFTER the coordinate data on a line from the file will be including as attribute for the feature that coordinate is in If not selected only lines from the file that are not determined to contain coordinate data will be used as attributes If you are doing a Point Only import and the Column Headers in First Row of File option is checked values in the first line from the file will be used at the names of
28. The optimal cut height will be reported as the break even height with the other measurement results On the right click menu in the Measure Tool are options to control how distances are measured and the paths are drawn The following options are available e Great Circle Any measured distances will use the great circle distance which is the shortest path along the surface of the earth s ellipsoid between the two points Any drawn paths will be along the great circle path Typically you won t notice a difference for short distances but will for longer ones e Grid Distance Any measured distances will use the distance as calculated in the Cartesion XY Table of Contents 187 Global Mapper User s Manual coordinate system of the current projected system Any drawn paths will be straight lines between the start and end point This can result in inaccurate distances for long measurements or when working in projection systems with high levels of distortion e Rhumb Line Any measured distances will be drawn along the rhumb line if possible which is a line of constant bearing between the start and end point Rhumb lines are often used in navigation so that a constant bearing can be maintained A rhumb line will be a straight line in the Mercator projection Any drawn paths will also be along the shortest rhumb line path between the start and end point On the right click menu in the Measure Tool are options to control how bearings are repoted T
29. You can specify the total power from the rest of the link budget i e transmission power plus antenna gain minus any other power losses excluding free space path loss and the signal frequency Then as you move the cursor over the view shed you can see the remaining power at the location In addition the view shed will get more transparent as thed signal power becomes less The Obstructions from Vector Data section allows the user to specify whether or not loaded vector data with elevation values should be considered when performing the view shed analysis This allows the user to use things like buildings fence lines towers etc to block portions of the view creating a more realistic view shed If the user elects to use vector data they can also specify whether the elevation values stored with vector features are relative to the ground or relative to mean sea level Typically heights for vector features are specified relative to the ground If any area features are included and their heights are relative to the ground the obstruction heights within those areas will be increased by the specified amount but any receiver heights will still be based on the terrain This makes things like wooded areas very easy to model The Obstruction Area Features Always Hidden option allows you to specify that any locations within an obstruction area will be marked as hidden rather than only those that actually would be hidden If checked the Display Hidden Rath
30. a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel Table of Contents 24 Global Mapper User s Manual Package Options Simplification Gridding Export Bounds Projection Use the options below to control what projection the data exported to the package file will be in You can choose to export the data in the curent view projection save everthing with lat lon values or keep the orginal projection of each layer C Use Currently Selected View Projection Geographic L Keep Original Native Projection for Each Layer MSRMaps com TeraServer USA Export Options Use the options below to control which layer of any loaded MSARMaps com data will be used when exporting The auto option will always pick a detail layer as good or better than what is displayed on screen without creating too large of an export file Automatically Choose a Good Zoom Level f Use Best Available Zoom Level Creates Larger Files f Use the Zoom Level Displayed on the Screen Use double precision coordinates for vector data This may make packages much larger and is usually only need when surveytevel accuracy is required Discard feature attribute values to save space and speed up package load times Always Maintain Feature Styles Even if Using Defaults Combine Compatible Vector Layers into a Single Layer Embed Images Associated with Picture Paints Cancel Apply Help The Package Options panel consists of options allowing th
31. dialog Save Tracklog The Save Tracklog command will save the currently record tracklog to a permanent line feature When selected this command will display a dialog allowing you to specify any additional desired attributes and or drawing styles that you would like to associate with the tracklog In addition any extraneous points that do not contribute to the shape of the tracklog will be automatically removed to save space Table of Contents 236 Global Mapper User s Manual Any saved tracklog features will be added to the user features layer which appears in the Overlay Control Center The saved tracklog features can be exported to any of the supported vector export formats Simplify Reduce Tracklogs when Saved The Simplify Reduce Tracklogs when Saved command controls whether or not recording GPS track logs are simplified reduced when saved or whether all recorded points are kept If this option is checked any points which do not significantly contribute to the shape of the recorded track log will be removed to conserve memory Send Raster Maps to Connected Garmin Device The Send Raster Maps to Connected Garmin Device is a very powerful option that allows you to send any type of loaded data to a connected Garmin device for display as raster maps on your handheld Garmin device Currently only a few Garmin GPS devices geared towards outdoor use like the Colorado Dakota and Oregon series with updated software support the displ
32. e Path Profile LOS Generate 3D path profile and perform line of sight LOS calculations e View Shed Analysis Perform view shed analysis using loaded elevation grid data e Digitizer Modify existing vector features and create new ones e Image Swipe Swipe away a raster layer to see what is underneath e Coordinate Convertor Easy reprojection conversion of coordinates e Control Center Central control for all loaded overlays e Configure General Global Mapper setup e Map Layout Setup Map Layout Display scale bar margins north arrow etc Zoom Tool al The Zoom command selects the zoom tool as the current tool To zoom in on a specific point choose the Zoom tool from the toolbar or Tool Zoom from menu bar A magnifying glass icon should appear on the screen To zoom in left click without dragging the mouse The view is centered on where the mouse was clicked and will zoom in by a factor of two To zoom out right click without dragging the mouse The view will zoom out by a factor of two centered on where the mouse was clicked You can also hold down the Ctrl key while right clicking to restore the view to the last zoomed view Alternately one can zoom in to a user defined rectangle by left clicking and then draging a box while holding down the left mouse button If your mouse has a middle button you can hold it down and drag the map similar to the behavior of the Pan Grab and Drag tool Pan Grab and Drag T
33. e Print Setup Command e Exit Command Open Data File s Command 5 The Open Data File s command allows the user to open additional data files into the main Global Mapper view If no other data is already loaded and the user has not explicitly set a projection the view will adopt the projection and datum of the first data file selected for loading If other data is already loaded the selected data files will be displayed in the current projection datum The data will automatically be displayed at the proper location relative to other loaded data creating a mosaic of data that is properly placed spatially You don t have to do anything special to create mosaics of multiple files this happens simply by loading the geo referenced files into Global Mapper Note Global Mapper automatically opens files with tar gz extensions without the use of a decompression tool such as Winzip This is particularly useful for SDTS transfers which are typically distributed in a tar gz format The Open Spatial Database command allows the user to open additional data into the main Global Mapper view from a spatial database connection If no other data is already loaded and the user has not explicitly set a projection the view will adopt the projection and datum of the first spatial table selected for loading If other data is already loaded the selected data files will be displayed in the current projection datum Click here for more information
34. j og a oe A sae ae fan ra as Fa i Ae a Afi Ee i Nope es ciel OSES ees SAC 94 2948131788 39 022 Ground Control Point GCF Entry Ground Control Point GCP Projection Fivel 3 a 68926909774 sE asting Lon 3 16 30580 wh Add Point to List Geographic Latitude Longitude WOSe4 arc Pivel 47143643571 A NorthingLat 39 LaF N Update Selected Point Select Projection Ground Control Foints O ouble click to Center on Control Paint 7 an Point Name Pixel Piel Projected Projected Longitude Latitude Error Pont 249257 B264 13 94 3187736667 390175236667 94 19 12642 W 39 1 05142 H 0 00 Port Z33023 4095 27 943684290000 390424296667 QF 221057 Ww So 254578 N 0 00 PortS 941 13 3934 54 94 3628810000 39 04546386333 JP 21 77206 So 2 72 705 H 0 00 Port4 4168 93 4714 36 942717633333 S9 0302195000 94 16 305850 391 81317 N 0 00 The Image Rectifier dialog is the heart of the image rectification process This dialog contains everything that you need to rectify an image from graphical views of the image to lists of ground control points to an Options menu for selecting the rectification and resampling methods to use Each part of this dialog is covered in detail below File Menu The File menu provides options allowing you to save the current ground control point list to a file and to add additional ground control points from a file The file specifying the ground control poi
35. would use GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS 8 4 GRID_OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID_TYPE_ parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID_NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID_NAMING_COLS and GRID_NAMING_ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID_NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used GRID_NAMING_COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Table of Contents 271 Global Mapper User s Manual Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM_REVERSE name using numbers in descending order ALPHA name using letters in ascending order 0 ALP
36. you will click a position in the zoomed view to fill in the pixel coordinates then manually enter the ground coordinates into the X Easting Lon and Y Northing Lat data fields or else select a point from the Reference Image view for the ground coordinates IMPORTANT If you manually enter the ground coordinates you must enter them in the coordinate system indicated by the Ground Control Point Projection portion of the dialog otherwise you will get incorrect results The one exception is that if you enter a value that looks like a lat lon coordinates but a projected system is selected you will be prompted to select whether or not the entered coordinates are lat lon coordinates or coordinates in the selected projection system Once the coordinates are entered press the Add GCP to List button to add the GCP to the list of GCPs to be used when rectifying the image The Update Selected GCP button allows you to update the coordinates associated with a previously entered GCP You can also use Alt R to simulate pressing the Update Selected GCP button Ground Control Point GCP Projection This portion of the dialog allows you to select the projection that ground coordinates are entered in as well as what projection the image will be natively treated as when rectified it can be reprojected later using the normal Global Mapper reprojection mechanisms See the IMPORTANT note above for more details Table of Contents 108 Global Mapper User s Manual
37. 1 271400 UTM NAD27 382769 777 4307807 107 38 54 4 The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Global Mapper window To display or hide the status bar use the Status Bar command in the View menu The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items and toolbar icons The left area of the status bar will also show color or elevation of the current pixel if it s over a raster image or the description of the closest vector overlay component If the nearest line feature to the cursor contains recognized addressing information the address nearest the cursor will be displayed The right areas of the status bar indicate the current view scale and the current mouse position in both the global ground reference system and in the Position Display Format currently selected from the Configuration dialog Background The Background command brings up a color dialog box from which the user can select a color to be the new background color of your Global Mapper window The background color selected will also be used to fill in areas of no data in exported raster imagery i e GeoTIFF and JPG files Center on Location The Center on Location command allows the user to manually enter a location to recenter the view on providing a quick and easy way to center yourself on a particular location Properties Properties The Properties command displays a dialog listing properties about the current view window Full View Table of
38. 146 Larkin St New Market AL 35761 256 379 5416 9 McPeak Faye 395 Dupree Dr Huntsville AL 35806 256 837 2657 When batch geo coding you can choose to either geocode US addresses against an online database or to geocode to loaded road data instead If you choose to geocode against loaded road data you must already have road data loaded with a known address format like Tiger Line data in the US or data with supported attribute names for addressing information like R FROM_ADR L_TO_ADR R_FROM_CITY L_TO_CITY etc so that the data can be geocoded Once you complete a batch geocode operation the results are displayed in a list in a dialog see sample below The Batch Geocode Results dialog contains buttons allowing you to create new point features from the matched address results or to export the results to a new file Batch Geocode Results sequence Mame Address City State ZIP Phone Latitude Long 1 McPeak Betty Morth Pole AK 99705 907 488 4879 BF 46 S dd oN 147 22 2 MicPeak F Anchorage AK 99501 907 770 2957 B12 58 32 N 149 52S 4 McPeak Roger Morth Pole AK 99705 907 488 0023 BF 4637 44 N 147 227 4 MMcPeak Allan 1011 McCay Ave Mobile L 36609 251 633 0931 30 40 08 127 N 88111 F icFeak Bill 395 Dupree Dr Huntsville L 35806 256 837 2657 34 47 45 15 HN 8b 43 2 G McPeak Carol 5923 Lumsden Battery Cir Mobile L 36619 251 661 0989 30 S6 11 03 N 88 10 4 T g 9 McPeak Dwight 5546 Heath Row Dr Birmingham AL 3
39. 255 WHITEISMIN GEOTIFF only creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image White will be stored as zero with varying shades of gray up to black with a value of 255 JPG GEOTIFF only creates a 24 bit RGB JPG in TIFF image Note that while this creates a highly compressed GeoTIFF file many software packages do not recognize JPG in TIFF format files MULTIBAND BIL BIP BSQ GEOTIFF JPEG2000 and NITF only creates a multi band image file with any number of bands of data This is useful for multi spectral imagery Either 8 or 16 bits per band will be used depending on what is available in the input data Use the NUM_BANDS parameter to specify how many bands to use You can override the default band setting using the BAND_EXPORT_SETUP parameter described below Custom palette filename you can also pass in the full path to a pal file containing a custom palette to use for the export e NUM_BANDS specifies how many bands of data to export fora PALETTE MULTIBAND export If you don t specify a value for this the band count will be the maximum available for any of the loaded layers e BAND_BIT_DEPTH specifies how many bits to use for each band of data for a PALETTE MULTIBAND export If you don t specify a value for this the highest bit depth of any of the input data layers will be used The valid values are BAND_BIT_DEPTH 8 BAND_BIT_DEPTH 16 or BAND_BIT_DEPTH 32 e BAND_EXPORT_SETUP all
40. 3D Map 0 Video Tutorial Downloading Free Maps Imagery from Online Sources Video Tutorial Exporting Current Zoom Level Using the Screenshot Function Video Tutorial Exporting Elevation Data to a XYZ File Video Tutorial Creating Maps and Overlays for Google Earth Video Tutorial _Georectifying Imagery PDF Files 101 Video Tutorial Importing ASCII files into Global Mapper 0 Video Tutorial Exporting to Google Maps Video Tutorial Creating Range Rings Importing Title Blocks and Address Searching 0 Video Tutorial Creating Line from Selected Points and Finding Max Slope Along Path User Supplied Tutorials 0 User Supplied Tutorial from EDGAR How to Create 3D Shadowed Maps 0 User Supplied Tutorial Garmin Custom Raster Maps with Global Mapper Reference Guide Generic ASCII Format Reference Guide Generic ASCII Format Field Descriptions Reference Guide Shortcut Key Reference Reference Guide Supported Datum and Ellipsoid List Reference Guide Built In Area Line and Point Types and Styles 3 MENUBAR AND TOOLBAR a File Menu Open Printable Searchable Copy PDF Format 1 Global Mapper User s Manual e Open Data File s Command e Open Spatial Database Command e Open Generic ASCII Text File s Command e Open All Files in a Directory Tree e Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location e Unload All Command e Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps e Create New Map Catalog Comma
41. 4 rows and 5 columns each grid cell will be exactly 25 of the total export height and 20 of the total export width The sample spacing may be slightly smaller than what is specified in order to achieve this By default the sample spacing is exactly maintained and each grid cell may be slightly larger than specified to maintain an integer number of exported cells Use GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE YES to enable GRID_NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID_NAMING_COLS and GRID_NAMING_ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID_NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used GRID_NAMING_COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM_REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 0 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order ALPHA_REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting
42. Contents 89 Global Mapper User s Manual The Full View command zooms such that all of the currently loaded overlays fit in the view window This command also places the overlays in the center of the view window Zoom In The Zoom In command zooms the current view in by a factor of 2 Zoom In Micro The Zoom In Micro command zooms the current view in by a small amount Zoom Out The Zoom Out command zooms the current view out by a factor of 2 Zoom Out Micro The Zoom Out Micro command zooms the current view out by a small amount Zoom To Scale The Zoom To Scale command zoom the current view to a user specified scale For example to make one inch on the screen be equivalent to 1 mile of ground truth you would enter a scale of 63360 this is the number of inches in a mile Zoom To Spacing Pixel Size The Zoom To Spacing command zoom the current view so that each pixel on the screen represents a user specified number of ground units Zoom To Selected Feature s The Zoom To Selected Feature s command zooms the current view to the bounds of the feature s that are currently selected with the Digitizer Tool Zoom To View in Google Earth The Zoom To View in Google Earth command will open a session of Google Earth on your machine and pan and zoom it to approximately match your current view Note that this does require that you have a copy of Google Earth installed Save Current View The Save Current View command saves the curren
43. Esri Geodatabases is only available in the 32 bit version of Global Mapper You can install the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of Global Mapper side by side and they can share a license Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Garmin TRK PCX5 File Command The Export Garmin TRK PCX5 File command allows the user to export any loaded vector line data to a Garmin TRK PCX5 format file This file can be imported by a wide variety of GPS software such as Garmin s MapSource amp reg to facilitate transferring track logs to a GPS unit When selected the command displays the Garmin TRK Format Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Garmin WPT PCX5 File Command The Export Garmin WPT PCX5 File command allows the user to export any loaded named point data to a Garmin WPT PCX5 format file This file can be imported by a wide variety of GPS software such as Garmin s MapSource amp reg to facilitate transferring waypoints to a GPS unit When selected the command displays the Garmin WPT Format Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of
44. Global Mapper User s Manual OSM Tiles Export Options OSM Options Export Bounds Data Set Name Blue Springs DEM m Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution to use for the maximum detail level in the exported tiles The default selection will preserve Full detail for any loaded rasterelevation data set Level 12 38 meters pixel Number of Zoom Levels to Use 5 i Google Maps API Key Enter the Google Maps API key to include in the generated HTML file You can get one of these from http www google comapis maps signup html E Tile Image File Format JPG Good for Imagery PNG Good for Scanned Maps and Vector Data z Default Background Map Layer ange Maas Con io Ald Map Type Selector Overview Map Scale Bar E T See Tih is the Map Transparent i Opaque W Make Image Tiles Transparent PNG Format Only Save vector Data f O payed Skip Easting Tiles Use to Resume Cancelled Export Skip Empty Tiles Dont Export Blank Tiles ADVANCED Fill to Tile Bounds ADVANCED Create World Files for Exported Tiles Note Users without a permanent registration key that export Google Maps tiles will get a large diagonal DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export PCX Command The Export PCX command allows the user to export any loaded data sets to a PCX image file The projecti
45. Mapper but the full extent of the data is on the screen then this option will no be available e Click the Draw a Box button to draw the bounding box on the screen using your mouse If there is no data loaded into the viewer then this option will not be available e Choose Lat Lon Degrees to specify the northwest and southeast corners of the bounding box in degrees of latitude and longitude e Choose Global Projection to specify the northwest and southeast corners of the bounding box in the unit of the current global projection If there is no data loaded into the viewer or the viewer currently has no projection defined then this option will not be available e Choose Corner w Size Global Projection to specify the northwest corner and the width and height of the bounding box in the unit of the current global projection If there is no data loaded into the Table of Contents 115 Global Mapper User s Manual viewer or the viewer currently has no projection defined then this option will not be available e Click the Reset to Last Import Bounds button to retrieve the most recently defined bounding box in the unit of the current global projection If there is no data loaded into the viewer or the viewer currently has no projection defined then this option will not be available Projections and Datums The Global Mapper display space adopts the coordinate system of the first table opened assuming that there is currently no data load
46. Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Processing Closure Line will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Line Types Drawing Line e Style Width ne Color Alley or Driveway 128 128 128 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 360 Global Mapper User s Manual Bathymetric Contour Solid Intermediate Bathymetric Contour Major Solid Bathymetric Contour Minor Solid Bathymetric Contour Solid Supplementary C pl Collector Road Solid Contour Line Intermediate Solid Contour Line Major Solid Contour Line Minor Solid Msn Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 361 Global Mapper User s Manual Deleted Line Dash 192 192 192 255 255 0 Digitizer Tool Line pd Dry Stream or River Dot 0 0 211 Ferry Route Solid 255 128 0 Solid 128 128 128 Grid Line Major 128 128 128 Grid Line Minor Solid 128 128 128 Intermittent Stream or River Dash 0 0 211 International Political Boundary pene Interstate Solid 132 130 255 Invisible Boundary Dot 192 192 192 Major Political Boundary State Solid 128 128 128 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 62 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Major US Highway 255 64 64 0 0 0 253 253 0 Minor Political Boundary Solid 0 0 0
47. Mapper User s Manual release it the point will be placed at the start of the mouse drag and the strike dip azimuth will automatically be initialized to the direction that you dragged You can cancel creation of the point s at any time by pressing the Escape key or right clicking After selecting the locationof your strike and dip point the Enter Strike and Dip Parameters dialog pictured below appears and allows you to setup your point This includes selected the azimuth angle for your strike either relative to True North the default or to the top of the map screen the dip value for your point which will be used as the display label on the map the symbol to use an optional description and which layer in the Control Center to place the new point feature There is also a Modify Location button which allows you to fine tune the location of the point by manually entering coordinates Once you have completed have completed creating the strike and dip point the Digitizer Tool will remain in the strike and dip creation mode so you can simply left click to create additional points centered on another location or right click to choose a different mode If you hold down the Ctrl key when left clicking to create additional points the new strike and dip point will automatically be created at the clicked location using the same parameters as the last strike and dip point that was created allowing you to quickly place a lot of points without going thr
48. Mapper after changing this file for the changes to have any effect Table of Contents 144 Global Mapper User s Manual OVERLAY CONTROL CENTER This section describes the Overlay Control Center dialog pictured below This dialog serves as the central control center handling all currently loaded data sets overlays B Overlay Control Center Curent Opened Overlays Right Click on Overlay Hames for More Options EREA NED Elevation Data E MF Tiger California CA Alpine CA Amador LA El Dorada CA Colusa Esl Usa tab edl Usa MIF Options ShowHide Close Overlay Currently Opened Overlays This is a list of the all currently opened overlays You can select an overlay by clicking on its name Multiple overlays can be selected using the shift and control keys while clicking on overlays in the list If the overlay is currently hidden it is indicated to the left of the overlay description Double clicking on a layer automatically brings up its Options dialog If you hold down the M key while double clicking the Metadata dialog for the layer will be displayed instead You can right click on the list of currently opened overlays to display a list of options available to perform on the selected overlays Examples of available options include the following e Create Elevation Grid from 3D Vector Data This allows you to create an elevation grid from part or all of any vector features in the selected overlays that conta
49. Name Feature Type Feature Layer and Drawing Style and Attributes for the selected features Deleting Undeleting Features Removing an unwanted feature is quite simple All that you need to do is select the feature s that you wish to delete then either select the Delete option from the right click popup menu or press the DELETE key Once you ve done that the feature is marked for deleted and will no longer appear on the display unless the Render Deleted Features option is enabled on the Vector Options tab of the Configuration dialog If you decide that you didn t want to delete a feature simple enable the Render Deleted Features option see above to show the deleted features then select the deleted features and select the Undelete Feature s option from the right click popup menu Moving Features You can move area line and point features simply by _selecting the feature s that you wish to move then selecting the Move XXX Feature s option from the right click popup menu or you can simply hold down the ALT key when selecting the feature s to move to automatically enter move mode for the selected feature s vertices Once you ve done that simply hold down the left mouse button and drag the features to the desired new location If you d only like to move the selected feature s either horizontally or vertically you can hold down either the X or Y keys on the keyboard to restrict the movement to that axis Holding down both keys w
50. New Area Feature Create Mew Line Feature Create Mew Point Feature Create Mew Point Feature Ot Specified Position Right Click to Display Option Menu UTM Nabe 384926 6 4321736 9 39 038995 N 94 929590 Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles When a single area line or point feature is selected there is an option on the right click popup menu allowing you to edit that feature 1 e Edit Area Feature Edit Line Feature or Edit Point Feature Selecting that option displays the Modify Feature Info dialog which allows you to modify the Name Feature Type Drawing Style and Attributes for the selected feature You can also access this dialog by double clicking on a feature A sample of this dialog for an area feature is below Table of Contents 214 Global Mapper User s Manual Mame My Housel Vertices Feature Type Misc Manmade Structure Create New Type a Feature Layer lt blue_springs opt gt BLUE SPRINGS MO MULTIPLE CATEGORIES m Feature Style f Use Default Style for Selected Feature Type Specify Style to Use When Rendering Feature Feature Attributes Attribute Name Attribute Walue DLGSCODEPAIR_1 200 164 DLG3CODEPAIR 2 200 0 Add Edit Delete Add File Link s Add Time Stamp coal The Name field allows you to modify the display name of the feature If you are editing or creating a road feature you can set the name to a commonly su
51. POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than Table of Contents 273 Global Mapper User s Manual the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use for naming or the special values lt Area Display Label gt or lt Area Source Filename gt If no value is provided the exported files will be sequentially numbered POLYGON_CROP_FOLDER_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use as a folder name before the actual filename or the special values lt Area Display Label gt TEMPLATE_FILENAME POLISH_MP only specifies the full path and filename for another MP file to use for the settings for the new MP file being exported MP_EXPORT_TEMPLATE_FILES POLISH_MP only if a TEMPLATE_FILENAME value is provided this controls whether or not the FILES section s from the template file will be copied to the new file MP_COPY_ENTIRE_TEMPLATE POLISH_MP only specifies that the enti
52. Patterns Area Border Styles e Line Styles Line Type Features Drawing Styles e Point Styles Point Type Features Symbols Basic Symbols Geology Area Styles Using the Area Styles panel users can configure how areas of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper Area fill border style and color can be modified on a type by type basis The Show Labels for Areas of This Type option allows users to turn area labels off on a type by type basis Area Types are shown in the Global Mapper Area Types table Tables showing the Global Mapper Fill Patterns and Border Styles follow the Area Types table Global Mapper recognizes five field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of an Area Type They are GM_TYPEH BORDER_COLOR BORDER_WIDTH BORDER_STYLE FILL COLOR FILL STYLE The FILL_ALPHA field attribute is recognized by Global Mapper to set an Area Type s transparency Values for FILL_ALPHA range from 0 Transparent to 255 Opaque To determine the transparency value setting simply multiply the percentage by 255 and round off to the nearest integer e g 75 transparency 0 75 x 255 191 25 use 191 As an example the default field attributes for the Anchorage Area Type are GM_TYPE Anchorage Area BORDER_COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER_WIDTH 1 BORDER_STYLE Comb Right Only FILL COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill To change the type s transparency to 35 the FILL_ALPHA fie
53. Projection tab of the Configuration dialog Disable Automatic Interpolation of Resampled Exports if checked exported raster layers will only be interpolated if the anti alias interpolation option for that layer is checked rather than interpolation occurring for any reprojected or resampled export Disable Automatic Interpolation of Zoomed Out Display if checked this option disables the automatic interpolation anti aliasing done when zoomed way out on raster imagery layers This can increase the drawing speed when zoomed out on data at the expense of a worse display for most maps Auto Fake Location of Unpositioned Rasters if checked this options causes the location of any un positioned raster files to automatically be faked to allow display This means rather than being prompted to rectify fake the position or cancel the load the fake position option would just be chosen automatically Export Old Format PRJ Files if checked this option specifies that the old mostly unsupported ESRI PRJ format be used when PRJ files are saved rather than the default new WKT projection format that is used by default Include Datum Transformations in PRJ Files if checked this option will cause any generated WKT PRJ files that use a datum based on a 3 parameter Molodensky or 7 parameter Bursa Wolfe transformation to include that transformation as a TOWGS84 field in the PRJ file Note that some products i e ESRI ones won t accept a PRJ file with
54. Radius i Kilometers al Modify Range Center Point Coordinates Combining Multiple Rings Advanced Users Combine Ring with Additional Rings to Fallow Use this feature to specify multiple range rings that you want combined into a single ring feature around the combined ranges Uncheck this box when specifying the ring parameters for the last ing in the multi ring to complete the process The range ring feature has numerous applications including search and rescue and aviation Creating Buffer Areas Around Selected Features After selecting the Create Buffer Areas Around Selected Feature s option in the Advanced Feature Creation popup menu the Setup Buffer Areas dialog pictured below appears and allows you to setup how many buffer areas that you want to create around each selected feature and at what distance to space them For example if you want to create buffers at distances of 100 200 and 300 meters around each selected feature you would specify that you want to create 3 buffer areas with a buffer distance of 100 meters You can also select to get the base buffer distance from an attribute of the selected features rather than using a single fixed buffer radius for each feature That attribute value can also include unit text like 500 m or 300 ft and that will automatically be recognized and used If you would like to combine all overlapping buffers into larger combined areas simply check the option to Combin
55. Require Connected Results to be Fully Closed Before Creating Area If checked this option indicates that only connected line paths that fully close to form a complete area will be turned into areas If not checked any path will be closed with a straight line between the two endpoints once no more connections can be found e Create Multiple Areas if All Lines Don t Connect If checked this option indicates that if all of the selected lines don t connect to form a single path then multiple area features will be generated one for each independent connected path If Require Connected Results to be Fully Closed Before Creating Area lf Create Multiple Areas if all Lines Don t Connect Creating New Line Features After selecting the Create New Line Feature Vertex Mode popup menu option you can proceed to draw a new line feature with the mouse To draw the feature simple left click at each place that you d like to drop a vertex To finish the line feature right click at the desired location of the last vertex You can cancel creation of the new line at any time by pressing the Escape key Note that while drawing the line in Vertex Mode you can use the Snapping feature to help align the line with existing features Table of Contents 204 Global Mapper User s Manual You can also choose to draw a line using the Create New Line Area Feature Trace Mode popup menu option To draw the feature simple press the left button to start the line are
56. Solid 0 0 0 Isobath Area sobath Area Solid Fill 132 130 255 Null 0 0 0 Iso height Area Iso height Area No Fill 0 0 0 pi pi fa om fea om Solid 128 64 0 i IOG B B a He B B E i i OOG B i l OIE B B k feo B B sq m1 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 306 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Fill 0 0 211 Lake 250 500 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Lake 30 100 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Lake 5 10 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Lake Unknown Area Lare Meto Large Metro Area Solid Fill Area Solid Fill 0 0 211 Solid Fill 220 212 148 255 247 181 Major National 0 235 0 Solid Fill Major River 0 0 211 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 307 Global Mapper User s Manual SOTE Solid Fill 0 235 0 Park Map Catalog ep ma a a agg E Diagonal Laver bout ap atalia ayer Boies Cros Hatch 255 64 64 W ae eae No Fill 255 0 255 Area Backwards E T cathe eae Diagonal 255 0 255 yy Cross Hatch Measurement Oron 255 0 0 Hatch ae Misc Manmade Solid Fill 255 64 64 Structure National Park ey Solid Fill 0 235 0 Ocean Solid Fill 0 0 211 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House Vie
57. The definitions of flat and steep are user configurable on the Shader Options panel e The Slope Direction Shader colors loaded terrain data by direction in which the terrain faces rather Table of Contents 136 Global Mapper User s Manual than the absolute elevation This shader allows you to easily identify things like the portions of the terrain that face south or any other direction The colors to use for each direction are user configurable on the Shader Options panel e If any custom shaders have been created they will be available as well Use the Enable Hill Shading option to view elevation data as shaded relief With this option off the map appears flat with elevations distinguished by color only With it on shadows are generated using the loaded elevation data along with the remaining settings on this panel The Elevation Display Units option allows you to modify the units that elevations will be displayed in on the status bar as you move the cursor over loaded elevation data The Lighting Direction options set the position of the light source the sun for performing hill shading Note that cartographic azimuth and altitude are used This means that 0 azimuth means the sun is to the north 90 azimuth means the sun is to the east and so on An altitude of 90 means that the sun is directly overhead while an altitude of 0 means the sun is on the horizon Use the Ambient Lighting to brighten up dark looking data sets o
58. Tool e Zoom To View in Google Earth Open Google Earth to same view e Save Current View Saves the current view for later restoration e Restore Last Saved View Restores the last saved view e Restore Last Drawn View Restores the last drawn view e Name and Save Current View Names and saves the current view e Restore Named View Restores a previously saved named view Toolbars Use this command to display and hide the Toolbars which includes buttons for some of the most common commands in Global Mapper A check mark appears next to the menu item when the Toolbar is displayed 4 Global Mapper v14 0 b091212 64 bit REGISTERED E E Toolbars w Status Bar File Edit Tools Terrain Analysis Search GPS Help File Toolbar EE View Toolbar Tools Toolbar os 5 m E i LISAS 3D View Ctrl 3 6 f Background Color ee ee Ke Full View Sie panna Center on Location Ctrl Home v aS a 325m Properties Digitizer Toolbar Zoom In PgDn Show All Toolbars Foom In Micro Ctrl PgDn Hide All Toolbars Zoom Out PgUp Use Old Style Toolbars 300 m Zoom Out Micra Ctrl PgUp Always Show Digitizer Toolbar if Enabled ie F i I me Fe F Favorites Toolbar The Favorites Toolbar pictured below provides very convenient one click access to many of the commands in Global Mapper including nearly every Digitizer Tool command and many of the commands under the other menu commands The toolbar consists of
59. WEST IDAHOHPGN 6152 IGRS1980 NAD83 NEBRASKAHPGN 6152 GRS1980 o NAD83 NEVADAHPGN 652 GRS1980 o NAD83 NEWENGLANDHPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 NEW JERSEY HPGN 6152 GRS1980 O NAD83 NEW MEXICO HPGN 6152 GRs1980 NAD83 NEW YORK HPGN 652 GRS1980 NAD83 NORTH CAROLINA HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 NORTH DAKOTA HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 OHIO HPGN S GRSU98O NAD83 OKLAHOMA HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 PENNSYLVANIA HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 PUERTO RICO VIRGIN ISLANDS HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 SOUTH CAROLINA HPGN 6152 IGRS1980 NAD83 SOUTH DAKOTA HPGN 6152 IGRS1980 NAD83 TENNESSEEHPGN 652 GRS1980 NAD83 TEXASEASTHPGN 652 GRS1980 NAD83 TEXAS WEST HPGN 6152 GRS 1980 GRS1980 S NAD83 UTAHHPGN S GRSU98O NAD83 VIRGINIAHPGN 61S2_GRS980 o NAD83 WASHINGTON OREGONHPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 WEST VIRGINIAHPGN 6152 GRS1980 o NAD83 WISCONSIN HPGN 6152 J Rsi980 NAD83 WYOMING HPGN 652 IGRS980 O NAD83 CSRS TT esoo S NAD83 CSRS ALBERTA 67 IGRSU98O NAD83 CSRS BRITISH COLUMBIA 6617 GRS1980 NAD83 CSRS NEW BRUNSWICK 6617 GRS1980 NAD83 CSRS QUEBEC 667 GRs1980 NAD83 CSRS SASKATCHEWAN 6617 GRS1980 NAHRWAN UAE 60m0 Clarke 1880 RGS NEW ISRAELI DATUM NID 6m IGRS980 o NORTH SAHARA 1959 6v Cweisso O NORTH SAHARA 1959 HASSI MESSAOUD 6307 Clarke 1880 NTF FRANCE GREENWICH MERIDIAN 6275 Clarke 18800GN NTF FRANCE PARIS MERIDIAN 6807 Clake18804GN
60. Web displays the Load Image From Web dialog pictured below This dialog allows the user to either select a predefined web link for loading or to enter the URL of any available ECW file served by Image Web Server Table of Contents 17 Global Mapper User s Manual Load Image From eb Africa Australia Cancel Help ai E Canada E Cosa E Denmark E Finland E Ikonos W Japan H UB Add Link o m 1941 _tenoroc Edit Link z Teter calit 2000 _tenoroc Delete Link The tree on the left of the dialog allows the user to select which data file they wish to load Global Mapper comes with several dozen useful links already entered into the tree To access your own ECW image from the web press the Add Link button This button causes the Add New Web Link dialog pictured below to be displayed Add Hew Web Image EJ Group Name My Custom Links Description JLas Vegas Ny Cancel Image URL Jecwp www earthete com images usa Lasveg The Group Name drop list allows the user to select which group if any to place the new link in Any of the predefined groups can be selected or a new group name can be entered Leaving the group name blank will cause the new link to appear at the root level of the tree The Description field is where you enter the human readable description of the link This is what will be displayed for the link on the main dialog Leaving this blank will cause the URL t
61. When rectifying new imagery you can control the default projection used by creating a default_rectification prj file in your Global Mapper installation folder If present the default rectification projection selected when you open the rectification dialog will be whatever projection is specified in that PRJ file Ground Control Points List This section of the dialog contains a list of all of the entered GCPs including their name pixel coordinates ground coordinates and the estimated error in pixels at each GCP based on the current rectification method Each GCP has a checkbox next to indicating whether or not that GCP is used for the rectification This provided you an easy way to remove GCPs from a rectification to see how they affect it Double clicking an item in this list will cause the Zoomed View to recenter on the GCP and will fill in the Ground Control Point Entry section with the pixel and ground coordinates of the selected GCP allowing for easy updating of GCP locations You can move the selection in the GCP list up and down using the Alt Q and Alt Z hot keys These can help facilitate quickly entering lots of GCPs without having to use the mouse If you simply want to shift an image all that you need to do is press the Shift All button and specify the adjustment to apply to each entered GCP Completing the Rectification Process Once you have entered all of your ground control points GCPs press the OK button to complete
62. a comma delimited list of the X Y and Z scale factors such as COORD_SCALE 0 1 0 1 1 0 e NO_DATA_DIST_MULT specifies how far from an actual data point a grid cell has to be before it is treated as a no data value This number is given as a multiple of the diagonal size of a single grid cell as nominally determined by the gridding algorithm or specified with the SPATIAL_RES parameter A value of 0 means that all points should be considered as valid e SPATIAL_RES specifies spatial resolution to use when generating an elevation grid from the data Defaults to a good value for maintaining the full spatial resolution of the provided point data if not specified Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the projection specified for the file For example if UTM with meter units was the file projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 e SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 SAMPLE IMPORT_ASCII FILENAME C data ASCII Files usvi_landmark asc TYPE POINT_AND_LINE COORD_DELIM A Table of Conte
63. a drop down with the configured Favorite options and commands to setup the Favorites and a green arrow that you press to active the currently selected command You can also use the Ctrl Enter shortcut key to run whatever the selected command is thus creating a single configurable shortcut key You can also use the Setup Favorites Shortcut Keys option to bring up a dialog allowing you to assign shortcut keys to any available command providing quick keyboard access to nearly any functionality in the software The Setup Favorites List option allows you to select commands to always have available in the Favorites drop down list above the first separator dashed line The Favorites toolbar will also remember what you commonly use in the Digitizer Tool and automatically populate the list with up to 5 commonly used tasks these are placed below the specifically selected commands Table of Contents 88 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper v14 0 b091212 64 bit REGISTERED _ _ File Edit Search GPS Help ajama siey View Tools Terrain Analysis 4 Export Elevation Grid Format GRID Create Regular Grid of User Specified Size Onentation Export Raster magerl Data to a Spatial Database Table Export Vector Format Setup Favorites List Clear Automatically Added Favorites Setup Favorites Shortcut Keys Status Bar Height 305 0 meters lt BLUE_SPRINGS_4 QUADS DEM gt BLUE SPRINGS MO
64. a projection file to set the global projection to geographic lat lon arc degrees with a datum of NAD83 LOAD PROJECTION FILENAMEF C DATA PRJ Files geo_degrees_nad83 pr 4 Use the EXPORT_RASTER command to generate a new 8 bit per pixel GeoTIFF file EXPORT_RASTER FILENAME C DATA EXPORTED DATA merged_drg_8bpp tif TYPE GEOTIFF PALETTE OPTIMIZED Now use the EXPORT_RASTER command to generate a grayscale GeoTIFF file Lets also create a world file for this one EXPORT_RASTER FILENAME C DATA EXPORTED DATA merged_drg_gray tif TYPE GEKOTIFF PALETTE GRAYSCALE GEN WORLD _FILE YES Create a JPEG file using the EXPORT_RASTER command Also create a world file and a projection file to make it easier to load in other places EXPORT_RASTER FILENAME C DATA EXPORTED DATA merged_drg jpg TYPE JPEG GEN WORLD _FILE YES GEN PRJ_FILE YES Generate Contours from all USGS DEMs in a Folder and Export them to DXF and Shape files GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 UNLOAD_ALL Loop over all DEM files in a folder and convert them DIR_LOOP_START DIRECTORY C DATA SDTS_DEM 24K FILENAME MASKS DEM STDS TAR GZ RECURSE_DIR Import an archived SDTS DEM file Global Mapper will automatically determine that this is an archived SDTS DEM file and load it jf correctly Table of Contents 302 Global Mapper User s Manual IMPORT FILENAME SFNAME W_DIR ANTI_ALTIAS YES Generate 50 ft contours from the loaded DEM data
65. a view shed analysis first select the view shed tool as your current tool Press and release the left mouse button at the position where you wish to place the transmitter At this point the View Shed Setup dialog pictured below will appear allowing you to setup the view shed calculation You can also calculate views sheds at multiple point locations by selecting the point features at the desired locations in the Digitizer Tool right clicking then selecting the Calculate View Sheds at Selected Point s option on the menu that is displayed If you choose to perform view shed operations at selected point feature locations the view shed calculation values will be initialized from attributes of that point feature The values selected on the dialog will be used except when one of the following attributes is present with a value to override what was selected on the dialog this allows you to batch calculate view sheds at different locations with different parameters OFFSETA height above ground in meters or feet if ft in value for transmitter observation point e OFFSETA_MSL or OFFSETA_MS if coming from a Shapefile height above sea level in meters or feet if ft in value for transmitter observation point e OFFSETB height above ground in meters or feet if ft in value for receiver e OFFSETB_MSL or OFFSETB_MS if coming from a Shapefile height above sea level in meters or feet if ft in value for receiver e AZIMUTH I
66. about loading data from a spatial database Open Generic ASCII Text File s Command The Open Generic ASCH Text File s command allows the user to import data from a wide variety of generic ASCII text formats Selecting the Open Generic ASCI Text File command prompts the user to select the file s to load and then displays the Generic ASCII Text Import Options dialog pictured below This dialog allows the user to specify how the text file s are formatted so that they can be imported Global Mapper supports coordinates in decimal format as well as degree minute and degree minute second coordinates Table of Contents 10 Global Mapper User s Manual p E gt Import Type Coordinate Delimeter f Point Only All Features are Points Select the characters that are used to separate the T Dan li coordinates in a coordinate lne from the file Select the Cancel Point Line and Area Features Auto Detect option if jou are not sure C Elevation Grid from 30 Point Data Auto Detect Comme Help Coordinate Column OrderFormat f Space or tab C Semicolon 7 Easting Longitude Coordinate First C Tab Co z Northing 7 Latitude Coordinate First Feature Classification J ina a aa Tama Beli Petes Assign Loaded Area Features the Classification f MGARS USNG Format Coordinates State Pak o Fields to Skip at Start of Line E l Assign Loaded Line Features the Classification Coordinate Format Default Decimal or Separate
67. adjustment The CONTRAST_STRETCH_SIZE parameter can be used to override the number of standard deviations from the mean to stretch to e MIN_MAX apply a min max contrast stretch stretching the available range of values in each color band to the full range of 0 255 For imagery which contains both black and white this will have no affect e CONTRAST_SHARED raster only specified whether or not the contrast adjustment for this layer will share the adjustment with other contrast adjusted layers in order to ensure a consistent modification across layers Use CONTRAST_SHARED YES to enable contrast sharing e CONTRAST_STRETCH_SIZE raster only specifies the number of standard deviations from the mean to use in a PERCENTAGE contrast adjustment The default is 2 0 e AUTO_CONTRAST raster only DEPRECATED use CONTRAST_MODE instead specifies whether to automatically calculate and apply a 2 standard deviation contrast adjustment to the image Use AUTO_CONTRAST YES to turn on Anything else turns it off e CLIP_COLLAR raster only specifies whether to clip the collar off of the image The following values are supported for cropping NONE no collar cropping is performed e AUTO automatically remove a USGS DRG style collar or a 3 75 DOQQ collar LAT_LON crop the collar to a a specified set of bounds specified in arc degrees in the native datum of the layer The bounds should be specified using the CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS parameter NA
68. along the boundary of one or more selected polygons Feather blending can be used on both raster imagery layers as well as gridded elevation layers In the case of elevation layers the feather blending works by calculating modified elevation values based on elevation value in the blended layer and the topmost elevation layer underneath the blended layer in the draw order Table of Contents 162 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Falette Feathering Color Grade Frojection Dont Feather this Layer Iw Top Edge Fj M Left Edge Iw Bottom Edge iw Right Edge rer ed E os Tie J Zi eS ont ort Peace rit ita i TORI Feather Within Curently Selected Polygonis m Size of Feather Blended Area Specify how many pixels from the selected edges or polygon to feather blend the layer The layer will be opaque at the specified number of pisels from the edge and become more and more transparent as you approach the edge Border Size in Pixels 100 Crop to Selected Boundary Rather than Feathering Feather Outside Polygon Rather than Inside The screenshot below displays the results of feather blending a very high resolution data set 0 15 meters per pixel with a lower resolution 3 5 meters per pixel dataset to remove the edge Note that the higher resolution image has been purposely tinted violet to make the effect more obvious Table of Contents 163
69. and into any exported vector files Selecting Features Before you can edit an existing feature or features you first must select them Once a feature is selected you can tell that it is selected because it will be drawn with a different style The different methods for actually selecting features are described below One way to select features is by simply by clicking the left mouse button near the feature or in the case of area features within the feature Using this method the closest point or line feature will be selected or if no point or line features are nearby and you clicked within an area feature the area feature will be selected To select multiple features at a time you can drag a selection box by holding down the left mouse button to draw a box Any features entirely within the box drawn or features which are cut by the box will be selected If you hold down the T key while dragging the box only features and vertices that are completely within the box will be selected This is useful for things like selecting a point feature that is on top of a line area border You can add to an existing selection by holding down the CTRL key while performing a selection with any of the above described methods You can deselect features by holding down the SHIFT key while performing a selection You can toggle the selection state of features by holding down both the SHIFT and CTRL keys while performing a selection As a final option holding
70. any attribute found in the loaded data If you choose the Split on Feature Type option you will get the export split based on the feature classification except in the case of the unknown types in which case the feature description will be used automatically The type description name attribute value of the features stored in each file will be appended on to the end of the selected filenames Table of Contents 75 Global Mapper User s Manual If selected the Generate Projection PRJ File option causes a projection file describing the ground reference system of the shapefile to be generated for each shapefile created The PRJ files will have the same name as the SHP file with the prj extension If selected the Generate 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data option specifies that 3D objects should be created in the shapefile The elevation stored for each vertex point will be the first of the following which is available e The elevation associated with the vertex point in question e The elevation associated with the entire feature being exported For example the elevation of a contour line e The first elevation obtained by searching the loaded elevation grid layers at the position of the vertex point e A value of 0 0 will be used if no elevation could be obtained via any of the prior methods If selected the Add Feature Type LAYER Attribute to DBF option specifies that the type description for each exported feature will be added
71. appears allowing you to enter the location for the new point feature in either latitude longitude coordinates or coordinates in the current view projection Once you ve placed the point the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the new point feature See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the point feature the Digitizer Tool will remain in the point creation mode so you can simply left click to place another point or right click to choose a different mode You can also create new point features from the centroids of selected area features or from the vertices of selected line and area features by selecting one or more areas or lines then right clicking and selecting the appropriate option under the Advanced Feature Creation Options menu Creating New Range Ring Features After selecting the Create Range Ring s popup menu option you can proceed to place the center location of your range rings by left clicking at the desired location If you had point features selected when you selected Table of Contents 207 Global Mapper User s Manual this option you can also choose to create the rings centered on the selected point feature s rather than manually specifying a center location You can cancel creation of the range ring s at any time by pressing the Escape key or right clicking
72. area or line feature This is the only way to get line or area features to display labels in Google Earth Highlight Areas in Google Earth when the Cursor Goes Over Them if this option is checked area features will highlight when you move your cursor over them in Google Earth In addition if you checked the option to display area and line labels the area label will be hidden until you mouse over the area at which time the label will popup Generate Index KML File if this option is checked an additional index KML file will be generated which indexes all tiles exported by the export command This is very useful for dealing with very large data sets as it will automatically load and unload individual KML tiles as needed for display in Google Earth much as a map catalog does in Global Mapper With this option you can load massive data sets into Google Earth and they will still display quickly The drawing style of the index tiles is controlled by the selected drawing style for the Coverage Quad area type on the Area Styles tab of the Configuration dialog For advanced users you can also customize what is displayed in the balloon text that appears in Google Earth when you click on a point You are able to customize the lt Balloon Style gt tag to use text with the string value Table of Contents 66 Global Mapper User s Manual stored in the registry create if it doesn t exist at HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper KmlExport_Ballo
73. around as well The reverse is also true in that the pan and zoom buttons on the 3D View window will cause the main Global Mapper view to pan and zoom as well Another example of the 3D view is displayed below This time it is several 24K USGS DLGs for Blue Springs MO overlaid on several 24K USGS DEMs for the same area EE 3D View he lm Al al el tI BQ alal ll Bl El 3D Vector Display Advanced Discussion and Options 3D vector data is exaggerated along with the terrain so it will align correctly A bridge going over a gorge with heights of 100m and 110m on either end wouldn t match up with the terrain heights of 100m and 110m if both weren t exaggerated If relative elevations of Om and 10m are used those would end up as Om and 30m Table of Contents 174 Global Mapper User s Manual which would still allow the bridge to match up NOTE these values assume a vertical exaggeration value of 3 0 When extruding to the surface the default base of the extrusion is set just below the minimum elevation so your extruded areas should always extend through the terrain surface You can provide additional control over how 3D vector features are rendered by provided attributes for those features The supported attributes are as follows e 3D_EX_HT the value of this attribute allows you to override the default extrusion height and extrude just that height in meters e 3D_ZOFFSET the value of this attribute allows you to provide an
74. attributes for attributes found in coordinate data lines This is useful for things like CSV files If the Treat 3rd coordinate value as elevation option is selected and a numeric value is found immediately following the x and y or lat and lon coordinate values that value will be treated as an elevation Otherwise the value will be included as an attribute if the Include attributes from lines with coordinate data option 1s selected Typically you want to leave this option checked unless you are importing point data in which the 3rd column is an attribute that occasionally contains all numeric values such as well names If you have line and or area data that do not have non coordinate lines separating them but rather are delimited by a change in a particular field column of data you can use the Break Line Area Features on Change in Field option to specify which field use a 1 based index to check for breaking the data into separate line area features Pressing the Select Coordinate Offset Scale button displays a dialog that allows the user to select an offset and scale factor to apply to each coordinate The offset entered will first be added to each coordinate and then each coordinate will be multiplied by the scale factor When generic ASCII text files are imported Global Mapper will scan the attributes associated with each feature and look for any attribute names that are known to it The following is an abbreviated list of attribute names
75. being displayed It may be useful to lighten or darken raster overlays in order to see overlaying vector data clearly The Translucency setting controls to what degree you can see through the overlay to overlays underneath the overlay The default setting of Opaque means that you cannot see through the overlay at all Settings closer to Transparent make the overlay increasingly more see through allowing you to blend overlapping data The Blend Mode setting controls how an overlay is blended with underlying overlays in addition to the Translucency setting These settings allow Photoshop style filters to be applied to overlays resulting in often stunning results What you get from a particular set of overlays from a particular blend mode setting can often be hard to predict so rather than try to understand what is technically happening for each blend mode it s best to just experiment with different ones until you find one that you like The Hard Light setting seems to work well with satellite imagery overlaid on DEMs but the others can be quite useful as well For example the Apply Color setting is useful for applying color to a grayscale overlay such as using a low resolution color LANDSAT image to colorize a high resolution grayscale satellite image The SPOT Natural Color blend mode combines the color channels in the topmost layer using the common algorithm for generating natural color imagery from images from the SPOT HRV multi spectral sensor Red
76. bottom SIMPLIFICATION specifies the simplification threshold to use when generating the contours This specifies how far off a straight line in the units of the current projection that a point has to be before itis kept Generally you should not specify a simplification value as the default value of one tenth of the sample spacing works quite well This is an option for advanced users only e GEN_HEIGHT_AREAS generate area features colored based on the current elevation shader in addition to generating contour lines Use a value of YES to enable the generate of the height areas e GEN_SPOT_ELEVATIONS generate spot elevations at min max elevations Use a value of YES to enable the generate of min max spot elevation points Table of Contents 277 Global Mapper User s Manual e SINGLE_LEVEL_ONLY specifies that the INTERVAL value is actually a value indicating the only height that a contour should be generated at Use a value of YES to turn this functionality on e FILL_GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being used to generate the contours will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is on by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off e LAYER_DESC specifies the name to assign to this layer If no layer description is provided the default name of GENERATED CONTOURS will be used o INC_UNIT_SUFFIX specifies whether or not a uni
77. buildings etc you could use this option to cause the transmitter and receiver heights to be based on the ground elevation whereas the actual visibility of each point will use the topmost of any loaded layer The View Radius section allows the user to specify how far in each direction from the transmitter to check for visibility Typically you d want to set this to the effective range of your transmitter If you want to ignore areas close to the transmitter you can also specify a minimum view radius value Use the default of O to include everything from the transmitter out ot the selected view radius The View Angle section allows the user to limit the view shed to a particular subsection of the complete radial area The Start Angle specifies the cartographic angle at which the radial subregion begins This angle is a cartographic angle meaning that 0 degrees is north and angles increase clockwise The Swept Angle specifies the number of degrees clockwise to include in the view shed For example if the transmitter being analyzed sweeps an arc from due south to due west a start angle of 180 with a swept angle of 90 would be used To perform a view shed analysis over the entire area keep the defaults of starting at 0 degrees and sweeping through 360 degrees The Earth Curvature section allows the user to specify whether they want to take the curvature of the earth into account while performing the view shed analysis In addition when earth curvatu
78. button Right click or press the ESC key to complete the operation once you re done Note that while joining vertices you can use the Snapping feature to help align the vertices with existing features Deleted Selected Vertices This option allows you to delete the selected vertices To quickly do this without using the right click menu the CTRL Delete hot key will also delete selected vertices Set Position of Selected Vertices This option displays a dialog allowing you to manually position the selected vertices by entering their new position in either latitude longitude coordinates or coordinates in the currently configured view projection datum If the selected vertices are from a 3D line or area feature you will also be able to set the elevation value to use for the vertex Insert Vertex This option allows you to insert a new vertex into the selected area or line feature To insert the vertex select the menu option then left click at the location where you want the new vertex inserted The vertex will be inserted on the area or line feature at the clicked location along the nearest segment of the feature Alternately if you hold down the SHIFT key while left clicking the new vertex will be placed on the selected feature s at the nearest location to the click location You can also use this feature to extend features The newly created vertices will be automatically selected If you need to add multiple vertices to the selected feature s si
79. cell size This option is useful for loading the slightly overlapping result files into something like Photoshop for color matching between cells If the Skip Existing Files option is checked any grid cell file that already exists at the destination location will be skipped This makes it easy to resume a cancelled export as the already exported files would not be re exported Table of Contents 101 Global Mapper User s Manual Elevation Export General Options Panel General Export Bounds Quadrangle Name Vertical Units Resolution AAMS 30 meters AMIE 30 meters IF pou wish to change the ground units that the resolution is specihed in you need to change the current projection by going to Config Projection M nterpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data The General panel allows the user to specify the quadrangle name DEMs only vertical units and grid spacing of an elevation grid being exported The Quadrangle Name field allows the user to enter the quad name to place in the header of a native format USGS DEM being exported The Vertical Units field allows the user to select the vertical units to use when exporting the data 1 e meters or feet Any input data not in the selected vertical units will be automatically converted on export The Resolution section allows the user to selected the grid spacing to use when generating the elevation data set The default value is the average of the grid s
80. checked this option causes the DGN color number for each feature to be appended to the feature description level number e DXF DWG Import INSERT entities as point features if checked this option specifies that the content of INSERT entities i e blocks in DXF and DWG files should be loaded as a single point feature at the location of the INSERT e DXF DWG Create New Types from Layers if checked this option will cause new Global Mapper types to automatically be created for every DXF DWG layer name encountered for which a Global Mapper type does not already exist e Show Pixel Location in Status Bar if checked this option causes the native pixel location of the topmost raster or gridded elevation file to be displayed in the status bar as you move the cursor around in addition to the color and or elevation data e Use DOS Character Set for Default Label Fonts if checked this option specifies that default display label fonts should use the OEM character set code page 437 rather than the ANSI character set code page 1252 This option can be helpful if you are having problem with accented characters not displaying correctly from some data sets those data sets encoded in code page 437 rather than 1252 e Use Path to First Loaded File as Default Export Path if checked this option specifies that when exporting a new file the default export path will be the path of the first loaded file during this session rather than the path to the l
81. command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MatLab format file When selected the command displays the MatLab Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Moss Command The Export Moss command allows the user to export any loaded area and line vector features to a Moss format file When selected the command displays the Moss Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export NIMA ASC Command The Export NIMA ASC command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets toa NIMA ASC format file that can be used on many shipboard radar displays When selected the command displays the NIMA ASC Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Orca XML Command The Export Orca XML command all
82. components on each line Since palette files don t contain elevation values the elevations will be incremented by one for each color and set to automatically scale the colors between loaded elevation values The Initialize from Surfer CLR File button allows you to initialize the list of color elevation pairs with aa CLR file created by the Surfer application by Golden Software You can use the Save to Surfer CLR File button to save your custom shader to a CLR file This is useful for making copies of a custom shader and Table of Contents 140 Global Mapper User s Manual providing them to other users Elevations shaded with a custom shader will use the color specified for each elevation value Any elevation values between two elevation color values will be a blend of the two bounding colors if the Blend Colors Between Elevation Slope Values option is checked For example if an elevation of 500 meters was set to black and an elevation of 1000 meters was set to white an elevation of 750 meters would be colored a medium shade of gray Any elevations below the minimum specified elevation will use the same color as the minimum elevation The reverse is true for any elevations over the maximum elevation If the blend colors option is not checked any elevation between two elevation values will be set to the color associated with the lower of the elevation values If you would like the elevation values selected to scale to the elevation range of the
83. creating a DWORD registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper ASCIIExportCoordPrecision For example set this value to 6 to get 6 decimal digits for each X Y and Z coordinate Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Delft3D LDB Command The Export Delft3D LDB command allows the user to export any loaded vector line data sets to a Delft3D LDB format file When selected the command displays the Delft3D Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DeLorme Text File Command The Export DeLorme Text File command allows the user to export any loaded vector features to one of 3 text formats that can be loaded into select DeLorme mapping products When selected the command displays the DeLorme Text Polygon Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DGN Command The Export DGN command allows the user to export any loaded vector data to a MicroStation DGN v8 format file When selected the command displays the DGN Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set
84. currently loaded data rather than stay at fixed elevation values check the Scale Shader to Loaded Elevation Values This will make your shader behave similar to most of the built in shaders like the Atlas or Color Ramp shaders For example if you check this option and specify that an elevation of O meters is blue and 1 meter is red and the actual loaded data has a range of 100 meters to 500 meters then 100 meters will be blue and 500 meters will be red with the values gradually shaded in between if you have the blend colors option checked If you would like to shade based on the slope of the terrain rather than the elevation values use the Shade Slope Values Degrees Rather than Elevations option This will change the provided values so they are treated as slope angles in degrees and allow you to setup shading based on the slope Projection The Projection panel pictured below is used to modify the projection and datum that the currently loaded data is displayed in Table of Contents 141 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Foint Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection Projection Load From File CE Saye To Fie Zone Init From EP SG 15 96W S0 W Northem Hemisphere Datum NAD27 CONUS Add Datum Planar Units METERS Parameters Atiibute Value CENTRAL MERIDIAN SCALE FACT 0 999600000 CENTRAL ME
85. cursor at the same location rather than just zooming in and out on the current screen center Swap Zoom Direction Using Mouse Wheel or Hot Keys when this option is selected the direction of zoom when scrolling the mouse wheel or using the Page Up Down keys will be reversed Export Snap Export Bounds to Pixel Boundary if Possible when this option is checked the bounding box for an export will be adjusted so that the top left corner of the bounding aligns with the top left corner of a pixel in the imagery being exported This is useful to eliminate any visual sub pixel shift due to mis alignment of the export bounds and the pixels in the input imagery Export Keep Pixel if any Part is Inside Crop Area when this option is checked and you are cropping a raster elevation export to a selected area feature an exported pixel cell will be kept if any corner of that cell is within the crop area rather than the default requirement of the center of the cell being in the crop area Disable Display of Pan Arrows on Map Edge when this option is checked the arrow cursor that displays near map edges when most tools are active to allow easy panning are disabled thus allowing use of the active tool all the way to the edge of the map display Always Display Lat Lon in Status Bar in WGS84 when this option is checked the lat lon location displayed on the right side of the status bar will always be in the WGS84 datum rather than whatever datum is selected on the
86. data to any format Export Zmap Plus Grid File Command The Export Zmap Plus Grid File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Zmap Plus Grid format file When selected the command displays the Zmap Plus Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vector Data The commands on the Export Vector Data submenu allow the user to export loaded vector data to various formats Export AnuDEM Contour Command The Export AnuDEM Contour commands allows the user to export any loaded contour line data to the AnuDEM contour gen file format When selected the command displays the AnuDEM Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Arc Ungenerate Command The Export Arc Ungenerate commands allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an Arc Ungenerate format file When selected the command displays the Arc Ungenerate Export Options dialog which consists of an Export Bo
87. default ACE Altimetry Corrected Elevation ACE format file e ARCASCIIGRID Arc ASCII Grid format file ARCBINARYGRID Arc Binary Grid format file AVC Arc Vector Coverage format file BIL BIL format file BSB BSB format file usually has KAP extension BT a BT Binary Terrain format grid file CANADASD Canada 3D format file COMPEGPS a CompeGPS RTE TRK or WPT file CPS3 a CPS 3 grid file Table of Contents 284 Global Mapper User s Manual e CTM_ DEM a CTM DEM format file DBF DBase file with point features DHM25 a Swiss DHM terrain format file DLGO USGS DLG O e DGN MicroStation DGN files earlier than v8 DIVAGIS_GRID a DIVA GIS grid format file e DMDF a Digital Map Data Format DMDF format file DOQQ USGS DOQ in JPEG format DTED Digital Terrain Elevation Data DTED format DXF DXF format ECW ER Mapper Compressed Wavelet ECW format file EME a Windows Enhanced Metafile EMF format file ENVI DEM ENVI DEM format file ERDAS Erdas Imagine format file ERDAS_GIS Erdas GIS format file e ERM_GRID ERM grid format file ESRI_PGEO ESRI personal geodatabase format file ETOPO2 ETOPO2 format file FAST_L7A a Landsat FAST L7A format file FILE_GDB an ESRI File Geodatabase FLOATGRID FLOAT GRID format file GEOSOFT_GRID a Geosoft Binary Grid format file GEOTIFE GeoTIFF format
88. displayed below allows the user to set up the threshold at which points that don t contribute much to the shape of the generated contour are removed in order to generate lines with less vertices The Gridding panel allows you to break up your contour generation into smaller pieces which can sometimes help reduce memory requirements when generating a very large amount of contour lines The Export Bounds panel allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded elevation grid data they wish to consider when generating the contours Contour Generation Options Contour Options Simplification Export Bounds Less Simplification More Simplification Larger Files Smaller Files Simplification is the process by which points that do nat significantly contribute to the shape of a line are removed Using a larger simplitication threshold right side of slider will result ina smaller data file however the curves in the contour lines will be less smooth Using a smaller simplification threshold left side of slider will result in larger data files that better maintain the integrity of the contour line shape Cancel Help Generate Watershed Command The Generate Watershed command allows the user to perform a watershed analysis on loaded terrain data to find stream paths as well as delineate the watershed areas that drain into a given stream section The Table of Contents 180 Global Mapper User s Manual watershed calculation uses th
89. displayed when you are zoomed out too far for the actual map data to display By default map bounding boxes are displayed using the style set for the Map Catalog Layer Bounds type Table of Contents 20 Global Mapper User s Manual Modify Map Catalog e When to Display Maps De Catalog Description a ei ast 7 Map List Right Click for Map Metadata Display Map Box is of Display Size i Cancel Description Filename j10 of Display lt blue_springs opt gt BLUE SPRINGS MO MULTIPLE CATEGORIES C Stemp exporl Display Pixel is Less Than Size ES Wyandotte C temp exporl m s00 meters per pixel Elp Dave S Below a Given Map Scale ro p C Between Given Map Scales 1 to 0 and to E 7 Map Bounding Boses M Show When Maps Not Displayed l TM t Select Bow Style Add Files Add Loaded Files Remove Selected Files Modify Display of Faster Layers Add Directory Add Onecreen Files Remove All Files Modify Display of Vector Layers You can obtain metadata and projection information about layers in the map catalog by right clicking on them in the Map List and selecting the appropriate option You can modify map catalogs again after loading them by opening the Overlay Control Center selecting the map catalog layer then pressing the Options button Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to create map catalogs Load Workspace Command The
90. el oe co Solid with Ts on Right Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 356 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Rectangles on Left EG Solid with Rectangles on Right EG Solid with Squares on Left EG Solid with Squares on Right EG Half Circles Tightly Spaced Left Only Co Half Circles Tightly Spaced Right Only oT a Ea Fees Half Circles Widely Spaced Left Only Half Circles Widely Spaced Right Only Solid with Diamonds on Left Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 357 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Diamonds on Right gt gt PPP RRP RF V Track Opens Towards End of Null Line a SILLEE V Track Opens Towards Start of Null Line gt Pe PP eS C Track Opens Towards End of Line C Track Opens Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards End of Line V Track Opens Towards End of Solid Line V Track Opens Towards Start of Solid Line Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 358 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Xs Through Line Solid with Diamonds along Line Solid with Empty Diamonds along Line Solid with Circles along Line Solid with Empty Circles along Line Cop Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start Solid with Arrow Pointing to End Solid with Empty Circle at Start Solid with
91. elevation data or raster imagery the Spatial Database Import Options dialog will contain a tab to specify raster options Under Elevation Options choose the Vertical Unit for the elevation data The default is meters If you don t choose the correct unit here you can always fix it in the Control Center Table of Contents 114 Global Mapper User s Manual spatial Database Import Optians Table Selection Import Bounds C Use Curent Screen Bounds Pics Box C Lat Lon Degrees i ae North 0 o West South 0 f East C Global Projection Robinson meters North o f West South o a East C Comer w Size Global Projection Robinson meters Noth 0D Wet idih 0 Height DO If the spatial database being opened contains vector data the Spatial Database Import Options dialog will contain the Import Bounds tab This tab allows the user to select a subset of the input data based on a bounding box All geometries that intersect the bounding box will be imported into Global Mapper This functionality applies only to vector data in a spatial database You can specify the bounding box in the following ways e Choose Load All Data to load all of the data in the selected database tables into Global Mapper e Choose Use Current Screen Bounds to use the current Global Mapper screen bounds as the to define the input bounds If there is no data loaded into the viewer then this option will not be available If there is data loaded in Global
92. exact The Resampling option allows you to control how the color value for each displayed export location is determined based on the values in the file The following resampling methods are supported e Nearest Neighbor simply uses the value of the sample pixel that a sample location is in When resampling or reprojected an image this can result in a stair step effect but will maintain exactly the original color values of the source image o Bilinear Interpolation determines the value of a new pixel based on a weighted average of the 4 pixels in the nearest 2 x 2 neighborhood of the pixel in the original image The averaging has an anti aliasing effect and therefore produces relatively smooth edges with hardly any jaggies e Bicubic Interpolation a more sophisticated method that produces smoother edges than bilinear interpolation Here a new pixel is a bicubic function using 16 pixels in the nearest 4 x 4 neighborhood of the pixel in the original image This is the method most commonly used by image editing software printer drivers and many digital cameras for resampling images e Box Average 3x3 4x4 5x5 and 7x7 the box average methods simply find the average values of the nearest 9 for 3x3 16 for 4x4 25 for 5x5 or 49 for 7x7 pixels and use that as the value of the sample location These methods are very good for resampling data at lower resolutions The lower the resolution of your export is as compared to the original the
93. export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in Table of Contents 263 Global Mapper User s Manual order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y e LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER _BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters
94. export to a Lowrance USR format file e MAPGEN export to a MapGen format file e MAPINFO export to a MapInfo MIF MID or TAB MAP format file MATLAB export to a MatLab format file MOSS export line and area features to a MOSS format file NIMA_ASC export to a NIMA ASC format file PLATTE_RIVER export to a Platte River ASCII Digitizer format file POLISH_MP export to a Polish MP format file SEGP export to a SEGP1 format file SHAPEFILE export to an ESRI Shapefile format file SIMPLE_ASCII export to a simple ASCII text file SOSI exports area line and point features to a SOSI Norwegian Data file SURFER_BLN export to a Surfer BLN format file SVG export to a Scalable Vector Graphic SVG format file TSUNAMI OVR export to a Tsunami OVR format file e WASP_MAP export to a WAsP map format file line features only ZMAP_ISOMAP_LINE export to a ZMap IsoMap Line format file line features only e ZMAP_XYSEGID export to a ZMap XYSegId format file area and line features only e GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following
95. file will be generated in the same directory as the image and will have the same primary name as the image with an extension of prj Checking the Generate Text Metadata File option results in a text file being generated listing the metadata for the captured image Checking the Crop to Loaded Map Data option results in a text file being generated that is cropped to the bounds of your currently loaded map data rather than the full screen extents If the loaded map data does not take up at least the entire screen then your specified pixel dimensions will also be shrunk so that the pixel size remains the same Pressing the OK button prompts the user to select the name and location of the image to generate and then proceeds to generate the image Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able capture the screen to an image file Export Global Mapper Package File Command The Export Global Mapper Package File command allows the user to export any or all of the loaded data to a Global Mapper package file These files are similar to workspace files except that the actual data is stored in the files Package files provide an easy way to pass around lots of data between Global Mapper users on different computers with a single self contained file When selected the command displays the Global Mapper Package Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the package export The dialog consists of a Package Options panel a Simplification panel
96. format file When selected the command displays the MapGen Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MapInfo MIF MID Command The Export MapInfo MIF MID command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MapInfo MIF MID format file When selected the command displays the MapInfo Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MapInfo TAB MAP Command Table of Contents 69 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export MapInfo TAB MAP command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MapInfo TAB MAP format file When selected the command displays the MapInfo Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MatLab Command The Export MatLab
97. if any for the supplied VERT_CS_CODE will be used e FILE SOURCE_ID LIDAR_LAS only specifies a File Source ID numeric value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used e GLOBAL_ENCODING LIDAR_LAS only specifies a Global Encoding numeric value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used e SYSTEM_ID LIDAR_LAS only specifies a System ID value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used e GEN_SOFTWARE LIDAR_LAS only specifies a Generating Software value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used Otherwise Global Mapper will be used e CREATE_BINARY STL only specifies that the STL file that is created will be a binary STL file rather than a much larger ASCII text STL file EXPORT_METADATA The EXPORT_METADATA command exports the metadata for a specified load layer The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path of file must already be loaded that you want to save the metadata for e METADATA_FILENAME full path of new text file to create on disk containing the metadata for the specified layer EXPORT
98. in a KMZ file recommended and whether or not to render and save loaded vector data The Visibility Range Fading Setup section allows advanced users to control the minLodPixels maxLodPixels minFadeExtent and maxFadeExtent values used in the exported file to control when i e what zoom level the data will be displayed and also if and how to fade the data There is also an option to automatically grid the data on export this creates what is known as a SuperOverlay Enabling this option allows very large quantities of data to be efficiently viewed using Google Earth When using this option you can also control the tile size to use when creating the super overlays For very large exports the larger sizes 1024x1024 or 2048x2048 are recommended Table of Contents 42 Global Mapper User s Manual _ KML KMZ Export Options KML KMZ Options Gridding Export Bounds m Export Image Format f JPG Quality gt 75 PNG Supports Transparency TIFF Palette TIFF 24 bit RGB Color a Sample Spacing 0 000353019822458628 arc degrees Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units 2 Visibility Range Fading Setup This setting controls how far you have to zoom in eminLodPixels gt before your data shows up in Google Earth and when your data stops showing smaxLodPovels gt Use 0 for either or both to always show Start Display at 64 Prels in Size Stop Display at fo Pixels in S
99. in result in a bounding box containing all loaded compatible data MGRS Military Grid Reference System Bounds Allows the user to specify the subset to export by entering the northwest and southeast corners of the bounding box to export in MGRS coordinates The default values automatically filled in result in a bounding box containing all loaded compatible data Crop to Selected Area Feature If enabled allows the user to crop the export to the currently selected area feature s To use this for supported exports select the area s that you wish to crop the export to using either the Feature Info Tool or the Digitizer Tool Drag a Box to Select Export Bounds Ea ae Pressing the Draw Box button brings up the Drag a Box to Select Export Bounds dialog In this dialog simply hold down the left mouse button and drag a rectangle around the area of the image that you wish to export If you make a mistake just drag another rectangle Draw Box When you press the OK button the bounds of the rectangle that you drew will automatically be inserted into the appropriate controls in the Export Bounds panel Table of Contents 99 Global Mapper User s Manual Gridding Panel General Gridding Export Bounds arid Layout C No Grd Just One Export File f Specify Number of Rows and Columns Rows 30 Columns z o Crop Right and Bottom Cells to Export Bounds C Specify Individual Grd Cell Width and Height Grid Width 0
100. in the palette transparent use TRANSPARENT _COLOR INDEX 1 Table of Contents 288 Global Mapper User s Manual e TRANSPARENT_COLOR_DIST for layers that have specified a color to make transparent this parameter allows you to specify how far a color in the layer has to be from the specified TRANSPARENT_COLOR value to be treated as transparent as well The default value of 0 means that the colors have to exactly match for the pixel to be treated as transparent Larger values up to 256 allow larger distances between the layer color and the transparent color This is useful for lossy formats like JPEG e COLOR_GRADE raster only specifies the color grading values to use for this layer as configured on the Color Grade options dialog tab This should be a comma delimited list with the saturation value from 0 1 first then the input and output range for the red green and blue color channels as follows COLOR_GRADE saturation red_in_start red_in_end red_out_start red_out_end blue_out_end e PROJ special Projection Specification type of parameter that specifies the projection to use for the file This will override any projection information stored in the file e PROJ_NAME DEPRECATED use PROJ instead specifies the name of the projection to use for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE_PROJ command e PROJ_FILENAME DEPRECATED use PROJ inst
101. itself indicated some incorrect data This option is rarely used You can however also use the Elevation Units control to specify what elevation units that values in the vector data that do not explicitly specify their units should use This is useful to indicate if the values associated with 3D vector features or with the ELEVATION attribute for features are in feet or meters Raster Data Options Selecting the Options button while only raster overlays are selected displays the Raster Options dialog The Raster Options dialog consists of several tabs each allowing you to control various aspects of how the selected raster layers are displayed Display Tab The Display tab pictured below contains controls allowing you to control the color intensity brightness darkness color transparency blending anti aliasing and texture mapping of the selected layers Table of Contents 155 Global Mapper User s Manual E Band Setup Feathering Color Grade Frojection Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Color Intensity 0 Translucency Can You See Through it 100 0 Transparent r Opaque 3 Transparency Transparent Set Transparent Color How Similar Must Colors be to Make Transparent 0 Exact O Fuzzy Blend Mode No Blend Resampling Nearest Neighbor None Texture Map The Color Intensity setting controls whether displayed pixels are lightened or darkened before
102. large exports Use DISABLE_BIGTIFF YES to disable the automatic BigTIFF support e TIFF_COPYRIGHT GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_COPYRIGHT tag e TIFF_DATETIME GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_DATETIME tag e TIFF_DOC_NAME GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_DOCUMENTNAME tag e TIFF_GT_CITATION GEOTIFF only specify text to store in GeoTIFF GTCitationGeoKey GeoTIFF tag e TIFF_IMAGE_DESC GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_IMAGEDESCRIPTION tag e TIFF_PCS_CITATION GEOTIFF only specify text to store in GeoTIFF PCSCitationGeoKey GeoTIFF tag e TIFF_NO_GTIFF_HEADER GEOTIFF only don t embed a GeoTIFF header in the file Use TIFF _NO_GTIFF_ HEADER YES to disable write of header e COORD_DELIM XY_COLOR only specifies the delimeter between coordinates COMMA coordinates are separated by commas SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons SPACE coordinates are separated by space characters TAB coordinates are separated by tab characters e USE_BAND4_AS_ALPHA ECW only specifies that the ECW file should store values from the Ath band of loaded layers to the alpha channel rather than using the alpha channel as on off values Use USE_BAND4_AS_ALPHA YES to enable This is an advanced option that allows some rudimentary multi band ECW support EXPORT_VECTOR The EXPORT_VECTOR command exports all currently loaded vector data to a file The following par
103. legend is displayed on the main map when elevation grid data is loaded and what units the elevation legend will be in if it is displayed The No Legend option causes no elevation legend to be displayed The Metric meters option causes an elevation legend to be displayed with various elevation values labeled in meters The Statute feet option causes an elevation legend to be displayed with various elevation values labeled in feet If the elevation legend is displayed in the main map view you can right click on it to control various options and also save it to a BMP file The Position Display Format setting controls the format of the cursor latitude longitude position display in the status bar The Area Measure Units setting controls what units that area measurements will be displayed in the Measure Tool and when creating new features with the Digitizer Tool The Distance Measure Units setting controls what units that distance measurements will be displayed in the Measure Tool and when creating new features with the Digitizer Tool as well on on the Distance Scale bar The Miscellaneous Advanced Options section contains options for advanced users The following options are available o Prefer World File TFW Coordinate for GeoTIFF Files if checked this option specifies that for GeoTiIFF files that also have accompanying TFW files the coordinates from the TFW file will be used rather than the coordinates embedded in the GeoTIFF file e Main
104. meters Grid Height 0 meters Specify Individual Grid Cell Pixel Size Fiel Width o Fiel Height 0 m Grid Naming C Sequential Numbering Row Major Order Separate Row Column Letters or Numbers Rows C Numbers Lettes Reverse Start at A Prefix With Step i Columns Numbers C Lettes Reverse Start at i Prefix With Step i Reverse Naming Columns First Then Rows if Prepend Os to Numbers to Make Same Length if Prepend As to Letters to Make Same Length Create Folders for Each Row or Col if Reversed if Separate Rows and Columns with Underscore Grd Cell Overlap Overlap Grid Cells by lo Percent of Cell Size Skip Existing Files Use to Complete Cancelled Exports al The Gridding panel provides the user with the means to easily split up data on export into a regularly spaced grid if desired using one of the following options e No Grid This option means that no gridding will be done only a single file with be exported with the full specified export bounds This is the default option e Specify Number of Rows and Columns Specifies that the data should be broken up into the given number of rows and columns of tiles Every tile will have the same width and height unless you check the Crop Right and Bottom Cells to Export Bounds option in which case the exported tiles along the right and bottom may be slightly smaller than the other so that no data from outside the specified export bounds is used
105. name of the attribute from the polygon features to use as a folder name before the actual filename or the special values lt Area Display Label gt e OVERWRITE_EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE_EXISTING YES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist EXPORT_RASTER The EXPORT_RASTER command exports all currently loaded raster vector and elevation data to a file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e TYPE type of raster file we re exporting to BIL export to a band interleave BIL format file BIP export to a band interleaved pixel BIP format file BMP export to a Windows bitmap BMP format file BSB export to a BSB KAP chart file BSQ export to a band sequential BSQ format file ECW export to an ECW format file ERDAS export to an Erdas Imagine IMG format file GEOTIFF export to a GeoTIFF format file IDRISI_RASTER export to an Idrisi raster format file JPEG export to a JPG format file JPEG2000 export to a JPEG2000 format file KML export to a raster KML KMZ format file for display in Google Earth NITE NITF format imagery PCX export to a PCX format file PNG export to a PNG format file XY_COLOR export to a XY color format file e SPATIAL_RES specifies spatial resolution Defaults to the minimum spatial resoluti
106. not empty to start with Use ADD_BLANK_LINE YES to enable adding the blank line e SAVE_DIST_Z_FILE specifies that the output file should contain distance and elevation values rather than X YZ coordinate values Use SAVE_DIST_Z_FILE YES to enable this option GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT Table of Contents 281 Global Mapper User s Manual The GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT must be the first command in the file The only parameter supported is the VERSION parameter Typically the entire command line will look like GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 You can use the following parameters with this command e VERSION specifies the version of the scripting language used This parameter is required You should always use VERSION 1 00 e ENABLE PROGRESS specifies whether or not any progress dialogs should be displayed while this script is processing This is enabled by default Use ENABLE_PROGRESS NO to disable the display of any progress dialogs during the processing of this script e REQUIRE_WORKSPACE name of workspace file that is required to be loaded for this script to run If a name is provided for this parameter and that workspace is not currently loaded into Global Mapper the script will immediately abort This can be used if you have different scripts that you only want to use if other workspaces are active and want to prevent accidentally selecting the wrong script GENERATE_REPORT The GENERATE_REPORT command allows you to generate a CSV text
107. of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vulcan3D Triangulation File Command The Export Vulcan3D Triangulation File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Vulcan3D triangulation file When selected the command displays the Vulcan3D Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export VRML Command Table of Contents 49 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export VRML command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data and raster data sets to a VRML file for display in a VRML viewer such as the Cortona VRML Client When selected the command displays the VRML World File Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing vertical exaggeration and compression options and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any forma
108. of translucency i e how see through the layer is Value values range from 0 to 512 with O meaning the layer is completely transparent 1 e invisible and 512 meaning the layer is completely opaque this is the default e GNORE_ALPHA raster only specifies that an embedded alpha channel in an image should be ignored This is useful for images that have incorrect alpha channels Use IGNORE_ALPHA YES to enable e BLEND_MODE elevation and raster only specify blend mode to use for combining this overlay and any previously loaded overlays NO_BLEND no blending is done this is the default e MULTIPLY SCREEN OVERLAY HARD_LIGHT COLOR_BURN COLOR_DODGE DARKEN LIGHTEN DIFFERENCE EXCLUSION APPLY_COLOR APPLY_COLOR_REVERSE KEEP_RED KEEP_GREEN KEEP_BLUE SPOT_NATURAL_COLOR_SPOT_TO_NATURAL PSEUDO_NATURAL_COLOR_CIR_TO_NATURAL COLOR_TO_GRAYSCALE e FEATHER_BLEND_EDGES raster only specifies that the layer should be feature blended around one or more ledges This is a numeric bitfield value Add the following values to enable blending on that edge blend top edge 2 blend bottom edge 4 blend left edge 8 blend right edge For example to blend all edges use FEATHER_BLEND_EDGES 15 The FEATHER_BLEND_SIZE parameter is used to specify how many pixels to blend on each blended edge e FEATHER_BLEND_SIZE raster only specifies the size in pixels to use for a blend
109. of various types and click here for more documentation on the supported fields Table of Contents 13 Global Mapper User s Manual Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps The Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps command allows the user to download mapping data from numerous built in and user supplied sources This includes premium access to high resolution color imagery for the entire world from DigitalGlobe worldwide street maps from OpenStreetMap org as well as seamless USGS topographic maps and satellite imagery for the entire United States from MSRMaps com TerraServer USA In addition access is provided to several built in WMS OpenGC Web Map Server databases to provide easy access to digitial terrain data NED and SRTM as well as color satellite imagery Landsat7 for the entire world You can also add your own WMS data sources for access to any data published on a WMS server This is an extremely powerful feature as it puts many terabytes of usually very expensive data right at your fingertips in Global Mapper for no additional cost with the exception of access to the un watermarked DigitalGlobe imagery which is not free Note that this feature requires Internet access to work When you select the menu command the Select Online Data Source to Download dialog pictured below is displayed This dialog allows you to select the type or theme of data to download as well as the extents of the data to download You can either
110. open or the Ctrl key was held down Clicking the Vertices button for line or area features displays the Feature Vertex List dialog pictured below which allows you to view edit and remove the individual vertex coordinates including Z and timestamp values if present for the selected feature The X and Y coordinates are listed in the native projection of the layer and the Z coordinates will have the elevation units defined for the layer on the Projection tab of the Options dialog for the layer You can also easily add per vertex elevation values to features that do not already have them by pressing the Add Elevs button on the Feature Vertex List dialog If timestamp values are present like for a GPS tracklog speed and bearing columns will also be displayed for each leg of the feature You can also right click on the vertex list for a feature with per vertex elevations and choose the option to evenly spread the elevations to achieve a constant slope between the first and last elevation on the feature and Table of Contents 189 Global Mapper User s Manual also to replace any zero elevation values by interpolating between non zero values You can also add and edit per vertex timestamps by right clicking on the vertex list and selecting the appropriate option Feature Vertex List a Vertes List Double Click to Center View on Vertes Right Click for More Options io Ez Longitude Latitude Length Time speed Heading Elapsed Time 110
111. or latitude default Y_FIRST y coordinates i e northing or latitude come first followed by x coordinates i e easting or longitude WKT coordinate string in WKT well known text format This allows single line representations of areas lines and points MGRS MGRS military grid reference system coordinate string Table of Contents 292 Global Mapper User s Manual e COORD_PREFIX if present this line is used to specify what special character sequence coordinate lines start with For example if the coordinate lines in the file started with the character sequence XY you should use COORD_PREF XY By default no coordinate prefix is assumed e INC_COORD_LINE_ATTRS set the value of this parameter to YES if you wish to use any leftover text at the end of coordinate lines as attributes for the feature the coordinates are in This could be useful if elevation data is present at the end of the lines By default the value of this attribute is NO e INC_ELEV_COORDS this parameter controls whether or not the value right after the 2nd coordinate column if there is one will be treated as an elevation value Use INC_ELEV_COORDS YES or INC_ELEV_COORDS NO to enable the default or disable this behavior e COL_HEADERS controls whether or not the first line of the file should be used as column headers for coordinate line attributes later in the file Setting this to yes is useful for things like CSV files with column headers i
112. or you can enter an asterisk to match any non empty value You can also use the asterisk at the start or end of the search string to look for text that starts or ends with some particular text In the Replace Text box you have more options You can specify a simple text string to replace the Search Text with or you can use a single wildcard to prepend or append text For example to prepend the text Sample in front of your search string enter a replace string of Sample To append the text to your search string use Sample If you want to replace any string that starts with the sequent N with North use a search string of N and a replace string of North Find Address The Find Address command displays the Search for an Address dialog pictured below which allows searching for an address city or postal code anywhere in the world search for an Address in the US Requires Internet Access Enter address to search for 1600 Pennsylvania Ave Washington DC Bpan Cancel Enter address in one of the following formats Hel elp street city state zip street city state street zip city state zip city state zip Geocode Addresses trom File If an address is found that matches the requested location a results dialog see sample below is displayed with the matching location information as well as button to allow creating a new point feature at the address location re centering the
113. panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF Point Command The Export DXF Point command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a 3D DXF Point file The DXF file will consist of a 3D DXF point for each point in the elevation grid defined by the spacing and extents that the user specifies This option may be useful when used with other software packages that do not specify the DXF mesh format When selected the command displays the 3D DXF Point Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 33 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export ECW Command The Export ECW command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an ECW file ECW files are highly compressed and great for storing things like satellite imagery There is no size restriction on exported ECW files so you can store many terabytes worth of imagery within a single highly compressed ECW file When sel
114. polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will generate a separate export for each polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon See the POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY and POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR options for naming and other options when using this parameter Use POLYGON _CROP_USE_EACH YES to enable POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use for naming or the special values lt Area Display Label gt or lt Area Source Filename gt If no value is provided the exported files will be sequentially numb
115. raw NMEA data strings for connected NMEA GPS devices Table of Contents 232 Global Mapper User s Manual Format Auto Detect a r Connection Serial Port Connection Port com Baud Aate 4800 C Gamin USE Device C Read From File NMEA Format Only ICA ataGPS D ata gps M Elevation Offset 0 meters Enter the value to add to all elevation values before reporting them This is useful to adjust for vertical datum shifts Data Logging Setup M Log GPS Data to Text File Select File IM Log NMEA Sentences to File Select File ADVANCED USERS ONLY By default GPS serial connections use 8 bit no parity and 1 stop bit 8N1 but if you have one of the rare units that uses 7 bit rather than 8 bit data streams there is a way to set that You need to run regedit and create a DWORD key named HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper GPS_ByteSize with a value of 7 do this with Global Mapper closed then your serial connections will use 7 bit mode rather than 8 bit mode Information If you are currently tracking a GPS device the Information command will display the GPS Information dialog pictured below This dialog displays status information about the current GP
116. select to download the current screen bounds an area to download around an address specify a lat lon bounds explicitly or select to download the entire data source Table of Contents 14 Global Mapper User s Manual select Online Data Source to Download nA Select Data Source E POPULAR SOURCES z Worldwide High Aes Imagery from DigitalGlobe PREMIUM CONTENT EE Cancel ASTERA GOEM Worldwide Elevation Data 1 5 arc second Resolution Use http fastenveb pl nasa govgqdem a Global agen Bing Maps Hybrid SpatialOnDemand com FREE REFERENCE SOURCE T Maphlart On Demand worldwide Data PREMIUM CONTENT MapQuest OpenStreethM ap Worldwide Street Maps NAIF Color Imagery for US 1m Resolution USA Topo Maps United States Elevation Data NED 10m Resolution Use http seamless usgs govy if fails World Imagery World Street Map Adfowla Tann hdan Add New Source Remove Source Delete Cached Files Add Sources from File Load ECM from Web Select 4rea to Download e fe within i miles Beer cee imoab ut within i miles of latitude o longitude 0 Specify Latitude Longitude Bounds of Area NOTE Longitude values in the Al North p Western Hemisphere and est le East f latitude values in the Southern South E hemisphere must be negative C Entire Data Source Bounds IMPORTANT NOTE These data sources are on external servers that we have no control over The data may drawexp
117. start angle for view shed 0 is north 90 is east etc e AZIMUTH2 send angle for view shed 0 is north 90 is east etc e RADIUS2 outer radius in meters of view shed calculation Table of Contents 195 Global Mapper User s Manual e RADIUSI inner radius in meters of view shed calculation default is 0 which does entire radius e VERTI The top of the vertical angle to limit the scan receiver angle range top value e VERT2 The bottom of the vertical angle to limit the scan receiver angle range bottom value Denion view Shed Analysis 1 OK Transmitter Elevation View Radius ig Cancel 35 FEET above Ground Kilometers ep Receiver Elevation i Minimum view radius U f Use an explicit height value for the receiver elevation cape iec oe te 25 METERS r above Ground The sample spacing controls the interval at which elevation samples are examined to determine visibility Smaller values res C Use a transmission angle from the transmitter for receiver elevation In more accurate but more slowly generated view sheds i degrees above the horizon AcaBIS 30 meters Use a transmission angle range to view where beam hits surface Y a is 30 meters E to o degrees abowe the horizon IF you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the current projection by goire Check at p meters above the ground surface to Contig gt Projection r Fresne
118. t pass anything in all vector layers will be operated on e TYPE specifies what type of operation to use when assigning the new attribute value COPY copies the source attribute value into the new attribute ADD numerically adds the second value to the source value and saves the result into the new attribute SUBTRACT numerically subtracts the second value from the source value and saves the result into the new attribute MULTIPLY numerically multiplies the second value by the source value and saves the result into the new attribute Table of Contents 241 Global Mapper User s Manual DIVIDE numerically divides the source value by the the second value and saves the result into the new attribute e APPEND appends the second value as a string to the source value and saves the result into the new attribute The SEP_STR parameter defined below is used to separate the second value from the source PREPEND prepends the second value as a string to the source value and saves the result into the new attribute The SEP_STR parameter defined below is used to separate the second value from the source e NEW_ATTR specifies the attribute value to create or update See special Attribute Name parameter details e SOURCE_ATTR specifies the attribute value to start with when creating the new attribute See special Attribute Name parameter details e VALUE_ATTR specifies the attribute value to use as the 2nd value of the calc
119. than an attribute use lt Feature Type gt for your attribute name To compare against the feature description use lt Feature Desc gt for your attribute name If you just want all lines features from the specified layer s just don t specify a COMPARE_STR value You can also use lt Feature Layer Name gt to specify a match against a layer name that will support wildcards e CASE_SENSITIVE specifies whether or not text comparisons are case sensitive or not Use CASE_SENSITIVE YES to enable by default comparisons are not case sensitive e LAYER_DESC specifies the name to assign to the newly generated layer containing the connected line features If no layer description is provided the default name of Combined Lines will be used e COMPATIBLE_ONLY specifies whether or not any connecting lines should be combined the default or just those which have compatible types and attributes Use COMPATIBLE_ONLY YES to enable combining only compatible lines e CLOSED_LINES_ONLY specifies whether or not any connected lines have to form a closed shape in order to create an area when generating area features Use CLOSED_LINES_ONLY YES to enable requiring closed paths e CREATE _MULTIPLE_AREAS specifies whether multiple area features can be created if the lines don t all connect to each other This is enabled by default use CREATE MULTIPLE_AREAS NO to disable this and require all matching lines to connect in a single path before creating an area
120. that path Click Here for Video Tutoral Table of Contents 211 Global Mapper User s Manual Create Perpendicular Lines Spaced Along Area and Line Features You can create a new line features spaced along selected area line features that are perpendicular to those selected features at each point To do so first select one or more area line features then right click and selecti the Advanced Feature Creation submenu option Create Perpendicular Lines Spaced Along Selected Line Area Feature s You will be prompted to select the spacing between lines and also the total length of each perpendicular line Creating a Point Offset from a Selected Point You can create a new point feature offset a given distance bearing or X Y offset from an existing point by selecting the start point feature then right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation submenu option POINT AT OFFSET Create New Point Text Feature At Specified Bearing Distance Editing Existing Features In addition to creating new vector features the Digitizer Tool is also very useful for editing existing vector features This tool provides the ability to move delete and reshape vector features as well as modify the label classification drawing style and attribution of any vector feature loading from any file format supported by Global Mapper Note than any edits made are NOT automatically saved back to the origin file but they will be saved in Global Mapper workspaces
121. the Create 3D Features Using Loaded Elevation Data option will cause any underlying elevation data like DEMs to be used to retrieve elevation values for 2D features being exported and generate new 3D features in the exported DWG file The units used by the elevation values are determined by the Elevation Display Export Units setting on the Vertical Options tab of the Configuration dialog If selected the Generate ECEF Coordinates option will cause the exported DWG file to use Earth Centered Earth Fixed ECEF X YZ coordinate values rather than XY values in the current export projection If selected the Generate Zero Width Lines option causes and line features created in the DWG file to be marked as having zero width Use this option if you intend to use the resulting DWG file with a product such as MicroStation which has problems with lines of non zero thickness Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Esri File or Personal Geodatabase Table Command The Export Esri File Geodatabase Table command and Export Esri Personal Geodatabase Table command allow the user to export any loaded vector data to a table in an Esri File Geodatabase or Esri Personal Geodatabase NOTE In order to export data to any Esri Geodatabase you must have installed and licensed a copy of Esri ArcGIS 9 3 1 or higher If you do not have ArcGIS installed the Esri options will not appear in the selection lists Support for
122. the TOWGS84 field which is why it isn t always included Table of Contents 125 Global Mapper User s Manual e Create PRJ Files with PRJ After Original File Extension if checked this option specified that any export that generates a PRJ file will append the prj to the entire filename rather than replacing the file extension with prj So if you exported a file named test ecw with a PRJ file you would get test ecw prj for this export rather than test prj e Always Load Duplicate Filenames Rather than Prompting if checked you will no longer be prompted to abort the load of already loaded files The files will just automatically load e GeoTIFF Export Default to No Compression if checked when doing a GeoTIFF export the compression will default to No Compression if available e Don t Copy Error Text to Windows Clipboard if checked text displayed on any error dialogs will no longer be automatically copied to the clipboard as text for pasting Check this if you are concerned with text you are working with on the clipboard being inadvertently erased when a Global Mapper process fails and shows an error The Restore Default Settings button will restore all Global Mapper settings from the Configuration dialog to their default values Vector Display Options The Vector Display panel pictured below controls options for the display of vector data areas lines and points Table of Contents 126 Global Mapper User s Manual
123. the image rectification Depending on how you entered the dialog the rectified image will now be in the view will be saved to a new rectified file or you will start the rectification of the next selected image If you are repositioning a loaded file you can press the Apply button to re rectify the file with the updated GCPs and see the results of your modifications Table of Contents 109 Global Mapper User s Manual 4 LOADING FILES Choose Open as New icon from the Toolbar An open window will appear This window can be set to display only files of selected types with the Files of Type subwindow Files of type AI Supported Types Cancel pi l LULC Files lule gz gir Geol IFF DRG DOG DEM Files tif tiff SOTS Transfer CLG CEM Files catd ddf USGS COED DEM Files dem dem gz c JPG Files ipg DOG Quarter Quad Files sec nec swe MEOFGTOPO 307BIL Files bil dem tar There is support for opening USGS DLG O DEM and several other file types directly from gzipped archives In addition SDTS DLG SDTS DEM and most other file types can be opened directly from tar gz tgz and zip archive files This means that you no longer need to extract all of those SDTS files to their own directory before opening them Global Mapper will do that automatically Loading Multiple Files Global Mapper will display multiple data sets in correct geospatial positions that is ad
124. the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 62 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GeoJSON Javascript Object Notation Command The Export GeoJSON Javascript Object Notation command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a GeoJSON format file When selected the command displays the GeoJSON Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GOG Generalized Overlay Graphics Command The Export GOG Generalized Overlay Graphics command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a GOG format file When selected the command displays the GOG Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GPX GPS eXchange Format Command The Export GPX GPS eXchange Format commands allows the user to export any loaded point and line data to a GPX GPS eXchange Format file When selected the command displays the GPX Export Options dia
125. the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y e LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER _BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e SAVE_GRID_LINES specifies that if grid line display is enabled that the grid lines should be saved Specify SAVE_GRID_LINES NO to disable this option If it s not specified the the grid lines will be saved if enabled Table
126. the right click popup menu Rotating and Scaling Features When you have one or more features selected you can right click and select the Rotate Scale Selected Features command to bring up the Setup Rotation and Scaling dialog pictured below This dialog will allow you to rotate and scale the selected features about a point that you select If you choose the option to drag to the map to rotate you will enter rotate mode after pressing Ok on the dialog and can then hold down the left mouse button and drag around to rotate the image graphically to setup the desired position setup Rotation and lt aling Rotation Angle Rotate by 45l degrees dockwise C Drag Map to Rotate After Closing Dialog Scale Factor to Apply 1 Select Point to Rotate jScale About f About Center of Selected Feature s Rotate About Center of Each Feature C About Specific Location f About Vertex 1 94 5507080675 39 0449436030 94 359077139074 39 04498 79251 94 350 7642734 39 0450736088 g4 3506940816 39 0451375008 934 3505952504 39 0451476599 mA Irae 7 FAA IAA Combining Area and Line Features You can combine overlapping or adjacent area features into a single area feature by first selecting the area features to combine then selecting the Combine Selected Area Features right click menu option Any areas that are succesfully joined into a new one will be marked as deleted Table of Contents 218 Global Mapper User s Manu
127. tif ADD FILE c tempo export test dem ZOOM DISPLAY PERCENT 0 10 0 Load the map catalog IMPORT FILENAMEF c temp export test script_catalog gmc EDIT_VECTOR The EDIT_VECTOR command allows you to assign feature types classifications add update attributes and display labels or delete features based on one or more attribute or label values You can choose to update area line and or point features with a single operation You can also supply multiple COMPARE_STR parameters to apply multiple criteria all of which must be true in order to edit a feature The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer to update If an empty value is passed in all loaded vector layers will be updated You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer updated SHAPE_TYPE specifies the vector object type s area line and or point to edit If you don t provide a value then all available matching features will be edited You can specify multiple different object types as a comma delimited list of the following like SHAPE_TYPE AREAS LINES AREAS area features LINES line features POINTS point features AREA_TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper area type to assign to matching area features LINE_TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper line t
128. to Contig gt Projection Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units Export at the Fixed Scale 1 0 TIFF Format Options DPI Value To Save in Image 0 for None p Compression Default Packbits Make Background Void Pixels Transparent ADVANCED Use Tile Rather than Strip Orientation Save Map Layout Scale Margins Grd Legend etc Save Vector Data f Displayed M interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data Generate TFW Word File Generate FRJ File The File Type section allows you to choose what type of GeoTIFF file to generate The various file types are described below o bit Palette Image This option generates a 256 color raster GeoTIFF file with 8 bits per pixel The Palette options described below will apply in this case This option will generate a relatively small output file at the expense of some color fidelity depending on the palette that you choose The image data will be compressed using the PackBits compression algorithm e 24 bit RGB This option generates a raster GeoTIFF file with 24 bits per pixel Uncompressed GeoTIFF images generated with this option will be at least 3 times the size of those generated with the S bit Palette option but the colors in the image will exactly match what you see on the screen You can also maintain the exact colors while achieving some compression using the LZW compression option Selecting the JPEG compression option generates a raster GeoTIFF file w
129. to Global Mapper Grd File After Filing Depressions IW Keep Ocean Elevations i e 0 meters at Zero Operations at Selected Locations Select with Digitizer Tool Trace Fow from Selected Line s Trace Fow from Selected Point s Water Drop Analysis Create Watershed Areas Showing Drainage to Selected Line s Create Watershed Areas Showing Drainage to Selected Pointis ADVANCED How Threshold in Sample Resolution f Create Watershed Areas Showing Drainage to Streams M Interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data l Smooth Streams to Improve Appearance ADVANCED Show Fow Accumulation as Grd Table of Contents 181 Global Mapper User s Manual The Resolution section controls the resolution at which the loaded terrain data is sampled to perform the watershed analysis The default values should capture the full resolution of the loaded terrain data Larger values i e lower resolution will cause the calculation to be quicker but less detailed The Stream Threshold section controls how much water must flow to a particular cell before it is considered part of a stream Larger values will result in only more water flow areas being delineated while smaller values will cause more minor water flows to be marked as streams Each stream segment i e the portion between and inflow and outflow point can optionally have the area that drains directly to that stream segment marked with a watershed area Check the C
130. use for the attribute holding the color elevation or slope that a particular area represents If you leave this attribute off then no value attribute will be saved with each area e AREA_TYPE specifies the name of the area type to assign to the area features See the Area Styles tab of the Configuration dialog for a list of available type names e COLOR_DIST specifies how far from an exact match each color channel of a color value must be to be considered the same By default a value of 0 is used which means exact matches only If you want to break the entire color range into say 4 ranges for each color channel use something like COLOR_DIST 32 as that would allow colors up to 32 away from each color channel value to match to acolor e ELEV_DIST specifies how far from an exact match in meters each value must be to be considered the same By default a value of 0 is used which means exact matches only If you want to say split into area groups 10 meters in size use ELEV_DIST 5 This would give you areas with values between 5 and 5 meters 5 and 15 meters etc e SLOPE_DIST specifies how far from an exact match in degrees each value must be to be considered the same By default a value of 0 is used which means exact matches only If you want to say split into area groups 10 degrees in size use SLOPE_DIST 5 This would give you areas with values between 0 and 10 degrees 10 and 20 degrees etc e FORCE_RGB specifies that the attribute va
131. value for numbering or lettering i e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID_NAMING_COLS NUM 100 DEM 10 GRID_NAMING_ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID_NAMING_COLS parameter above for details on the format GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES NO to disable the prepending of zeroes GRID_NAMING_SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default is an underscore GRID_CREATE_FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder QUALITY JPEG or GEOTIFF only specifies the quality setting to use when generating the image Valid values range from to 100 with 1 generating the lowest quality image and 100 generating the highest quality image If no QUALITY setting is present a default value of 75 is used which generates a very high quality image that i
132. values and interpolate the color values in between those numbers Any features that do not have a matching attribute name value will use the default style assignment for their type or the custom style if one has been set You can also use wilcard and characters in your attribute value to match on values matching some pattern If you want to initialize the list of attribute values and styles from those attribute values found in the selected layer s press the nit from Values button You can also right click on an existing attribute style pair to get a menu of additional options including one to clone that item into a new value using the same style e Assign Random Colors to Features This option specifies that each feature shall be assigned a random color either from the full set of 24 bit colors or from a collection of colors specified by the user in a palette You can use the Select Base Style button to assign the base style whose color will be randomly assigned For areas if the selected style uses no area fill then the area border color will be varied rather than the fill color For point features you need to have a dot or custom shape like dot diamond square etc selected as the symbol for the color randomization to work properly Projection Tab The Projection tab is used to reinterpret the raw vector data to a new projection This is useful if the wrong projection was selected for the dataset when it was loaded or if the data set
133. values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the contour bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the contour bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the contour generation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to generate contours to the bounds of the file c test uf you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right
134. will be used as the layer name in the PDF file Use Source File Description as Layer Name The Control Center layer name for the layer that the feature is in will be used as the PDF layer name e Point Symbol Scaling Factor Specifies the scaling factor to apply when rendering point symbols to the PDF file For example use 2 0 to double the size of your point symbols in the final PDF file or 0 5 to make them half the size o Label Font Scaling Factor Specifies the size scaling factor to apply when rendering feature labels to the PDF file allowing you to easily grow or shrink all labels written to the PDF file For example use 2 0 to double the size of your labels in the final PDF file or 0 5 to make them half the size e Use JPG Compression for Raster Layers Specifies that any raster layers exported to the PDF will be compressed in the PDF file using JPG compression While there may be a slight loss in quality by using this option the resulting files are typically much smaller and in most cases you cannot notice any loss in quality so it is recommended to use this option e Combine Raster Layers into a Single PDF Layer Specifies that if multiple raster or gridded elevation data sets are involved in the export they will be combined into a single layer in the generated PDF file rather than each staying in a separate layer in the created file This will result in smaller files but you won t be able to individually turn different raster f
135. with Database Information if you want to save the authentication information along with the connection definition The password will be encrypted Click the Test Connection button to determine whether or no the connection parameters can be used to connect to the spatial database Once you have entered all of the required information click the OK button to save the connection definition The Cancel button quits the process of creating or updating a connection definition The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Table of Contents 121 Global Mapper User s Manual 5 CHANGE DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS Selecting the Tools Configuration menu item or toolbar button displays the Configuration dialog This dialog provides for general setup of Global Mapper display options The Configuration dialog provides the following panels allowing the modification of display options e General Scale Units and Position Display Setup e Vector Display Vector Display Setup e Area Styles Area Type Color Fill Border Settings e Line Styles Line Type Color Width Style Settings e Point Styles Point Type Symbol Settings Custom Symbols e Vertical Elevation Display Setup e Shader Shader Specific Setup e Projection Select Display Projection Datum General Options The General panel pictured below controls options for the display of vector data areas lines and points as well as position format on the status bar
136. within the data sets being combined will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is off by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the operation should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be combined will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL or POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the new terrain layer will be in i e the current projection POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will generate a separate export for each polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon See the POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY and POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR options for naming and other options when using this parameter Use POLYGON _CROP_USE_EACH YES to enable POLYG
137. you to calculate cut and fill volumes either within the selected area or along the selected line feature For more information about this operation see the cut and fill section of the Measure Tool help If you have multiple area features selected you can also calculate the combined cut and fill volume of all of the selected area features Table of Contents 221 Global Mapper User s Manual Insert a Pad Site This functionality is only available in the Global Energy Mapper product You can easily insert a complete pad site template or really any object template by right clicking and selecting the Insert Pad Site from Library option When selected this option displays the Select Pad Site dialog see below This dialog allows you to choose which pad site template to insert There are several pad site templates included with the installation You can press the Add Pad Site from File button to add a new template object to the library from any supported vector format like a DXF or DWG file When you press the OK button the group of objects is inserted at the clicked location and is automatically selected for easy moving scaling and rotating Available Pad Sites 3 Well Exhibit Pad 6 Well Exhibit Pad Place Top Left of Pad Site at Insertion Point Rather than Center of Pad Site Add Pad Site from File 8 Cancel Creating a Flattened Site Plan This functionality is only available in the Global Energy Mapper product
138. 0 5 provides a decent simulation of a bunker o Ignore Zero Elevations If checked this option will cause any features with an elevation value of zero to be ignored This is useful if you have a data set where features with no known elevation are marked with an elevation of zero e Save Triangulated Network TIN as a Vector Layer If checked this option will cause a separate vector layer with area features for each 3D triangle created as part of the triangulation and gridding process This is known as the TIN surface e Heights Relative to Ground If you check this option all elevation values from the selected vector layers will be treated as relative to the height of any loaded underlying terrain surface like a DEM This is very handy for doing things like creating building models where you just know the building height above ground and not above sea level e Fill Entire Bounding Box Instead of Just Inside Convex Hull If you check this option the generated elevation grid will contain valid values filling the entire bounding box specified for the gridding operation Otherwise the valid values will only fill out to the convex hull polygon of the data being eridded e Export Grids Directly to Global Mapper Grid Files If checked this option will cause the generated elevation grid file s to be directly exported to Global Mapper Grid GMG files This is useful when you are triangulating and gridding a very large collection of data and also u
139. 127 colors BSB marine chart raster image for use in compatible applications and some marine chartplotters The export will generate a single KAP file containing the chart image When selected the command displays the BSB Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and chart parameters a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export BT Binary Terrain Command The Export BT Binary Terrain command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a BT Binary Terrain format file When selected the command displays the BT Binary Terrain Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing to use a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export CADRG CIB RPF Command The Export CADRG CIB RPF command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to anew CADRG or CIB database This export will automatically split the export into the a
140. 28 Solid 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 Residential Road Solid 128 128 128 River lt 20 km Solid 0 0 211 River gt 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 100 250 km Solid 0 0 211 River 20 50 km Solid 0 0 211 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 24 Global Mapper User s Manual River 50 100 km Solid 0 0 211 Solid 0 0 211 River Unknown Length 2550 0 0 Trail Solid 0 0 0 255 0 255 0 0 211 0 0 0 128 128 128 Solid Unclassified Line Feature 128 128 128 Solid 0 0 0 Unknown Line Type Unpaved Road Solid 128 128 128 Drawing Styles Global Mapper Drawing Styles Drawing Style ee Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 25 Global Mapper User s Manual es a S a ss ss Se o o O e e sain signentat es Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 326 H Global Mapper User s Manual a ee e a eee a Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 327 F r C E Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Empty Circles along Line Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 328 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN POINT TYPES AND SYMBOLS This secti
141. 3 Global Mapper User s Manual HD JO View The images below shows the 3D viewer after an operation to flatten a site high above the terrain surface mainly to illustrate how the terracing works Note how the new surface matches up with the original terrain surface Table of Contents 224 Global Mapper User s Manual 30 3D View afa afolo ol ala G Working with Feature Measurements i e Length Enclosed Area If one or more area and or line features are selected the Add Update the Measure Attributes of Selected Feature s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will add measurement attributes to the selected features that do not already have them or update the measurement attributes of features that do The measure attributes include LENGTH for lines and PERIMETER and ENCLOSED_AREA for areas In addition to adding updating the measure attributes for the selected feature s the combined length and or enclosed area of the selected line and area features will also be reported by this command You can also select the Display Feature Measurements option to display a dialog pictured below listed the measurements and attributes of each selected line and area feature as well as the total combined enclosed area and perimeter length of the features This dialog also allows you to easily export the results to a CSV file Table of Contents 225 Global Mapper User s Manual
142. 3D View window contains a toolbar with command buttons allowing you to modify the default view You can use the mouse to rotate the view around as well as zoom in The arrow keys on the toolbar allow you to pan the data visible in the 3D view in any direction The zoom in and out buttons allow you to zoom in or out on the center of the 3D view Additional buttons are also available for modifying the vertical exaggeration displaying water and saving the 3D view contents to a Windows BMP TIFF PNG or JPG file You can also use the arrow keys and numeric Keypad to pan and zoom the 3D image without using the mouse The following keys are recognized e Arrow Keys pan 3D view left right forward and back or move in Walk Mode hold shift for larger move e Page Up Down zoom in and out hold shift for larger move e Numbers 8 and 2 control tilt forward and back e Numbers 4 and 6 control rotation right and left e Numbers 7 and 9 move up e Numbers 1 and 3 move down e Number 5 and letter H return to default view e W show wireframe e A draw axes If you press the Change Display Properties button on the 3D toolbar the 3D View Properties dialog 1s displayed allowing you to configure the 3D view settings including the vertical exaggeration the water display background color 3D vector display as well as the terrain and draped image resolution sae Vertical exaggeration 3 75 j Background calor Walk Mo
143. 446 LOS3 94000 2 906380 6 10543264 0 2a DO 2 9s LOD SAS Sc Zs 900584 8 LUS65 96530 Zs S9SZ7145 LOS6 7414 2 0 Lk 886094 7 LOSS DS 96520 Lx 884645 6 LOSST 40 ales Les OL OO TG LOSZ442 70 cr 870155 lt 4 10518630 0 os 865808 5 LOSLZ3634 0 Su 861944 4 LOS OS6S 70 op aae PATAS 104949630 3 5 S71LIZ1 6 10493997 lt 0 Ja 880781 6 L04363930 3 SO 947526 LOAIOAD Si cr 890924 8 LO SO 9936 0 oie 889475 8 10518147 0 om 884645 6 LTOS249T00 oe SL OU Tie6 105244270 J Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Batch Convert Reproject The Batch Convert Reproject command allows the user to easily convert multiple files in one format to another format When the command is selected the user is first prompted to select the file type to convert from using the dialog pictured below Once an input file type is selected another dialog with a list of all compatible export file types is displayed allowing the user to select what type of file to convert the input files to Finally after Table of Contents 81 Global Mapper User s Manual the input and output file types are selected the Batch Convert dialog pictured below is displayed allowing the user to set up the batch conversion Select File Type to Convert From Select Type Y Select Type ACE Altitude Corrected Elevation Arc Vector Coverage File 4rc lnto ASCII Grid File 4rc lnto Binary Grid File AutoCAD OF Drawing Interchan
144. 5242 205 991 5662 37 23 56 21M ob A Y McPeak Faye 146 Larkin St NewMarket AL 35761 256 379 596 3P od ad PN BY 25 Ol McPeak Faye 395 Dupree Dr Huntsville AL 35806 256 637 2697 3P 4r 45 15 N ab AF A gt Create Points from Geocoded Addresses Export Results to File Find Features with Duplicate Attribute Values The Find Features with Duplicate Attribute Values command allows you to search loaded vector features to find those that have duplicate values for a selected attribute value You can then view the results and manually edit them or choose to automatically assign unique numeric values for the selected attribute so that duplicates no longer exist When you select the menu item you are first prompted to select which attribute including feature name to search for duplicates on then the search proceeds and any duplicate values are display in the Duplicate Search Results dialog picture below This dialog allow you to view the features with duplicate results and to edit those features or automatically assign new unique values You can also press the Delete Duplicates button to Table of Contents 95 Global Mapper User s Manual mark the duplicate features as deleted When doing this you will have the option to mark all duplicates except for the first one as deleted or to just delete the duplicate features that also have duplicate coordinates this is what you ll most often want to do E Duplicate Search Results The duplic
145. 8 53m 08721703 08 16 02 4a4kmh 114 6 110 49 SS 70600W sea Sb 36 0300 N 1014A m 08 21703 08 16 11 33 2 km h JE 110 49 55 6452 wW a2 J6 36 4556 M 39 53am 08 21703 08 16 22 426 kmh 4 6 l l ah A m d el ee ee N Maaa Samh Ma MSIN a EE ol sm lal boms de M M 4 I Co ee a Edit Position Add Elevs Edit Length Copy to Clipboard Delete Selected Vertices Update Elevations from Terrain Cancel 7 On fe Do Pat ee The PathProfile LOS command selects the 3D path profile LOS line of sight tool as the current tool This tool allows you to get a vertical profile along a user specified path using loaded elevation datasets In addition registered users can perform line of sight calculations along the defined path Path Profile LOS Tool To define the path along which to generate the 3D path profile first select the path profile tool as your current tool Press and release the left mouse button at the position where you wish to start the path Move the mouse to the next position that you want to include in the path profile then press the left mouse button again Right click on the last location in the path profile to complete selecting points and display the Path Profile Line of Sight dialog pictured below The Path Profile Line of Sight dialog will appear displaying the 3D path profile of the selected path Any points along the path that did not have elevation data underneath will be treated as an elevation o
146. AL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID_NAMING_COLS and GRID_NAMING_ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID_NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used GRID_NAMING_COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM_REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 0 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order ALPHA_REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting value for numbering or lettering 1 e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID_NAMING_COLS NUM 100 DEM 10 GRID_NAMING_ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE p
147. ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon e POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box GENERATE_ELEV_GRID The GENERATE_ELEV_GRID command allows for the generation of a gridded elevation layer using loaded 3D vector data The following parameters are supported by the command as well as the display option paramters supported by the IMPORT command e ELEV_UNITS specify elevation units to use for new grid FEET US feet DECIFEEFT 10ths of US feet METERS meters DECIMETERS 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS centimeters e SPATIAL_RES specifies spacing of grid points to use in generated grid A smaller grid spacing results in higher fidelity but larger elevation grids Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global Table of Contents 278 Global Mapper User s Manual projection and you wanted to use a grid with a 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 If you do not provide a SPATIAL_RES value a good d
148. ASCII text file for later use The following parameters are supported by the command In addition all of the option parameters for the IMPORT command are also supported for this command e FILENAME full path to file to load the data from e TYPE type of import that we re doing POINT_ONLY all lines with coordinate data will result in a new point object begin created POINT_AND_LINE both point and line features will be created from coordinate data in the file Line features will be created when coordinate data lines are back to back in the file All individual coordinate lines will result in a point object being created ELEVATION all lines in the file with 3 coordinate values x y and elevation will be used to create an elevation grid The data will be triangulated and gridded automatically resulting in a fully usable elevation grid that can be exported to any of the supported elevation data formats e COORD_DELIM specifies the delimeter between coordinates in coordinate lines AUTO automatically detect the delimeter type default WHITESPACE coordinates are separated with one or more space and or tab characters COMMA coordinates are separated by commas SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons TAB coordinates are separated by tabs e COORD_ORDER specifies the order of the coordinates in coordinate lines X_FIRST x coordinates i e easting or longitude come first followed by y coordinates i e northing
149. ATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 e FORCE_SQUARE_PIXELS if this value is set to YES the spatial resolution of the resultant elevation file will be set so that the x and y pixel size are the same with the minimum default size being used for both e GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y e LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER _BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be sp
150. Aqua Geology Foliation Open Small Black Geology Foliation Open Small Green Geology Foliation Open Small Red Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Black Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Green Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Red Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Black Beno nooeo BODO ERG Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 379 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Green i Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Red kii Geology Joint Closed Medium Aqua Geology Joint Closed Medium Black Geology Joint Closed Medium Green Geology Joint Closed Medium Red Geology Joint Closed Small Aqua Geology Joint Closed Small Black Geology Joint Closed Small Green Geology Joint Closed Small Red Geology Joint Open Medium Aqua Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 380 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Joint Open Medium Black Geology Joint Open Medium Green Geology Joint Open Medium Red Geology Joint Open Small Aqua Geology Joint Open Small Black Geology Joint Open Small Green Geology Joint Open Small Red Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Mediu
151. COMBINE_TERRAIN The COMBINE_TERRAIN command generates a new terrain gridded elevation layer by combining two loaded terrain layers through some operation like addition subtraction difference average min max etc The new terrain layer can then be operated on just like any other terrain layer The following parameters are used by the COMBINE_TERRAIN command e LAYERI_FILENAME full path and filename of the first loaded terrain layer to use You can also pass in the full description of the loaded layer to use in case you want to use a layer not loaded from a file e LAYER2_FILENAME full path and filename of the second loaded terrain layer to use You can also pass in the full description of the loaded layer to use in case you want to use a layer not loaded from a file e COMBINE_OP defines the operation to perform when combining the layers The following operations are supported e ADD adds the values from the first layer to the second SUBTRACT_SIGNED subtracts the values of the second layer from the first and saves the signed result SUBTRACT_UNSIGNED subtracts the values of the second layer from the first and saves the magnitude of the result AVERAGE saves the average of the values from the first and second layers MINIMUM saves the smaller of the values from the first and second layers Table of Contents 243 Global Mapper User s Manual MAXIMUM saves the larger of the values from the first and seco
152. CROPATH_3CD a Micropath 3CD grid file MICROPATH_DEM a Micropath DEM file MRSID a LizardTech MrSID image file NetCDF a NetCDF format file NIMA_GNS a NIMA GNS format file NITE NITF format imagery NOS_GEO a NOS GEO format chart file NTF_GRID a NTF grid format file OPTIMIGRID an Optimi terrain or clutter grid format file OZI an OziExplorer format waypoint WPT or track PLT file PCX a PC Paintbrush PCX format file PCXS5 a Garmin PCX5 format waypoint WPT or track TRK file e ROCKWORKS_GRID a RockWorks Grid format file e RPF Raster Product Format database like CADRG e RPF_FRAME single frame from a Raster Product Format database like CADRG S57 a S 57 chart file SDTS a SDTS transfer SEGP1 a SEGP1 seismic shotpoint file SHAPEFILE an ESRI Shapefile SURFERGRID a Surfer grid format file SWEDISHDEMGRID a Swedish DEM grid format file TERRASCAN a TerraScan LIDAR format file TIGER_LINE a Tiger Line format file e TRMM_GRID a TRMM precipitation grid file USGS_DEM a native format USGS DEM file VPF a Vector Product Format file such as VMAP or DNC data e VULCAN_3D a Vulcan3D triangulation file WASP_RESOURCE_GRID a WaSP resource grid file e ZMAP_PLUS a Geographix Zmap Plus format file e PROMPT_IF_TYPE_ UNKNOWN set to NO if you don t want the user to be prompted to select a file type if the type cannot automati
153. Configuration dialog to be used when rendering the feature Alternatively you can choose the Specify Style to Use When Rendering Feature option and select how you want this feature drawn independent of the selected Feature Type The Feature Attributes selection allows you to edit the attributes that are associated with this feature The Add File Link s button in this section allows you to easily add attributes that point to files somewhere on disk without having to manually type in the file name These file links can later be followed from the Feature Information dialog displayed with the Feature Info tool The Add Time Stamp button allows you to easily add a TIMESTAMP attribute with a value set to the current system time When you add or edit new attributes the dialog that appears includes drop downs for both the attribute name and value showing previously entered names and values for easy selection These values are stored in an easy to edit text file named attr_previous_vals txt in your setting file path see Help gt About dialog for this location The format is described in the file so you can set this up initially with values for particular customers if you don t want to wait to have it filled in as it s used When more than one area line and or point feature is selected there is an option on the right click popup menu allowing you to edit the selected features Selecting that option displays a dialog dialog which allows you to modify the
154. Cut Copy Paste Snapping to Existing Features When Drawing Snapping Vertically Horizontally When Drawing Un doing Digitization Operations Additional Feature Operations 0 Image Swipe 0 Coordinate Convertor Control Center 0 Configure Map Layout e Terrain Analysis Menu 0 Combine Terrain Layers Generate Contours Command 0 Generate Watershed Command 0 Find Ridge Lines Command Measure Volume Between Surfaces Command f Search Menu g GPS Menu Start Tracking GPS 0 Stop Tracking GPS Keep the Vessel On Screen Q Mark Waypoint Vessel Color 0 Vessel Size Setup gt Information 0 Manage GPS Vessels 0 View NMEA Data Log Clear Tracklog 0 Record Tracklog Save Tracklog Send Raster Maps to Connected Garmin Device h Help Menu Table of Contents Online Help User s Group Find Data Online Command Register Global Mapper Create S 63 User Permit File Check for Updates Automatically Check for Updates at Startup Global Mapper User s Manual 0 About Global Mapper 4 OVERLAY CONTROL CENTER a Currently Opened Overlays b Metadata c Options 0 Vector Data Options 0 Raster Data Options 0 Elevation Data Options d Show Hide Overlay s e Close Overlay s 5 LOADING FILES a Loading Multiple Files b Projections and Datums 6 CHANGE DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS a General Options b Vector Display Options c Area Styles d Line Styles e Poi
155. D _ GREEN _ BLUE where the SIZE value is the radius in pixels of the dot or square and the RED GREEN and BLUE values represent the color to use For example to specify a dot symbol of radius 10 pixels with a color or green you would use a symbol name of DOT_CUSTOM_10_0_255_0 e COLOR the COLOR attribute should be formatted as RGB red green blue In the absence of a specific fill or line color it will be used e LINE COLOR LINE_COLOR BORDER COLOR BORDER_COLOR PEN COLOR or PEN_COLOR the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the color for the pen used to draw line features The values must be formatted according to the guidelines layed out for the COLOR attribute in order to be recognized e LINE WIDTH LINE_WIDTH BORDER WIDTH BORDER_WIDTH PEN WIDTH or PEN_WIDTH the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the width for the pen used to draw line features e LINE STYLE LINE_STYLE BORDER STYLE BORDER_STYLE PEN STYLE or PEN_STYLE the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the style for the pen used to draw line features Valid values are Solid Dash Dot Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot and Null Only the Solid value is valid for lines with a width greater than 1 e LABEL_ON_LINE if this is set to YES or TRUE the label if any for this line feature should be rendered centered on the line e CLOSED if this is se
156. EE Ty tele BORG RE EGE Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 376 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Dip Bedding Small Black Geology Dip Bedding Small Green Geology Dip Bedding Small Red Geology Dip Overturned Medium Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Medium Black Geology Dip Overturned Medium Green Geology Dip Overturned Medium Red Geology Dip Overturned Small Aqua Geology Dip Overturned Small Black Geology Dip Overturned Small Green Geology Dip Overturned Small Red SOoROnonoon feds fell ele pep e Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 377 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Foliation Closed Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Closed Medium Black Geology Foliation Closed Medium Green Geology Foliation Closed Medium Red Geology Foliation Closed Small Aqua Geology Foliation Closed Small Black Geology Foliation Closed Small Green Geology Foliation Closed Small Red Geology Foliation Open Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Open Medium Black Geology Foliation Open Medium Green PPP PEED TPT DOUGOOOOCON Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 378 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Foliation Open Medium Red Geology Foliation Open Small
157. EEP_CELL_SIZE YES to enable GRID_NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and column or SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID_NAMING_COLS and GRID_NAMING_ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID_NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used Table of Contents 261 Global Mapper User s Manual e GRID_NAMING_COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM_REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 0 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order ALPHA_REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting value for numbering or lettering i e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasi
158. EN 69 J Rsioso S SWISSGRID CHI903 _ 6 Bessel isi 6 TANANARIVE 1925 GREENWICH 6297 Intemational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 TANANARIVE 1925 PARIS 6810 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 TETE MOZAMBIQUE 627 Clark 1866 u Tokyo 80 eea dd TRINIDAD 19036802 ess S j TWD67 TAIWAN Unknown GRS1967 Modified 6 VN 2000 VIETNAM 756 G84 a wess4 826 wa WI COUNTY BURNETT 6152 WE County Burnett WI COUNTY CHIPPEWA 6152 WE County Chippewa WI COUNTY DOUGLAS 6152 WCouy Douglas WI COUNTY MARATHON 6152 WCouy Marathon WI COUNTY SHEBOYGAN 6152 W Couny Sheboygan WI COUNTY TAYLOR 6152 WCoumty Tayor XIAN 1980 CHN 6610 Xian 1980 YACARE URAGUAY 6309 International 1909 Hayford n 1924 1 ZANDERIJ SURINAME 631 _ international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 2 Built in Ellipsoids Ellipsoid Name Semi Major Axis m ATS77 6378135 000 6377563 396 Australian National 6378160 000 Built in Ellipsoids 391 Global Mapper User s Manual 6378293 645 Clarke 1866 6378300 789 Clarke 1880 IGN Everest 1830 6377298 556 6378137 000 Helmert 1906 2575000 000 Built in Ellipsoids 392 Global Mapper User s Manual 6378544 823 6378434 181 6378647 54 1 MN County Crow Wing 6378421 989 MN County Grant Built in Ellipsoids 393 Global Mapper User s Manual 6378414 369 6378472 281 6378418 94 1 6378434 181 MN County Scott Built in Ellipsoids 394 Global
159. ENAME SLAYER DIRSSLAYER_ FNAME WO_EXTS_loop tif FORMAT GEOTIFF Disable the current layer so it won t be involved in other operations SET_LAYER_OPTIONS FILENAMF SLAYER_ FNAME W_DIR S HIDDEN YES LAYER _LOOP_END Unhide all layers LAYER_LOOP_START FILENAME VAR NAME PREF IX HIDE SET_LAYER_OPTIONS FILENAME SHIDE FNAME W_DIR amp HIDDEN NO LAYER _LOOP_END LOAD_PROJECTION The LOAD_PROJECTION command imports a projection from a PRJ file and makes it the current global projection This projection will be used for all exports after this command until another LOAD_PROJECTION command is encountered to change the global projection The following parameters are supported by the command you would just use one of the below e PROJ special Projection Specification type of parameter that specifies the projection to use for the file This will override any projection information stored in the file e FILENAME DEPRECATED use PROJ full path to PRJ file to load the projection from e PROJ_NAME DEPRECATED use PROJ specifies the name of the projection to use This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE_PROJ command e PROJ_LEPSG_ CODE DEPRECATED use PROJ specifies the numeric EPSG projection code that defines the projection For example use PROJ_EPSG_CODE 26715 to define a UTM zone 15 projection with NAD27 as the datum and meters as the units LOAD_STYLE_FILE The LOAD_STYLE_FILE command load a Global Mapper Style g
160. EW The SAVE_CURRENT_VIEW command saves the current view window for later restoration using the RESTORE_LAST_SAVED_VIEW command This command does not take any parameters SAVE_PROJECTION The SAVE_PROJECTION command saves the current global projection to a PRJ file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to PRJ file to save the projection to SET_BG_COLOR The SET_BG_COLOR command sets the color to use for any background pixels when rendering layers The following parameters are supported by the command e COLOR specifies the background color to use The color should be specified as RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to make white the background color use COLOR RGB 255 255 255 SET_LAYER_OPTIONS The SET_LAYER_OPTIONS command sets the display options for one of more loaded layers These are the options that you would normally supply when importing a layer The following parameters are supported by the command In addition all of the option parameters for the IMPORT command are also supported for this command e FILENAME full path or description of loaded layer to set the options for This can include wildcard characters like If you specify an empty filename then all layers that have no filename like generated contours will be matched If you leave of the FILENAME parameter entirely or use a wildcard like FILENAME then all loaded layers will be updated
161. E_SHAPE command e SHAPE_NAME specifies the name to associate with the shape Here is an example of a DEFINE_SHAPE command used to define a feather polygon with a name of FEATHER_POLY DEFINE SHAPE SHAPE NAME FEATHER_ POLY 3114932234 43239 74 016 91D 34345097 45106 6 109 S61L01 953 4314414 750 S060 7014 109 43171ies eis 3869 3 719 4322400 000 381869 766 4324588 266 371 1493 23474323974 016 END_DEFINE_SHAPE DEFINE_VAR The DEFINE_VAR command allows you to define a variable and an associated value You can then use the defined variable name later wrapped in percent signs to have the defined value replaced in the script This is useful for things like defining a path or something at the top of a script that you can easily change in just one place later The following parameters are required by the DEFINE_VAR command Table of Contents 246 Global Mapper User s Manual e NAME specifies the variable name e VALUE specifies the variable value e REPLACE_STR specifies a text value to replace inside the value with something else This is typically used inside a DIR_LOOP_START DIR_LOOP_END loop where the VALUE contains other variables The format is REPLACE_STR old_value new_value See example below e PROMPT specifies that the user should be prompted to enter the value for the variable rather than specifying it with the VALUE parameter Very useful for developing interactive scripts Use PROMPT_TEXT to specify the text di
162. Empty Circle at End Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 359 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Black Edges Line Styles Using the Line Styles panel users can configure how lines of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper The line style width color and label font can be modified on a type by type basis In addition the Show Labels for Lines of This Type option allows users to turn line labels off on a type by type basis The Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option allows users to turn on off the fattening of road lines when zoom in tight on them Global Mapper s Line Types are listed in the Global Mapper Line Types table Drawing Styles are listed in the Global Mapper Drawing Styles table Global Mapper recognizes four field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of a Line Type They are GM_TYPE Airport Runway LINE _ WIDTH 1 LINE_COLOR RGB 0 0 0 LINES PY LE So Lid The LINE_STYLE field attribute can be set to any one of the 60 Drawing Styles shown in the Global Mapper Drawing Styles table Line Types Upper line shows line types normal appearance Lower line shows how line type appears when Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option is checked and display is zoomed in Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which lines can be seen Any line whose color is the same as the Global
163. Export LMN Spectra Line Management Node Command 0 Export Lowrance LCM MapCreate File Command Export Lowrance USR Command 0 Export MapGen Command 0 Export MapInfo MIF MID Command 0 Export MapInfo TAB MAP Command 0 Export MatLab Command 0 Export Moss Command 0 Export NIMA ASC Command 0 Export Orca XML Command 0 Export OSM OpenStreetMap org XML Command 0 Export Platte River WhiteStar Geographix File Command 0 Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command 0 Export Polish MP cGPSMapper File Command 0 Export SEGP1 Command 0 Export Shapefile Command Export Simple ASCH Text File Command 0 Export Surfer BLN Command 0 Export SVG Command 0 Export Tom Tom OV2 File Command 0 Export Tsunami OVR Command 0 Export UKOOA P 190 Command 0 Export WAsP MAP File Command 0 Export ZMap IsoMap Line Text File Command 0 Export ZMap XYSegId File Command Export Web Formats Google Maps VE WW etc Export Bing Maps Virtual Earth Tiles Command Export Google Maps Tiles Command 0 Export KML KMZ Command 0 Export OSM OpenStreetMaps org Tiles Command 0 Export SVG Command 0 Export TMS Tile Map Service Tiles Command 0 Export VRML Command Export World Wind Tiles Command 0 Export Zoomify Tiles Command Export Elevation Spatial Database Command Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual Export Raster Image Spatial Database Command Export Vector Spatial Database Command Batch Convert Reproject e Print Command e Print Preview Command
164. Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PNG Command The Export PNG command allows the user to export any loaded data sets to a PNG file When selected the command displays the PNG Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Options panel pictured below which allows the user to select whether to export an 8 bit palette based PNG or a 24 bit RGB PNG file as well as other applicable options a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 46 Global Mapper User s Manual PNG Export Options Eg PNG Export Options Gridding Export Bounds File Type C 24 bit AGB Langer Size Full Color Palette Image Optimized Palette Sample Spacing rais 0 000277777777 79994 arc degrees axis 0 000277777777799941 arc degrees W Always Generate Square Pixels IF you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the curent projection by gong to Config Projection Save Scale Elevation Le
165. F only use to disable the automatic creation of BigTIFF format files for very large exports Use DISABLE_BIGTIFF YES to disable the automatic BigTIFF support e TIFF_COPYRIGHT GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_COPYRIGHT tag e TIFF_DATETIME GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_DATETIME tag e TIFF_DOC_NAME GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_DOCUMENTNAME tag e TIFF_GT_CITATION GEOTIFF only specify text to store in GeoTIFF GTCitationGeoKey GeoTIFF tag e TIFF_IMAGE_DESC GEOTIFF only specify text to store in TIFFTAG_IMAGEDESCRIPTION tag e TIFF_PCS_CITATION GEOTIFF only specify text to store in GeoTIFF PCSCitationGeoKey GeoTIFF tag e TIFF_NO_GTIFF_HEADER GEOTIFF only don t embed a GeoTIFF header in the file Use TIFF_NO_GTIFF_ HEADER YES to disable write of header e EXPORT_SLOPE FLOAT_GRID only use to specify that slope values should be exported rather than elevation values Use EXPORT_SLOPE YES to enable e EXPORT_SLOPE_DIR FLOAT_GRID only use to specify that slope direction values should be exported rather than elevation values Use EXPORT_SLOPE_DIR YES to enable e EXPORT_SLOPE_PERCENT FLOAT_GRID only use to specify that slope values should be exported as percent slope rather than degrees Use EXPORT_SLOPE_PERCENT YES to enable and also make sure to add EXPORT_SLOPE YES to the command line e DTED_LEVEL DTED only specifies which DTED level to export to The valu
166. FORMAT parameter see below for details The following parameters are used by the VAR_LOOP_START command Table of Contents 300 Global Mapper User s Manual e VAR_NAME specifies the name of the variable that will be used to store the current loop value By default this will be Z COUNTER but you can use anything you want See the example below for usage e VAL_START specifies the value to start the loop out This would be something like 1 for just a simple counter loop but can be any number or a single letter like A e VAL_STOP specifies the value to stop the loop out When the current loop value goes past this value the loop will stop but it will run at this value So to do a loop from 1 to 10 including 10 use VAL_START 1 VAL_STOP 10 and VAL_STEP 1 To loop through the letters A through J use VAL_START A VAL_STOP J and VAL_STEP 1 e VAL_STEP specifies the value to increment the loop variable by each time the commands are run through If you don t provide this it will increment by 1 if the VAL_STOP is greater than VAL_START and 1 if they are reversed e VAL_FORMAT specifies a C style printf format string for formatting the numeric loop variable as a string For example to format as a 3 digit number with O s filling in for values less than 100 use VAL_FORMAT 03d If you provide a custom format it should always include exactly one and end with a d for integer values or a f for floating point If you don t provi
167. File with XYZ and Distance Values option allows registered users to save all of the coordinates and distances to that location along the path profile to a CSV text file Each line in the text file will be formatted as follow x coordinate y coordinate elevation distance from start The Save Distance Elevation option allows registered users to save all of the distances and elevations along the path profile to a text file Each line in the text file will be formatted as follow distance from start elevation The Save To XYZ option allows registered users to save all of the positions and elevations along the path profile to a text file Each line in the text file will be formatted as follow x coordinate y coordinate elevation The Save LOS to KML option allows registered users to save a 3D line of sight and if selected the Fresnel zone boundary lines to a KML file for display in Google Earth Pressing the Line of Sight button brings up the Setup Line of Sight Earth Curvature dialog pictured below which allows the user to configure a line of sight calculation along the selected path You can only perform a line of sight analysis if exactly two points are in the path profile e g line of sight analysis cannot be performed on multi segment paths Table of Contents 192 Global Mapper User s Manual Setup Line of Sight Earth Curvature From Sight Elevation l na METERS above Ground Cancel m To Sight El
168. Fill 0 0 211 Coral Pattern 255 0 0 Solid Fill 0 0 211 E Ff ete im D iz Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View Regional River Solid Fill 104 133 138 Sand Pattern 255 255 0 pi pi Null Null Null Solid Null Null Null Null Null 349 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Fill 0 255 0 i i ee ee ee Scrub Area ie ots Megs goons aes h A ARRAK RS a a cal Maro Aea Solid Fill 255 247 181 Area owg Snow or Glacier Solid Fill 255 255 255 Glacier _ B A na _ B D _ B ie Unclassified Unelassitied Area Feature No Fill 0 0 0 Area Feature Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 350 Scattered Trees Null 0 0 0 0 128 128 Null 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Unknown Area Type View Shed Coverage Area _ thy Backwards Wooded Area Ay Diagonal 165 145 97 1 Cross Hatch Area Fill Patterns Global Mapper User s Manual Unknown Area Type No Fill Ea View Shed Coverage Area No Fill oe Solid Fill 125 191 167 Global Mapper Fill Patterns Fill Pattern B L B Backwards Diagonal Cross Hatch Cross Hatch Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 351 Global Mapper User s Manual Diagonal Cross Hatch Forward Diagonal Cross Hatch
169. Garmin device The KMZ format maps should be saved on the device in the Garmin CustomMaps folder while the JNX files should be saved in the Garmin BirdsEye folder If your device is connected when you start the export the default export folder should be in the appropriate location Table of Contents 237 Global Mapper User s Manual Gamin Options Export Bounds IMPORTANT NOTE Curenth only a small number of Gamin devices i e Oregon Colorado etc support the display of raster maps Make sure to save your map on your Gamin device in the aamin Custom Maps folder Advanced JNX Format Sample Spacing Resolution Amis 5 75290364502928e 006 arc degrees Y axis 4 50501025472014e 006 arc degrees iW Always Generate Square Pixels f you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the curent projection by going to Contig gt Projection Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units Lower Higher Smaller Larger Convert to Grayscale Save Map Layout Scale Mangins Grd Legend etc Save Vector Data f Displayed interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data Display On Top of Roads and Trails ADVANCED Max Tiles Supported by Unit 100 Apply Click to see a discussion thread that includes several screenshots with custom maps displayed on Garmin devices Table of Contents 238 Global Mapper User s Manual Scripting Language Reference Contents e Genera
170. Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper User s Manual Download Offline Copy If you would like to have access to the Global Mapper manual while working offline click here to download the manual web pages to your local hard drive To use the manual offline unzip the downloaded file then double click on the Help_Main html file from Windows Explorer to start using the manual If you would like context sensitive help from Global Mapper to use the help files that you have downloaded rather than the online user s manual create a Help subdirectory under the directory in which you installed Global Mapper by default this will be something like C Program Files GlobalMapperXX where Program Files could also be Program Files x86 for a 32 bit install on 64 bit Windows and XX is the version like 13 or 14 If you are running the 64 bit version this could also be GlobalMapperX X_64bit and unzip the contents of the zip file to that directory Open Printable Searchable Copy PDF Format Table of Contents 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL a System Requirements b Download and Installation c Registration 2 TUTORIALS AND REFERENCE GUIDES Tutorial Getting Started with Global Mapper and cGPSMapper Guide to Creating Garmin format Maps Video Tutorials Supplied by http globalmapperforum com Video Tutorial Changing the Coordinate System and Exporting Data Video Tutorial Viewing 3D Vector Data Video Tutorial Creating a Custom
171. HA_REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting value for numbering or lettering i e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID_NAMING_COLS NUM 100 DEM 10 e GRID_NAMING_ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID_NAMING_COLS parameter above for details on the format e GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES NO to disable the prepending of zeroes e GRID_NAMING_SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default is an underscore e GRID_CREATE_FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder e GEN_3D_FEATURES DGN and SHAPEFILE only specifies that 3D line and point objects should be created in the exported file Set this to YES to cause the the 3D features to be generated Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES results
172. ISLANDS EAST 6267 Clake1866 NAD 27 ALEUTIAN ISLANDS WEST 6267 Clake1866 NAD27 BAHAMAS 007 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CANADA 007 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CANAL ZONE 6267 Clarke 1866 o NAD27 CARIBBEAN 060 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CENTRAL AMERICA 6267 Clarke 1866 NAD27 CONUS 6267 Clarke 1866 S NAD27 CUBA 0267 Clarke 1866 S NAD27 GREENLAND 6267 Clarke 1866 NAD27 MEXICO 6267 Clarke 1866 S NAD27 SANSALVADOR 6267 Clarke 1866 NAD27 YUMA PROVING GROUNDS 6267 Clarke 1866 Clarke 1866 S NADSS 69 soo S NAD83 ALABAMAHPGN 652 GRS1980 NAD83 ARIZONAHPGN 652 oRsi980 o NAD83 ARKANSASHPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 CALIFORNIA NORTH HPGN 6152 IGRS1980 NAD83 CALIFORNIA SOUTH HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 COLORADO HPGN 6152 GRSU980 NAD83 FLORIDA HPGN 652 eRsi980 o NAD83 GEORGIA HPGN 652 eRs1980 NAD83 HAWAITHPGN 652 eRsi980 NAD83 LLINOISHPGN 652 eRs1980 NAD83 INDIANAHPGN 652 Rsi980 NAD83 IOWAHPGN 652 IGRSU98Q S NAD83 QTRF9 Unknown IGRSI980 S NAD83 KANSASHPGN 652 IGRS1980 o NAD83 KENTUCKYHPGN 6152 GRSU980 NAD83 LOUISIANA PGN 652 GRS1980 NAD83 MAINEHPGN 652 GRS98O o NAD83 MARYLAND DELAWAREHPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 MICHIGANHPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 MINNESOTA HPGN 6152 GRS1980 NAD83 MISSISSIPPI HPGN 6152 J Rs1980 NAD83 MISSOURI HPGN 6152 JGRsi980 NAD83 MONTANA EASTHPGN 6152 GRS1980 Built in Datums 388 Global Mapper User s Manual NAD83 MONTANA
173. If one or more area features is selected and terrain data is loaded the Advanced Feature Creation submenu will contain the Calculate Flattened Site Plan Grid from Selected Area s option When selected the Setup Site Flatten Parameters dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the site flattening operation You can specify the height to flatten the areas to or allow a height ot automatically be calculated that results in an approximately equal amount of terrain needing to be cut as needs filled so little or no haul in or out is needed You can also setup the allowed slope from the site edges to the terrain surface as well as what width and vertical separation of benches terraces to use if required Table of Contents 222 Global Mapper User s Manual Setup Site Flatten Parameters Layer Description Flattened Site Plan l Height to Flatten Selected Area s To Fixed Height to Flatten To 220 7 meters hi f Calculate Height to Flatten to That Equalizes Cut and Fill Volumes Allowed Slope around Edges 0 5 for 1 2 0 33 for 1 3 etc 0 5 m Bench Terrace Setup If the edges outside the selected area s require flat benches to terrace the sides specify the width and vertical spacing of the benches below Bench Width 0 for none 0 meters Bench Vertical Spacing E meters The images below show the 3D viewer before and then after performing a flattening operation on a hillside Table of Contents 22
174. LENGTH PERIMETER ENCLOSED_AREA etc to new area and line features created with the Digitizer Tool The Make Duplicate Vertex Turn Off Area Border Segment allows you to use duplicate area vertices to turn segments of the area border on and off This is known as Pen Up Pen Down display How it works is that the border pen is on down at the start of the border Whenver a duplicate vertex is encountered then pen it turned off for the next segment So if for example you had vertex 1 then a duplicate vertex 2 and 3 then non duplicate vertices 4 and 5 you would get a border drawn from vertex 1 to vertex 2 then it would turn off for 3 4 then be drawn again for 4 onto the end Table of Contents 129 Global Mapper User s Manual The Disable Snapping to Features in the Digitizer Tool option allows you to disable automatic snapping to nearby features when drawing in the Digitizer Tool If you check this option then snapping will be disabled by default and holding down the ALT key can be used to enable snapping the default behavior is the reverse The Snap to Grid Lines if Displayed option allows you to disable automatic snapping to nearby grid lines features when drawing in the Digitizer Tool If you check this option then snapping to grid lines will be disabled Area Styles REFERENCE GUIDE ALERT Built In Area Types and Styles A graphical reference guide to the area types and border fill styles built in to Global Mapper The Area Styles p
175. LE_RANGE display the map when the current display is below a range of scale value For example use ZOOM_DISPLAY SCALE_RANGE 25000 100000 to display the map when the current draw scale is between 1 25000 and 1 100000 e ADD_FILE specifies the full path to a file to add to the map catalog You can include wildcard characters like and in the filename You can also include multiple ADD_FILE parameters to add multiple files in one command For example to add all of the ECW files in a folder to the catalog use ADD_FILE C path_to_files ecw e REMOVE_MAP specifies the full path of a file to remove from the map catalog You can include wildcard characters like and in the filename You can also include multiple ADD_FILE parameters to remove multiple files in one command For example to remove all of the ECW files in the map catalog use REMOVE_MAP ECW To clear out a map catalog use REMOVE_MAP To remove a file by filename without specifying a folder use a for the path Table of Contents 248 Global Mapper User s Manual For example to remove c temp my_map tif you could use REMOVE_MAP my_map tif or REMOVE_MAP c temp my_map tif Here is a sample showing how to create a map catalog and then load it Create the map catalog Maps should show when they take up at least 10 of display EDIT MAP CATALOG FILENAME C TEMP EXPORT TEST script_catalog gmc CREATE_IF_EMPTY YES ADD_FILE c temp export test
176. Layer When a single raster or elevation grid layer is selected with the exception of online sources this option appears and allows you to create area features covering each distinct color or elevation value encountered in the raster file This is useful for automatically creating areas for things like land cover raster files in a vector format e Find Extreme Min Max Elevation Values in Selected Layer s This scans the selected elevation grid layers to find the minimum and maximum elevation values and reports both the values and their locations to the user The complete list up to 10 000 shared location will be saved to a file and a shorter list presented to the user e Change View Shed Layer Color This allows you to edit the color used to display the coverage area for a selected view shed layer e Edit View Shed Parameters and Recalculate This allows you to edit the calculation parameters for a view shed layer and then update the results e Open Selected Map Folder in Windows Explorer This causes the Windows Explorer application to be opened to the folder containing the selected map file e Split Into Separate Layers Based on Description Attribute Value This option allows you to create new layers by splitting the selected layer s into new layers based on a particular attribute value or by the description type or name of each feature The new layers will be grouped together using the name of the original layer unless the original l
177. Load Workspace command allows the user to load a Global Mapper workspace file gsw previously saved with the Save Workspace command Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to load Global Mapper workspace files Save Workspace Command The Save Workspace command allows the user to save their current set of loaded overlays to a Global Mapper workspace file for later loading with the Load Workspace command The Global Mapper workspace maintains the list of all currently loaded overlays as well as some state information about each of those overlays When the workspace file is loaded all of the overlays that were loaded at the time the workspace file was saved will be loaded into Global Mapper This provides a handy way to easily load a group of overlays which you work with often Table of Contents 21 Global Mapper User s Manual The Global Mapper workspace will also contain any changes that you have made to loaded vector features as well as any new vector features that you have created The user projection and last view on the data will also be maintained Find Data Online Command Selecting the Find Data Online command will open a web browser pointing to places on the internet where data compatible with Global Mapper is available for download Run Script Command The Run Script command allows users to run a Global Mapper script file that they have created This is a powerful option that allows the user to automate a wide variet
178. ME filename of current file value is my_file dem e LAYER_FNAME_WO_EXT filename of current file without extension value is my_file e LAYER_PARENT_DIR name of parent directory of file value is data e LAYER_DESC description of current layer The following parameters are used by the LAYER_LOOP_START command e FILENAME filename or description of layer s to loop over This can include and wildcard characters If you leave the FILENAME parameter off then all loaded layers will be looped over which is the same behavior as using FILENAME If you specify a blank FILENAME parameter then you will loop over all layers not based on a file e VAR_NAME _ PREFIX prefix to use for the variable names in the loop useful in nested loops For example if you provided VAR_NAME_PREFIX HIDE then you would use 7 HIDE_FNAME rather than 7LAYER_FNAME inside that loop If you don t provide a value then the default of LAYER is used Table of Contents 295 Global Mapper User s Manual SAMPLE GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 Hide all layers LAYER_LOOP_START FILENAMFE VAR NAME PREF IX HIDE SET _LAYER_OPTIONS FILENAME SHIDE FNAME W_DIR amp HIDDEN YES LAYER _LOOP_END Loop over the loaded layers doing a separate export for each LAYER_LOOP_START FILENAMF Enable the current layer since we hid it above SET_LAYER_OPTIONS FILENAMF SLAYER_ FNAME W_DIR S HIDDEN NO fi Export EXPORT_RASTER FIL
179. Mapper User s Manual 6377340 189 6378155 000 6378388 000 6378285 480 Built in Ellipsoids 395
180. N export to a Terragen terrain file USGS_DEM export to a native format USGS DEM file VRML export to a VRML file e VULCAN_3D export to a Vulcan3D triangulation file e XYZ_GRID export to a XYZ Grid file e ELEV_UNITS specify elevation units to use in export FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters e SPATIAL_RES specifies spatial resolution Defaults to the minimum spatial resolution of the two layers if not specified Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 You can also specify as a percentage of the default resolution by adding a percent For example to get half the detail your double the spatial resolution value so you would use SPATIAL_RES 200 200 e SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use Table of Contents 252 Global Mapper User s Manual SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SP
181. N WORLD_FILE YES to turn on e GEN_TAB_FILE GEOTIFF only specifies that a MapInfo TAB file should be generated in addition to the GeoTIFF file Use GEN _TAB_FILE YES to turn on e GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 e GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in pixels samples The value should be specified as cell pixel width cell pixel height For example if you want to tile the export into cells that are 800 pixels wide by 600 pixels tall you would use GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE 800 600 e GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE_MAxX specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given maximum size in pixels samples This works by calculating the Table of Contents 253 Global Mapper User s Manual number of rows and columns needed to hold cells of the given pixel dimensions then shrinking those pixel dimensions down so that the tiles exactly cover the exported bounds The value should be specified as cell pixel width cell pixel height For example if you want to tile the expor
182. Name and Description command allows for searching for features in all loaded vector data by attribute value name feature index within the layer and description type When selected the Search Vector Data dialog is displayed B Search Vector Data 4 a a _ s s gt Types To Search Select Layer s to Search jw Areas f Search All Enabled Layers i Lines f Search Specific Layers Select Layers I Paints f Search Onscreen Features Only Search Criteria Wildcards and are Allowed in Compare Value Attibube l tern Compare Value lt Feature Name i az Text Make Text Comparisons Case Sensitive HEW SEARCH SEARCH IN ESISTING RESULTS Double click on item to recenter map view on it right click for more options _sFeatureName gt lt Feature T pe gt B CFEC CUNT 12 Ramp ABS wWwpandotte Tae Ramp ABS Wiandothe 12 Ramp ABS Wiandotke Te Ramp AES Wirandotte Hard Pl Residential Road Ad Wiandothe Hard FI Residential Road Ad Whandotte Hard Pl Residential Road Ad wWwpandotte rard Pl Residential Road Ad wWwpandotte IH Edit Selected Delete Selected Select All The Search Vector Data dialog displays a list of all of the vector features areas lines and or points which match the specified Search Criteria The Search Criteria can be applied to any attribute value of the loaded features the display label field or the description type field Comparisons to the Compare Value can be
183. ON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use for naming or the special values lt Area Display Label gt or lt Area Source Filename gt If no value is provided the exported files will be sequentially numbered POLYGON_CROP_FOLDER_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use as a folder name before the actual filename or the special values lt Area Display Label gt DEFINE_PROJ The DEFINE_PROJ command allows a projection including datum to be associated with a name The projection name can then be used in later IMPORT IMPORT_ARCHIVE IMPORT_ASCII and LOAD_PROJECTION commands to specify a projection as needed The DEFINE_PROJ command consists of a single command line followed by a series of lines describing the projection in the format of an ESRI PRJ file The easiest way to determine the text for a projection is to setup a pro
184. ON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL and POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions Note that line and area features will only be cropped to the bounds of the specified polygon Point features from some formats will actually be cropped to the specified polygon boundary e POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in e POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon e MAP_NAME POLISH_MP only specifies the map name for the MP file e POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will generate a separate export for each polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon See the POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY and POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR options for naming and other options when using this parameter Use POLYGON _CROP_USE_EACH YES to enable e
185. OUNTY MAHNOMEN 6152 MN County Mahnomen Built in Datums 386 Global Mapper User s Manual MN COUNTY MARSHALL 6152 MNCouny Marshal MN COUNTY MARTIN 6152 MNCounty Martin MN COUNTY MCLEOD 6152 MN County McLeod MN COUNTY MEEKER 6152 MNCouny Meeker MN COUNTY MOWER 6152 MNCouny Mower MN COUNTY MURRAY 6152 MNCouny Muray MN COUNTY NOBLES 6152 MNCouny Nobles MN COUNTY NORMAN 6152 MNCouny Noman MN COUNTY OLMSTED 6152 MN County Olmsted MN COUNTY PINE 152 MNCowmy Pine MN COUNTY POLK 652 MNCowy Pok MN COUNTY POPE f 652 MNCouny Pope MN COUNTY RAMSEY 6152 MN County Ramsey MN COUNTY RED LAKE 6152 MNCouny RedLake MN COUNTY REDWOOD 6152 MNCouny Redwood 6152 MN County Rice MN COUNTY ROCK 152 MNCowy Rock MN COUNTY ROSEAU 6152 MNCouny Roseau MN COUNTY SCOT 6152 MNCowny Scot MN COUNTY STEARNS 6152 MNCouny Steams MN COUNTY STEELE 6152 IMNCounty Stecle MN COUNTY STEVENS 6152 MNCouny Stevens MN COUNTY TODD 652 MNCowy Todd MN COUNTY WABASHA 6152 MN County Wabasha MN COUNTY WADENA 6152 MNCouny Wadena MN COUNTY WASECA 6152 MNCounty Waseca MN COUNTY WATONWAN 6152 MNCounty Watonwan MN COUNTY WINONA 6152 MN County Winona MN COUNTY WRIGHT 6152 MN County Wright Built in Datums 387 Global Mapper User s Manual NAD 0867 hark 1866 NAD 7 ALASKA 6267 Clarke 1866 NAD27 ALEUTIAN
186. Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DWG Command The Export DWG command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an AutoCAD Drawing DWG format file When selected the command displays the DWG Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a DWG Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 60 Global Mapper User s Manual DWG Export Options DWG Options Gridding Export Bounds DWa Version RA15 Autocad 000 Display Labels for Area and Line Features Do Not Include Display Labels Include Display Labels as Separate Text Layer Include Display Labels as Attributes Note that some software may be unable to deal with attributes f you have trouble with an exported DXF with this option enabled disable this option and try again Text Size Left Smaller Right Bigger 1 00 Layer Names f Use Feature Description for Layer Name Use Feature Display Label for Layer Name Use Feature Source Filename for Layer Name Generate Projection PRI File Create 3D Features Using Loaded Hevation Data Generate ECEF Coordinates Advanced Users Onhy Generate Zero Width Lines Cancel Appli Help The DWG Version section allows you to select which DWG version to create
187. Orientation This setting controls whether the target page uses landscape or portrait orientation Fill Page If checked your specified export bounds will be expanded to fill the entire page if necessary If you do not check this option only your exact export bounds will be exported with the rest of the page remaining blank Resolution DPI This setting controls the resolution dots per inch of your output Larger values result in more detail being stored in the created PDF file although the resulting file will also be larger Border Style Pressing this button brings up a dialog allowing you to setup the style of the border line drawn around your data Table of Contents 27 Global Mapper User s Manual Export to Fixed Scale If you choose the option to export to a particular scale the generated PDF file will have the specified scale The specified export bounds will be adjusted around the selected center point to have the scale specified e Margins This section allows you to setup the size of the white margins around your data e Header Allows you to specify a header text to draw in the top margin of the output file e Footer Allows you to specify a footer text to draw in the bottom margin of the output file e Layer Naming This section controls how layers in the created PDF will be named You can access PDF layers in the Acrobat Reader Use Feature Type Description as Layer Name The feature type name description
188. Overturned Small Red Geology Foliation Closed Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Closed Medium Black Geology Foliation Closed Medium Green Geology Foliation Closed Medium Red Geology Foliation Closed Small Aqua Bn DoEoeon BOSD DEERE Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 339 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Foliation Closed Small Black Geology Foliation Closed Small Green Geology Foliation Closed Small Red Geology Foliation Open Medium Aqua Geology Foliation Open Medium Black Geology Foliation Open Medium Green Geology Foliation Open Medium Red Geology Foliation Open Small Aqua Geology Foliation Open Small Black Geology Foliation Open Small Green Geology Foliation Open Small Red PPE PPP PP ery DOCCOGOGOGOCOD Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 340 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Black Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Green Geology Horizontal Bedding Medium Red Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Aqua Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Black Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Green Geology Horizontal Bedding Small Red Geology Joint Closed Medium Aqua Geology Joint Closed Medium Black
189. P zoom bit level that a feature should appear at For example if you use the maximum Map Detail setting with no template file you will get a map with populated zoom levels at 24 22 and 20 bits If you wanted a feature to show up in just the lower 2 zoom levels of that map the 24 and 22 bit resolution layers you could add a MP_BIT_LEVEL attribute with a value of 22 to your feature or the default attribute list for that type then that feature would get a Levels 2 value written to the exported MP file If your map had less detail say zoom levels of 21 19 and 17 bits the same feature would only show up in the most detailed 21 bit layer as features are always present in at least one layer of the map If you want a feature to always show up at all zoom levels in your map regardless of what zoom levels are present just add a MP_BIT_LEVEL attribute with a value of 1 The Template File sections allows you to select a file to use as a template for the new MP file The new file with use all of the settings from the selected template file except for the map ID unless you check the Keep Image ID from Template MP File option and if you provide a map name the map name This includes the Dictionary setting and all levels settings This provides a way for advanced users to set up one MP file exactly how they want and then export new maps with the same settings You can also check the Copy Entire Contents of Template File option to have everything from the tem
190. PExport_RgnLimit with your desired value Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export SEGP1 Command The Export SEGP1 command allows the user to export any loaded 3D line and point vector data sets to a SEGP1 format file When selected the command displays the SEGP Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Shapefile Command The Export Shapefile command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to ESRI Shapefile format files When selected the command displays the Shapefile Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a File Selection panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 74 Global Mapper User s Manual Shapefile Export Options File Selection Gridding Export Bounds Export Areas C Temp expart test blue_sor Select Export Points File Select The shapefile format does not allow the mixing of different entitiy types i e points lines and areas within a single shape file Thus you need to sp
191. R File Create 3D Features Using Loaded Hevation Data Generate ECEF Coordinates Advanced Users Onhy Generate Zero Width Lines Some software such as MicroStation does not properly deal with DXF line features having a non zero thickness i e they create duplicate lines Enable this option if you encounter this problem The Display Labels section allows you to control if you want feature display labels included in the DXF files and if so whether you want them represented as TEXT entities in their own layer called FEATURE LABEL or as DXF attributes The default is to have them included as attributes associated with each feature As some software packages cannot handle attributes in DXF files you may have to switch to a different option with the associated loss of information to get your exported DXF files to work with some software packages If you would like line features to have rotated labels running along the line associated with them you have to use the option to Include Display Labels as Separate Text Layer The Layer Names section allows you to control how the layer names used in the exported DXF file are generated You can choose to use the feature description feature display label or feature source filename as the layer name in the exported file If you choose to use the display label as the layer name any features that do not have a display label will use the feature description as the layer name in the exported file
192. R FORMAT JPG to use JPG format files e KML_SUPER_OVERLAY KML only specifies that the data should be automatically gridded into super overlays to allow displaying large quantities of data in Google Earth Use KML SUPER _OVERLAY YES to enable this behavior e KML_TILE_SIZE KML only if data is being automatically gridded into super overlays this specifies the size of tiles to use for gridding The default tile size is 1024 To change this for example to 512x512 use KML_TILE_SIZE 512 e KML_ZOOM_SCALE_FACTOR KML only if data is being automatically gridded into super overlays this specifies the multiplier to use when creating zoomed out pyramid layers The default value of 2 makes each successive zoom level 1 2 the resolution of the previous one until everything Table of Contents 268 Global Mapper User s Manual fits in a single tile To change this to making each layer 1 3rd the resolution of the previous one use KML_ZOOM_SCALE_FACTOR 3 e ADD_OVERVIEW_LAYERS ERDAS only specifies that overview pyramid layers should be generated for the export Use ADD_OVERVIEW_LAYERS YES to enable e BLOCK_SIZE ERDAS only specifies the block size to use for the export The default is BLOCK_SIZE 64 e COMPRESS_OUTPUT ERDAS only specifies whether or not the exported file should be compress The default is COMPRESS_OUTPUT YES e DISABLE_BIGTIFF GEOTIFF only use to disable the automatic creation of BigTIFF format files for very
193. REA TYPES FILL PATTERNS AND BORDER STYLES This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Area Styles Area Types Area Fill Patterns Area Border Styles Area Styles Using the Area Styles panel users can configure how areas of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper Area fill border style and color can be modified on a type by type basis The Show Labels for Areas of This Type option allows users to turn area labels off on a type by type basis Area Types are shown in the Global Mapper Area Types table Tables showing the Global Mapper Fill Patterns and Border Styles follow the Area Types table Global Mapper recognizes five field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of an Area Type They are GM_TYPEH BORDER_COLOR BORDER_WIDTH BORDER_STYLE FILL COLOR FILL STYLE The FILL_ALPHA field attribute is recognized by Global Mapper to set an Area Type s transparency Values for FILL_ALPHA range from 0 Transparent to 255 Opaque To determine the transparency value setting simply multiply the percentage by 255 and round off to the nearest integer e g 75 transparency 0 75 x 255 191 25 use 191 As an example the default field attributes for the Anchorage Area Type are GM_TYPE Anchorage Area BORDER_COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER_WIDTH 1 BORDER_STYLE Comb Right Only PILE COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill To change the type s trans
194. RIDIAN 93 00000000 ORIGIN LATITUDE 0 00000000 FALSE EASTING m 500000 FALSE NORTHING im 0 Use the Projection pull down menu to select the projection you wish to view the currently loaded data in The Geographic projection is really the absence of a projection It is just a linear mapping of latitude longitude to a grid For a good description of most of the other supported projection systems and a discussion of the tradeoffs in using various projections we suggest visiting http www progonos com furuti MapProj Normal TOC cartTOC html The Datum pull down is used to select the datum to use in association with the projection The most commonly used datums are WGS84 NAD27 and NAD83 If you find that the datum that you need is not available you can use the Add Datum button to add your datum When that button is pressed the Create New Datum dialog pictured below is shown allowing you to enter the parameters for either a 3 parameter Molodensky datum transformation or a 7 parameter Bursa Wolfe datum transformation or even specify a transformation defined by a text file with a list of control points If you choose the Custom Shift Based on Control Point File option the text file that you select should have a series of lines defining the mapping from a lat lon coordinate in the new datum and the corresponding lat lon value in WGS84 This is a very easy way to define a datum if you don t know any transformation parameters but do know
195. River gt 250 km Coordinate Line Pretix Assign Loaded Point Features the Classification None Coordinates appear immediately at the start 7 ol any lines in the text file that they appear in Spot Sounding Zd All coordinate lines begin with the test string f specified below For example some ASCII formats may begin a coordinate line with ey Column headers in first row of file points w KT only Treat 3rd coordinate value as elevation i Break Line Area Features on Change in Field 3 Rows to Skip at Start of File o W Create Areas from Closed Lines Select Coordinate OffsetScale W Include attributes from lines with coordinate data The Import Type section allows the user to specify how they want the data in the file to be treated The different import types are defined as follows e Point Only All lines from the file which are determined to contain coordinate data will result in a single point feature to be generated o Point Line and Area Features Any string of two or more consecutive lines with coordinate data will result in a line or area feature All isolated coordinate lines will result in a point feature e Elevation Grid All lines from the file which are determined to contain 3D coordinate data will be use generated a triangulated terrain which is then gridded to create a elevation grid This grid has all the capabilities of an imported DEM including contour generation line of sight and view
196. S connection as well as the current GPS location in both lat lon and the current global coordinate sytem speed heading and accuracy estimate Table of Contents 233 Global Mapper User s Manual GPS Information Eg M Connection Status 3D Fix Current Location Lat Lon 39 37 9 2280 N 104 54 13 7100 W Global System 104 9038083333 39 6192300000 Accuracy EFH 0 0 m POOP 1 90 Copy Location to Clipboard Hum Sats Used 10 r Current Elevation 1737 3 m 5699 792 ft Current Speed gt Curent Heading 0 0 kph 222 Manage GPS Vessels The Manage GPS Vessels command will display the Manage GPS Devices dialog pictured below This dialog displays a list of all GPS devices that are currently being tracked and provides the ability to modify several settings related to the GPS devices such as device icon and track style allowed boundary etc This dialog can be considered the central command center for fleet management operations when tracking multiple GPS devices through a compatible receiver such as the RavTrack GPS Transponders from RaveonTech Table of Contents 234 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper v10 01 REGISTERED File Edit view Tools Search GPS Help J alala R omela dn g atesSheser E dal M S O O T GPS Devices Name Group El Main Connected GPS Device K Default Group 0 0 mph cha
197. Screen Location e Unload All Command e Create New Map Catalog Command e Find Data Online Command e Download Online Imagery Topo Terrain Maps e Load Workspace Command e Save Workspace Command e Save Workspace As Command e Run Script Command e Capture Screen Contents to Image Command e Export Submenu Export Global Mapper Package File Command Export PDF File Command Export Gridded Elevation Data 0 Export Arc ASCH Grid Command 0 Export BIL BIP BSO Command 0 Export BT Binary Terrain Command 0 Export DEM Command 0 Export DTED Command 0 Export DXF 3D Face File Command 0 Export DXF Mesh Command 0 Export DXF Point File Command 0 Export Erdas Imagine Command 0 Export ERS ERMapper Grid Command 0 Export Float Grid Command Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual 0 Export Geosoft Grid Command 0 Export GeoTIFF Command Export Global Mapper Grid Command Export Gravsoft Grid Command 0 Export HF2 HFZ Command 0 Export Idrisi Command 0 Export JPEG2000 Elevation Command 0 Export Lidar LAS Command 0 Export Lidar LAZ Compressed LAS Command Export Leveller Heightfield Command Export Optimi Terrain Command 0 Export PGM Grayscale Grid Command 0 Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command 0 Export RAW Command 0 Export RockWorks Grid Command 0 Export SRTM Command 0 Export STL Command Export Surfer Grid ASCII Format Command 0 Export Surfer Grid Binary v6 Format Command Export Surfer Grid Binary v7 Format Command 0 Expor
198. Styles Tab Point Styles Tab Projection Tab e Raster Data Options Display Tab Color Contrast Adjustment Tab Cropping Tab Band Setup Tab Palette Tab Feathering Tab Color Grade Tab e Elevation Data Options Display Tab Alter Elevation Values Tab Feathering Tab Vector Data Options Table of Contents 152 Global Mapper User s Manual Selecting the Options button while a vector i e SHP DXF E00 etc overlay is selected displays the Vector Options dialog pictured below Feature Types Labels Elevations Tab Vector Options Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Projection Feature Types Labels Hevations m Name Features Using Atribute Value C Do Not Use an Attribute Value for Name f Use Selected Attribute Value for Name PLACE L C Use Multiple Attributes for Name C Use Custom Formatting String for Name Keep Orginal Label if Non Empty Get Hevations Fan Attribute Value Default Hevation Units for Unspecified Hevation Values 4 METERS z Classify Unclassified Area Features As Unknown Area Type Classify Unclassified Line Features As Unknown Line Type Classify Unclassified Point Features As Unknown Point Feature The Feature Types Labels Elevations tab provides the ability to specify which attribute field s Gf any to display as the name of features loaded from the vector file You can choose from the following options e Don
199. TIVE crop the collar to a specified set of bounds specified in the native projection system and datum of the layer The bounds should be specified using the CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS parameter PIXELS crop a given number of pixels off of each side of the layer The number of pixels to remove from each side should be specified using the CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS parameter Table of Contents 287 Global Mapper User s Manual SNAP_DEGREES crop the collar by snapping each edge to a specified degree boundary specified in arc degrees in the native datum of the layer The bounds should be specified using the CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS parameter For example to crop the west and east edges to a half degree boundary and the north and south edges to a one degree boundary use the following CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS 0 5 1 0 0 5 1 0 POLY crop to a polygon provided with the CLIP_COLLAR_POLY parameter e CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS raster only specifies the bounds of the collar to be clipped off when the CLIP_COLLAR parameter is enabled The coordinates should be specified in arc degrees native layer coordinates or pixel counts as a comma delimited list going west south east north For example CLIP_COLLAR_BOUNDS 34 25 109 0 34 375 108 875 e CLIP_COLLAR_POLY raster only specifies the name of the previously defined shape with the DEFINE SHAPE command to crop the layer to when the CLIP_COLLAR POLY parameter is used The coordinates in the shape must have been defined in t
200. The basic format of degree fields when this option is checked is DD MMSS Example COGO Input N 23vl4e12 W340 S O45 Lere6 E 230 The first character of a COGO input string must be either the character N or S to indicate whether the bearing is relative to the north or south directions After another space the angle begins The angle can be in any angle specification that Global Mapper supports including degrees degrees minutes or degrees minutes seconds A space follows the angle and is then followed by either the E or W characters A space separates the bearing from the distance which should be in appropriate linear units For those unfamiliar with the notation for bearings Picture yourself in the center of a circle The first hemispere notation tells you whether you should face north or south Then you read the angle and either turn that many degrees to the east or west depending on the second hemisphere notation Finally you move distance units in that direction to get to the next station Creating New Point Features After selecting the Create New Point Feature popup menu option you can proceed place the point feature by left clicking at the desired location of the point You can cancel creation of the new point at any time by pressing the Escape key You can also use the Create New Point Feature at Specified Position option to create a new point feature at a manually specified location When you select this option a dialog
201. U ore 955 4321867 882 380232 064 ABZ LOO h 2082 DOUG 2519 4321888 450 330262 116 4321888 450 0 LOQDOQOOE 34 245 3802622118 A3L05 39 3024 S80 257495 A 3205 90 034 380254 024 AS LOS S03 2 91 3302 62 4118 A3209603 013 Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export ZMap XYSeglId File Command Table of Contents 80 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export ZMap XYSegId File command allows the user to export loaded line and area features to a ZMap text format file for use with applications like Landmark Graphics When selected the command displays the ZMap XYSegld Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export This format costs of one line per each input coordinate with the X coordinate followed by the Y coordinate optionally with a Z if available followed by the feature index in the file The following is short sample of an output file with a couple of features 924600 21 LOD DS Z 50 20 de IL OO T OL 10590840 0 Es 91507350 1038697670 i ILAT 40 LOS TO2Z4S lt 0 i oles ea ed LOST SAS oO Ls 2 kOe 10 56 9 5 3 7 0 Fa O39 9 Chas DOS G6 13 6 20 Lis ISO 5244S 103738670 Jl EREE 103864990 Li 934460 2 TOUS S255 20 es 924 098 43 LOS94Z 21 0 dle PO ao LO9932Z59 20 ile 884645 6 Oe esl Zs So 104341 1034934370 Li SIIL LR 10540849 0 a 90056
202. UAL_CENTER rotates each feature about the center of the feature independently Manually specified location you can manually specify the X and Y coordinates to rotate about in the projection of the layer being rotated like ROTATE_ABOUT 45000 0 1356000 0 e CONNECT_ISLANDS specifies that any matching area features with islands should have the islands connected to the outer area boundary to form a single vertex list This is useful if you need to export the data for use in software that doesn t support area features with holes islands in them Use CONNECT_ISLANDS YES to enable e SIMPLIFICATION specifies a simplification threshold to use to simplify reduce the matching area and line features This specifies how far off a straight line in the units of the current projection that a point has to be before it is kept e CONVERT_AREAS_TO_LINES specifies that any matching area features will have new line features created from them Use CONVERT_AREAS_TO_LINES YES to enable this functionality e INSERT_VERTICES_AT_INTERSECTIONS specifies that new vertices will be inserted at the intersection of any matching line features Use INSERT_VERTICES_AT_INTERSECTIONS YES to enable this functionality e SPLIT_AT_INTERSECTIONS specifies that any matching line features that share an interior vertex will be split at that vertex into new lines Use SPLIT_AT_INTERSECTIONS YES to enable this functionality Use this in conjunction with the INSERT_VERTICES_AT
203. VERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist EXPORT_PDF The EXPORT_PDF command exports all currently loaded data to a PDF file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e DPI specifies the DPI that the file is generated at e EXPORT_SCALE specifies the scale to do the export at For example to export at 1 50 000 scale use EXPORT_SCALE 50000 e PDF_PAGE_SIZE specifies the name of the paper size to use This should match one of the entries on the PDF export dialog like landscape portrait AO etc e PDF_PAGE_ORIENTATION specifies the page orientation to use for the generated PDF file The following values are supported AUTO Automatically determine whether to use portrait or landscape mode based on export bounds aspect ratio PORTRAIT LANDSCAPE e PDF_MARGINS specifies the margins to use in inches The value should be a comma delimited list of numbers for the left top right and bottom margins For example PDF_MARGINS 0 5 1 0 0 5 1 25 would result in a 0 5 inch margin for the left and right 1 0 inch for the top and 1 25 inches for the bottom e PDF_HEADERR specifies the header to use e PDF_FOOTER specifies the footer to use e PDF_COMBINE_RASTERS specifies whether multiple raster layers should be combined into a single layer or kept separate Use PDF_COMBINE_RASTERS YES to combine them or PDF_COMBINE_RASTER_LAYERS NO to keep sepa
204. _INTERSECTIONS option to insert vertices at intersections and then split the lines there e PTS_AT_INTERSECTIONS specifies that new point features will be created wherever two or more matching line features touch Use PTS_AT_INTERSECTIONS YES to enable e UNIQUE_ID_BASE specifies a number to start assigning unique IDs to features that match the query For example using UNIQUE_ID_BASE 1 would assign ID attributes to each matching feature starting at 1 and increasing sequentially i e 1 2 3 etc For an example of how to use the EDIT_VECTOR command see the sample at the bottom of this document EMBED_SCRIPT The EMBED_SCRIPT command allows you to call another script from within a script This can be useful in many situations For example if you have a common set of data files that you want to load for each script operation you could simply create a script that loaded those files then embed that script within your other scripts The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to script file to run e SKIP_UNLOAD_ALL specifies whether or not the first UNLOAD_ALL command in the script file being run should be skipped This is useful for embedding workspace files which typically unload everything to start with Use SKIP_UNLOAD_ALL YES to skip the first UNLOAD_ALL command Table of Contents 251 Global Mapper User s Manual EXPORT_ELEVATION The EXPORT_ELEVATION command exports all currently loaded el
205. _PACKAGE The EXPORT_PACKAGE command exports all currently loaded raster vector and elevation data to a Global Mapper Package GMP file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e SIMPLIFICATION specifies the simplification threshold to use when exporting the vector features This specifies how far off a straight line in the units of the current projection that a point has to be before it is kept Generally you should not specify a simplification value as the default just exports all vertices as they are This is an option for advanced users only e SINGLE_PRECISION specifies that vector coordinates should be written out as 4 byte single precision floating point numbers rather than the default 8 byte double precision floating point numbers Use SINGLE_PRECISION YES to enable single precision export which will result in smaller files e DISCARD_ATTRIBUTES specifies that the list of attribute value pairs for each vector feature should not be written out Use DISCARD_ATTRIBUTES YES to enable this behavior e VECTOR_ONLY specifies that only vector layers should be exported to the package file Use VECTOR _ONLY YES to enable e SHAPE_TYPE specifies the vector object type s area line or point to export You can specify a comma delimited list of the following ike SHAPE _TYPE AREAS LINES or if you don t Table of Contents 257 Global Mapper User s Manual provide a v
206. _TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE_MAX specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given maximum size in pixels samples This works by calculating the number of rows and columns needed to hold cells of the given pixel dimensions then shrinking those pixel dimensions down so that the tiles exactly cover the exported bounds The value should be specified as cell pixel width cell pixel height For example if you want to tile the export into cells that are at most 800 pixels wide by 600 pixels tall you would use GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE_MAX 800 600 Table of Contents 265 Global Mapper User s Manual e GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS 8 4 GRID_OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID_TYPE_ parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE specifies that the size of the grid cells should be maintained over sample spacing This means that if you specify a grid of
207. a e FNAME_W_DIR full path and filename of current file value is C data my_file dem e YFNAME filename of current file value is my_file dem e YFNAME_WO_EXT filename of current file without extension value is my_file e PARENT_DIR name of parent directory of file value is data For a sample of the DIR_LOOP_START command in use see the example at the bottom of this reference The following parameters are used by the DIR_LOOP_START command Table of Contents 247 Global Mapper User s Manual e DIRECTORY specifies the directory to search for files in If you leave this blank the operation will be based in the current folder e FILENAME_MASKS space separated list of filename masks to import If no value is provided then all files will be used If you provide as the mask you will enter the loop once for each folder that is matched allowing you to perform one operation per folder on an enter directory tree e RECURSE_DIR specifies whether the loop operation will search subdirectories of the specified directory as well as the current one Use RECURSE_DIR YES to enable The default value is to NOT search subdirectories EDIT_MAP_CATALOG The EDIT_MAP_CATALOG command allows you to work with map catalogs managed collections of map files including create new map catalogs adding maps to existing map catalogs and removing maps from existing map catatalogs The following parameters are suppor
208. a then trace the path to draw using your mouse while keeping the left button pressed To finish the feature simply release the left button You can cancel creation of the new feature at any time by pressing the Escape key or just releasing the left button then pressing Cancel on the dialog that appears If you are using a digitizing table just select this mode then press down the pen to start trace the path then release it to end If your drawn path is nearly closed you will be asked whether to create a closed area feature from the path or just keep it as a line feature Once you ve completed drawing the line the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the line The length of the line feature will be added as a default attribute The units for the length measurement can be modified on the General tab of the Configuration dialog See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the line the Digitizer Tool will remain in the line creation mode so you can simply start left clicking to draw another line or right click to choose a different mode You can also create new line features from selected area features by selecting one or more areas then right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation Options gt Create New Line Feature s from Selected Area Feature s menu command This will creat
209. able creating potentially very large files or the scale the most closely matches the current display scale on the screen The Combine Compatible Vector Layers into a Single Layer option causes all vector features with the same native projection to be combined into a single layer within the package file rather than maintaining their original layer structure The Embed Images Associated with Picture Points option causes any images associated with a vector feature like points from an EXIF JPEG file to be embedded in the GMP file for easy use on other systems The Simplification panel allows the user to set up the threshold at which points that don t contribute much to the shape of the vector line and area features being exported are removed in order to generate features with less vertices By default all vertices will be kept but the user can move the slider to the right to get rid of relatively insignificant vertices and realize significant space spacings at the cost of some fidelity The Gridding panel allows the user to split up the data into regularly spaced tiles on export if desired rather than just exporting a single file The Export Bounds panel allows the user to select what portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able capture the screen to an image file Export PDF GeoPDF File Command The Export PDF File command allows the user to export any or all of the loaded data to a Geo e
210. ables snapping on the Vector Display tab of the Configuration dialog ADVANCED USERS You can customize the pixel radius used when looking for a location on existing features to snap by creating editing the DWORD registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper SnapToPixelRadius The default value is 10 pixels Just create that registry key and provide the distance in pixels to search from the cursor location for a location to snap to Snapping Vertically Horizontally When Drawing When drawing new area or line features or moving existing features you can use the CTRL and SHIFT keys to cause the next vertex to be snapped vertically or horizontally relative to the last vertex or moved vertically or horiztonally compared to the features current location Hold down the CTRL key to snap vertically the SHIFT key to snap horizontally or both the CTRL and SHIFT keys to snap diagonally Un doing Digitization Operations During some operations like drawing new features you can undo your last placed point by pressing Ctrl Z Table of Contents 220 Global Mapper User s Manual Displaying Additional Feature Information Depending on what types of feature are selected and what data is available additional options may appear on the option menu that appears when right clicking These additional options are described below Adding Elevation Values from Terrain to Features If gridded elevation data i e DEMs is loaded and one or more feature
211. ace on the list of values Notes on Bearings When entering data using the Specify Separate Distance and Bearing Values option the bearing values are degrees clockwise from true north so O degrees is north 90 degrees is east etc For the Specify Using Quadrant Bearing Distance option you specify a quadrant value of 1 to 4 with 1 being the NE quadrant 2 being the SE quadrant 3 being the SW quadrant and 4 being the NW quadrant The bearing values are then east of the NS line for quadrants and 2 and west of the NS line for quadrants 3 and 4 It is also important to remember that any bearing are specified relative to true north unless you check the Use Grid Bearings Rather Than Bearing Relative to True North so if your projection isn t oriented so that straight up is true north most projected systems like UTM are not unless you are right at the projection Table of Contents 206 Global Mapper User s Manual center a line of bearing 0 won t be straight up but will be slightly skewed so that it points at the North Pole A line of bearing 0 will be straight up in projections like Geographic or Mercator where true north is always straight up If you check the DMS degree minute second Values Specified in Decimal Degrees option you can enter your DM degree minute or DMS degree minute second values as decimal degrees For example with this option checked a value of 40 3020 is interpreted as 40 degrees 30 minutes and 20 seconds
212. additional offset in meters when rendering a 3D vector feature Table of Contents 175 Global Mapper User s Manual Terrain Analysis Menu The Terrain Analysis Menu offers the following commands e Combine Terrain Layers e Generate Contours Command e Generate Watershed Command e Find Ridge Lines Command e Measure Volume Between Surfaces Command Combine Compare Terrain Layers Command The Combine Compare Terrain Layers command allows the user to generate a new gridded elevation or other gridded value layer by combining and or comparing the elevation values from two other loaded terrain layers When selected the command displays the Combine Terrain Options dialog which allows the user to set up generation of the new terrain layer Once completed the new terrain layer is added to the Overlay Control Center and displayed Table of Contents 176 Global Mapper User s Manual Combine Terrain Options Combine Terain Layers Options Export Bounds Description Combined Hevation Grid Operation Subtraction Difference Signed Select First Hevation Layer to Combine lt ASTGTM N41E022 dem tif SILC TIFF lt ASTGTM_N41E022 numtif gt SILC TIFF Select Hevation Layer to Combine the First Layer With cASTGTM N4le02 dem tit gt SILC TIFF ASTOTM_NAH EN num t SILC TIFF Vertical Units METERS Sample Spacing Xade 0 000277777777 arc degrees Y as 0 000277777771 arc degrees Always Generate Square Grid Cells f y
213. al You can combine multiple line features into a single line feature by first selecting the line features to combine then selecting the Combine Selected Line Features right click menu option This option will connect any lines that you have selected that join at an endpoint Any lines that are succesfully joined into a new one will be marked as deleted When you select the option you will be allowed to setup options for the combine operation including whether or not the attributes of the lines have to much to be combined if the lines being joined have to fully close and whether or not to create multiple areas if the selected lines don t all form a single path Finding the Intersection of Multiple Area Features You can find the intersection of two area features by selecting both features then right clicking and selecting the Find Intersection of Selected Area Features menu command This operation will create a new area feature from the intersection of the two selected area features You will also be prompted to create new area features from what is left outside of the intersection If you choose this option then the original area features will be marked as deleted once the operation completes successfully Cutting Areas From Adding Islands to Area Features You can cut one area feature shape out of another area shape either adjusting the second areas outer boundary or making the first area feature become an island or hole within the sec
214. al Mapper User s Manual Setup Volume Calculation Parameters Volume Calculation Type r Base Height for Volume Calculations f Calculate Cut and Fill Volumes Along Line Feature Specities the base henght s for the volume calculations Any areas higher than this height will be used as the cut volume and any areas below this height will be used as Coridor Diameter around Line Meters the HIU volume PAN IF you select the above ground option for volume calculations along a line feature Calculate Cut and Fill Volumes Within Area Feature the base height used will be relative to ground level at each vertes in the line with the elevations in between vertices being aes Sample Spacing The sample spacing controls the Internal at which eles ation samples SES ree OL aati ne Sena aetrirg a etn Ee eg eal meter nn nen ne i ey rh Pa oo are examined to determine the volumes Smaller values result in more e e isons Sees accurate but more slowly calculated volumes ere i oe i R meter i to a300 z Y as 1 z meee E al Meters GR IF pou wish to change the ground units that the spacing i specified in atep Size 5 you need to change the current projection by going to Contig Projection Volume Units Sabie feet f Specify the Base Height to use at Each Vertex 1 W Create New Line Area Feature with Volume Attributes 2 Um ee 3 m 4 Om On the Setup Volume Calculate Param
215. al Mapper script via a CreateProcess call and the Global Mapper process is not returning when the script completes or if you need a particular return code provided The following parameters are supported by this command e RETURN_CODE specifies the numeric return code to use If not provided 0 is returned if the script did not encounter any errors or 1 if there were errors encountered GENERATE_CONTOURS The GENERATE_CONTOURS command allows for the generation of contour lines isolines of equal elevation from any or all currently loaded elevation data The following parameters are supported by the command e ELEV_UNITS specify elevation units to use in export FEET export in US feet e METERS export in meters e INTERVAL specifies the contour interval to use This must be a whole number greater than 0 The units are specified with the ELEV_UNITS parameter described above If you wanted to generate a Table of Contents 276 Global Mapper User s Manual contour file with an interval of 20 feet you would use INTERV AL 20 ELEV_UNITS FEET in the parameter list If no interval is provided a default one is guessed based on the elevation range of the loaded elevation data MIN_ELEV minimum elevation to consider for contours Must be specified in conjunction with MAX_ELEV in order to restrict the range of contour generation to anything other than the full range of loaded elevation values MAX_ELEV maximum elevation to consider for conto
216. alue at all the default of all types will be exported e AREAS export area features LINES export line features POINTS export point features KEEP_ALL_STYLES specifies that the full style of each feature should be written to the package file even if it uses the current default for the type Use KEEP_ALL_STYLES YES to enable this This is useful if you want features to look exactly the same on all systems and not be affected by changes to the default styling for types KEEP_NATIVE_ PROJECTION specifies that each layer should be exported in the native projection of the layer rather than reprojected to the current projection Use KEEP_NATIVE_PROJECTION YES to enable this behavior COMBINE_VECTOR_LAYERS specifies that all vector data should be combined into a single layer within the package file Use COMBINE_VECTOR_LAYERS YES to enable this behavior GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a
217. alue which is the minimum spatial resolution of all loaded data Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to use a grid with a 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the contour bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the contour bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the contour bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost
218. ameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e TYPE type of vector file we re exporting to ANUDEM_CONTOUR export lines with elevation to an AnuDEM contour gen format file e ARC_UNGENERATE export line and area features to an Arc Ungenerate format file ARC_UNGENERATE_ POINTS export point features to an Arc Ungenerate format file CDF export to a Geographix CDF format file CSV export point features to a CSV format file DELORME_DRAWING export features to a DeLorme drawing text file DELORME_TRACK export line features to a DeLorme track text file DELORME_WAYPOINT export point features to a DeLorme waypoint text file DGN export to a DGN V8 file DLGO export to a native format USGS DLG O file DWG export to an AutoCAD DWG format file Table of Contents 269 Global Mapper User s Manual DXF export to an AutoCAD DXF format file GARMIN_TRK exports lines to a Garmin TRK PCX5 format file GARMIN_WPT exports names points to a Garmin WPT PCX5 format file GEOJSON exports area line and point features to a GeoJSON JavaScript Object Notation file GPX exports line and point features to a GPX GPS eXchange Format file INROADS exports to the InRoads ASCII format KML export to a KML or KMZ format file LANDMARK_GRAPHICS export to a Landmark Graphics format file LIDAR_LAS export to a Lidar LAS file LOWRANCE_USR
219. an attribute named MP_TYPE with the type value to use as the attribute value If the value that you provide is for a marine type you should also provide an attribute with a name of MARINE and a value of Y You can also override the default type mapping for built in types by adding a default attribute list for the type on the Styles tab of the Configuration dialog Just add a MP_TYPE attribute to the default attribute list for a type to manually specify what type to use in exported MP files for a given Global Mapper type Table of Contents 73 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper will automatically convert exported data to the appropriate projection and datum for export so that the Polish MP file will be correctly positioned By default this will be lat lon degrees with the WGS84 datum although if you use a template file that specified a different recognized datum Global Mapper will instead convert to that datum automatically In any case Global Mapper will always automatically do the right thing Advanced Users If you aren t use a template to configure your export you can customize the values used for several settings in the header for adding registry keys The following values are supported o TreSize Add a DWORD registry value using regedit at HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper MPExport_TreSize with your desired value e RenLimit Add a DWORD registry value using regedit at HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper M
220. anel pictured below allows the user to configure how areas of a given type will be displayed in Global Mapper The area fill and border style and color can be modified on a type by type basis You can also use the Add Custom Fill Pattern option to provide your own image to use as a fill pattern For transparent or translucent patterns use a transparent PNG format image file when creating the custom fill pattern With the Transparency slider users can make solid filled areas partially see through translucent in order to see data underneath the area In addition the Show Labels for Areas of This Type When Present option allows users to turn area labels off on a type by type basis The New Type button allows the user to create a new area feature type and specify how it should be displayed The Edit Type button allows the user to edit area types that were previously created with the New Type button and the Delete Type button allows the user to remove area types that were previously created with the New Type button With the Attributes button you can specify a set of default attributes and values to use for new features of this type created using the Digitizer Tool If you right click on the list of types a menu will appear allowing you to save and restore your style settings using a Style file This provides an easy way to setup a set of styles to use then restore them at a later date for use with a particular set of data Table of Contents 130
221. ansform Coordinates Based on File you will be prompted to select a control point file describing a transformation from the current coordinate system of the file to some new coordinate locations The file should be a simple comma delimited text file with each line describing a transformation as follows current_x current_y new_x new_y There must be at least 2 transformation lines specified Specify Coordinate Transformation allows you to specify a generic coordinate transformation with an offset scale and rotation about some point The information provided should be in the same coordinate system projection as natively used by the layer s being transformed You can save the coordinate transformation that you define to a gm_xform file If that file is saved alongside a vector file and has the same name i e my_file gm_xform in the same folder as my_file dxf then that transformation will automatically be loaded and applied to the coordinates in the file e Scale Layer Based on Actual Length of Selected Line This option allows you to scale a selected layer based on a user specified length of a selected line feature in that layer This is useful if you know the actual length of a line feature in a vector layer and want to scale the layer so that the line length is correct without caring about where on the earth the layer is placed The line that you know the length of should be selected with either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tool e Create W
222. ar From Image Add Loaded Files Add Onecreen Files Pisau imade Contrast 4 Table of Contents 82 Global Mapper User s Manual The Source Files section displays the list of source files currently selected to be converted Pressing the Add Files button allows the user to select additional files for conversion Pressing the Add Directory allows the user to easily add an entire directory s worth of source files to the to be converted list All directories under the added one can be recursively searched if so desired by answering Yes to the dialog that pops up immediately after selecting the directory Pressing the Add Loaded Files button causes all files loaded into the main Global Mapper view that match that batch convert input type to be added to the list of files to be converted Pressing the Add Onscreen Files button causes all files loaded into the main Global Mapper view that are currently at least partially onscreen and that match the batch convert input type to be added to the list of files to be converted The Directory section allows the user to choose where they would like the newly created output files to be created The Use same directory as file being converted option causes the output file created off of each source file to be created in the same directory as the source file The Specify output directory option allows the user to choose a specific directory to output all of the newly created output files to The File Names sec
223. arameter See the documentation for the GRID_NAMING_COLS parameter above for details on the format GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES NO to disable the prepending of zeroes GRID_NAMING_SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default is an underscore GRID_CREATE_FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder Table of Contents 254 Global Mapper User s Manual e QUAD_NAME USGS_DEM only specifies the quad name to place in the header of the USGS DEM file e FILL_GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being exported will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is on by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off e VERT_EXAG VRML only specifies the vertical exaggeration to use when creating the VRML file Larger values result in a rougher terrain being generated while smaller values result in a smoother terrain A value of 1 0 results in no vertical exaggeration at all i e a nearly true to life representation If you don t specify a value the currently selected vertical exaggeration value on the Vertical Options tab of the C
224. ark aqua thickness 1 0x53 dotted aqua thickness 1 0x54 white thickness 1 0x55 black thickness 2 Table of Contents 68 Global Mapper User s Manual 0x56 blue thickness 2 0x57 dark aqua thickness 2 0x58 dotted aqua thickness 2 0x59 white thickness 2 OxSA black thickness 3 OxSB blue thickness 3 Ox5SC dark aqua thickness 3 0x5D dotted aqua thickness 3 OxSE white thickness 3 When selected the command displays the Lowrance LCM Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Lowrance USR Command The Export Lowrance USR command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Lowrance USR format file for use in Lowrance brand GPS devices When selected the command displays the Lowrance USR Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export MapGen Command The Export MapGen command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a MapGen
225. as a LAYER attribute to the DBF file generated with the SHP file If selected the Add Style Attributes to DBF option specifies that style attributes should be added to the generated DBF file containing information about the drawing style and label font used for each feature If you check this then when you reload your data in Global Mapper but typically not other applications it should maintain its drawing style If selected the Generate Multi Patch Features for Areas option specifies that multi patch features should be generated for area exports rather than normal polygon records This is useful for exporting 3D models such as those you would load from Google SketchUp SKP files WARNING The Shapefile format uses a DBF file for attribute storage which means that any attribute names are limited to 10 characters Any attribute names longer than that will be truncated with a number potentially added on to maintain uniqueness among multiple long attribute names Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Simple ASCII Text File Command The Export Simple ASCII Text File command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets i e areas lines and points to a delimited ASCII text file Each vertex in an area or line and the position of each point will be represented When selected the command displays the ASCI Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consis
226. associate with the shader to allow the user to select it The Elevation Colors section display the elevations and their color values associated with the custom shader Pressing the Change Color and Change Elevation buttons allow the user to change the values associated with the current elevation selected in the Elevation Colors list The Delete Elevation button allows the user to delete the currently selected elevation New elevations can be added by entering the elevation in the currently selected units and pressing the Add button The Evenly Space Elevations Starting at Arbitrary Base Elevation button will allow you to quickly populate the list of elevation values with a series of evenly spaced values starting at some specified elevation You can then assign the colors as desired after that For example you could use this to quickly populate the list with all elevations from 0 meters to 5000 meters with an elevation every 500 meters then modify those as desired The Initialize from Other Shader button will allow you to initialize the list of color elevation pairs to those used by either the Global Shader built into Global Mapper or another user created custom shader This allows users to easily create a slightly modified version of an existing shader if they d like The Initialize from Palette File button allows you to initialize the list of color elevation pairs from a color palette file in any recognized format like a comma delimited file of R G B
227. ast exported file in any session e Use CR LF in World Files TFW Instead of LF if checked this specifies that lines in generated world files will be terminated using a carriage return CR and linefeed LF character as is customary Table of Contents 124 Global Mapper User s Manual on Windows systems rather than just a LF character Use this if your world files are not being recognized by your Windows based applications Automatically Create Backup Copies of Workspace Files if checked this option will cause your current workspace file to automatically be backed up every so often i e after so many vector edits etc These backup copies will be created in the same folder as the workspace file and have the suffix auto_backupX where X is a number from 0 to 9 Lock Active Workspace File to Prevent Sharing if checked this option prevents other users from opening and using the same workspace file that you are using while you have it open This is useful in network environments where you don t want one person s work to accidentally overwrite anothers If you try to open a locked workspace it will automatically be opened in read only mode which will prevent you from overwriting the original workspace file when saving Don t Center on Cursor when Zooming with Mouse Wheel when this option is unchecked or when holding down Ctrl and you rotate the mouse wheel over the map the map will zoom in and out and maintain the location under your
228. at don t already have labels Use LABEL_FIELD_FORCE_OVERWRITE YES to enable LABEL_PREFIX specifies the prefix to prepend to attribute based labels LABEL_SUFFIX specifies the suffix to append to attribute based labels ELEV_FIELD specifies the name of the attribute field to use as the elevation value for the features in the file AREA_TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for area features imported from the file LINE_TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for line features imported from the file POINT_TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper type to use for point features imported from the file LAYER_DESC specifies a description to use for the layer when displaying it in the Overlay Control Center This overrides the default description based on the filename or other information within the file GCP specifies a single ground control point for use in rectifying a file The GCP record consists of 5 comma delimited fields the control point name the pixel X and Y coordinates and the corresponding ground X and Y coordinates A separate GCP parameter and value should be used for each control point used in the rectification As an alternative the GCP_FILENAME parameter see below can be used instead GCP_FILENAME specifies the name of a control point file used to rectify the file being imported GCP_PROJ_NAME specifies the name of the projection that the ground control points are provide
229. ate search results are displayed below double click to zoom to feature Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type Unknown Line Type 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 20020121 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 39999999 39999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 39999999 99999999 939999999 al a1 al G1 al al al G1 ai al al a amp i FECHAALTA FECHABAJA MAPA NAME NUMSYMBOL TTGGSS A Wo Edit Selected Assign New Unique Values Delete Duplicates Help Menu The Help menu offers the following commands e Online Help Command e FAO Command e User s Group Command e Register Global Mapper Command e Check for Updates Command e About Global Mapper Command Online Help Command The Online Help command open the table of contents for the Global Mapper User s Manual in your browser window You must be connected to the Internet in order to access the online manual FAQ Command The FAQ command opens the Frequently Asked Questions FAQ for Global Mapper in your browser window You must be connected to the Internet in order to access the FAQ User s Group Command The User s Group command open the Global Mapper Yahoo User s Group in your browser window You mus
230. ation This provides a handy way to edit elevation layers as you can edit the elevation attribute of the created points or remove bad points then create a new elevation grid from the layer e CALC ATTR Calculate Copy Attribute Value This allows you to create a new attribute value or update an existing one by copying the value of some attribute performing a mathematical operation either between two attributes or an attribute and some number or to append some text string to a value The dialog below is displayed when you select this option to allow you to set it up Setup Attribute Calculation Select Attribute to Assign Calculated Values To ADDR RANGE Calculation Definition Source Attribute FR_ADDR_L Operation Subtract z C Use Fixed Value Use Attribute Value FR_ADDR_R H e JOIN TABLE Join Attribute Table to Data Set This allows you to join a table of attribute values either from a DBF file or from a text file to the attribute table of a selected layer based on a common value of some attribute You will be prompted to select the attribute from the attribute table file to join against a user selected attribute from the selected layers For text files the first line must contain the attribute column names Whenever a match is found the other attributes from the data table are added to the matching record s in the file e DENSITY Create Density Grid This causes a new layer to be created by calculatin
231. ation only specifies the scale value to apply to each elevation value in the layer This allows you to vertically scale a layer to match other layers Default to 1 0 no scaling e MIN_ELEYV elevation only specifies the minimum elevation meters to treat as valid when rendering this layer Any elevations below this value will be treated as invalid and not be drawn or exported e MAX_ELEV elevation only specifies the maximum elevation meters to treat as valid when rendering this layer Any elevations above this value will be treated as invalid and not be drawn or exported e CLAMP_ELEVS elevation only if a MIN_ELEV and or MAX_ELEV value is specified setting this to YES will make any valid elevation values outside of the specified range be clamped to the new range value rather than treated as invalid e VOID_ELEV elevation only specifies the elevation meters to replace any void areas in the layer with If not specified the void areas will be transparent Table of Contents 289 Global Mapper User s Manual e SHADER_NAME elevation only this sets the name of the shader to use when rendering the gridded elevation data for this layer Use this to override use of the shared default shader just for this layer This must be one of the names displayed in the shader drop down in Global Mapper such as Atlas Shader or Global Shader or the name of a custom shader e TRANSLUCENCY elevation and raster only specifies the level
232. atures in addition to contour lines as well as spot elevations at the highest and lowest points in the area over which the contours are generated The smoothing option controls whether or not extra vertices are added along generated line and area features to improve their appearance If you need to generate a huge amount of contour lines over a large area the option to export the contours directly to a package file can be used in addition to the Gridding tab options to export those contours directly to package files to get around memory limitations Note that the contour lines will be generated so that the Table of Contents 179 Global Mapper User s Manual higher elevations are to the left of the contour line The ADVANCED Create Contours Where Elevations Pass Down to Contour Value Rather Than as They Go Down From One option is an advanced option allowing you to change how the contouring works in flat areas If this option is checked you will get contours generated where the terrain surface arrives at a contour height from higher terrain rather than where it departs a contour height for lower terrain So if you have a flat plain exactly at a contour height you will get the contour at the base of the hill where it starts up rather than at the top where it starts down This is most useful when you have water like the ocean and want to get a shoreline contour generated where the terrain leaves the flat surface of the water The Simplification panel
233. ave their own built in iconization such as Tiger Line and USGS DLG files For example this will work for formats like Shapefiles and MapInfo MIF MID files among others The Fix Line Label Position on Longest Segment option controls whether or not the label displayed for line features should move around to always be centered on the longest on screen segment the default unchecked behavior or should remain fixed on the center of the longest segment of the line regardless of whether it is on screen or not Checking this can prevent your line labels from jumping around as you zoom in and out but can result in a lot of unlabeled lines if you zoom in too far The Only Snap to Area and Line Vertices by Default option controls whether or not the snapping behavior of the Digitizer Tool will snap to anywhere on existing area and line vertices the default unchecked behavior or will only snap to vertices on area and line features Holding down the V key when drawing will toggle this behavior The Only Display Area Labels when Completely Inside Area option allows you to easily disable the display of any area label when that label is not completely contained within the area feature that it is labeling This is useful to keep area labels from displaying until you are zoomed in far enough on the area for a label to be appropriate The Don t Add Measure Attributes to New Features option allows you to disable the automatic adding of measure attributes ike
234. ay of custom raster maps although it is likely in the future additional Garmin devices will support this type of display When you select the menu command the Garmin Raster Export Options dialog pictured below is displayed allowing you to configure the export You can control the resolution sample spacing of the export the quality setting for the JPG files that are embedded in the output files for display on the GPS device and several other options You can also control the format used The default is the Google Earth KMZ format which is official supported by Garmin but is limited in terms of how much area you can cover with the data The other option new in v14 is the Garmin JNX format This format allows much larger areas to be covered by using the same method that is used for the Garmin BirdsEye imagery It can also be faster to display than KMX but is more locked down It appears that Garmin devices allow small JNX files to display just fine without a BirdsEye subscription Larger files though require you to have a BirdsEye subscription from Garmin and you must use Garmin s BaseCamp software to pull in the JNX from the device then send it back to the device to unlock it for the device so it can display Prior to doing that you will get an error about having an Invalid JNX file on the device There are some firmware hacks out there to get around this locking mechanism but only use this if you are comfortable voiding your warranty for your
235. ayer was already in a group e Allow Feature Selection from Selected Layer s This option controls whether or not vector features from this layer can be selected using either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools e Select All Features in Selected Layer s with Digitizer Tool This option causes all features in the selected layer s to be selected with the Digitizer Tool e Close All Hidden Layers This option causes all layers that are currently marked as hidden i e have their display checkbox unchecked to be closed e Hide All Offscreen Layers This option causes all layers that are currently completely off of the main map view to be marked as hidden i e have their display checkbox unchecked e Remove All Onscreen Layers from Map Catalog This option appears when you right click on a map catalog layer and allows you to remove all of the maps from the map catalog whose bounds intersect the current screen bounds If multiple maps are onscreen you will be presented with a list of those Table of Contents 148 Global Mapper User s Manual maps so you can control which ones to remove e Hide Layers that Outside Selected Area Feature s This option causes all layers whose bounds don t intersect the currently selected area feature s to be marked as hidden The area s need to be selected with the Digitizer or Feature Info tools e Reorder Maps by Resolution Description Location This option displays a dialog allowing you to choose a metho
236. ays information about the view shed analysis as shown below If you would like to modify the settings used to calculate the view shed and recalculate it using currently loaded data you can right click on the View Shed layer in the Overlay Control Center and select the option to modify the view shed Table of Contents 198 Global Mapper User s Manual dloy3 Pro Global Mapper REGISTERED File View Tools Search Help a4 c i Q Feature Information Name view Shed Analysis 1 x Atlas Shader E Description VIEW SHED TRANSMITTER Li Attributes Value RADIUS 3 0 mi TRANSMITTER_HEIGHT 100 0 m above RECEMER HEIGHT 5 0 m above g PERCENT VISIBLE rode Height 257 613 meters RGBI206 120 000 view Shed Analysis 1 UTM NAD27 381862 3 4321407 5 39 035618 N 9 Image Swipe Tool The Image Swipe command selects the image swipe tool This tool allows you to select a raster image layer to swipe away by holding down the left mouse button and dragging in some direction This allows you to easily compare overlapping layers in an interactive manner You will be prompted to select the raster image layer to swipe away when activating the tool Once active you can change the swipe layer by right clicking and choosing the appropriate option To swipe just hold down the left mouse button and drag in th
237. b The Grid Spacing section allows you to specify whether to allow Global Mapper to automatically determine a good grid spacing to use or to specify a custom grid spacing If the Show All Grid Lines Regardless of Zoom Scale option is checked all grid lines will always be shown rather than the default behavior of only major grid lines being displayed when zoomed way out and the more minor grid lines only showing up as you zoom in If the Extend Grid Lines Beyond Loaded Data Bounds option is checked the generated grid lines will extend a little bit beyond the bounds of the loaded data Otherwise the grid lines will stop at the edge of the smallest bounding box encompassing all loaded data files If grid lines are being displayed the grid lines can also be exported to any of the supported vector export formats The color and style of the grid lines can be modified on the Line Styles tab by modifying the styles for the Grid Line Grid Line Minor and Grid Line Major line types You can also selectively turn off the display of any or all of the grid line types using the Filter options described above The Distance Scale Display options allow for the control of whether or not a distance scale is displayed on the main map when data is loaded The Distance Measure Units selection below it then controls the units that are displayed on the scale bar The Elevation Legend Display Units options allow for the control of whether or not an elevation
238. ble MF map options Copy Entire Contents of Template File g Keep Non Data Sections fike FILE MAP REGIONS etc from Template MF File Keep Image ID from Template MP File Create a ap Eki Save All Attributes Even Non MF Attributes The Map Name and Copyright fields allow to specify the name to use for the final map when created as well as the copyright text to associate with the map Table of Contents 72 Global Mapper User s Manual The Map Detail section allows you to control at what zoom levels the final map will be viewable at More detail results in a map that better represents the shape of the source data but that requires zooming further in to see the map while less detail will result in a rougher map that shows up sooner You should tailer this to the approximate scale of your source data will the lowest detail setting approximating source vector data of around 1 250K scale and the highest detail setting representing 1 24K or better scale data Most built in types already have a default zoom scale at which they will show up in built MP maps this will translate to a Levels value for the feature in the exported MP file based on the levels in the MP file header For custom types and for types that you want to change the default zoom scale for you can add a MP_BIT_LEVEL attribute to the feature itself or to the default attribute list for a feature type The value of this attribute should specify the minimum M
239. boundary e FEATHER_BLEND_POLY_FILE raster only specifies that the polygon boundary to feather blend this layer against should come from the specified file e BAND_SETUP raster only specifies what bands of data from the raster file being loaded should be used to populate the red green and blue color channels when displaying the image This is useful for multi spectral imagery which may have more than 3 color bands The default band setup will be to use the first three bands as follows BAND_SETUP 0 1 2 Note that not all raster formats support specifying a non default band setup e LABEL_FIELD specifies the name of the attribute field to use as the label attribute for the features in the file By default the attribute based labeling will only be applied to those features that don t Table of Contents 290 Global Mapper User s Manual already have a label but if the LABEL_FIELD_FORCE_OVERWRITE attribute is set to YES then all features will have their labels replaced If you want to build the label from multiple attributes separate them with gt lt in the file like RD_PREFIX gt lt RD_NAME gt lt RD_SUFFIX LABEL_CUSTOM_DEF specifies a custom free form string describing how to form the display labels for this layer This can include embedded attribute values as 7ATTR_NAME LABEL_FIELD_FORCE_OVERWRITE specifies that the LABEL_FIELD or LABEL_CUSTOM_DEF attribute value should be applied to all feature labels not just those th
240. by the analysis for display on the map The Transmitter Elevation section allows the user to specify the height of the transmitter that the view shed analysis will be simulating Table of Contents 196 Global Mapper User s Manual The Receiver Elevation section allows the user to specify the minimum height above the ground or sea level from which the transmitter must be visible for the point to be considered visible Most of the time you ll want to specify an elevation above ground but specifying an elevation above sea level can be useful for aviation purposes Optionally you can also specify that the receiver elevation should be calculated based on an elevation angle relative to the horizon from the transmitter This is useful if you have something like a radar dish that points up at some angle and you want to see where the signal can be seen Finally you can also specify a transmission angle range for a beam transmitted from the transmitter Then the view shed will depict where that beam would hit the terrain surface or some user specified distance above the surface The Select Elevation Layer s to Base Transmitter Receiver Heights On button displays a dialog allowing you to select which of the loaded elevation layers you want to base ground relative transmitter and receiver heights on The default is to use all loaded layers but if you have a situation where you have a ground level data set loaded and perhaps another set with heights of
241. cale variables wherever you want as well Use x for X Soy for Y and 7 for Z All 3 must be present For example the following would work http fomdemo keyhole com query request ImageryMapsax ay yar Voz Select Image File Type png Max Zoom Level Level 18 0 60 meters pixe Native Projection of Source Default Web Mercator Y Lat Lon Bounding Box of Entire Data Set WGS8 4 North a0 West 180 South 30 You can also use the Delete Cached Files button to remove any locally cached files from any particular type of data sources This is useful if the online data may have changed or if you have downloaded corrupt files somehow The Add Sources From File button allows you to add new WMS sources from an external text file This provides an easy way to share your list of WMS sources with other users You can simply provide them with your wms_user_sources txt file from your Application Data folder see the Help gt About dialog for the location of this folder and they can load that file with this button to add their sources to your source list The Load ECW from Web button allows the user to open an ER Mapper Compressed Wavelet ECW image file directly from an Image Web Server URL using the ECWP protocol While these files may be terabytes in actual size only the portion needed for the current display window is downloaded allowing for the browsing of extremely large data sets Selecting the Load ECW from
242. cally be determined useful when looping e HIDDEN set to YES to cause this overlay to be hidden from view after it is loaded The default is to show the overlay e LOAD_FLAGS contains flags for any import options that you were prompted for when loading the file such as if you have a tif file that you were prompted to select as elevation or raster Also things like the coverages and tile sets for VPF layers To see how to set these if you are writing a script load a file with the settings that you want in the main user interface and then save a workspace then examine the IMPORT command in the gmw file for that file and see how the LOAD_FLAGS were set e SAMPLING_METHOD elevation and raster only specifies the sampling method to use when resampling this layer The following values are supported NEAREST_NEIGHBOR use the nearest neighbor sampling method BILINEAR use bilinear interpolation BICUBIC use bicubic interpolation BOX_2X2 use a 2x2 box average BOX_3X3 use a 3x3 box average BOX_4X4 use a 4x4 box average BOX_5X5 use a 5x5 box average BOX_6X6 use a 6x6 box average Table of Contents 286 Global Mapper User s Manual BOX_7X7 use a 7x7 box average BOX_8X8 use a 8x8 box average BOX_9X9 use a 9x9 box average MAX_2X2 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 2x2 box e MAX_3X3 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 3x3 box MAX_4X4 terrain layers onl
243. can mark the current location as a waypoint You can also choose to record a bread crumb trail or tracklog of where you have gone Below is a sample screen capture of what Global Mapper looks like when tracking a GPS device over loaded data In the sample 30 m SDTS DEM data is loaded as a backdrop with Tiger 2002 data loaded on top You can see the GPS vessel location and the tracklog of where the vessel has been The GPS Information dialog displays current GPS status information Table of Contents 230 Global Mapper User s Manual a Global Mapper REGISTERED Efe weg oos Search GPS Help S mem Hele Is FO Sj h p K e ashe Ws m di ow j ees TNW Dunc aR ap nGallia rat T N 3D Differential Fix Curent Location Lat Lon 39 00 41 19 H 94 19 00 72 W nter Global Syste 285983 46 4318663 22 Elevatior 368 6 m 1203 3 it Accuracy EPHE 25 ft Current Speed Curert Heading 60 mph 136 a Pe hie Bal I p s bs T i e 0 0 mi 0 5 mi 1 0 mi 15 mi 3 0 mi 35 mi i 2NO LASEL gt Local neighborhood and rural road city street unseparated UTM HAD27 354762 17 4321505 74 39 02 12 74 H 94 1753 Start Tracking GPS The Start Tracking GPS option causes Global Mapper to look for a GPS device attached on the configured serial port see the Setup command and to start displaying the location of the GPS device 1f found in the Global Map
244. comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS specifies that the exp
245. cribed above Averaging is useful if you need a very accurate position for your waypoint Any created waypoint features will be added to the user features layer which appears in the Overlay Control Center The waypoint features can be exported to any of the supported vector export formats Vessel Color The Vessel Color command allows you to control what color the GPS vessel is displayed in Vessel Size The Vessel Size submenu options allow you to control how large you would like the GPS vessel to be on screen Vessel Shape The Vessel Shape submenu options allow you to control the shape of the GPS vessel on screen Setup The Setup command displays the GPS Setup dialog pictured below The GPS Setup dialog allows you to tell Global Mapper what port your GPS device is connected to your computer on and what format the GPS device is communicating in Make sure that you have your GPS device set to NMVEA 0183 v2 x or Garmin mode There is also an Auto Detect option which will cause Global Mapper to try and automatically determine your GPS device s settings when you start tracking the device You can also specify that you would like to read GPS information from a text file containing NMEA 0183 sentences The Data Logging section allows you to setup logging of the incoming GPS information to new text files You can choose to log decoded position information including latitude and longitude elevation depth speed heading and time in addition to
246. d Table of Contents 201 Global Mapper User s Manual Digitizer Tool a The Digitizer Tool allows you to modify existing vector features as well as to create new ones This tool encompasses a lot of functionality from modifying the shape and position of area line and point features to editing the attribution and drawing styles of individual vector features The major activities available with the Digitizer Tool are described below e Creating New Features Creating New Area Features Creating New Line Features Create New Line Features with Distance Bearing COGO Input Creating New Point Features Creating New Range Ring Features Create Buffer Areas a Fixed Distance Around Features Creating Shape e g Circle Rectangle etc Features Create Strike and Dip Geology Related Features Create Regular Grid of Area Features of User Specified Size Orientation Create Points Spaced Along Area and Line Features Creating a Line by Connected Points Create Perpendicular Lines Spaced Along Area and Line Features Creating a Point Offset from a Selected Point e Editing Existing Features Selecting Features Selecting Vertices Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles Deleting Undeleting Features Moving Features Changing the Shape of Area and Line Features Rotating and Scaling Features Combining Area and Line Features Finding the Intersection of Multiple Area Features Cutting Areas From Adding Islands
247. d in This name must have been defined with a prior DEFINE_PROJ command Use this if you want to specify control points in a projection other than what you want to define as the native projection for the file Note that you must also explicitly specify the name projection of the file using either the PROJ TRANSFORM_FILENAME specifies the name of a control point file used to transform the coordinates of the imported file This is different than the GCP_FILENAME in that the file defines a mapping of world coordinates to a new set of world coordinates rather than pixel coordinates to world coordinates Each line should be of the format x_orig y_orig x_new_y_new PROJ_NAME PROJ_EPSG_CODE or PROJ_FILENAME parameters GCP_PROJ_FILENAME specifies the name of the projection prj file that contains the projection definition for the projection that the ground control points are provided in Use this if you want to specify control points in a projection other than what you want to define as the native projection for the file Note that you must also explicitly specify the name projection of the file using either the PROJ PROJ_LNAME PROJ_EPSG_CODE or PROJ_FILENAME parameters GCP_PROJ_EPSG_CODE specifies the EPSG code of the projection that the ground control points are provided in Use this if you want to specify control points in a projection other than what you want to define as the native projection for the file Note that you must also explicitly speci
248. d HTML file You can get one of these from http www google com apis maps signup html lyourkeey here i Tile Image File Format JPG Good for Imagery f PNG Good for Scanned Maps and Vector Data a Default Background Map Layer Google Maps Street Maps i Google Maps Controls to Add Map Type Selector Overview Map I Scale Bar m Transparency How See Through is the Map Transparent i Opaque M Make Image Tiles Transparent PNG Format Only W Save Vector Data f Displayed Skip Existing Tiles Use ta Resume Cancelled Export Skip Empty Tiles Dont Export Blank Tiles ADVANCED Create World Files for Exported Tiles Note Users without a permanent registration key that export Google Maps tiles will get a large diagonal DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export Gravsoft Grid Command The Export Gravsoft Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Gravsoft Grid format file When selected the command displays the Gravsoft Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 40 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered user
249. d by which to reorder the maps in the list This includes sorting alphabetically by resolution or spatially sorting the maps e Move Selected Overlay s Up Down These options allow you to modify the order in which overlays are displayed in the main view The large arrow buttons on the right hand side of the dialog also perform these functions Create Elevation Grid from 3D Vector Data Selecting the Create Elevation Grid from 3D Vector Data option on the popup menu that appears when right clicking on vector layers in the Overlay Control Center displays the Elevation Grid Creation Options dialog pictured below Using this dialog you can configure how you want the elevation grid to be created using the selected vector data as well as what portion of the selected overlays to use when creating the elevation grid You can also use the Gridding tab to specify that your data should be gridded in sections This makes it possible to grid data sets that are too large to grid all at once Table of Contents 149 Global Mapper User s Manual Elevation Gnd Creation Options ii Grd Options Gridding Grid Bounds Description BLUE SPRINGS MO Triangulated Hevation Grid Vertical Units METERS x Grid Spacing f Automatically Determine Optimal Grid Spacing Manually Specify the Grd Spacing to Use X as l meters Y axis fi meters f you wish to change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need to change the curent p
250. d map name are all displayed Buttons are also available allowing you to edit the selected feature s information and drawing style marking the selected feature as deleted as well as to copy all of the feature information as text and the feature itself to the Windows clipboard for pasting elsewhere such as in a text editor or as a new feature in a running session of Global Mapper In addition you can right click on any attribute value to see additional options specific to the selected attribute value pair You can copy the selected pair to the Windows clipboard treat the value as a web URL and open that location in a web browser or treat the value as a filename either absolute or relative to the path of the source file from which the feature was read and load that file either into Global Mapper or with the program associated with that file type in Windows You can also choose to zoom the main map view to the extents of the selected feature If the selected feature has an attribute named IMAGE_ LINK and the value of that attribute refers to a local image file Global Mapper will automatically open that image in the associated application on your system unless the Ctrl button was held down when you selected the feature Likewise if you have an attribute named GM_LINK and the value of that attribute refers to a local file Global Mapper will try and open that file in the current instance of Global Mapper as a new layer unless the layer is already
251. d to the product of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer Table of Contents 177 Global Mapper User s Manual o Divide Ist Value by 2nd value in new layer is assigned to the value from the first layer divided by the value in the second layer If either value is missing or the second layer value is zero the new sample is marked as invalid o Filter Keep First Value if Second Valid value in the new layer is assigned to the value in the first layer only if the value in the second layer is vaild Otherwise the value in the new layer is marked as invalid void This is useful for applying a mask to a terrain layer o Filter Keep First Value if Greater Than Second value in the new layer is assigned to the value in the first layer only if the first layer value is greater than the second layer value If either value is invalid or the first value is less than the second value the value in the new layer is marked as invalid void o Filter Keep First Value if Less Than Second value in the new layer is assigned to the value in the first layer only if the first layer value is less than the second layer value If either value is invalid or the first value is less than the second value the value in the new layer is marked as invalid void o Filter Keep First if Second Greater Than Compare Value value in the new layer is assigned to the value in the first layer only if the second layer value is valid and is greater t
252. date the base terrain in WorldWind rather than just creating a new image layer to drape on the existing terrain choose the BIL format export Table of Contents 51 Global Mapper User s Manual World Wind Export Options Ea gt Word Wind Options Export Bounds Bats Set Name Blue Springs DEM Tile Export Location Select the root folder for saving all of the Word Wind tiles in the export The appropriate zoom level folder names will be created based on the other export parameters C temp Select z Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution to use for the maximum detail f Jevel in the exported tiles The default will preserve full detail for any loaded rasterelevation data set Level 11 19 076 m 0 618 arc seconds C Use Level 0 Tile Size of 1 pages Number of oom Levels to Use 5 Tile Image File Format JPG Good for Imagery C PNG 8 bit Good for Scanned Maps and Vector Data C PNG 24 bit Good for Imagery with Transparency C BIL Terain Data Replaces WW Elevation Surface M Make Image Tiles Transparent M Save Vector Data if Displayed M Create Filenames for WW Java Edition No Leading Zeroes ADVANCED Create World Files for Exported Tiles Note Users without a permanent registration key that export World Wind tiles will get a large diagonal DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export Zoomify Tiles Command The Export Zoomify Ti
253. de Height 1 meters above Ground Water Display Display Water in the 3D View Water Level 0 meters _ _ 30 Vector Display Options Display 30 Vector Features in Space Above Below Terrain Surface Treat 3D Vector Elevations as Relative to the Terrain Surface i Extrude 3D Areas to Surface Useful for Buildings 3D View Resolution Select the dimensions of the terrain surface and the rendered texture to display in the 3D view Larger values result in a more detailed display but will take longer to render Terrain Surface 2048 x 2048 Image 4036 x 4096 The terrain and image size settings on the 3D View Properties dialog controls how detailed the terrain surface and draped image surface in the 3D view will be Larger values will result in more detail but will also take more time to draw Also some video cards can t handle the larger sizes resulting in crashes in the 3D view If Table of Contents 173 Global Mapper User s Manual this happens and you can t get back into the 3D view options to change this you need to run regedit and delete the HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper 3DView_TextureSize and 3DView_TerrainSize keys then re open the 3D viewer The contents of the 3D View window will always reflect what is visible in the main Global Mapper view This means that as you pan and zoom around the main Global Mapper view the contents of the 3D View window will pan and zoom
254. de a format string a good default numeric represntation will be used Here is a simple example for looping over some rows and columns GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 Loop over rows 1 10 with leading zeroes in the format VAR_LOOP_START VAL _START 1 VAL _STOP 10 VAL_STEP 1 VAL FORMAT 02d VAR_NAMF SROWS Loop over colums 5 15 in this row use default formatting VAR_LOOP_START VAL_START 5 VAL_STOP 15 VAL_STEP 1 VAR_NAMF COLS Import a file with the row and column in the filename IMPORT FILENAME c path_to_file base_filename_ tROW _ SCOL jpg VAR_LOOP_END VAR_LOOP_END Attribute Name Parameter An attribute name parameter has a value that can be either the name of an attribute or one of the special values below for accessing other fields associated with the feature e lt Feature Name gt the value is the display label of the feature e lt Feature Type gt the value is the classification of the feature e lt Feature Desc gt the value is the description of the feature often the same as the feature type For formats like DXF or DGN this will be the DXF layer or DGN level name respectively e lt Feature Layer Name gt the value is the name of the layer that the feature is in e lt Feature Source Filename gt the value is the filename of the file the layer was loaded from e lt Index in Layer gt the value is the 0 based index of the feature in the layer that the feature is in Note that area line and p
255. default use GEN_AREAS NO to disable SMOOTH_STREAMS specifies whether or not generated streams should have smoothing applied to improve appearance This option is enabled by default Use SMOOTH_STREAMSE NO to disable smoothing FLOW_TO_POS specifies the X and Y location or longitude latitude of a position to generate an area with all parts of the terrain surface that flow to or near that point in the vector area feature The format is FLOW_TO_POS x y Use FLOW_TO_POS_THRESH to specify how close to the position the flow has to go in order to consider the source point part of that area Use FLOW_TO_POS_PROJ to specify the projection of the position If that 1s not provided it will be assumed to be in the current projection FLOW_TO_POS_THRESH specifies how many samples away from the sample containing the specified FLOW_TO_POS that the flow can be and still be considered to go to that point The default is FLOW_TO_POS_THRESH 1 FLOW_TO_POS_PROJ special Projection Specification parameter providing the projection of the FLOW_TO_POS FILLED_DEM_FILENAME specifies the full path and name of a GMG Global Mapper Grid file to save the depression filled DEM to after finding it The default is to not save the filled DEM to a GMG file SPATIAL_RES specifies spacing of grid points used to calculate the watershed A smaller grid spacing results in higher fidelity but the calculation process will take longer Typically you ll want to use the default v
256. done either textually or numerically For text equal and not equal searches the Compare Value field can contain the and wildcard characters Table of Contents 92 Global Mapper User s Manual In addition one can control which vector object types area line and or point to include in the search and also whether to limit the search to those features that are on screen Once you have your Search Criteria set how you want for the search press the New Search button to actually perform the search and display the matching results in the results list The results will be sorted in ascending order by the names of the features by default but you can click on any column header to sort the results by the values in that column Clicking the same column header again will reverse the order of the sort You can also press the Search in Existing Results button to apply the new search criteria to the existing results Using this you can create complicated searches based on multiple criteria Double clicking on an item in the list will recenter the view on that object The Edit Selected button displays a dialog allowing the user to modify the name feature type and drawing style of any features selected The Delete Selected button will mark all selected features as deleted If you right click on the results list additonal options will appear such as the option to select all of the results in the list If multiple line features are selected in the re
257. e Occasionally you may wish to make copies of existing features or perhaps move features from one instance of Global Mapper to another You can easily do this by first selecting the features then either making a copy of those features use Edit gt Copy Selected Features to Clipboard menu command or Ctrl C shortcut or cutting those features to the clipboard use Edit gt Cut Selected Features to Clipboard menu command or Ctrl X shortcut Then simply paste those features into any running instance of Global Mapper using either the Edit gt Paste Features from Clipboard Ctrl V shortcut or Edit gt Paste Features from Clipboard Keep Copy Ctrl Shift V shortcut the latter of which keeps the features on the clipboard for additional pasting rather than wiping the clipboard clearn Snapping to Existing Features When Drawing During some operations i e drawing new area or line features or graphically placing a new point feature the cursor can automatically snap to existing features when you move it near them to facilitate lining up features This happens by default unless the ALT or V keys are depressed Pressing the ALT key causes no automatic snapping to occur while pressing the V key causes only vertices on existing features to be snapped to Holding down the P key causes only nearby point features to be snapped to Note that you can reverse the automatic snapping behavior so that snapping is disabled by default and holding down the ALT key en
258. e displayed if enabled e WATER_ALPHA this setting controls how see through the water is when displayed The valid range of values is 0 255 with O meaning the water is completely see through i e invisible and 255 meaning that the water color is completely opaque such that you can t see any of the shaded relief below it SHOW_3D_VIEW The SHOW_3D_VIEW command displays the 3D view window with the loaded data The following parameters are supported by the command e MAXIMIZE specifies whether or not the 3D view window should be maximized or not Use MAXIMIZE YES to force the window to be maximized when displayed Table of Contents 299 Global Mapper User s Manual UNLOAD_ALL The UNLOAD_ALL command unloads all currently loaded data This command takes no parameters The following parameters are supported by the command e VECTOR_ONLY specifies that only layers containing vector data shall be unloaded All raster and gridded elevation layers will remain loaded Use VECTOR_ONLY YES to enable unloading just the vector layers UNLOAD_LAYER The UNLOAD_LAYER command allows you to unload all previous loaded layers with a given filename This is useful if you don t want to unload all previously loaded layers just to get rid of a few of them The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer to unload If an empty value is passed in all layers that were created by the script such as those f
259. e generated If the option is not specified elevation values will be generated e EXPORT_ATTRS DGN POLISH_MP and SIMPLE_ASCTI only specifies whether or not feature attributes should be written to the text file just before the coordinates Use EXPORT_ATTRS YES to enable export of the feature attributes If the option is not specified attributes will be exported If you Table of Contents 272 Global Mapper User s Manual don t want to export style attribute with the feature use EXPORT_ATTRS NO_STYLE to get just the associated attributes and name of the feature in the attribute list e COORD_OFFSET SIMPLE_ASCTI only specifies the offset to apply to any coordinates written to the file This offset will be added to each coordinate written to the file The offset should be specified as acomma delimited list of the X Y and Z offsets such as COORD_OFFSET 100000 0 200000 0 0 0 e COORD_SCALE SIMPLE_ASCII only specifies the scale factors to apply to any coordinates written to the file Each coordinate will be multiplied by these scale factor before being written to the file The scale factors should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X Y and Z scale factors such as COORD_SCALE 0 1 0 1 1 0 e CDF_MAJOR_CODE CDF only specifies the default major attribute code to use for features when exporting to a CDF format file default is 32 e CDF_MINOR_CODE CDF only specifies the default minor attribute code to use for features wh
260. e Code FCODE If the feature already had a label and the Keep Original Label if Non Empty option is checked the original label will be used rather than the attribute value You can also select which attribute field if any to use for the elevation value for the layer By default several attribute field names like ELEVATION ELEV ALTITUDE Z etc are checked when an elevation value for the feature is needed This option allows you to override this behavior and manually select the attribute to use You can also select what units to assign to unspecified elevation values for the layer such as per vertex elevation values for 3D line and area features in the layer Finally there are also options available to select the classification to apply to unclassified area line and or point features in the layer Area Line and Point Styles Tabs Vector Options Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Projection C Use Default Style Based on Classification or Custom Style C Use Same Style for All Features 3 f Apply Styling Based on Attribute Name Values r Atibute Name to Base style On DLG3CODEPAIR_1 m Setup Shing Based ton Tr List of Values and Associated Styles New Value ji Delete Edit Value il it Style Load from File Save to File Init From Values Iw interpolate Colors Between Numeric Values C Assign Random Colors to Features The Area Styles Line Styles and Point Styles tabs provide the abi
261. e LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom LAYER_DESC specifies the name to assign to this layer If no layer description is provided a default name will be assigned NO_DATA_DIST_MULT specifies how far from an actual data point a grid cell has to be before it is treated as a no data value This number is given as a multiple of the diagonal size of a single grid cell as nominally determined by the gridding algorithm or specified with the SPATIAL_RES parameter A value of O the default means that all points should be considered as valid GRID_FILL_TO_BOUNDS specifies that the grid values should be filled out to the entire bounds of the gridded data rather than just to the convex hull of the data being gridded Use GRID_FILL_TO_BOUNDS YES to enable this GRID_FLATTEN_AREAS specifies that area features with elevatio
262. e Overlapping Buffer Areas To create buffers some Table of Contents 208 Global Mapper User s Manual distance inside a selected area feature rather than outside of it simply specify a negative buffer distance Once you have completed have completed creating the buffer areas s the newly created areas will automatically be selected so you can easily right click to edit them display measurement information etc Setup Buffer Area Creation Enter the buffer distance from the selected feature s as well as how many iterations of that buffer distance should be applied Use a negative butter distance to create buffers inside area features rather than outside them Number of Buffer Zones for Each Feature 2 Buffer Distance Fixed Distance of 50 Meters 0 Get Distance from Attribute Area Type for Buffers Range Ring a Combine Overlapping Buffer Areas Creating New Shape e g Circle Rectangle etc Features Under the Create Area Shapes and Create Line Shapes right click popup menus you will find options to create Arc Circular Elliptical Rectangular and Square area and line features For all of these shape types except the rectangular square option where you manually enter the coordinates you click and hold the left mouse button at the center of the feature then drag it until it is of the desired shape For Circular Elliptical features and Arcs the default shape follows a circle and holding down the SHIFT key
263. e POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use as a folder name before the actual filename or the special values lt Area Display Label gt Table of Contents 255 Global Mapper User s Manual e ALLOW_LOSSY GLOBAL_MAPPER_GRID only specifies whether or not a slight loss in precision is allowable in order to achieve better compression ratios The default is YES so turn only use lossless compression you need to specify a value of ALLOW_LOSSY NO e EXPORT_COLORS XYZ_GRID only specifies that RGB color values should be exported for each coordinate that is saved e OVERWRITE_EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE_EXISTING YES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist e ADD_OVERVIEW_LAYERS ERDAS only specifies that overview pyramid layers should be generated for the export Use ADD_OVERVIEW_LAYERS YES to enable e BLOCK_SIZE ERDAS only specifies the block size to use for the export The default is BLOCK_SIZE 64 e COMPRESS_OUTPUT ERDAS only specifies whether or not the exported file should be compress The default is COMPRESS_OUTPUT YES e TILE_SIZE GEOTIFF only specifies that the GeoTIFF file should be exported with a tiled organization and use the specified tile size This tile size should be between 8 and 2048 Typical values are 64 128 and 256 e DISABLE_BIGTIFF GEOTIF
264. e a single closed line feature from each selected area feature Creating New Line Features with Distance Bearing COGO Input After selecting the Create New Line with Dist Bearing COGO popup menu option you can proceed to select the starting location of the new line feature by left clicking at the desired start location Note that while selecting the start point for the line you can use the Snapping feature to help align the line with existing features After selecting the starting location the Distance Bearing COGO Input dialog pictured below will display allowing you to enter distance bearing information for additional points either as separate distance bearing values as a COGO Coordinate Geometry coordinates see below for explanation or as a quadrant bearing distance value Once you have entered all of your points press Done to complete the process and create the new line feature You can also check the option to Close Path Using Compass Rule when Completing Feature If this option is checked all of the points will be adjusted using the compass rule to ensure that the shape is closed The compass rule evenly distributes the shift required to close the shape to all vertices and is commonly used by surveyors Table of Contents 205 Global Mapper User s Manual Distance Bearing COGO Input Distance Bearing Input Add Faint C Specify Separate Distance and Bearing Values Done Distance B Cancel Bearing lou O is nor
265. e an enterprise database connection Table of Contents 120 Global Mapper User s Manual Spatial Database Connection Connechon Name Database Inforrmatiar Databate Mame m Authentication User Name Password If Save User Name and Password with Database Information Test Connection Help ie 7 Cancel Choose the option from the Spatial Database Type drop down list that corresponds to the spatial database you are using Type a unique Connection Name to identify this connection The name you use here will be listed in the connection list on the Open Spatial Database Dialog The Database Information section specifies the location of your database on the network Fields that are not needed for a particular database vendor will be greyed out and disabled o In the Server field type the name of the network server where the database is located e Specify the required server port in the Port field In an Esri ArcSDE geodatabase connection this is also known as the Service parameter e Enter the database name in the Database Name field Note that the database name is optional when defining an Esri ArcSDE geodatabase connection Whether or not it is needed is specific to your particular installation Use the Authentication section to specify the user and password required to log on to the spatial database e Type a valid User Name e Type a valid Password e Put a check next to Save User Name and Password
266. e button to zoom in on a particular area in this view Right clicking will zoom out If you hold down the CTRL key when right clicking will zoom out to the full extents For those of you with wheel mice rolling the wheel forward zooms in and rolling it back zooms out Moving the mouse near the edge of the Zoomed View displays a pan arrow Clicking when this is visible will cause the view to pan in the direction of the arrow hold down CTRL to increase the size of the pan Pressing down the Shift button while moving the mouse will disable this functionality and allow you to click all the way to the edge of Table of Contents 107 Global Mapper User s Manual the Zoomed View To select a location for control point entry position the crosshair over the pixel of interest then press and release the left mouse button This will cause the pixel coordinates of the point to be entered in the Ground Control Point GCP Entry portion of the dialog described below In addition a small red dot will be placed at the click location to make it easy to see If you also hold down the CTRL key when clicking the left mouse button the Reference Image view will be recentered on the associated point and the reference coordinates wil automatically be filled in if there have been enough control points entered to convert the coordinates If you hold down the SHIFT key when left clicking the current control point will automatically be added to the GCP list just as if you
267. e desired swipe direction When you release the mouse the swipe is reset and the entire image is displayed again Coordinate Convertor Command Selecting the Coordinate Convertor menu item displays the Coordinate Convertor dialog picture below This dialog allows you to easily convert a coordinate in one projection datum unit system to another When a conversion is made the results are automatically copied to the clipboard for easy pasting in another location using Ctrl V There are also buttons to allow you to easily recenter the map on the coordinates or to create a new point feature at the coordinates Table of Contents 199 Global Mapper User s Manual Coordinate Convertor m Input Coordinate M Output Coordinate xE asting Longitude 400000 Easting Longitude 94 09 18 7466 w Northing Latitude 4320000 FS ere From Northing Latitude as 01 23 9772 N Input Coordinate System Output Coordinate System UTM Geographic Latitude Longitude DATUM HADS3 DATUM HADBA UNIT meters UNIT arc degrees UTM ZONE 15 96 90w Northem H Select Input Coordinate System Select Output Coordinate System Center on Output Coordinates Close Create New Point at Output Coordinates Control Center Command oe Selecting the Control Center menu item or toolbar button displays the Overlay Control Center dialog This dialog is the central control center for obtaining information and setting options for all
268. e eight direction pour point algorithm D 8 to calculate the flow direction at each location along with a bottom up approach for determining flow direction through flat areas and a custom algorithm for automatically filling depressions in the terrain data When selected the command displays the Watershed Generation Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the watershed generation process Resolution The resolution affects fidelity with which the watershed is generated Larger numbers result in a less detailed watershed but it will generate more quickly Typically youl just want to accept the defaults Kais 30 meters Y axis 30 meters f you wish to change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need to change the current projection by going to Contig gt Projection z Stream Threshold Specify how much ground area or how many cells the flaw must accumulate from for a cell to be considered part of a stream Larger values result in only more major water flows being classified as streams Stream Cell Count 2500 Stream Drainage Area Square Meters Discard Stream Starts Less than 50 p meters in Length r Depression Fill Depth Specify the maximum depth of depression in the terain data that will be filled to facilitate creating the flow network Reduce this for faster results 11 5 l meters Save DEM
269. e in Each of these options is further described below If one or more area features are selected the Add Attributes to Selected Areas from Points option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause Global Mapper to search for any point features within each area and if found add the attributes from the included point feature to the area s attribute list If multiple points are found within the area the user is prompted whether or not to use the attribute data If one or more point features are selected the Add Attributes to Selected Points from Areas option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause Global Mapper to search for the top most area feature with attributes that each point feature is in and if found add the attributes from that area to the point s attribute list If one or more point features are selected the Add Attributes to Selected Points from Lines option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause Global Mapper to search for the nearest line feature within the specified search distance with attributes and if found add the attributes from that line to the point s attribute list If one or more line features are selected the Add Attributes to Selected Lines from Areas option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause Global Mapper to search for the top most area feature with attributes that each line feature is in and if found add the at
270. e location Calculating Elevation Statistics for Selected Features If gridded elevation data i e DEMs is loaded and at least one feature is selected the Calculate Elevation Slope Stats for Selected Feature s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will examine the loaded terrain within the selected area feature s and if terrain is found within a selected area add MIN_ELEV MAX_ELEV AVG_ELEV STD_DEV_ELEV MAX_ SLOPE AVG_SLOPE and STD_DEV_SLOPE attributes to the area containing the minimum maximum average and standard deviation of elevation values encountered within the area feature as well as the maximum average and standard deviation of the slope values in degrees found within the area For selected line features the maximum and average slope in degrees the total elevation gain and loss along the path and the maximum slope both up and down the line assuming travel from the start of the line to the end for the line will be computed and added as MAX_SLOPE MAX_UP_SLOPE MAX_DOWN_SLOPE AVG_SLOPE ELEV_GAIN and ELEV_LOSS attributes For selected point features the ELEVATION SLOPE and SLOPE_DIR attributes will be calculated and added for each point that is on a loaded terrain surface Calculating Cut and Fill Volumes for Area and Line Features If you have a single area or line feature selected the Measure Volume option will appear when bringing up the right click menu Selecting this option will allow
271. e or specify a new table name Table of Contents 118 Global Mapper User s Manual Esri Geodatabase Options Table Selection General Gridding Export Bounds Table Export to Table dem data o l Options MW Wam Before Replacing Existing Tables On the Table Selection tab for elevation or raster imagery export you can specify a table name where the data will be stored Note that if you choose an existing table the data in that table will be replaced with the data in the viewer Enter a table name in the Export to Table field If you want to export data to an existing table choose the name from the drop down list Place a check next to Warn Before Replacing Existing Tables to be notified when you choose a table that already exists You can choose whether to replace the existing table or specify a new table name You can use the Export Bounds Panel define the extent of the data that you want to export Once you have chosen table names and data extents click the OK button to export the data to the geodatabase tables The Cancel button quits the process of exporting data to a spatial database Table of Contents 119 Global Mapper User s Manual The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Spatial Database Connection Manager The Spatial Database Connection Manager allows you to create and save enterprise spatial database connection definitions Once a connection has been defined you can use it whe
272. e point including where to position the label relative to the point what angle if any to rotate point labels at how to fill the background for the labels and whether or not to display the labels at a fixed height in ground units rather than a fixed font size in pixels Table of Contents 134 Global Mapper User s Manual Trajan Pro O Trebuchet MS Tunga O Tw Cen MT O Tw Cen MT Condense O Tw Cen MT Condense Effets _ r Sample F Strikeout l Underine AaBbYyZz jr Color E Sack Set Label Background Fill Mode At f Automatic C Fill with Background Color Transparent Background Label Position Relative to Point Feature Automatic Always Display Label if any Labels are Displayed ates Labels Using this Font at a Feed Height of i meters of foa degrees Vertical Options The Vertical Options panel pictured below controls options for the display of elevation data Table of Contents 135 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection TE Shader Ivf Enable Hill Shading Hevation Display Esport Units f Native Overay Units Metric Statute ft Light Direction Altitude 45 Azimuth 45 Ambient Lighting 0 00 Dim E Bright T Vertical Exaggeration 6 8 Flat _ _ _ _ _ High Hil Shading Shadow Darkness 27 Dark
273. e to Fill Small Gaps in Data option is checked any small areas with missing data will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding valid data This is useful for filling small gaps between adjacent tiles or small holes in elevation data If the Generate PRJ File option is checked a describing the projection of the coordinates in the file will automatically be created If the ADVANCED Don t Write GeoTIFF Header option is checked no GeoTIFF tags will be written to the generated file This is useful for using things like datum specializations that can t be exactly stored in GeoTIFF files so you d rather just use a PRJ file and not have anything in the GeoTIFF file Export Global Mapper Grid Command The Export Global Mapper Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Global Mapper Grid format file The Global Mapper Grid format is a highly compressed elevation grid format that loads and draws very quickly and requires very little memory If you have a choice for what format to store your gridded elevation data in we suggest using the Global Mapper Grid format When selected the command displays the Global Mapper Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to
274. e to delete from matching features You can include multiple instances of this attribute to delete multiple values To remove the feature label rather than an attribute use lt Feature Name gt for the attribute name e ATTR_TO_RENAME specifies the name of an attribute to rename from matching features and what to rename it to You can include multiple instances of this attribute to rename multiple attributes For example to rename the attribute CTY to be COUNTY add the parameter ATTR_TO_RENAME CTY COUNTY to your command e ATTR_TO_COPY specifies the name of an attribute to copy the value of an existing attribute or label to You can include multiple instances of this parameter to copy multiple attributes For example to create a new attribute named DISP_LABEL from the feature label use ATTR_TO_COPY DISP_LABEL lt Feature Name gt or to create a new attribute named DEPTH from the value of an attribute named Z use ATTR_TO_COPY DEPTH Z CASE_SENSITIVE specifies whether or not text comparisons are case sensitive or not Use CASE_SENSITIVE YES to enable by default comparisons are not case sensitive DELETE_FEATURES specifies whether or not to mark all matching features as deleted Use DELETE_FEATURES YES to enable DELETE_DUPLICATES specifies whether or not to mark matching features that are duplicates i e same coordinates label attributes type and style as deleted Use DELETE_DUPLICATES YES to enable Note that this o
275. e user to select the projection to save the data in how to handle dynamically streamed MSRMaps com TerraServer USA data and other options These include the Always Maintain Feature Styles option which specifies that any vector features stored in the package file should explicitly save the styling of that feature even if they are using the default style for the feature classification This can make it easier to maintain exact styling when transferring packages between Global Mapper installations In the Projection section of the panel the user can choose to save all loaded data in the currently selected view projection this is the projection selected on the Projection tab of the Configuration dialog in latitude longitude coordinates the Geographic projection with the WGS84 datum or to keep each layer in its original native projection In the TerraServer Export Options section of the panel the user can select how displayed layers from the Download TerraServer menu option are exported The Automatic selection for imagery themes i e DOQs Urban Area imagery will save data slightly more detailed than what is displayed on the screen For the DRG topographic map theme the most detailed zoom range for the current scale of DRG map being displayed i e 24K 100K 250K will be determined and data from that scale will be saved The other alternatives either Table of Contents 25 Global Mapper User s Manual save the most detailed scale avail
276. ea or line feature and be presented with a dialog showing the length of the segment which you can then edit All vertex locations from the end of the segment on to the end of the line will be adjusted to make the clicked on segment the specified length If you also have the option enabled to label each segment with its length on the Vector Display tab of the Configuration dialog then you can just double click on a segment to edit its length Move Selected Vertices This option allows you to move selected vertices to a new location To do this simply hold down the left mouse button and move the vertices to the desired location then release the left mouse button You can continually to refine the location by repeating Right clicking or pressing the ESC key will complete the operation Note that while moving a single vertex you can use the Snapping feature to help align the vertex with existing features If you d only like to move the selected vertices either horizontally or vertically you can hold down either the X or Y keys on the keyboard to restrict the movement to that axis Holding down both keys will move the vertices diagonally Join Selected Vertices This option allows you to set multiple vertices to the same location which is handy for ensuring that there are no gaps along the seams of features Once you ve selected this option hold down the left mouse button and move the vertices to the new desired location then release the left mouse
277. ead specifies the name of the projection prj file to use for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file e PROJ_EPSG_CODE DEPRECATED use PROJ instead specifies the numeric EPSG projection code that defines the projection for this file this will override any projection information stored in the file For example use PROJ_LEPSG_CODE 26715 to define a UTM zone 15 projection with NAD27 as the datum and meters as the units e PROMPT_IF_PROJ_UNKNOWN set to NO if you don t want the user to be prompted to select a projection if the projection of the file cannot be automatically determined e ELEV_UNITS specify elevation units to use for this file if it contains gridded elevation data and also for vector feature elevations that don t have a unit embedded in the elevation value Valid values are as follows FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet e METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters e ELEV_OFFSET elevation only specifies the offset in meters to apply to each elevation value in the layer This allows you to vertically shift a layer to match other layers e ELEV_POWER elevation only specifies the power value to apply to each elevation value in the layer For example a value of 2 0 would square each elevation value before applying a scale and adding the offset Default to 1 0 no power e ELEV_SCALE elev
278. earch By Name The Search By Name command allows for searching for features in all loaded vector data by name When selected the Find By Name dialog is displayed Find By Name Search String CPLR Types To Search M Areas W Lines M Points Chloride Gulch Valley Chloride Gulch Valley Chloride Mine Mine Chloride Mine Mine Colard Ranch Locale Coloradian Mine Mine Coloradium Mine Mine Colorado Academy School Colorado Agricultural Canal Canal Calar sin Alen Ollan Cc The Find By Name dialog displays a list of all of the vector features areas lines and or points whose label starts with the search string specified in the Search String field This field can contain the and wildcard Table of Contents 91 Global Mapper User s Manual characters In addition one can control which vector object types area line and or point to include in the search Double clicking on an item in the list will recenter the view on that object and show a bullseye on it hold down the ALT key when double clicking to not show the bullseye The Edit Selected button displays a dialog allowing the user to modify the name feature type and drawing style of any features selected The Delete Selected button will mark all selected features as deleted This dialog is particulary handy with the GNIS Geographic Names database which is freely available for download Search By Attributes Name and Description The Search By Attributes
279. ecified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e SAMPLING METHOD elevation and raster only specifies the sampling method to use when resampling this layer The following values are supported DEFAULT Use either automatic resampling based on export or layer resampling depending on setting of global flag about whether to resample on export AUTO Automatically select a resampling method based on how the export resolution and bounds compare to the original layout for a layer For example if you export to a lower resolution a box averager of appropriate size may be used automatically LAYER Use the sampling method set for each layer The list of SAMPLING METHOD values for the IMPORT command Click here for list can also be specified to use a particular sampling method for all layers being exported e FORMAT SURFERGRID only determines if Surfer Grid export format is ASCII BINARY_V6 or BINARY _V7 The default is ASCII if no format is specified e GEN_WORLD_FILE GEOTIFF only specifies that a TIFF world file TFW should be generated in addition to the TIFF file Use GE
280. ecifies the color which all parts of the terrain with a slope at or above the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with Table of Contents 138 Global Mapper User s Manual e Smooth Gradient Specifies that all portions of the terrain with a slope between the Minimum Slope Value and the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with a smooth gradient of colors that vary with the slope from the Minimum Slope Color to the Maximum Slope Color Custom Color Specifies that all portions of the terrain with a slope between the Minimum Slope Value and the Maximum Slope Value will be colored with a single color that can be modified with the Select button Slope Direction Shader e Fast Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly East e North Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly North e South Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly South e West Color Allows the user to set the color to use for slopes facing directly West e Angle Offset Allows the user to specify an angle offset in degrees to add to the calculated slope direction in order to shade against slope directions other than cardinal directions HSV Shader e Low Color Start Advanced Sets where in the HSV color range the lowest elevation will be Value Advanced Modifies the HSV value parameter e Saturation Advanced Modifies the HSV saturation parameter e Range Modifies h
281. ecify which entity types you wish to export and what file to export them to Split Export Based on Do Not Split Export Generate projection PRJ file for each entity type Note W that some software i e Arc Explorer cannot handle shapefiles with a FRJ file so disable if you have trouble Generate 3D Features Using Loaded Hevation Data i Add Feature Type LAYER Attribute to DBF Generate Multi Patch Features for Areas Cancel Appli Help The Export Areas Export Lines and Export Points options enable area line and point export respectively Pressing the Select button next to each of those options allows you to select the name of the SHP file to generate In addition to the SHP file containing the actual geometry of the features an shape index file SHX and attribute database file DBF will be created as well with the same name as the SHP file In general Global Mapper will automatically determine an appropriate field type and length for any attributes exported to the DBF file created along with a Shapefile based on the values of the attribute data being exported However if your input data includes Shapefiles or DBF files the original field type and length for an attribute will be used unless the attribute values being exported make that impossible The Split Export Based On option allows you to split up your export into separate files based on the feature type classification feature description feature name or
282. ected the command displays the ECW Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and target compression ration a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export If you would like to generate a lossless JPG2000 format file simply slide the Target Compression Ratio slider all the way to the left 1 1 target compression ration Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Elevation Spatial Database Command The Export Elevation Spatial Database command allows the user to export any loaded elevation data to a table in a Spatial Database Global Mapper can export elevation data to the following spatial databases e Esri Enterprise Geodatabase ArcSDE e Esri File Geodatabase e Esri Personal Geodatabase Export Erdas Imagine Command The Export Erdas Imagine command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an Erdas Imagine file When selected the command displays the Erdas Imagine Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish t
283. ectification dialog for that layer As Needed Rectification There are two ways to rectify imagery in Global Mapper The first is to simply load the imagery file needing to be rectified just like any other file Global Mapper will automatically prompt you to rectify an image if it cannot automatically determine where on the earth the image should be placed If you indicate that you would like to rectify an image when prompted the Image Rectifier dialog will appear allowing you to enter ground control points for the image in order to rectify it This process is described in detail later Batch Rectification By using the Rectify Georeference Imagery command under the File menu you can select multiple images to rectify at a time You will be allowed to rectify all images that you select regardless of whether they already contain valid positioning information In this way you can correct poorly positioned imagery Using the Batch Image Rectification Options dialog pictured below you can setup whether you would like to view the images after rectification export them to one of several formats or both Table of Contents 103 Global Mapper User s Manual Batch Image Rectification Options Specify below what to do with each image after you have rectified it Exported images will be saved in the save directory as the original with rectified appended to their filenames M Show Rectified Images in Reference View W Export Rectified Image
284. ector file containing a polygon feature to which the operation should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be combined will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL or POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the new terrain layer will be in i e the current projection POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box IMPORT The IMPORT command imports a data file for later use The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to load the data from This can also be the URL http or ftp for a file on a web site that you want Global Mapper to download and load e TYPE type of data file we re loading AUTO automatically determine the type
285. ed Subsequent data sets will be transformed to the coordinate system of the first data set loaded or the display projection subsequently selected from the configuration dialog Exporting Data to a Spatial Database In order to export data to a spatial database you need to specify the location of the spatial database and one or more table names in which the data will be stored When writing to an Esri file geodatabase or personal geodatabase you can create a new database file before writing the tables If you are exporting data to any of the enterprise database types you can only create tables in an existing database To export data to a spatial database you start by choosing one of the following export options from the File Export menu e Export Elevation Spatial Database e Export Raster Spatial Database e Export Vector Spatial Database When the Select Export Format Dialog is displayed there will be three choices e Esri File Geodatabase Table e Esri Personal Geodatabase Table e Spatialite DB Table e Spatial Database Table Choose the option indicating your desired spatial database type and press OK to continue If you choose Spatial Database from the list Global Mapper will display the Open Spatial Database Dialog Select the database connection that you want to use and click OK to continue by specifying Spatial Database Export Options If you choose Spatialite DB Table Esri File Geodatabase Table or Esri Personal G
286. ed data The user is free to change the values to fit their needs DLG O Export Options X DLG O Options Export Bounds Banner JUSGS NMD ELG DATA CHARACTER FORMAT 09 OCU Name GRAND CANYON AZ Category ROADS AND TRAILS OF Cancel Aly Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF Command The Export DXF command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an AutoCAD DXF format file When selected the command displays the DXF Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a DXF Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 58 Global Mapper User s Manual DXF Export Options DAF Options Gridding Export Bounds Display Labels for Area and Line Features C Do Not Include Display Labels Include Display Labels as Separate Text Layer f Include Display Labels as Attributes Note that some software may be unable to deal with attributes f you have trouble with an exported DXF with this option enabled disable this option and try again Text Size Left Smaller Right Bigger 1 00 Layer Names f Use Feature Description for Layer Name C Use Feature Display Label for Layer Name C Use Feature Source Filename for Layer Name Generate Projection P
287. ed or resampled e Never Automatically Adjust Contrast this option disables automatic contrast adjustment even for those layers to which it would normally be applied by default like 16 bit per color channel images Only Generate Metadata Files causes only metadata files like world files PRJ files and TAB files to be generated This is a very handy way to create metadata files for a large collection of files like GeoTIFF files in order to use the data in software that doesn t recognize embedded positioning information Remove Collar From Image causes the collar of DRG style images to be automatically removed from each image that is converted if collar bounds can be automatically determined Note that some collar may remain in order to make the end result rectangular if the destination projection in not geographic lat lon If you check this option and the file being converted is also loaded in the main map view and has some custom collar cropping applied those collar cropping options will be used rather than the automatic DRG style collar setting Skip Existing Output Files this option causes any conversion operations for which the default output filename already exists to be skipped This is useful when resuming batch conversion operations that failed or were cancelled Use Big Endian For Elevations causes stored elevations to use the big endian Motorola byte order rather than the default little endian Intel byte order Use L
288. eed to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will generate a separate export for each polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon See the POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY and POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR options for naming and other options when using this parameter Use POLYGON _CROP_USE_EACH YES to enable POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use for naming or the special values lt Area Display Label gt or lt Area Source Filename gt If no value is provided the exported files will be sequentially numbered POLYGON_CROP_FOLDER_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using th
289. eep Same as Source File The new file will use the same color encoding as the source file either palette based 24 bit RGB multi band or grayscale o Multi Band Image The new file will use be a multi band image using the same number of bands as the input file You will be able to choose either 8 bits or 16 bits per band The additional list of options varies depending on the particular conversion being performed The meaning of those options is defined below e Add Watermark Image when this option is checked you will be prompted to select an image to use as a watermark for your raster format export You will also be allows to select display options for your watermark image such as transparency to provide the desired effect The selected watermark image will be stretched to cover the entire output image for each converted file e Adjust Image Contrast causes the contrast of any input file to be automatically adjusted prior to being exported This is useful for improving the display of some types of imagery e Clamp Export to Lat Lon Boundary causes the export bounds of each image being converted to be clamped to the nearest 3 75 lat lon boundary This can be useful in limited cases such as when reprojecting to geographic arc degrees and the source images had a tiny collar to make the image square in the native projection Convert to Grayscale causes the exported imagery to be generated in only shades of gray o Crop to Selected A
290. efault for the input data will be chosen so in most cases it is best just to leave this off SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the grid bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the grid bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the grid bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the grid generation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to generate contours to the bounds of the file c test tif you would us
291. eir original layer Cropping Line Features to Area Features You can crop or split selected line features to a selected area feature by right clicking and selecting the option to Crop Split Selected Lines to Selected Areas This will delete any portion of the line feature that lies outside of the selected areas unless you select the Split option in which case separate lines will be created for the parts inside and outside the selected area feature s Note that the original line will remain available as a deleted feature so you can recover the original line if needed Table of Contents 219 Global Mapper User s Manual Cropping Area Features to Line Features You can split selected area features to a selected line feature by right clicking and selecting the option to Crop Selected Area to Selected Line This will split the area feature along the selected line boundary If the line doesn t extend all the way to outside the area it will be extended to the area bounding box Note that the original area will remain available as a deleted feature so you can recover the original area if needed Moving Selected Point Features to the Nearest Point on Selected Line Features You can automatically move selected point features to the nearest point on the selected line feature s by selected both line and point features then right clicking and and selecting the option to Move Selected Point Features to Selected Lines Copying Features Cut Copy Past
292. elect which specific area line and point feature types you wish to display By default all feature types are displayed The Vector Map Detail setting controls how much decluttering of displayed vector data is done This is useful when you have a large of amount of vector data loaded For example if you had all of the roads for an entire state loaded at once you could slide the detail slider to the left to make minor roads been hidden until you zoomed in sufficiently far on the data The rightmost default setting causes all vector data to be displayed regardless of zoom scale This setting does not affect the display of raster or elevation data sets The Vector Layer Ordering During Draw settings control the order in which data from vector layers is displayed The default setting order by type before layer order is that all vector data is drawn after any other Table of Contents 127 Global Mapper User s Manual loaded raster or elevation data regardless of how the vector layers are ordered in the Overlay Control Center All area features from all layers will be drawn first followed by all line features from all layers and finally all point features from all layers Within each grouping e g areas lines or points the drawing order will be determined first by type and then by layer ordering The second draw order option order first by layer then by type within a layer specifies that the order of the vector layers in the Overlay Cont
293. els in the overlay Valid values range from 0 to 20 with 0 being completely black 10 being no alteration and 20 being completely white For example to make an image slightly darker you could use COLOR_INTENSITY 7 NOTE This parameter has been deprecated in favor of the COLOR_INTENSITY_FULL parameter e COLOR_INTENSITY_FULL elevation and raster only specifies the color intensity to use when adjusting the brightness of pixels in the overlay Valid values range from 0 to 512 with O being completely white 256 being no alteration and 512 being completely black For example to make an image slightly darker you could use COLOR_INTENSITY 300 NOTE This parameter replaces the COLOR_INTENSITY parameter e TEXTURE_MAP raster only specifies that this image should be draped over any elevation data loaded before it Use TEXTURE_MAP YES to turn on Anything else turns it off e TRANSPARENT_COLOR elevation and raster only specifies the color to make transparent when rendering this overlay The color should be specified as RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to make white the transparent color use TRANSPARENT_COLOR RGB 255 255 255 If you do not wish any color to be transparent do not use this parameter Optionally if the image that you are making transparent uses a palette for the colors you can specify a palette index in the following format INDEX lt 0O based palette index gt For example to make the second color
294. en exporting to a CDF format file default is 45 e CDF_USE_DEFAULT_CODE CDF only specifies that the default attribute code pair should be used for all features written to the CDF file and not just those for which no attribute code pair could be automatically determined based on the feature classification e INC_ELEV_ATTR MAPINFO only specifies whether or not the elevation of a feature should be added as an attribute to the MapInfo files exported Use INC_ELEV_ATTR YES to enable or INC_ELEV_ATTR NO to disable This is enabled by default e INC_LAYER_ATTR SHAPEFILE MAPINFO or KML only specifies whether or not the layer description of a feature should be added as an attribute to the DBF files exported with the Shapefile or for KML files whether or not displays labels should be exported for line and area features Use INC_LAYER_ATTR YES to enable or INC_LAYER_ATTR NO to disable This is enabled by default for Shapefile and MapInfo exports and disabled by KML e INC_MAP_NAME_ATTR SHAPEFILE only specifies whether or not the name of the map file that a feature came from should be added as an attribute to the DBF files exported with the Shapefile Use INC_MAP NAME ATTR YES to enable e INC_STYLE_ATTRS SHAPEFILE only specifies whether or not attributes for the feature styles of each feature should be added as attributes to the DBF files exported with the Shapefile This is disabled by default use INC_STYLE_ATTRS YES to enable e POLYG
295. eodatabase Table Global Mapper will display the Select Esri Geodatabase Dialog The following sections describe that dialog and the required steps to export a table Selecting a Spatialite database Esri File Geodatabase or Personal Geodatabase for Export Use the Select Database Dialog to choose a Spatialite database Esri file geodatabase or personal geodatabase where you want your exported data to be stored You can also create a new database if necessary Table of Contents 116 Global Mapper User s Manual select Spatialite Database Database PA Spatialite Wwsae sqlite Create New Database Cancel Help You can enter the full path to a Spatialite file geodatabase or personal geodatabase in the Database field or click the Browse button to select an existing database from the file system If you are selecting a Spatialite database or a personal geodatabase then Global Mapper will display the standard Open File dialog Spatialite database files have an extension of sqlite and personal geodatabase files have an extension of mdb If you are selecting a file geodatabase Global Mapper will display a Folder Selection dialog Folder names that end in gdb contain file geodatabases If you want to create a new database click the Create New Database button Global Mapper will display the Create Database Dialog Once you have created a new database the full path will be in the Database field Once you have selec
296. er User s Manual Display Alter Elevation Values Feathering Projection Hevation Offset and Scale Factor Scale Factor iil Power f Offset 0 Meters Hevation values will be altered first by applying the power rarely used then multiplying by the scale factor then by adding the offset value as shown in the following equation new elev scale org_elev power offset For example f you specify a scale of 1 0 and an offset of 10 meters an elevation sample of 150 meters from the file would become 160 meters r Valid Hevation Range Minimum Valid Hevation 214 Meters Maximum Valid Elevation 330 Meters Replace Invalid With Meters Clamp Out of Bound Values to Valid Range Hevation Units Interpretation METERS This option allows you to reinterpret the raw elevation values stored in the overay data This option should only be used when the vertical units selected when the overlay was loaded or indicated by the overay data file were incorrect Use the Hevation Display Units selection on the Vertical Options panel of the Configuration dialog if you just want to change the units that elevation values are displayed in Apply Show Hide Overlay s Toggles whether the currently selected overlays are visible You can also use the checkboxes next to each layer to control the visible state of the overlays Close Overlay s Closes all the currently selected overlays Table of Conte
297. er than Visible Areas option causes the generated view shed to cover those areas that would NOT be visible rather than those that would be visible from the transmitter location If checked the Generate Area Features in Covered Areas option specifies that view shed coverage area polygon featuers should be generated for those areas that are visible These generated area features then behave just like any other vector feature and can be exported to vector formats like Shapefiles for use in other software Pressing the Select Transmitter Location button displays a dialog that allows the user to adjust the exact transmitter coordinates from the coordinates where they clicked Pressing the Select Display Color button displays a dialog that allows the user to select the color in which to display the visible areas on the map After setting up the view shed calculation in the dialog and pressing the OK button the view shed analysis will be performed and when complete the results will be displayed on the main map display as anew Overlay All visible areas within the specified radius will be displayed using the selected color The overlay will default to being 50 translucent allowing you to see areas underneath the view shed You can modify the translucency of the overlay in the Overlay Control Center In addition a small radio tower point will be created at the selected transmitter location When selected using the pick tool this point displ
298. er than all shape points The Render Deleted Features option specifies whether or not features that have been deleted by the user should be displayed The Draw Feature Labels option specifies turns labeling of features on or off globally For more fine grained control over which types are labeled check the Area Styles Line Styles or Point Styles tab The Always Display All Labels option specifies whether or not feature labels should be allowed to overlap when drawing them on the screen When this option is not checked this is the default labels that collide with other labels on the screen will be discarded until you zoom far enough in on the feature so that they can be displayed without overlapping any other labels The Render Segment Lengths on Map option specifies that when you zoom in on line features that the length of each segment should be displayed on the map along the segment The Render Segment Bearings on Map option specifies that when you zoom in on line features that the bearing of each segment should be displayed on the map along the segment The Render Line Direction Arrow option specifies whether or not a small arrow should be drawn on each line feature indicating in which direction the line vertices go The arrow will point along the line towards the last vertex in the line Table of Contents 128 Global Mapper User s Manual The Hide Extra Label Text Displayed Under Road Icons option allows you to control whether or n
299. ered POLYGON_CROP_FOLDER_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use as a folder name before the actual filename or the special values lt Area Display Label gt ONLY_GENERATE_METADATA GEOTIFF JPEG and PNG only specifies that only metadata files like world files TAB files and PRJ files should be created for this file This is useful for things like generating world and TAB files from GeoTIFF files without doing a whole new export Just make the output filename the same as the loaded file to create the metadata for COMPRESSION GeoTIFF only specifies the type of compression to use for the generated TIFF file If you do not provide a compression value the default compression for each type will be used The following values are supported NONE Do not compress the output LZW Use LZW lossless compression on the output JPEG Use JPEG in TIFF lossy compression Only works for 24 bit RGB output Use QUALITY parameter to set quality setting PACKBITS Use Packbits lossless compression Only works for 8 bit palette based output Table of Contents 267 Global Mapper User s Manual DEFLATE Use Deflate ZIP lossless compression on the output e USE_LZW GEOTIFF only DEPRECATED use COMPRESSION instead specifies that LZ W compression should be used for th
300. es Current View SAVE PROJECTION Saves the Current Global Projection to a PRJ File SET BG COLOR Sets the Background Color SET LAYER OPTIONS Updates Display Options of Loaded Layer SET LOG FILE Sets the Name of the Log File SET VERT DISP OPTS Sets the Vertical Display Options SHOW _3D VIEW Displays the 3D View Window UNLOAD ALL Unloads All Currently Loaded Data UNLOAD LAYER Unloads a Single Layer VAR LOOP END Ends a Loop of Commands Over a Range of Values VAR LOOP START Start a Loop of Commands Over a Range of Numeric Values e Special Parameter Types Attribute Names Projection Specification e Samples Crop Merge and Reproject 4 USGS DRGs into new GeoTIFF and JPEG files Generate Contours from all USGS DEMs in a Folder and Export them to DXF and Shape files Reclassify Features Based on an Attribute and Display Label General Overview Global Mapper script files allow the user to create custom batch processes that make use of the functionality built in to Global Mapper From a script one can import data in any of the numerous formats supported by the software reproject that data if desired and export it to a new file Global Mapper script files consist of a series of command lines Each command line begins with a command A series of parameter value pairs should follow the command These pairs should be written as parameter value No spaces should exist before or after the eq
301. es must be between 0 and 5 with 0 1 and 2 being the only levels supported by most applications e SPLIT_INTO_FOLDERS DTED only write each column out to separate folders by longitude Use SPLIT_INTO_FOLDERS YES to enable this behavior e COMPRESSION GeoTIFF only specifies the type of compression to use for the generated TIFF file If you do not provide a compression value then no compression will be used NONE Do not compress the output LZW Use LZW lossless compression on the output DEFLATE Use Deflate ZIP lossless compression on the output e LAS_VERSION LIDAR_LAS only specifies what version of LAS file to write out This would be 1 1 1 2 1 3 or 1 4 If you don t specify a version the lowest version that will support all of the provided options will be used typically 1 1 or 1 2 e VERT_CS_CODE LIDAR_LAS only specifies the vertical coordinate system 1 e vertical datum to store in the LAS file to specify what the elevations are referenced to Use the EPSG code like 5103 Table of Contents 256 Global Mapper User s Manual for NAVD88 If you don t specify a value and the source files used all use the same known system that will be used Note that no vertical datum conversion is done this is just to supply metadata e VERT_CITATION LIDAR_LAS only specifies the text description to store in the Lidar LAS file for the vertical coordinate system for the elevations If nothing is supplied the default one
302. es of gray up to white with a value of 255 Table of Contents 37 Global Mapper User s Manual Grayscale Min is White Palette This palette creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image White will be stored as zero with varying shades of gray up to black with a value of 255 The Vertical Units field allows the user to select the vertical units to use when exporting elevation data i e meters or feet Any input data not in the selected vertical units will be automatically converted on export The Resolution section allows the user to selected the grid spacing to use when generating the GeoTIFF The default value is the average of the grid spacings of all the currently loaded raster and elevation overlays If the Always Generate Square Pixels option is checked the smaller of the specified x and y resolutions will be used for both the x and y resolution Forcing square pixels ensures that the resultant GeoTIFF file will look good even in software that is not able to deal with pixels that aren t square If you d like to specify the spacing in units other than those of the currently selected view export projection press the Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units button If you want to generate a GeoTIFF file corresponding to a particular scale relative to the selected DPI value see below you can check the Export at the Fixed Scale option and then specify the scale to use For example if you speci
303. ess Cti Enter for New Line of Text Character Encoding is0 2859 1 W Create Compressed KMZ File Recommended Hide Point Features by Default When Loading File W Use Displayed Point Symbols Rather than Push Pin for Points Display Labels for Area and Line Features Highlight Areas in Google Earth when the Cursor Goes Over Them Generate Index KML File Good for Large Datasets The 3D Line Export 3D Area Export and 3D Point Export sections allow the user to control whether or not area line and point features with elevation values associated with them are drawn at the terrain surface or at the elevation values associated with the feature You can specify whether the elevation values are relative to ground level or sea level if drawing the features above the terrain If area features are drawn above the terrain the Extrude Areas option allows you to control whether or not they will also be extruded which means they will extend back to the terrain surface making them look like solid 3D features If this option is not checked the areas will just be drawn in space as a surface and not a 3D closed object If the Fake 2D Area Heights to Maintain Area Draw Order option is checked exported 2D area features will be assigned fake elevation values in order to attempt to get them to layer properly when displayed in Google Earth This is only Table of Contents 65 Global Mapper User s Manual necessary if you have overlapping areas that do not di
304. etCapabilities URL such as http wms jpI nasa gov wms cgi for the JPL WMS data server Once you ve entered the URL press the Get List of Available Data Layers button to query the server and populate the data control with the available data layers on that server Then simply select the data layer and style that you want and press OK to have it added to the available data source list Once a Table of Contents 15 Global Mapper User s Manual source is added you can use the Remove Source button to remove it from the list of available data sources at a later time If you need to specify additional options for the WMS server such as forcing a particular image format to be used add those parameters after the Service Name parameter For example to force the use of the JPG format you might specify a Service Name parameter of WMS amp format image jpeg To force a particular projection that the server supports to be used include a SRS parameter like WMS amp SRS EPSG 26905 to force the use of the UTM projection with the NAD83 datum and zone 5N You can also right click on the added WMS layer in the list of sources and set a maximum zoom level in meters per pixel for the layer For example you can specify a maximum zoom level of 5 0 meters per pixel so when loading data from the source no tiles with a resolution greater than 5 0 meters per pixel will be downloaded This is useful for sources that don t specify themselves what the maximum resolution s
305. eters you can select whether to measure cut and fill volumes within some specified distance of the selected line or within the specified area If you are measuring along a line you can specify the cut heights to use at each vertex individually or use the same cut base height for each vertex relative either to the ground at each vertex or relative to sea level Whichever option you choose the heights will be interpolated between line vertices to get a smoothly varying cut height If measuring within an area there is also an option to perform multiple cut and fill calculations between a range of cut base height values If you choose this option the results will be displayed in a table at the end of the operation so you can see the results of each calculation Once you have your volume calculation setup and you press ok to calculate it the volume of earth that would be needed to fill any space below the cut surface fill volume is reported along with the volume of earth that is above the cut surface cut volume After viewing the reported volumes you have the option to save a new feature with the measurement values If measuring the cut and fill volumes within an area feature you can also check the Find Area Cut Height Where Cut and Fill Volumes are Equal to find the approximate cut height where the same amount of dirt would have to be cut out as filled This is useful for selecting a cut height at which no dirt needs to be hauled off or brought in
306. etetsserttste eee ee The Open Spatial Database dialog allows the user to select the connection parameters that will be used to open an enterprise spatial database Table of Contents 111 Global Mapper User s Manual The Name drop down list contains all of the spatial database connections that are currently defined Click the New button to define a new spatial database connection When the button is clicked the Database Connection Dialog will be displayed After you finish setting up a new connection that name of that connection will be added to the list and become the selected connection The User field specifies the user ID required to connect to the database If the selected database connection has a predefined user ID then that value will be displayed in this field You can override this value if needed If you type in a different user ID the stored database connection definition will not be changed Use the Password field to specify the password required to connect to the database If the selected database connection has a predefined password then that value will be automatically entered into this field You can override this value if needed If you types in a different password the stored database connection definition will not be changed After you have selected a connection and entered a user ID and password click the Open button to bring up the Spatial Database Import Options Dialog to choose a table from the database
307. etup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export JPG2000 Command The Export JPG2000 command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a JPG2000 format file JPG2000 files are highly compressed and great for storing things like satellite imagery There is no size restriction on exported JPG2000 files so you can store many terabytes worth of imagery within a single highly compressed JPG2000 file When selected the command displays the JPG2000 Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and target compression ration a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export If you would like to generate a lossless JPG2000 format file simply slide the Target Compression Ratio slider all the way to the right 1 1 target compression ration Table of Contents 41 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export JPEG2000 Elevation Command The Export JPEG2000 Elevation com
308. evation 100 METERS above Ground Fresnel one Specification W Check Clearance with Respect to First Fresnel Zone Frequency GHz 5 Percent Clear 60 Earth Curvature Ignore Earth Curvature Atmospheric Corectior i 333330035 The earth curvature settings are used to simulate the curvature of the earth when performing line of sight analysis For short distances the curvature typically doesn t affect the path profile much but the effect over lange distances can be significant Atmospheric comection it used to account for the effect the earth s atmosphere has on different kinds of transmissions For example a value of 1 333 i often used to emulate how microwave transmissions travel through the atmosphere mM Exclude Endpoints hen Finding Minimum Clearance The From Sight Elevation section allows the user to select the height at the start position left side of graph to use in the line of sight calculations This height can be specified in either feet or meters above the ground or above sea level The To Sight Elevation section provides the same functionality for the end position right side of graph The Fresnel Zone Specification section allows you to have the line of sight analysis also check that a certain portion the Percent Clear value of the first Fresnel zone for a transmission of a particular frequency is clear The typical standard is that good visibility requires that at least 60 the default of the fi
309. evation data to a file The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to file to save the data to e TYPE type of elevation file we re exporting to e ARCASCIIGRID export an Arc ASCII Grid format file BIL export to a BIL format file simple binary format with header BT export to a BT Binary Terrain format grid file DTED export to DTED format grid files DXF_3DFACE export a DXF 3D face format file DXF_MESH export a 3D DXF mesh format file DXF_POINT export a 3D DXF point format file ERDAS export to an Erdas Imagine IMG format file FBX export to Open Flight FBX format file FLOATGRID export a Float Grid format file GEOSOFT_GRID export to a Geosoft grid format file GEOTIFF export to a GeoTIFF format file GLOBAL_MAPPER_GRID export to a Global Mapper Grid format file e GRAVSOFT_GRID export to a Gravsoft Grid format file HF2 export to a HF2 HFZ format file IDRISIL_RASTER export to an Idrisi elevation format file LEVELLER_HF export to a Leveller heightfield file LIDAR_LAS export to a Lidar LAS file e MAPMAKERTERRAIN export to a MapMaker Terrain format file NITF NITF format terrain file ROCKWORKS_GRID export to a RockWorks Grid format file STL export to a STL format file SURFERGRID export to a Surfer Grid format file The FORMAT parameter specifies whether it is an ASCII or binary format Surfer Grid file TERRAGE
310. export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Google Maps Tiles Command The Export Google Maps Tiles command allows the user to export any loaded datato JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required for display in using the Google Maps interface This command will create both the image tiles and a sample HTML file for displaying the data with the Google Maps interface You can just load the HTML file into your web browser to view the data once the export is over You can also customize the HTML file however you need to When you select the command the Google Maps Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in your web browser the zoom level setup the Google Maps API key to use the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 39 Google Maps Options Export Bounds Data Set Name Blue Springs DEM m Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution to use for the maximum detail level in the exported tiles The default selection will preserve Full detail for any loaded rasterelevation data set Level 14 9 6 meters pixel Number of Zoom Levels to Use 5 a Google Maps API Key Enter the Google Maps API key to include in the generate
311. f you don t provide a value then all available features will be exported For the SHAPEFILE format you must specify exactly one of the below For other formats you can specify a comma delimited list of the following like SHAPE_TYPE AREAS LINES e AREAS export area features LINES export line features POINTS export point features GEN_PRJ_FILE specifies that a projection PRJ file should be generated in addition to the output file Set this to YES to cause the projection file to be generated Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES will cause no PRJ file to be generated GEN_AUX_XML_FILE specifies that an ESRI aux xml projection file should be generated in addition to the data file Use GEN_ AUX_XML_FILE YES to turn on GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you
312. f you have an attribute named CFCC and you want to match when the value of that attribute starts with an A you can use COMPARE_STR CFCC A as your parameter You can add multiple COMPARE_STR parameters to a single command to combine multiple criteria for your search See special Attribute Name parameter details for special attribute names to compare against e CASE_SENSITIVE specifies whether or not text comparisons are case sensitive or not Use CASE_SENSITIVE YES to enable by default comparisons are not case sensitive GENERATE_WATERSHED Table of Contents 282 Global Mapper User s Manual The GENERATE_WATERSHED command allows for the generation of a watershed including stream flow and optionally watershed areas for each stream segment The following parameters are supported by the command e STREAM_THRESHOLD specifies the number of cells that have to drain to a particular location before that location is considered to be part of the stream network e MAX_DEPTH specifies the maximum depression depth in meters that will be filled prior to calculating the watershed This is needed to prepare a terrain surface for flow analysis so that a continuous flow can be found Note that while using a large MAX_DEPTH value may generate better results it could also cause the process to take a lot longer GEN_AREAS generate watershed area features for each found stream segment outlining the area that drains into that stream Enabled by
313. f zero You can also generate 3D path profiles for existing line features by selecting the line feature in the Digitizer Tool right clicking then selecting the Generate Path Profile From Line option on the menu that is displayed Table of Contents 190 Global Mapper User s Manual E Path Profile Line of Sight File Options Calculate From Pos 39 3 52269 N 94 26 24246 W 7 z mi on Location 39 3 00141 N 94 25 71606 W Elev 311 70 m Dist 1 228 km 290 m 265 m 200 m 0 5 km 1 0 km 1 5 km 2 0 km zt Line of Sight Cutand Fill Volumes The Path Profile Line of Sight dialog displays the 3D path profile and provides several options related to the profile A vertical scale is displayed on the left hand side of the profile window The start and end coordinates of the path are displayed at the top of the profile window If more than two points are in the path the intermediate points will be marked in the profile window with a yellow dot These intermediate points can be toggled on and off using an option available by right clicking on the path profile window Also note that this dialog is resizable If you have water display enabled on the Vertical Options tab of the Configuration dialog and there would be water along the path that will be displayed as well Moving your cursor over the profile window displays information about the current cursor location along the profile including the position and profile ele
314. file GIF a GIF format file with associated world file GLOBAL_MAPPER_CATALOG a Global Mapper Map Catalog file GLOBAL_MAPPER_GRID a Global Mapper Grid format file e GML a GML format file GNIS Geographics Names Information Service GNIS file GPS_TRACKMAKER a GPS TrackMaker format file GXF Geosoft Grid ASCII GXF file GPX GPS eXchange Format file HDF an HDF format raster or grid file like ASTER DEM or ASTER VNIR imagery e HELAVA_DEM a Helava DEM file e HYDRA_GRID a Hydra Grid file HYPACK_MATRIX a Hypack Matrix format file IBCAO Arctic bathymetry in NetCDF format IDRISI_RASTER Idrisi raster elevation format file IGF_DIS an IGF DIS format file INM_3TX an INM 3TX grid file INTERGRAPH_COT Intergraph COT format file JDEM a Japanese DEM mem file JPEG a JPEG file with an associated world file JPEG2000 a JPEG 2000 file KML a KML KMZ file LAZ a LASZIP compressed Lidar LAS file LIDAR_LAS a LAS file with LIDAR data e LOWRANCE_USR a Lowrance USR format file LULC USGS Land Use and Land Cover vector data file MAPINFO a MapInfo MIF MID of TAB MAP vector data collection e MAPMAKERTERRAIN a MapMaker terrain file e MARPLOT_MIE a MarPlot MIE format file Table of Contents 285 Global Mapper User s Manual e MAPTECH a MapTech BSB Topo or Aerial format file e MICRODEM_DEM a MicroDEM created DEM file MI
315. file _ine of Sight File Right click below to change vertical display units or manually specify startend positions From Pos 376077 8 4322 14 4 To Pos 382594 3 4316723 Minimum Clearance 59 6 ft at 376402 7 4322515 4 05m Om tom 2 0m 2 65mi 3 0m 3 5m 4 0m 4 7 mi Help 0K Pressing the Cut and Fill Volumes button brings up the Setup Volume Calculation Parameters dialog allowing the user to perform a cut and fill volume analysis along the path using loaded terrain data See the Measure Tool for more information on cut and fill volume setup Once you have performed a cut and fill analsyis the cut line will be displayed on the path profile allowing easy visualization of the cut and fill areas along the path as evidenced by the picture below Table of Contents 194 Global Mapper User s Manual Cut Volume 974 73702 cubic yards Fill volume 56 505643 cubic yards The measurements have also been copied to the clipboard For your convenience 125 ft 250 ft 375 ft 500 ft 625 ft Line of Sight CutandFill Volumes KF View Shed Tool x The View Shed command selects the view shed analysis tool as the current tool This tool allows registered users to perform a view shed analysis using loaded elevation grid data with a user specified transmitter location height and radius All areas within the selected radius that have a clear line of sight to the transmitter are colored with a user specified color To perform
316. fy a scale value of 25000 each inch in the output an inch being the number of pixels equal to the specified DPI value will be approximately equivalent to 25 000 inches on the ground The DPI Value to Save in Image option allows you to specify a DPI dots per inch value to save in the TIFF header Some software in particular graphics editing software makes use of this value when sizing TIFF files for printout Specifying the default value of O will result in the DPI tag not being saved to the TIFF file at all The Compression selection allows you to select what type of compression to use for the selected export file type The available compression types are as follows e No Compression The exported data is not compressed Packbits The palette based image will be compressed using the lossless Packbits algorithm e LZW Compression The data will be compressed using the lossless LZW algorithm Note that not all applications can load a LZW compressed GeoTIFF file e CCITT Fax4 The 1 bit black and white image will be compressed using the lossless CCITT Fax4 algorithm e JPEG Compression The 24 bit color image will be compressed using the lossy JPEG algorithm Note that not all applications support loading JPEG in TIFF encoded files If the Make Background Void Pixels Transparent option is checked for 8 bit palette 24 bit RGB or JPEG in TIFF files an alpha channel will be added to the created GeoTIFF file to indicate which pixels s
317. fy the name projection of the file using either the PROJ PROJ_LNAME PROJ_EPSG_CODE or PROJ_FILENAME parameters RECTIFY specifies the rectification method to use for rectifying this file Valid value are LINEAR HELMERT AFFINE POLYNOMIAL and TRIANGULATION If you do not specify a rectification type but do provide at least two ground control points best rectification method will automatically be chosen based on the number of control points specified Table of Contents 291 Global Mapper User s Manual e ALLOW_SELECTION set to NO to disable selection of features from this layer using either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools IMPORT_ARCHIVE The IMPORT_ARCHIVE command imports a data file from a tar gz archive for later use The only time you should ever need to use the IMPORT_ARCHIVE command is when you only want to load some of the data inside a tar gz archive For the typical case of just loading everything in an archive use the IMPORT command with AUTO as the value for the TYPE parameter The following parameters are supported by the command e ARCHIVE_FILENAME full path to the archive file to load the data from e FILENAME filename to load from the archive You can include wildcard characters like and in the value to match on multiple files e NOTE All other parameters that are supported by the IMPORT command are also supported by this command IMPORT_ASCII The IMPORT_ASCII command imports data from a generic
318. g density values from the point features in the selected layer You can setup the density grid to be based on a simple point count or as a sum of the numeric values of some attribute value for the points within some search radius The Density Grid Setup dialog pictured below appears when you select this option allowing you to control the density grid calculation Table of Contents 147 Global Mapper User s Manual Description BLUE SPRINGS MO Density Grid Population Field lt Paint Count gt F Search Radius 5 meters Density Type Gaussian Kernel Default Shader Default Shared Shader Specify Bounds Cancel a The Population Field option allows you to control whether a simple point count or attribute value is used to compute the density grid The Search Radius option allows you to specify how far from a grid sample location a point can be and still be considered as part of the value The Density Type option allows you to specify whether a weighted distance Gaussian distribution is used this gives much prettier results or a simple in or out of radius calculation is used The Shader option allows you to control which elevation shader is used to render the computed grid You will often want to select a specific shader rather than using the default shared one as the data won t typically render well with other loaded grid layers e Create Area Features from Equal Values in Selected
319. ge File BSE A LE f Cancel Select File Type to Convert To Select Type Select Type 4rclnfo ASCH Grid File BIL Band Ineleaved Imagery BIL 16 bit Elevation Samples BIL 32 bit Elevation Samples BIF Band Interleaved Fisel BSO Band Sequential Imagery DEM USGS ASCII CEM Formati Cancel Batch Convert Source Files Destination Files nk m Direct GADATAIMAGERYSZ5N80W Elevation Drape 1 sats G DATASIMAGER Y Bathurst Inlet North tif G Be same eee as file Cancel G ADATANMAGERYSBurlington Standard MatColor RS Rn GADATAMMAGE A Burlington Standard NatColor C Specify output directory Help G ADATAMMAGERYSC3009213 NW 20 zip eee r GADATAMMAGERYANTS95607_95403_01 R51 Change GSDATANIMAGERY compressed tif example tif T i GADATAMMAGER ev11656_land_shallow_ topo gt File Names GOA TASIMAGE RY isla chariaral tit f Use Source File Name G ADATAMMAGERY S051 20a tif GSDATANMAGERY seco_resamp_rect tif G DATAMMAGER YSsmallliz tif Use Quad Name Append to Filename M Projection f Use Source File Projection Specify Projection Change Setup Gridding i e Tiling Setup Sample Spacing Horz Datum Source D atum Use Other Source Files As Filler Add Files Pemoye Selected Generate Projection PRAJ Files Generate World Files TF JG Add Directory Remove All Force Square Pixels in Output Remove Coll
320. gend Grid if Displayed Save Vector Data if Displayed i Generate orld File i Generate Projection PAJ File i Make Background oid Pixels Transparent Cancel Help Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Raster Image Spatial Database Command The Export Raster Spatial Database command allows the user to export any loaded raster image data to a table in a Spatial Database Global Mapper can export raster imagery to the following spatial databases e Esri Enterprise Geodatabase ArcSDE e Esri File Geodatabase e Esri Personal Geodatabase Export RockWorks Grid Command The Export RockWorks Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a RockWorks Grid format file When selected the command displays the RockWorks Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the Table of Contents 47 Global Mapper User s Manual portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export SRTM Command The Export SRTM HGT commands allow the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to HGT format files to the SRTM specifications including file naming project
321. h allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer Grid Binary v6 Format Command The Export Surfer Grid Binary v6 Format command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a binary format Surfer Grid file compatible with Surfer v6 and above Binary format Surfer Grids will be smaller than their ASCII format cousins so if you can use the binary format I would suggest it When selected the command displays the Surfer Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 48 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer Grid Binary v7 Format Command The Export Surfer Grid Binary v7 Format command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a binary format Surfer Grid file compatible with Surfer v7 and above Binary format Surfer Grids will be smaller than their ASCII format cousins so if you can use the binary format I would suggest it When selected the command displays the Surfer Grid Export Options dialog which a
322. h export should actually be cropped to the polygonal boundary of the area or should just use the rectangular bounds of the area s boundary Note that when you select a filename to save to after this the filename portion of the selected name will be pre pended to whatever is used as the grid cell name So if you want just your selected item i e attribute name etc and nothing prepended only specify a period and then the extension when selecting the base output filename like jpg for JPG output If the user chooses to breakup the data into a grid then the options in the Grid Naming section will apply and allow the user to control how the individual grid tile files are named The following naming options are available e Sequential Numbering Row Major Order With this option a number starting at 1 for the top left tile will be appended to the selected export filename The number will increase across each row e Separate Row Column Letters or Numbers With this option separate indicators will be appended to the selected export filename for the row and column If letters are selected the letters A Z will be used If more than 27 letters are needed multiple letters will be used e g AA AB etc If numbers are used the number values will be pre pended with zeroes in order to make the numeric values have the same number of characters for every output tile If the Reverse checkbox is marked the order or the numbers or letters used will be
323. had pressed the Add GCP to List button Reference Images The Reference Images portion of the Image Rectifier dialog allows the user to view what is currently loaded in the main Global Mapper view and to enter ground coordinates by left clicking on an appropriate place on the view This can be very useful for doing things such as rectifying a satellite photo by clicking on the Zoomed View at a road intersection to select the pixel coordinates then clicking on the intersection of those roads on a vector file loaded into the main view By default when you click near a vector feature in the Zoomed View the location will snap to that vector feature You can disable this behavior by holding down the ALT key when clicking If you hold down the SHIFT key when clicking the clicked coordinates will be rounded to the nearest 30 seconds for arc degree units and the nearest 1000 ground units for other coordinate units Holding down the CTRL key when clicking the left mouse button will cause the Zoomed Image view will be recentered on the associated point and also fill in the pixel X and Y coordinatess automatically if there have been enough control points entered to convert the coordinates You can also zoom and pan the Reference Images view in a manner identical to the Zoomed Images view Ground Control Point GCP Entry This portion of the dialog is where you actually enter the ground control points GCPs that define where the image is on the earth Typically
324. han the specified compare value Otherwise the value is marked as invalid This is useful for keeping elevation values where something like a return count from another layer is greater than some value The Compare Value on the dialog corresponds to the value to compare to o Filter Keep First if Second Less Than Compare Value value in the new layer is assigned to the value in the first layer only if the second layer value is valid and is less than the specified compare value Otherwise the value is marked as invalid This is useful for keeping elevation values where something like an error value from another layer is less than some value The Compare Value on the dialog corresponds to the value to compare to Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to combine terrain layers Generate Contours Command The Generate Contours command allows the user to generate equally spaced contour lines from any loaded elevation grid data When selected the command displays the Contour Generation Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the contour generation process Table of Contents 178 Global Mapper User s Manual Contour Interval 5 METERS Only Generate Contour Lines at Specified Height r ADVANCED Contour Interval Multiplier Minor Contours 2 Major Contours 10 r Hlevation Range Default is Entire Loaded Range Generate contours within following range of elevations 214 to 330 METERS a Sta
325. he export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export The township range section and meridian values saved for each area feature exported are derived either from the attribute values for the area feature or the display label for Survey Section area types The following attribute values names are recognized for each field e Township Attributes TOWNSHIP or TWP e Township Direction Attributes TDIR must have value of N or S e Range Attributes RANGE or RNG e Range Direction Attributes RDIR must have value of E or W e Section Attributes SECTION SECT or SEC e Meridian Attributes MERIDIAN or MER Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command The Export PLS CADD XYZ File command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a PLS CADD XYZ format file These files can be used with the PLS CADD software application When selected the command displays the PLS CADD XYZ Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Polish MP cGPSMapper Command Table of Contents 71 Global Mapper User s Manual TUTORIAL ALERT Getting S
326. he following options are available e True North Any measured bearings will be reported relative to True North This means that a bearing of O will point directly at the North Pole and bearings of 180 will point directly at the South Pole e Magnetic North Any measured bearings will be reported relative to Magnetic North This means that a bearing of O will point directly at the magnetic North Pole rather than the geographic North Pole All other bearings are relative to that so a bearing of 180 is exactly away from the magnetic North Pole The magentic Nort Pole slowly meanders around but is not coincident with the geographic North Pole e Grid North Any measured bearings will be reported relative to Grid North This means that a bearing of O will point directly up on the Y axis of your current display projection to the top of the screen assuming you don t have any rotation enabled 90 will be directly to the right along the X axis etc If your projection is one that is orthogonal to the lat lon grid like Geographic or Mercator the cardinal directions 0 90 180 and 270 will be the same but in between could vary due to scale differences Feature Info Tool in The Feature Info command selects the Feature Information tool as the current tool This tool allows you to select vector features areas lines and points by clicking on or near them Once selected a dialog displaying information about the selected item appears To pick
327. he native projection system of the layer being loaded e ZOOM_DISPLAY specifies when the map should be displayed and when it should be hidden based on the display zoom scale This command will be formatted as a name from the list below followed by 2 numeric paramters For example use ZOOM_DISPLAY SCALE 25000 0 to have a map display only when zoomed in below 1 25000 scale ALWAYS always display the map The numeric parameters are ignored e PERCENT display the map when the map bounding box is a certain percentage of the screen size For example use ZOOM_DISPLAY PERCENT 0 10 0 to display the map when its bounding box is at least 10 of the screen size PIXEL_SIZE display the map when each display pixel is less than some number of meters in size For example use PIXEL_SIZE SCALE 10 0 to display the map when the current display resolution is 10 meters per pixel or less higher resolution SCALE display the map when the current display is at or below a certain scale For example use ZOOM_DISPLA Y SCALE 25000 0 to display the map when the current draw scale is at or below 1 25000 SCALE_RANGE display the map when the current display is below a range of scale value For example use ZOOM_DISPLAY SCALE_RANGE 25000 100000 to display the map when the current draw scale is between 1 25000 and 1 100000 e COLOR_INTENSITY elevation and raster only specifies the color intensity to use when adjusting the brightness of pix
328. herefore produces relatively smooth edges with hardly any jaggies e Bicubic Interpolation a more sophisticated method that produces smoother edges than bilinear interpolation Here a new pixel is a bicubic function using 16 samples in the nearest 4 x 4 neighborhood of the sample in the original image e Box Average 3x3 4x4 5x5 and 7x7 the box average methods simply find the average values of the nearest 9 for 3x3 16 for 4x4 25 for 5x5 or 49 for 7x7 samples and use that as the value of the sample location These methods are very good for resampling data at lower resolutions The lower the resolution of your export is as compared to the original the larger box size you should use The Shader option allows you to choose which elevation shader is to be used for coloring the cell values within this layer By default all gridded layers will share the elevation shader selected on the toolbar but there may be certain situations where you want to color one layer differently than the others and exclude it from the loaded elevation range One common example is a gridded layer that actually has non elevation data The Alter Elevation Values tab pictured below allows you to modify how elevation values from the selected layer s are interpreted providing you a means to offset all of the elevations in the layer s by a given value and to restrict the range of elevation values that are treated as valid Table of Contents 167 Global Mapp
329. hould be and just go blank when you overzoom them You can also right click on the added WMS layer in the list of sources and check whether or not to download as tiles when drawing or to download a single image for each draw operation The default is to use tiles as that allows caching so that if you revisit an area at the same zoom level you don t have to redownload it However if you have a source that adds a watermark to each tile this may be undesirable Uncheck this option to disable the use of tiles for display They will still be used for export as the size of exports makes it impossible to fetch all at once in many cases Select WMS Data Source to Load Server UAL Get Capabilities Address http wms ipLnasa gow wms cal Service Mame Most use whS WMS Get List of Available Data Layers OnE ath Web Map Server WMS Global Mosaic pan sharpened WMS Global Mosaic not pan sharpened CONUS mosaic of 1990 MALE dataset lt STYLE Pseudo color image Uses IA and Visual bands 542 mapping lt STYLE Reabcolor image Uses the visual bands 327 mapping lt STYLE Visual Red band grayscale lt STYLE Visual Green band grayscale lt STYLE Visual Blue band grayscale lt STYLE Near lA band 1 Landsat band 4 grayscale lt STYLE Near lA band 2 Landsat band 5 grayscale lt STYLE Near lA band 2 Landsat band 7 grayscale SATH reflectance magnitude 30m cancel If you choose the OSM Google Maps
330. hould be treated as transparent Note that this will create a larger file and not all applications will support TIFF files with alpha channels If the ADVANCED Use Tile Rather than Strip Orientation option is checked the GeoTIFF file will use a tile based organization rather than a strip scanline based orientation A tile based orientation has advantages when zoomed in on a layer for display but can be slower when zoomed further out By default a tile size of 128x128 will be used but you can customize this by creating a DWORD registry key value HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper GeoTIFFExport_TileSize with the desired tile size like 256 for example for 256x256 tiles If the Save Scale Elevation Legend Grid if Displayed option is checked the distance scale elevation legend and coordinate grid will be saved to the GeoTIFF file except vertical GeoTIFFs if they are configured to show up in the main display Table of Contents 38 Global Mapper User s Manual If the Save Vector Data if Displayed option is checked any loaded vector data that is configured to show up in the main display will be saved to the GeoTIFF file except vertical GeoTIFFs If the Generate TFW File option is checked a TIFF world file will be generated with the same name as the GeoTIFF file with a tfw extension The TFW file is used by software that is not capable of reading the placement of the GeoTIFF file directly from the GeoTIFF header If the Interpolat
331. ied the information beep will play RESTORE_LAST_SAVED_VIEW The RESTORE LAST SAVED VIEW command restores the last view saved with the SAVE _CURRENT_VIEW command or the last view saved with the View gt Save Current View menu command in the Global Mapper user interface This command does not take any parameters RUN_COMMAND The RUN_COMMAND command allows you to execute any program on Windows with a set of parameters The following parameters are supported by the command e COMMAND _LINE full command line to run If you need to use quotation marks in your command line instead use apostrophes 1 e rather than and they will be converted to quotes prior to running the command Note to run a DOS shell command like mkdir you will need to run it via cmd exe like COMMAND_LINE cmd C mkdir C temp export test new folder note use of apostrophes for quotes e WAIT _FOR_ COMPLETE specifies whether or not the script should wait for your command line run to complete prior to continuing The default is to wait for the command to complete 1 e WAIT_FOR_COMPLETE YES If you just want the command line to run and then immediately let the script continue processing use WAIT_FOR_COMPLETE NO Here is a sample that runs another instance of Global Mapper and loads a file Table of Contents 297 Global Mapper User s Manual RUN_COMMAND COMMAND _LINE c program files x86 GlobalMapper12 global_mapperl2 exe c temp SAVE_CURRENT_VI
332. iles on and off when viewing the PDF file e Embed Fonts Specifies that any fonts used that might not be on every system will be embedded in the PDF file Using this option will basically guarantee that your text will display the same on any system but unless you are using an unusual font the increase in PDF file size might not be worth it as most users would have your font anyway If any of the point features being exported contain an attribute with LINK in the attribute name and a value either pointing to a valid web URL or a local file then a clickable hot spot will be embedded in the generated PDF file allowing you to click the location and pull up the web page or file from inside Acrobat Reader The Gridding panel allows the user to split up the data into regularly spaced tiles on export if desired rather than just exporting a single file The Export Bounds panel allows the user to select what portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able capture the screen to an image file Export Raster and Elevation Data The commands on the Export Raster and Elevation Data submenu allow the user to export loaded raster and elevation data to various formats Export Arc ASCII Grid Command Table of Contents 28 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export Arc ASCII Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to an Arc ASCII Grid format file When selected the comma
333. ill move the feature s diagonally If after moving a feature you decide that you want to undo the move simply select the feature s that you want moved back and select the Restore Original Shape from the right click popup menu If you need to shift offset selected features a particular distance you can also simply right click when the feature s to move are selected and select the Shift Offset Selected Feature s option This will bring up a dialog allowing you to specify a distance to shift the selected features by in both the X and Y direction or Table of Contents 216 Global Mapper User s Manual some distance along a specified bearing The bounding coordinates of the feature in the current projection coordinate system will be displayed at the bottom of the dialog that appears to help you calculate an appropriate shift offset distance Changing the Shape of Area and Line Features You can change the shape of area and line features in several different ways You ll first have to enable the Show Area and Line Vertices option Shift V is a keyboard shortcut to toggle this setting before having access to the features described below You ll also need to select the vertices to work with before performing any of the described operations except inserting new vertices The following options are available for reshaping area and line features Edit Length of Area and Line Feature Segments This option allows you to click on a segment of an ar
334. in and smaller as you zoom out to maintain the same width in ground units In addition the Show Labels for Lines of This Type When Present option allows users to turn line labels off on a type by type basis The Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option allows users to turn on off the fattening of road lines when zoom in tight on them Table of Contents 131 Global Mapper User s Manual The New Type button allows the user to create a new line feature type and specify how it should be displayed The Edit Type button allows the user to edit line types that were previously created with the New Type button and the Delete Type button allows the user to remove line types that were previously created with the New Type button With the Attributes button you can specify a set of default attributes and values to use for new features of this type created using the Digitizer Tool If you right click on the list of types a menu will appear allowing you to save and restore your style settings using a style file This provides an easy way to setup a set of styles to use then restore them at a later date for use with a particular set of data Configuration Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Line Types Right Click for More Options Collector Road Contour Line Intermediate Contour Line Major Contour Line Minor oe ee a a Contour Line Supplemen
335. in elevation data e Modify Image Position This allows you to reposition imagery and vector data that was not correctly positioned when loaded including imagery that was manually rectified See the option below if you just want to shift an entire layer by some distance e Setup What Zoom Levels to Display Selected Layer s At This option allows you to control what zoom levels scales that the selected layer s will display at You can choose to have layers only display below a certain zoom scale or between scales or when the map is a certain percentage of the map display size or the map resolution reaches a certain level If you choose to show when the map covers a certain percentage if the upper range is O the map will always show above the bottom range Otherwise it will show between the specified ranges e Shift Selected Layer s a Fixed Distance or Transform Coordinates This option provides a quick way to shift any layer some fixed distance in any direction or to shift layers based on a transformation described in a control point file or via a transformation dialog When selected a dialog is presented allowing you to select the type of transformation to perform The following options are available Shift Layers a Fixed Distance presents a dialog allowing you to specify the distance to shift the selected layers in the X and Y direction or some distance along a particular bearing Table of Contents 145 Global Mapper User s Manual Tr
336. in the normal 2D objects The elevation stored for each vertex point will be the first of the following that is available The elevation associated with the vertex point in question The elevation associated with the entire area line point being exported For example the elevation of a contour line or spot elevation The first elevation obtained by searching the loaded elevation layers at the position of the vertex point A value of 0 0 will be used if no elevation could be obtained via any of the prior methods e COORD_DELIM SIMPLE_ASCTI only specifies the delimeter between coordinates in coordinate lines COMMA coordinates are separated by commas SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons SPACE coordinates are separated by space characters TAB coordinates are separated by tab characters e FEATURE_SEP SIMPLE_ASCII only specifies whether or not to separate vector features with a blank line NONE do not separate vector features BLANK_LINE separate vector features with a blank line Any other text Use the escape sequence n to specify that you want to insert a line break For example to separate features with a blank line then a line with the text NEW FEATURE then another blank line use FEATURE_SEP nNEW FEATURE n e EXPORT_ELEV SIMPLE_ASCII CSV and DXF only specifies whether or not a elevation value should be generated for each vertex A value of EXPORT_ELEV YES will cause elevations to b
337. ine and point geometries based on the data types that are currently in the display Spatial Database Export Options Table Selection Export Bounds Tables CB SSCS Options M Wam Before Replacing Existing Tables Spatial databases do not allow the ming of diferent entitiy types i e points lines and areas within a single table Thus you need to specify which entity types you wish to export and what table to export them ta On the Table Selection tab for vector data export you can specify a table name for each of the data types that are currently in the viewer Note that if you choose an existing table the data in that table will be replaced with the data in the viewer 1 To export polygon features check the Export Areas box and enter a table name in associated entry field If you want to export data to an existing table choose the name from the drop down list 2 To export line features check the Export Lines box and enter a table name in associated entry field If you want to export data to an existing table choose the name from the drop down list 3 To export point features check the Export Points box and enter a table name in associated entry field If you want to export data to an existing table choose the name from the drop down list Place a check next to Warn Before Replacing Existing Tables to be notified when you choose a table that already exists You can choose whether to replace the existing tabl
338. ing this will display a dialog allowing you to either mark all line endpoints that do not connect to an endpoint not an interior vertex of another selected line or those line endpoints that don t connect and are within some distance of another selected line endpoint This is a very useful feature for allowing easy identification and fixing of connectivity issues within loaded vector data Any line endpoints that do not connect based on the selected criteria will be displayed with a blue circle over that endpoint Once you think you have fixed the connectivity issues at a location simply re run the command to find the non connected line endpoints to update the display of the blue circles they are not automatically updated as you join line endpoints Finding Nearby Points If two of more point features are selected the Find Selected Points Within Meters of Other Selected Points option will appear when right clicking Selecting this will display a dialog allowing you to specify a search distance Any selected point features that are within the specified search distance of another selected point feature will be displayed with a blue circle over that point If you delete or move some points to remove duplicates the primary use of this tool simply re run the command to find the to update the display of the blue circles they are not automatically updated as you edit the data Flattening Terrain Using Area Features Table of Contents 226
339. ion and standard sample size for easy use in any SRTM compatible applications When selected the command displays the SRTM Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export STL Command The Export STL command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a STL format file for use with some CAD systems When selected the command displays the STL Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer Grid ASCI Format Command The Export Surfer Grid ASCII Format command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to an ASCII format Surfer Grid file When selected the command displays the Surfer Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel whic
340. ion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export ZMap IsoMap Line Text File Command The Export ZMap IsoMap Line Text File command allows the user to export loaded line features to a ZMap text format file for use with applications like Landmark Graphics and GeoAtlas When selected the command displays the ZMap IsoMap Line Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export This format costs of a header for the file then a header line for each line feature which has the line elevation if available then one line per each input coordinate with the X coordinate followed by the Y coordinate All features will be tagged as contour line types The following is short sample of an output file with a couple of features File exported from Global Mapper using the ZMapt IsoMap Line export l Projection UTM Zone 15 NAD27 meters l OCONTOUR FELLE CNIR 30 d X BASTING y Lr Nee ke La AOS Te OLE OOOOO0R TS ba 205 TO Y NORTHING 2y 2r Lp 21 4205 77 Os I000000EF3 Ly z 20y Ty 0 0 2 LOODO0 OAS 4 2a 3802625118 43216046 769 S80 2497294 AS LOS i 30902321064 4321651 300 380222629 ABZ LOD Ne O34 380202 009 43216357046 3301950383 43Z21656 460 SOUL TL O54 4321657 086 380202 009 4321888 741 SO
341. is RGB or palette based GeoTIFF file LZW compression typically results in much smaller files than the default compression but there may be some software packages that do not yet support LZW encoded GeoTIFF files Specify USE_LZW YES to enable LZW compression e TILE_SIZE GEOTIFF only specifies that the GeoTIFF file should be exported with a tiled organization and use the specified tile size This tile size should be between 8 and 2048 Typical values are 64 128 and 256 e TILE_SIZE JPG2000 only specifies that the JPEG2000 file should internally use tile organization with the given tile size By default an internal tile organization of size 1024x1024 is used Use TILE_SIZE 0 to disable tile organization e SAVE _ SCALE _AND_LEGEND specifies that the distance scale and elevation legend if applicable and enabled for display on the Configuration dialog should be exported to the generated raster file Specify SAVE_SCALE_AND_LEGEND YES to enable this option e BG_TRANSPARENT ECW GEOTIFF JPEG2000 and PNG only specifies that any areas of no data background should be marked as transparent Use BG_TRANSPARENT YES to enable e OVERWRITE_EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE_EXISTING YES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist e EXPORT_SCALE specifies the scale to do the export at You must also specify a DPI value in order to use the EXPORT_SCALE paramete
342. ith 24 bits per pixel but with the raster data compressed using the JPG compression algorithm GeoTIFF Table of Contents 36 Global Mapper User s Manual images generated with this option will maintain good color fidelity and often be highly compressed although they will lose some information as compared to the uncompressed 24 bit RGB option Something else to keep in mind if selecting this option is that many software packages do not yet support GeoTIFF files that use the JPEG in TIFF compression option By default the JPG compression used in the GeoTIFF file uses a quality setting of 75 but you can modify this on the displayed options dialog e Multi band This option generates a raster GeoTIFF file with 1 or more bands of data at either 8 16 or 32 bits per band of data This option is very useful when working with multi spectral imagery with more than 3 bands of data like RGBI or Landsat imagery or data sets with more than 8 bits per color channel If you select this option after hitting OK to start the dialog additional dialogs will be presented allowing you to further setup the multi band export by choosing the input sources for each band in the output image e Black and White This option generates a two color GeoTIFF file with 1 bit per pixel This will generate by far the smallest image but 1f you source image had more than two colors the resulting image will be very poor By default white will be a value of O and black will be a va
343. ither keep the sample spacing of source raster and elevation files when converting the selected or to specify a new sample spacing to resample all of the selected input files at when performing the conversion This option is only available when converting to a raster or gridded elevation format The Horz Datum selection allows the user to choose the horizontal datum that each newly created output file should use By default each output file will use the same horizontal datum as the source file that it was created off of Alternately the user can specify to have all output files created in NAD27 NAD83 WGS72 or WGS84 with the appropriate offset being applied automatically The Vertical Units selection is present only for some conversions and controls the output elevation units The Palette selection is present only for some conversions and controls the palette if any used in the output files The palette values are defined as follows e Image Optimized Palette The palette generated will be an optimal mix of up to 256 colors that will closely represent the full blend of colors in the source images This option will generate the best results but can more than double the export time required if any high color images are present in the export set If all of the input data is palette based and the combined palette of those files has 256 Table of Contents 83 Global Mapper User s Manual colors or less then the combined files of the input file
344. ive space for the installation Space requirements for the data are typically higher depending upon the size of the dataset Download Step 1 Download the Global Mapper software latest version from the Global Mapper website http www globalmapper com by following the Download Free Trial link on the main page Step 2 Go to the directory in which you saved the viewer in Step and select the global_mapper14_setup exe icon Step 3 Double click the icon Select YES to install the program Allow the installation to progress normally and select any defaults it asked for Registration You can freely download the latest version of Global Mapper by following the instructions above However without a valid license several significant functions will be unavailable In particular if you do not obtain a valid license for your copy of Global Mapper you will be subject to the following limitations e You will be unable to export data to any format e You will be limited to loading a maximum of 4 data files at a time With the full version you can load any number of data files simultaneously e You will be unable to view loaded elevation data in 3D e You will be unable to load workspaces e You will be unable to do line of sight calculations using loaded elevation data e You will be unable to perform view shed analysis using loaded elevation data e You will be unable to perform cut and fill volume calculations using loaded elevation data
345. ize Stop Initial Fade In at Pixels in Size 1 for No Fade Start Initial Fade Out E Piels in Size 1 for No Fade 2 Super Qveray Setup m Automatically Grid Export of Large Data Sets so that Google Earth Can Handle Them Better Known as Super Overlays Grid Cell Size Pixels eS M Create Compressed KMZ File Save Map Layout Scale Mangins Grd Legend etc Save Vector Data f Displayed ADVANCED Separate Raster Layers Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Leveller Heightfield Command The Export Leveller Heightfield command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Leveller Heightfield file for use with the Daylon Leveller application When selected the command displays the Leveller Heightfield Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Table of Contents 43 Global Mapper User s Manual Export Lidar LAS Command The Export Lidar LAS command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets
346. jacent data sets can be mosaicked and vector data can be displayed on top of raster and elevation data Choose Open Data Files icon from the Toolbar and select files The registered version Global Mapper has no limit on the number of overlays that can be viewed simultaneously A maximum of four files of any type may be viewed simultaneously in the unregistered version of Global Mapper You can also load all of the files under a directory and all subdirectories under that directory that match a specified filename mask You can do this using the Open All Files in a Directory Tree File menu command Projections and Datums The Global Mapper display space adopts the coordinate system of the first data set opened Subsequent data sets will be transformed to the coordinate system of the first data set loaded or the display projection subsequently selected from the configuration dialog This is a very powerful feature it makes differences in projections and datums transparent to the user This also means that the order in which data sets are loaded can have a significant impact on the appearance of the display This is the most obvious when working with data sets of widely varying scales Table of Contents 110 Global Mapper User s Manual SPATIAL DATABASE SUPPORT Global Mapper can import vector data from and export vector data to the following spatial databases e Esri ArcSDE Geodatabase e Esri File Geodatabase e Esri Personal Geodatabase
347. jection on the Projection tab of the Tools gt Configuration and then use the Save to File button to create a new prj file Then just open the prj file up in Notepad and copy the contents to the lines following the DEFINE _PROJ command line Table of Contents 245 Global Mapper User s Manual The DEFINE_PROJ command is terminated with a single line containing only the text END_DEFINE_PROJ For a sample of the DEFINE _PROJ command in use load some data and then save a Global Mapper workspace file from the File gt Save Workspace menu command Open the resulting gmw file in an editor and you can see how the DEFINE_PROJ command is used to define a view projection and the set it The following parameters are required by the DEFINE_PROJ command e PROJ_NAME specifies the name to associate with the projection DEFINE_SHAPE The DEFINE SHAPE command allows a multi point shape like a polygon to be associated with a name The projection name can then be used in later commands for things like cropping and feathering to polygonal boundaries The DEFINE_SHAPE command consists of a single command line followed by a series of lines describing the series of XY coordinate pairs that define the shape Each line should have a single coordinate value with the X and Y coordinates separated by a comma The DEFINE_SHAPE command is terminated with a single line containing only the text END_DEFINE_SHAPE The following parameters are required by the DEFIN
348. just additional 3D data points constraints This allows you to create flattened areas like lakes and also nice terrain surfaces from things like building models If only 3D area features are present any grid locations outside of the areas will be marked as invalid otherwise the grid locations within areas will just be flattened to the area heights and the remainder of the grid will be generated as usual o Taper 3D Area Features Using Curve Value If you have any area polygon features with elevation in the selected layers that you are gridding and you also checked the option to flatten 3D area features the taper option allows you to specify that rather than making the areas absolutely flat the edges should be tapered with the area elevation existing near the centroid of the area and the elevation Table of Contents 150 Global Mapper User s Manual applied for the area dwindling to zero as you reach the area edge The curve value specifies the exponent to apply to the percent distance a sample location is between the area centroid and the area edge to adjust the height applied at that location Values less than 1 will make the edge steepness progressively greater i e flatter at the middle then steep edges while values larger than one cause the steepness to be near the area centroid and flatter towards the edges while a value of 1 provides for a linear taper For example if you want to simulate a sand bunker for a golf course a value of around
349. l 1840 BESSEL 1841 ITALIA Genova Unknown Bessel 1840 BESSEL 1841 ITALIA Monte Mario Unknown Bessel 1840 BESSEL 1841 GREENWICH Unknown Bessel 1840 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY 6218 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 3 BUKITRIMPAH 219 Besi y s CAMP AREA ASTRO 675 _ intemaional 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 CAMPO INCHAUSPE ARGENTINA 6221 _ Intermational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 CAPE S y O Oa Ceo a CARTHAGE 223 eo e CHAD WG1998 Unkown wes S CROATIA HDKS GRID Unknown Besseli8ti CSJ 67 GUYANE FRANCAISE 6235 _ Iintemational 1909 Hayford Int 1924 1 D 48 SLOVENIA Unknown Bessel 1841 6 DEALUL PISCULUI 1933 ROMANIA 6316 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 Built in Datums 383 I 09 2 Global Mapper User s Manual 6317 Krassovsky O oo DEIR EZ ZOR SYRIA 627 Clakei880dGN O DUTCH RD O O 6289 Besell8s4i O U O EASTER ISLAND 1967 6719 interational 1909 Hayford In 1924 ED50 S 6230 international 1909 Hayford Ind 1924 ED50 NGLAND 6230 jntermational 1909 Hayford In 1924 ED50 FINLAND NORWAY 6230 International 1909 Hayford In 1924 ED50 GREECE 6230 intermational 1909 Hayford Ind 1924 EDSO TALIA 6230 intermational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 ED50 MALTA 6230 intemational1909 Hayford In 1924 ED50 NORTH SEA 6230 jntermational 1909 Hayford In 1924 ED50 NORWAY OFFSHORE N62 6230 International 1909 Ha
350. l Overview e Batch Mode Operation e Comments e Commands ADD MEASURE ATTRS Adds Updates Measure Attributes to Features in a Layer ASSIGN_TYPE Deprecated Use EDIT_VECTOR Instead CALC ATTR Calculate a New Attribute Value Based on Existing Attribute s and a Second Value COMBINE LINES Combines Connected Line Features Into New Lines or Areas Based on Attribute Values COMBINE TERRAIN Combines Two Loaded Terrain Layers to Generate a New Terrain Layer DEFINE PROJ Define a Projection for Later Use DEFINE SHAPE Define a Shape i e Polygon for Later Use DEFINE VAR Define a Variable for Later Use DIR LOOP END Ends a Loop of Commands Over Files in a Directory DIR LOOP START Start a Loop of Commands Over Files in a Directory EDIT MAP CATALOG Creates or Edits a Map Catalog EDIT VECTOR Edit Loaded Vector Features that Match a Type Name Attribute Query EMBED SCRIPT Runs Another Script File Within This Script EXPORT ELEVATION Export Elevation Data to a File EXPORT METADATA Export Metadata for a Layer to a File EXPORT PACKAGE Export Data to a Global Mapper Package File EXPORT PDE Export Data to a PDF File EXPORT RASTER Export Raster and Elevation Data to a File EXPORT VECTOR Export Vector Data to a File e FORCE EXIT Forces Global Mapper to Immediately Exit with a Return Code GENERATE CONTOURS Generate Contours from Elevation Data GENERATE ELEV GRID Generates an Elevati
351. l Trae 4 n DEMO 00 lt Default Group gt 1 2 mph 166 0 528 2251 Demo O71 Default Group 3 1 mph 136 0 532 492 Speed Heading E p o a RGB 106 106 106 Pix 0 0 TerraServer DOQ Denver Colorado United States 1 1667 GEO WwG584 104 90414688 The dialog buttons perform the following functions e Set Track Display Style Allows you to select the drawing style to use when displaying the track log for the selected device e Select Device Icon Allows you to select the what icon to use for the selected device on the main map display You can choose from one of the available point symbols or choose to use the GPS vessel selection which allows for direction of travel to be easily visualized e Set Device Boundary Allows you to select a rectangular or polygonal boundary to restrict the selected GPS device s to If a device travels outside its allowed boundary a warning message will be Table of Contents 235 Global Mapper User s Manual displayed e Set Device Display Name Sets the name to use for the selected GPS device when displaying it on the map display and in the device list e Set Device Display Font Allows you to select the font to use when displaying the name of the selected device on the map You can also right click on the device list to get additional options including the ability to set text to disp
352. l Zone Specification Select Elevation Layers to Base Transmitter Hecenver Heights On foi erate eaae Berea a cane on View Angle 0 North 90 East 13 South 270 West EE Ba e HE 7 mo Start Angle E Swept Angle 360 i m Free Space Path Loss Calculation Earth Curvature i Calculate and Display Free Space Path Loss Lass Bate Cohan PowerwithallGainsfLosses dB ed Atmospheric Correction 1 33353 Frequency GHz 24 The earth curvature settings are used to simulate the curvature of the earth when performing view shed analysis For short distances the Pace eile leech ae i e SES ZIG 2 curvature typically doesn t affect the results much but the effect over Use Vector Featu large distances can be significant iy He Atmospheric comection is used to account for the effect the earth s Gite atmosphere has on different kinds of transmissions For example a value of 1 333 i often used to emulate how microwave transmissions travel through the atmosphere W Generate Area Features in Covered Areas O Display Hidden Rather Than Visible Areas Tranemitter Location Display Color The View Shed Setup dialog provides options that allow the user to precisely setup the view shed analysis that they wish to perform The Description provides the user with a place to enter a name to identify this view shed analysis This name will be displayed in the Overlay Control Center and will also be the name of the transmitter point created
353. larger box size you should use e Box Maximum 3x3 4x4 and 5x5 the box maximum methods simply find the maximum value of the nearest 9 for 3x3 16 for 4x4 25 for 5x5 or 49 for 7x7 pixels and use that as the value of the sample location These methods are very good for resampling elevation data at lower resolutions so that your new terrain surface has the maximum elevation value rather than the average good for terrain avoidance This method behaves the same as the average on raster imagery layers The lower the resolution of your export is as compared to the original the larger box size you should use The Texture Map option allows a 2D raster overlay to be draped over loaded 3D elevation overlays Selecting the check box causes the overlay to use any available data from underlying elevation layers to determine how to color the DRG or DOQ The result is a shaded relief map Color Contrast Adjustment Tab The Color Contrast Adjustment tab pictured below allows you to control the color balance and contrast of the selected overlay s Table of Contents 157 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Cropping Feathering Projection Display Color Contrast Adjustment Color Balance Red 11 2 Green 0 z Blue 0 i Contrast Adjustment No Contrast Adjustment Linear Percentage Stretch Most Common Stretch Size Standard Deviations 2 C Linear Minimum Maximum Stretch i Share Contrast Adjus
354. lay when hovering over the device with the mouse cursor on the map as well as the ability to group the devices and set styles by group View NMEA Data Log The View NMEA Data Log command will display the NMEA GPS Logging dialog pictured below This dialog displays a list of recently received NMEA sentences when tracking a connected GPS device in NMEA mode This is a useful diagnostic tool and also allows you to save received NMEA data to a file for later playback NMEA GPS Logging GPG5 3 1 03 01 39 103 37 02 25 215 00 04 36 297 37 05 00 526 00 70 OPOS 3 2 09 07 7 295 4711 0 067 000 156 4 041 4 2030044 4s GPOS 3 3 03 44 1 2 202 00 40 GPGLL3553 9295 N 1 3936 69F0 E 002454 4 Ata GPBOD T M4 PGRME 8 6 M 9 6 M1 12 9 M 15 PGRM2 51 F30 HOHDG 101 1 7 1 wesc PGPRTE A 1c GPAMC 002456 4 3553 5295 M1 3936 6570 E 0 043 171 80700 7 1 Ww A 3D Save to File Clear Tracklog If you are currently recording a tracklog of where your GPS device has been the Clear Tracklog command will clear whatever is currently recorded that has not yet been saved using the Save Tracklog command Record Tracklog The Record Tracklog command controls whether or not a bread crumb trail 1 e tracklog will be recorded to log where the GPS device has traveled This tracklog can be saved to any of the supported vector export formats The drawing style of the tracklog can be configured on the Line Styles tab of the Configuration
355. ld attribute value should be set equal to 89 0 35 x 255 89 25 GM_TYPE Anchorage Area Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 344 Global Mapper User s Manual BORDER _COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER WIDTH 1 BORDER _STYLE Comb Right Only FILL COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill FILL ALPHA 89 Area Types Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which areas can be seen Any area whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Snow or Glacier Area will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Area Types B lk o iii B a _ C oj _ C H j p 0 235 0 County Subdivision Coverage Quad Coverage uad om o Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View County Subdivision No Fill 0 0 0 No Fill 183 183 0 Border Border Style Color 0 0 0 Null 128 128 128 0 0 0 0 0 0 345 Global Mapper User s Manual ee intermittent Dry Lakebed Water 132 130 255 e ae Pattern intermitent i Intermittent nie 5 5 Water 132 130 255 Lake an 5 Pattern Intermittent ih oe LARET Aee Stream River i oe Water 132 130 255 Pattern Intertidal Area Intertidal Area Solid Fill 192 240 188 b _ Isobath Arez Solid Fill 132 130 255 0 0 Isoba
356. le Custom roughness tables can be defined in a roughness_tables txt file in the settings file path listed on the Help gt About dialog A sample roughness tables txt file can be found here e Zoom to Selected Layer s This causes the view to be zoomed such that the full extents of the selected overlays are visible Table of Contents 146 Global Mapper User s Manual e Zoom to Full Detail For Layer This causes the view to be zoomed such that a single sample pixel in the selected overlay will take up approximately one pixel on the screen e Set Group to Assign to Selected Layer s This allows you to specify a group to assign the selected layer s to If layers are in a group they will be organized under that group name in the Control Center and you can easiliy collapse them into a single item in the list of layers and operate on all items in the group by selecting the parent group item e Create Area Features From Selected Layer Bounds This causes new rectangular area features with the name of the overlay as the display label to be created for each selected layer in the User Created Features Layer This is useful for creating an image index as the filename of the layer will also be saved as an attribute of the area feature created from it e GRID Create Point Features at Elevation Grid Cell Centers This causes a new layer to be created for each selected elevation grid layer with a spot elevation point feature at each grid cell center loc
357. le for raster image files that use a fixed color palette for display This tab allows you to see what colors are in the palette as well as edit the color and or description of each color in the palette This allows you to easily replace one color with another You can also save the palette to a new file or load an entirely new palette to use for the layer from an existing PAL or CLR file Table of Contents 161 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options ColorContrast Adjustment Featherng Projection WE Pal idx 0 AGB 0 0 0 __ Pal Idx 1 RGB 255 255 255 MM Fal id 3 RGB 203 0 23 B Pal Idx 4 RGB 131 66 37 Pal Idx 5 RGB 201 234 157 GE Pal Idx 6 RGB 137 51 128 ln Pal Idx 7 RGB 255 234 0 LL Pal Idx 8 RGBY 167 226 226 ny Pal Idx 9 RGB 255 184 184 Pal Idx 10 RGB 218 179 214 Pal Idx 11 RGBY 209 209 209 Pal Idx 12 RGB 207 164 142 Edit Selected Color Edit Selected Label Load Palette File Save Palette File Restore Original Palette Feathering Tab The Feathering tab pictured below allows you specify that you would like to feather blend the selected overlay s with the underlying overlay s on the specified edges This can be extremely powerful tool for blending imagery maps from different sources and or at different resolution to make the edge between the map sets invisible You can choose to either feather blend around the edges of selected files or
358. lecting the Print in Black and White option causes the printout to be generated in black and white rather than full color even when printing to a color printer The generated image will be a 256 level grayscale image Selecting the Use White Background Color option causes any background areas being printed to be filled with white so as not to use any printer ink Uncheck this option is you want the currently configured background color to be maintained on the printout The Extra Margin Around Printout setting allows you to specify an extra margin to draw around the output This is useful when printing to things like a PDF file that do not have any natural margins like a printer does The Print To Scale option allows you to specify that you want the printed result to match a certain scale like 1 1000 This means that one inch on the printed paper will correspond to 1000 inches in the real world If you choose to print to a certain scale the printout will be centered on the center of your current screen view but the appropriate amount of information will be rendered to achieve the requested scale The Print To File section allows you to specify that the printout be directed to an image file rather than to the printer This can be handy if you either want to save the results of the printout to email to someone or post on a web site or you are having trouble printing and would like to print out the data generated by Global Mapper using another applica
359. led the Esri options will not appear in the selection lists Support for Esri Geodatabases is only available in the 32 bit version of Global Mapper You can install the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of Global Mapper side by side and they can share a license Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Surfer BLN Command The Export Surfer BLN command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Surfer BLN format file used by Golden Software s Surfer package to specify breaklines When selected the command displays the Surfer BLN Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export SVG Command The Export SVG command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a SVG Scalable Vector Graphic format file suitable for display on the web When selected the command displays the SVG Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Tom Tom OV2 Command The Export Tom Tom OV2 command allows the user
360. les command allows the user to export any loaded data to JPG files tiled in the configuration required by the Zoomify viewer This command will create both the image tiles and the XML file required for Zoomify to use the data You will also need the Zoomify plugin to allow viewing the data Global Mapper is not allowed to distribute that so you will have to obtain it from Zoomify yourself When you select the command the Zoomify Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the sample spacing and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 52 Global Mapper User s Manual foomity Export Options General Export Bounds Sample Spacing X axis Er meters Y axis H meters lv Always Generate Square Pixels f you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the curent projection by going to Config gt Projection Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units Image Quality Size 76 Lower _ Higher Smaller Langer Convert to Grayscale Save Map Layout Scale Margins Gnd Legend etc Save Vector Data if Displayed l interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export XY Color Command The Export XY Colo
361. lity to customize how area line and point Table of Contents 154 Global Mapper User s Manual features found in the selected layer s are displayed The following style settings are available e Use Default Style Based on Classification or Custom Stlye This option is the default and specifies that features should be drawn and labeled using either the custom style applied to each feature or the default drawing style for the classification assigned to each feature You are configure the default drawing style for any particular classification on the Area Styles tab of the Configuration dialog the Line Styles tab of the Configuration dialog or the Point Styles tab of the Configuration dialog e Use Same Style for All Features This option specifies that all features in the selected layer s should be drawn with the same drawing style regardless of type or any custom style applied e Apply Styling Based on Attribute Name Values This option provides a way to base the drawing style on the value of a particular attribute This is a powerful feature allowing you to assign a style to a particular value for a particular attribute Any features whose value for the selected attribute name matches the selected value will be assigned that style If you have numeric values and the nterpolate Colors Between Numeric Values option is checked any numeric values for the selected attribute name that do not exactly match a value will find the two closest numeric
362. llows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Terragen Terrain File Command The Export Terragen Terrain File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Terragen terrain file When selected the command displays the Terragen Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vertical Mapper MapInfo Grid File Command The Export Vetical Mapper MapInfo Grid File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Vertical Mapper GRD format file When selected the command displays the Vertical Mapper Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion
363. loaded overlays See the Overlay Control Center section for complete details Configure Command Selecting the Configure menu item or toolbar button displays the Configuration dialog This dialog provides for general setup of Global Mapper display options See the Configuration section for complete details Map Layout Command Selecting the Map Layout menu item or toolbar button displays the Map Layout dialog pictured below This dialog provides for setup of the map display including specifying the placement and display of the distance scale bar elevation legend margins map legend and north arrow There are also options to save and map layout to a file and restore it later In addition the current map layout will be saved to any workspace files Table of Contents 200 Global Mapper User s Manual setup Map Layout Distance Scale Margins l Show Distance Scale on Map M Display Margins on Map Color Font Background Color Position Top 0 1 Left jo Right Transparency 75 Bottom 0 1 Transparent Opaque Margin Units centimeters Elevation Legend Text NoLegend Metric meters Statute feet Font Background Color Position Transparency 75 New Delete Move Font Transparent Opaque North Arrow Map Legend North Arrow Maritime Display Legend Based on Loaded Vector Types Position cele Fadar os Font a Background Color Positio
364. log which consists of an Export Bounds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export If you want to fill in the lt cmt gt field of a feature during a GPX export simply add a COMMENT attribute to the feature with the desired comment Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export InRoads ASCII Command The Export InRoads ASCII command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an InRoads ASCII format file When selected the command displays the InRoads ASCII Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Hypack Linefile Command The Export Hypack Linefile command allows the user to export any loaded vector line data sets to a Hypack Linefile format file Table of Contents 63 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the Hypack Linefile Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export KML KMZ Command The Export KML KMZ co
365. longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the contour generation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to generate contours to the bounds of the file Table of Contents 283 Global Mapper User s Manual c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom FILL_GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being used to generate the watershed will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This option is on by default specify FILL_GAPS NO to turn off LAYER_DESC specifies the name to assign to this layer If no layer description is provided the default name of GENERATED WATERSHED will be used POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a v
366. lue for a color based area will always be the full RGB color and not a palette index name if available Use FORCE_RGB YES to enable e GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y e LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the area generation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to generate contours to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER _BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expa
367. lue of 1 but you can reverse this by selecint the Grayscale Min Is Black palette option e Elevation 16 bit integer samples This option generates an elevation GeoTIFF using the currently loaded elevation grid data sets Elevation samples will be stored as signed 16 bit integers There are only a handful of software packages that can recognize a vertical GeoTIFF properly so only use this if you know it works o Elevation 32 bit floating pointr samples This option generates an elevation GeoTIFF using the currently loaded elevation grid data sets Elevation samples will be stored as 32 bit floating point values There are only a handful of software packages that can recognize a vertical GeoTIFF properly so only use this if you know it works When generating a 256 color 8 bits per pixel GeoTIFF it is necessary to select a palette indicates what 256 colors will be used to describe the image being exported The following choices of palette are available e Image Optimized Palette The palette generated will be an optimal mix of up to 256 colors that will closely represent the full blend of colors in the source images This option will generate the best results but can more than double the export time required if any high color images are present in the export set If all of the input data is palette based and the combined palette of those files has 256 colors or less then the combined files of the input file will just be used with no additio
368. ly be used in conjunction with IGNORE_ATTRS YES otherwise all attributes are required to be equal COORD_OFFSET specifies the offset to apply to any coordinates for the features that match the specified criteria The offset should be in the units of the layer the features are being matched from The offset should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X and Y offsets such as COORD_OFFSET 100000 0 200000 0 COORD_SCALE specifies the scale factors to apply to any coordinates for the features that match the specified criteria Each coordinate will be multiplied by these scale factor The scale factors should be specified either as a single value the most common scenario or as separate scale factors for the X and Y values like COORD_SCALE 1 00005 for a single value or COORD_SCALE 1 0045 1 0052 for separate X and Y coordinate scales ROTATE_ANGLE specifies the angle in degrees by which to rotate matching features by clockwise around some point The ROTATE_ABOUT parameter specifies what point the feature coordinates are rotated about Table of Contents 250 Global Mapper User s Manual e ROTATE ABOUT if a non zero ROTATE_ANGLE value is specified specifies the point that the features should be rotated about with the default being about the center of all matching features The following values are supported COMBINED_CENTER rotates about the combined center of all matching features This is the default value INDIVID
369. lygon option The Crop to Currently Selected Polygon s option specifies that you want to crop the selected layer s to any area feature s currently selected with either the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools Band Setup Tab The Band Setup tab pictured below is available for some types of imagery with 3 or more bands of data This tab allows you to control which bands of data are used for the red green and blue color bands This is a very useful tool when trying to extract different types of information out of multi spectral imagery There is also an option for advanced users to allow disabling of the alpha translucency channel for an image This is useful if you have an image with bad alpha values like all set to completely transparent and you just want to see the colors without applying the alpha values Table of Contents 160 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Eg Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Band Setup Feathering Color Grade Projection Select which band of data from the image to use for each color channel fed green and blue This allows you to analyze muli spectral imagery in many diferent ways To view just a single band of data set each color channel to come from the same band Red Color Channel Band 3 Green Color Channel Band 2 Blue Color Charne i ADVANCED Ignore Built in Alpha Channel if Present Palette Tab The Palette tab pictured below is availab
370. lygons the operation will generate a separate export for each polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon See the POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY and POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR options for naming and other options when using this parameter Use POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH YES to enable e POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box Table of Contents 259 Global Mapper User s Manual e POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use for naming or the special values lt Area Display Label gt or lt Area Source Filename gt If no value is provided the exported files will be sequentially numbered e POLYGON_CROP_FOLDER_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use as a folder name before the actual filename or the special values lt Area Display Label gt e OVERWRITE_EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE_EXISTING YES so use O
371. m Black Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Green Geology Vertical Bedding Medium Red FETTET tet tp P Pp Tepe Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 381 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Vertical Bedding Small Aqua Geology Vertical Bedding Small Black Geology Vertical Bedding Small Green Geology Vertical Bedding Small Red Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 382 Global Mapper User s Manual Built in Datums The following is a list of the datums built in to Global Mapper and the transformation parameters used to convert those datums All parameters are given with respect to transforming from the given datum to WGS 84 aX ADINDAN 201 hark 80 a AIN EL ABD BAHRAIN 6204 __ International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 AIN EL ABD SAUDI ARABIA 6204 __ International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 _ 1 AMERICAN SAMOA 1962 669 Clarke 1866 ARATU BRAZIL 6208 international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 _ 1 ARC1950 6209 hark 80d ARCI960 2 hark 80d ASTRO B4 SOROL ATOLL Unknown international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 ASTROBEACON Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 ASTRO DOS 71 4 Unknown International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 3 ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 Unknown international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 1 BEDING 195942 Krassovsky BESSEL 1841 ITALIA Castanea d F Unknown Besse
372. m_style file containing style definitions for a list of types You can optionally choose to have any types specified in the style file that aren t present in the running instance of Global Mapper to be added providing a script way to add new custom types The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to style gm_style file to load e ADD_UNKNOWN_TYPES specifies that any types found in the style file that aren t present will be Table of Contents 296 Global Mapper User s Manual added as custom types Use ADD_UNKNOWN_TYPES NO to disable adding missing types or ADD_UNKNOWN_TYPES YES to enable it this is the default LOAD_TYPE_FILTER The LOAD_TYPE_FILTER command load a type filter from a Global Mapper Filter GMF file You can create new GMF files from the type filter dialogs accessible from the Vector Display tab of the Configuration dialog The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to GMF file to load e FILTER_TYPE specifies the type of features the filter file is for The supported values area FILTER_TYPE AREA FILTER_TYPE LINE or FILTER_TYPE POINT PLAY_SOUND The PLAY_SOUND command plays either the information sound for the system or a specified sound file This can be useful if you want audible confirmation when a script completes The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to sound file like wav to play If not specif
373. mand allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a 32 bit JPEG2000 format elevation grid format file providing excellent but lossy compression of gridded elevation data sets When selected the command displays the JPEG2000 Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export KML KMZ Command The Export KML KMZ command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a KML KMZ format file for display in Google Earth If you are wanting to export a vector KML KMZ file from loaded vector data use the File gt Export Vector Data gt Export KML KMZ menu command instead When selected the command displays the KML KMZ Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a KML KMZ Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export The KML KMZ Options panel allows the user to set up the target image format for storage and the sample spacing as well as other options such as whether to store all of the resulting files
374. map view on the address and copying the address information to the Windows clipboard for easy pasting into another application Address Search Result for 1600 Pennsylvania Ave Washington DC Eg ADDRESS 1600 PENNSYLVANIA AVE AM WASHING TOM 20502 0001 US PRECISION address POS ae Ba S62 N Ae 02 1400 Create Point From Address Center Map on Address Copy Address Data to Clipboard The dialog also includes a Geocode Addresses from File button that allows you to geocode a bunch of addresses at once The text file that you select to convert can either contain a list of files with addresses in the single line form accepted when searching on a single address or it can be a comma or tab delimited file with Table of Contents 94 Global Mapper User s Manual named columns like Address City State Country and Zip or Postcode see the example file contents below Note that you are limited to about 5 000 address searches within a single 24 hour period Sequence Name Address City State ZIP Phone 1 McPeak Betty North Pole AK 99705 907 488 4879 Z2 MoPeak P Anchorage Ak 99501 90 7 7 0 295 7 3 McPeak Roger North Pole AK 99 05 90 488 8823 4 McPeak Allan 1011 McCay Ave Mobile AL 36609 251 633 0931 5 McPeak Bill 395 Dupree Dr huntsville Al 35606 256 8S3 265 6 McPeak Carol 5923 Lumsden Battery Cir Mobile AL 36619 251 661 0989 7 McPeak Dwight 5548 Heath Row Dr Birmingham AL 35242 205 991 8862 8 McPeak Faye
375. mat e GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES NO to disable the prepending of zeroes e GRID_NAMING_SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default is an underscore e GRID_CREATE_FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder e POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL or POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions e POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in e POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon e POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple po
376. mmand allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a KML KMZ format file for use with Google Earth When selected the command displays the KML KMZ Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a KML KMZ Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 64 Global Mapper User s Manual KML KMZ Export Options ome KML KM2 Options Gridding Export Bounds 3D Line Export C Draw 3D Lines Above Terain Bevations Relative to Sea Level Draw 3D Lines Above Terain Elevations Relative to Ground Level 3D Area Export Draw 3D Areas on Terain Surface C Draw 30 Areas Above Terain Elevations Relative to Sea Level Draw 3D Areas Above Terain Blevations Relative to Ground Level MW Extrude Areas Fill to Ground Make Buildings Fake 2D Area Heights to Maintain Area Draw Order 3D Point Export f Draw 3D Points on Terain Surface C Draw 3D Points Above Terrain Elevations Relative to Sea Level C Draw 3D Points Above Terain Hevations Relative to Ground Level Extrude Points Draw Line to Terain Surface from Bevated Point Filled Area Translucency 75 Clear F Feature Descriptions Feature Description and Links Only C Feature Description Links and Attribute Values Custom HTML Test Use ATTR_NAME for Attrs Pr
377. mn or SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST for separate prefix appending by columns and rows For the SEPARATE options use the GRID_NAMING_COLS and GRID_NAMING_ROWS parameters to specify the details of how to name the rows and columns If no GRID_NAMING parameter is supplied the last selected grid naming options selected in the user interface will be used e GRID_NAMING_COLS specifies how to name the column portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE or GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST parameter The value of this field is a comma delimited list with the following field values Naming type Can have the following values 0 NUM name using numbers in ascending order 0 NUM_REVERSE name using numbers in descending order 0 ALPHA name using letters in ascending order ALPHA_REVERSE name using letters in descending order Starting value for numbering or lettering i e 1 or A Prefix string to use before the numeric or alphabetic value Step value for numeric naming default is 1 You can leave values blank if they don t apply or you want to use the default As an example to do numeric naming starting at the number 100 increasing by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID_NAMING_COLS NUM 100 DEM 10 e GRID_NAMING_ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID_NAMING_COLS parameter above for details on the for
378. mply hold down the T key when left clicking to place the vertex and you will remain in the insert vertex mode Resample Selected Feature s at Specified Spacing This option is found under the Advanced Feature Creation Options submenu and allows you to resample your selected area or line feature at a specified interval This is useful if you want to add a lot of new vertices along your feature to make reprojection work better or to facilitate smoothing of the feature Table of Contents 217 Global Mapper User s Manual e Simplify Reduce Vertices of Selected Feature s This option allows you to automatically remove vertices that do not significantly contribute to the shape of your selected area or line features This is useful to significantly reduce the size of your features without giving up much detail in the shape When selected you will be presented with an option to specify how different from a straight line a vertex has to be in order to be kept e Smooth Selected Line Area Feature s This option allows you to modify the position of the vertices of your selected line and area features to smooth the appearance This can be useful on things like jagged contour lines to give them a better appearance If after modifying the shape of an area or line feature you decide that you want to undo the changes and restore the feature to its original shape simply select the feature s that you want restored and select the Restore Original Shape from
379. n A Transparency 75 Border Style Filter Type i Setup Palette Transparent Opaque Label Vector Types By Header Street Map Font si Footer Copyright Global Mapper 2010 Font Number of Columns in Legend 1 Transparency 100 Transparent Opaque OK Apply Load from File Save to File The Map Legend section allows you to setup the display of a map legend on the display You can setup your map legend to use one of the following types No Map Legend no map legend is displayed on the map Display Legend Based on Loaded Vector Types a map legend is generated based on the list of loaded vector types and their drawing styles There will be a separate entry on the legend for each unique combination of type and style You can filter the list of type that are displayed on the map legend using the Filter Types button Display Legend Based on Color Palette a map legend is generated based on a color palette i e a list of colors and names You can setup the palette to use for generating the map legend using the Setup Palette button On that dialog you can manually enter colors and their names load a palette from a file or initialize a palette from the palette of a loaded file Display Legend Based on Vector Types and Palette this option is a combination of the previous two item Both entries from the loaded vector types styles and from a customizable color palette will be use
380. n Datums 385 21 Global Mapper User s Manual MN COUNTY BECKER 6152 IMNCounty Becker MN COUNTY BENTON 6152 MINCounty Benton MN COUNTY BIG STONE 6152 MN County Big Stone MN COUNTY BLUE EARTH 6152 MN County Blue Earth MN COUNTY BROWN 6152 MNCowy Brown MN COUNTY CARLTON 6152 MNCouny Carton MN COUNTY CASS NORTH 6152 MNCouny Cass North MN COUNTY CASS SOUTH 6152 MN County Cass South MN COUNTY CHIPPEWA 6152 MIN County Chippewa MN COUNTY COOK NORTH 6152 MNCouny Cook North MN COUNTY COOK SOUTH 6152 MNCounty Cook South MN COUNTY COTTONWOOD 6152 MNCounty Cottonwood MN COUNTY CROW WING 6152 MN County Crow Wing MN COUNTY DAKOTA 6152 MNCouny Dakota MN COUNTY DODGE 6152 MNCouny Dodge MN COUNTY DOUGLAS 6152 MNCounty Douglas 6152 MN County Fillmore MN COUNTY GOODHUE 6152 MNCouny Goodhue MN COUNTY GRANT 652 MNCowy Gant MN COUNTY HOUSTON 6152 MNCouny Houston MN COUNTY ITASCA NORTH 6152 MNCounty Itasca North MN COUNTY ITASCA SOUTH 6152 _ MNCounty Itasca South MN COUNTY JACKSON 6152 MNCouny Jackson MN COUNTY KANABEC 6152 MNCouny Kanabece MN COUNTY LAC QUI PARLE 6152 MN County Lac Qui Parle MN County Lake of the Woods North MN COUNTY LAKE OF THE WOODS SOUTH 6152 MN County Lake of the Woods South __ MN COUNTY E SUEUR 6152 MNCounty Le Sueur MN COUNTY LYON 6152 MN County Lyon MN C
381. n importing and exporting spatial database tables These connection definitions can be used with the following spatial database e Esri ArcSDE Geodatabase e MySQL e Oracle Spatial e PostGIS Spatial Database Connection Manager Connections Edit Delete Open Connection Help OK Cancel The Connections area contains a list of existing connections To create a new connection click the New button Global mapper will display the Define Spatial Database Connection Dialog which can be used to specify the connection parameters for the new connection To update an existing connection definition select it in the Connections list and click the Edit button Global mapper will display the Define Spatial Database Connection Dialog which can be used to update the connection parameters for the selected connection To delete an existing connection select it in the Connections list and click the Delete button Click the Open Connection button to open the currently selected connection and load data into Global Mapper When you have made all of your changes to the spatial database connections click the OK button to store the new definitions The Cancel button quits the process of changing spatial database connection definitions The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Define Spatial Database Connection Use the Spatial Database Connection Dialog to create or modify the parameters that defin
382. n the first row otherwise set it to NO the default e SKIP_COLUMNS specifies the number of columns fields to skip at the start of a coordinate line before trying to read the coordinates For example if the X and Y coordinates of a line were in the 3rd and 4th columns of the coordinate line you d use a value of SKIP_COLUMNS 2 The default value is 0 meaning that coordinates must be in the first two columns e SKIP_ROWS specifies the number of rows to skip at the start of a file before trying to read any data For example if your file has a fixed header of 20 lines you would use SKIP_ROWS 20 to skip those header rows e BREAK _COL_IDX specifies the 1 based index of the column to break features at if the value in that column changes e CREATE AREAS FROM _ LINES controls whether or not area features will be created from closed line features first and last point the same if no CLOSED attribute was specifically provided for the feature e COORD_OFFSET specifies the offset to apply to any coordinates read in from the file This offset will be added to each coordinate read in from the file The offset should be specified as a comma delimited list of the X Y and Z offsets such as COORD_OFFSET 100000 0 200000 0 0 0 e COORD_SCALE specifies the scale factor to apply to any coordinates read in from the file Each coordinate will be multiplied by these scale factor after being read in from the file The scale factors should be specified as
383. n values should be flattened to the elevation of the area features Use GRID_FLATTEN_AREAS NO to disable this GRID_HEIGHTS_RELATIVE specifies that the elevation values for the input vector features should be treated as relative to any loaded terrain data rather than as absolute elevation values This useful for things like trees or buildings where you have a height above the ground rather than an absolute height Use GRID_HEIGHTS_RELATIVE YES to enable this e GRID_SAVE_TIN specifies that the triangulated irregular network TIN for the grid operation should be saved as a new separate vector layer consisting of triangular 3D area features Use GRID_SAVE_TIN YES to enable this e GRID_USE_CONSTRAINTS specifies that 3D line and area features should be treated as constraints breaklines during the gridding process Use GRID_USE_CONSTRAINTS YES to enable this e GRID_IGNORE_ZERO specifies that features with an elevation of 0 0 will not be used during the eridding process Table of Contents 279 Global Mapper User s Manual GENERATE_EQUAL_VAL_AREAS The GENERATE_EQUAL_VAL_AREAS command allows for the generation of areas for regions of the same or similar color elevation or slope values from a loaded raster or elevation layer e FILENAME specifies the filename of the already loaded layer from which to generate the equal value areas e LAYER_DESC specifies the description to use for the layer e ATTR_NAME specifies the name to
384. nabled PDF file These are standard PDF files that can be read in Adobe Acrobat Reader They also will have geopositioning information embedded in them so that mapping applications like Global Mapper can automatically display the data in the PDF at the proper location When selected the command displays the PDF Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the PDF export The dialog consists of a PDF Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel Table of Contents 26 Global Mapper User s Manual PDF Export Options PDF Options Gridding Export Bounds Fage Setup Page Size Letter lw Fill Page Orientation Autematic ttt Resolution DPI 300 Border Style lw Export to Fixed Scale of 1 24000 Margins Top let Right 1 i Bottom H Margin Units inches ji Header Blue Springs MO DLG Font Footer 1 24K Scale Font m Layer Naming f Use Feature Type Description as Layer Name C Use Source File Description as Layer Name Point Symbol Scaling Factor f Label Font Scaling Factor 2 I Use JPG Compression for Raster Layers M Combine Raster Layers into a Single PDF Layer Embed Fonts Larger Files but Tet Will Aways be OK i Cancel The PDF Options tab allows the user to setup the PDF specific export options The following sections are available e Page Setup Page Size The page size setting controls the target paper size for the export
385. nal export time being required Grayscale Palette This palette consists of 256 scales of gray ranging from black to white e DRG Optimized Palette This palette is optimized for the exporting USGS DRG data The palette consists of only the standard DRG colors e DRG DOQ Optimized Palette As the name suggests this palette is optimized for exporting a mixture of USGS DRG data and grayscale satellite photos i e USGS DOQs The palette consists of the 14 standard DRG colors with the remaining 242 colors being a range of gray values ranging from black to white o Halftone Palette The palette consists of a blend of 256 colors evenly covering the color spectrum This palette is the best choice when exporting anything but DRGs and grayscale satellite photos Custom Palette from File This option allows the user to choose a pal file describing the palette to use for the export A pal file should be a text file with one line per color with the red green and blue color components for each color in the palette separated by a comma You can save a pal file for an existing palette based file by opening the Overlay Control Center selecting the palette based layer press Options then the Transparent Color button then selecting the option to save a color palette file Grayscale Min is Black Palette This palette creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image Black will be stored as zero with varying shad
386. nd o Rectify Georeference Imagery Command e Load Workspace Command e Save Workspace Command e Save Workspace As Command e Run Script Command e Capture Screen Contents to Image Command e Export Command Export Global Mapper Package File Export PDF File Export Elevation Grid Format Export Raster Imagery Format Export Vector Format Export Web Formats Google Maps VE WW etc Export Elevation Spatial Database Command Export Raster Image Spatial Database Command Export Vector Spatial Database Command e Batch Convert Reproject e Print Command e Print Preview Command e Print Setup Command e Exit Command b Edit Menu 0 Copy Selected Features to Clipboard Cut Selected Features to Clipboard 0 Paste Features from Clipboard 0 Paste Features from Clipboard Keep Copy 0 Select All Features with Digitizer Tool c View Menu Toolbars Status Bar 3D View 0 Background Color Center on Location Properties gt Full View 0 Zoom In Zoom In Micro 0 Zoom Out gt Zoom Out Micro 0 Zoom To Scale Zoom To Selected Features 0 Zoom To View in Google Earth Save Current View Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual Restore Last Saved View d Tools Menu Zoom Pan Grab and Drag Measure Feature Info 0 Path Profile LOS Line of Sight View Shed Analysis Digitizer Edit Creating New Features Editing Existing Features Copying Features
387. nd displays the Arc ASCI Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export BIL BIP BSQ ERS RAW Command The Export BIL BIP BSQ ERS RAW command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and or elevation grid data to a BIL BIP BSQ ERS ERMapper Grid or RAW format file Note that ERS and RAW files are the same as BIL which is just a flat binary file with one or more header files describing the file layout When selected the command displays the BIL BIP BSQ Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Options panel pictured below which allows the user to set up type of export to perform the sample spacing vertical units and other applicable options a Gridding Panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 29 Global Mapper User s Manual BIL BIP BSQ Export Options C BIF Band Intedeaved Pixel Raster Imagery BSO Band Sequential Raster Imagery C Grayscale Imagery f Elevation BIL a Elevation Bll Gard Setup E He ae Er Defau
388. nd layers MULTIPLY multiplies the values from the first and second layers If one or both of the values is missing the sample is marked as invalid DIVIDE divides the value from the first layer by the value in the second layer If one or both of the values is missing or if the second value is 0 the sample is marked as invalid FILTER_KEEP_FIRST saves the first layer value if the second layer value is valid FILTER_KEEP_FIRST_IF_GT_SECOND saves the first layer value if the second layer value is valid and the first layer value is greater than the second layer value FILTER_KEEP_FIRST_IF_LT_SECOND saves the first layer value if the second layer value is valid and the first layer value is less than the second layer value FILTER_KEEP_FIRST_IF_SECOND_GT_VAL saves the first layer value if the second layer value is valid and the second layer value is greater than the value provided with the COMPARE_VAL parameter FILTER_KEEP_FIRST_IF_SECOND_LT_VAL saves the first layer value if the second layer value is valid and the second layer value is less than the value provided with the COMPARE_VAL parameter e COMPARE_VAL provides a numeric vlaue to compare against for some of the combine operations above e LAYER_DESC specifies the name to assign to the newly generated terrain layer If no layer description is provided the default name of Combined Elevation Grid will be used e ELEV_UNITS specify elevation units to use in ne
389. nd mode setting can often be hard to predict so rather than try to understand what is technically happening for each blend mode it s best to just experiment with different ones until you find one that you like The Hard Light setting seems to work well with satellite imagery overlaid on DEMs but the others can be quite useful as well The Transparent option allows a particular color to be displayed transparently making it possible to see through a layer to the layers underneath For example when viewing a DRG on top of a DOQ making the Table of Contents 166 Global Mapper User s Manual white in the DRG transparent makes it possible to see much of the DOQ underneath Pressing the Set Transparent Color button allows the user to select the color to treat as transparent in the selected overlay The Resampling option allows you to control how the elevation value for each displayed export location is determined based on the values in the file The following resampling methods are supported e Nearest Neighbor simply uses the value of the sample that a location is in When resampling or reprojected an image this can result in a stair step effect but will maintain exactly the original elevation values of the source file o Bilinear Interpolation determines the value of a new sample based on a weighted average of the 4 samples in the nearest 2 x 2 neighborhood of the sample in the original image The averaging has an anti aliasing effect and t
390. nd the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom SAMPLE Table of Contents 280 Global Mapper User s Manual This sample will generate equal elevation areas of size 20 meters 10 meters on either side from the specified DEM layer and store the elevation values in an attribute named ELEV for each area feature GENERATE_EQUAL_VAL_ AREAS FILENAME C temp export test blue_springs_4 gquads dem ELEV_DIST 10 C GENERATE_LAYER_BOUNDS The GENERATE_LAYER_ BOUNDS command create a new layer with a single bounding box area created from the bounding box of each loaded layer e LAYER_DESC specifies the description to use the for created layer GENERATE_PATH_PROFILE The GENERATE_PATH_PROFILE command allows for the saving of a 3D path profile to an ASCH XYZ file This command uses loaded elevation data to generate a list of the 3D coordinates between two given points in the given elevation units The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME full path to XYZ ASCII file to save the data to e ELEV_UNITS specify elevation units to use in export FEET export in US feet METERS export in meters e POINT_COUNT specifies the number of points to generate in the path This m
391. nds to Single Vertex List Connect Points to Selected Lines with Shortest Path Line Creating New Features At any time that the Digitizer Tool is active you have the option to create new area line and point features simple by right clicking and selecting either the Create New Area Feature Create New Line Feature Vertex or Trace Mode or Create New Point Feature options on the popup menu pictured below Any new features created can be exported to new vector files in any of the supported vector export format DXF Shapefile etc Beli Global Mapper REGISTERED File View Tools Search Help sam Alala m ale ra ry Co Create Mew Line Feature Create Mew Point Feature Show Area and Line vertices 250 m S500 m 750 m Right Click to Display Option Menu UTM NAD27 387801 1 4319610 9 39 020216 N 94 2960350 W Z Creating New Area Features Table of Contents 203 Global Mapper User s Manual After selecting the Create New Area Feature popup menu option you can proceed to draw a new area feature with the mouse To draw the feature simple left click at each place that you d like to drop a vertex To finish the area feature right click at the desired location of the last vertex to complete the area You can cancel creation of the new area at any time by pressing the Escape key Note that while drawing the area you can use the Snapping feature to help align the area with existing features Once yo
392. ned Maps and Vector Data Transparency How See Through is the Map Transparent A Opaque M Save Vector Data f Displayed MW Make Image Tiles Transparent PNG Format Only Skip Existing Tiles Use to Resume Cancelled Export Skip Empty Tiles Don t Export Blank Tiles Note Users without a permanent registration key that export Virtual Earth tiles will get a large diagonal DEMO symbol across the image Registered users will not see that symbol on their output Export World Wind Tiles Command The Export World Wind Tiles command allows the user to export any loaded data to JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required by NASA s World Wind application This command will create both the image tiles and the XML file required for World Wind to use the data You should place the generated xml file in the Config Earth folder under your World Wind installation folder in order for it to be picked up by World Wind When you select the command the World Wind Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in World Wind the base directory to which the directory tree of map tiles will be exported the zoom level setup the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export If you want to create a new terrain layer to up
393. neral options panel which allows the user to set up the quadrangle name grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DTED Command The Export DTED command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to native format DTED files DTED files support a set of fixed resolutions i e DTED levels which are defined as aligning on particular boundaries When you select the DTED level to export to and the export bounds this defines which DTED tiles need to be generated to conform to the DTED standards for that level The filename that you select for the export is used as a base with the lat lon coordinates of the southwest corner of each tile Table of Contents 32 Global Mapper User s Manual appended to each filename as it is exported You can also option choose to split up the exports by longitude into separate folders in which case the longitude is used as a folder name and the latitude appended to your base filename for each exported cell When selected the command displays the DTED Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a DTED Options panel which allows the user to set up the DTED level and other options a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to se
394. ng by 10 each time with a prefix of DEM you would use GRID_NAMING_COLS NUM 100 DEM 10 GRID_NAMING_ROWS specifies how to name the row portion of grid cell names when using the GRID_NAMING SEPARATE parameter See the documentation for the GRID_NAMING_COLS parameter above for details on the format GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES specifies whether or not to prepend zeroes to the start of grid column row names Use GRID_NAMING_PREPEND_ZEROES NO to disable the prepending of zeroes GRID_NAMING_SEPARATOR specifies the separator string to use between pieces of a grid name The default is an underscore GRID_CREATE_FOLDERS specifies that a separate folder should be generated for each row or column if GRID_NAMING SEPARATE_COLS_FIRST is specified of the export rather than placing every output file in the same folder POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL or POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the export is being done in POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL s
395. ng the daylight gradient slope and HSV shaders described above Table of Contents 137 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Paint Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection Daylight Shader 7 Gradient Shader Surface Color Low Color High Color Slope Shader Minimum Slope Slope Value Color Maximum Slope Slope Value f Color Coloring Between Min and Max Slope Values Smooth Gradient Custom Color T Slope een Saas North Color West Color East Color f HSV Shader Low Color Start Value 1 Saturation Range m Custom Shaders Custom Shader 1 7 i Edit Delete l z Reverse Colors of Selected Shader South Color Daylight Shader e Surface Color Sets the calculated surface intensity color Gradient Shader e Low Color Sets the lowest elevation value color e High Color Sets lowest elevation range color Slope Shader e Minimum Slope gt Slope Value Allows the user to set the slope at or below which the Minimum Slope Color is used e Minimum Slope gt Color Specifies the color which all parts of the terrain with a slope at or below the Minimum Slope Value will be colored with e Maximum Slope gt Slope Value Allows the user to set the slope at or above which the Maximum Slope Color is used e Maximum Slope gt Color Sp
396. nits of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the export should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projec
397. nly removes duplicate features that are within the same layer Duplicates in different layers will not be deleted MARK_DUPLICATES specifies whether or not to add a DUPLICATE Y attribute to matching features that are duplicates i e same coordinates label attributes type and style Use MARK_DUPLICATES YES to enable Note that this only marks duplicate features that are within the same layer Duplicates in different layers will not be marked All features in the duplicate set will be marked with the DUPLICATE Y attribute except the first one All of the duplicates will also get a DUP_ID attribute that uniquely identifies the group of duplicates IGNORE_ATTRS specifies when deleting or marking duplicates that only the geometry of the features should be considered and not any attribute values Add IGNORE_ATTRS YES to make the attributes be ignored You can require some particular attributes to be equal using the DUPLICATE_ATTR parameter DUPLICATE_ATTR specifies the name of an attribute to that must have the same value in both features being compared when looking for duplicates You can include multiple instances of this attribute to require multiple attributes to be equal Special attribute names like lt Feature Name gt are recognized for the attribute name For example to require the name and an attribute named ROAD_ID to be equal add DUPLICATE_ATTR ROAD_ID and DUPLICATE_ATTR lt Feature Name gt to your command This would on
398. nt Styles f Vertical Options g Shader Options h Projection Options Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is for Global Mapper v14 0 Earlier versions of the software may not contain all the features documented here Later versions may contain additional features or behave differently To see the version of your software select Help About Global Mapper from the Menu Bar The demo version contains some but not all of the features available through a registered version of Global Mapper The Global Mapper Web Site found at http www globalmapper com maintains a list of changes and supported formats features links to sample data as well as current information about the Global Mapper software Please refer to this site to obtain the latest copy of the software Earlier versions of the software should be uninstalled Start Settings Control Panel Add Remove Programs before installing later versions System Requirements Global Mapper software is compatible with Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows ME Windows XP 32 and 64 bit versions Windows Vista 32 and 64 bit versions Windows 7 32 and 64 bit versions Windows 8 32 and 64 bit versions and Windows Server 2003 You may also be able to run Global Mapper on a Macintosh computer using an emulator like VirtualPC Parallels or Boot Camp or on a Linux OS under WINE The minimum system requirements are 128 MB of RAM and 60 MB of hard dr
399. nts 168 Global Mapper User s Manual 3D View Menu Command The 3D View command in Global Mapper allows registered users to view gridded elevation data and any overlying raster or vector data in a true perspective 3D manner In addition any vector data with associated elevation values can also be displayed in true 3D VIDEO TUTORIAL ALERT e Video Tutorial Viewing 3D Vector Data e Video Tutorial Creating a Custom 3D Map When selected the 3D View command displays a window containing a 3D view of the data in the current Global Mapper view Any imagery or vector data being drawn on top of the elevation grid s in the main Global Mapper view will automatically be draped on top of the elevation data in the 3D View window If so configured any 3D vector data will be displayed in space as well The image below depicts a sample of the 3D View window displayed using 250K USGS DEM data for Salt Lake City UT overlaid with DOQ satellite imagery from the TerraServer import command under the File menu Table of Contents 169 Global Mapper User s Manual a i EENE P Wr j The image below depicts a sample of the 3D View window displaying terrain data with 3D building areas for Kuala Lumpur Malaysia Table of Contents 170 Global Mapper User s Manual Table of Contents 171 Global Mapper User s Manual 30 iew LTT A a tit itt it Global Mapper User s Manual The
400. nts 293 Global Mapper User s Manual IMPORT_DIR_TREE The IMPORT_DIR_TREE command imports all of the data files in a given directory tree that match a list of filename masks The following parameters are supported by the command In addition all of the option parameters for the IMPORT command are also supported for this command e DIRECTORY full path to root of directory tree to import files from e FILENAME_MASKS space separated list of filename masks to import If no value is provided then all files which are of recognized types will be imported SAMPLE IMPORT_DIR_TREE DIRECTORY C TEMP EXPORT TEST FILENAME MASKS OPT GMP IMPORT_WMS The IMPORT_WMS command imports a chunk of WMS or WMTS tiled WMS data such as satellite imagery or topographic maps The following parameters are supported by the command e NOTE All style parameters that are supported by the IMPORT command are also supported by this command e WMS_SERVER_URL URL to WMS server GetCapabilites e WMS_SERVICE service name to use typically WMS e WMS_LAYER name of WMS layer to load e WMS_IS_TILED specifies that the server is a WMTS tiled WMS service Use WMS_IS_TILED YES to enable e ADDRESS address to download data near Use along with RADIUS to specify the bounds with an address and radius rather than a specific bounding box e RADIUS radius in kilometers around ADDRESS to search e LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the bounds to import in latit
401. nts should be a comma delimited file in the following format Table of Contents 105 Global Mapper User s Manual amp ltx pixel location amp gt amp lty pixel location amp gt amp ltx ground location amp gt amp lty ground location amp gt amp ltpoint name optional amp gt amp ltpoint error in pixels optional amp gt There are also options on the File menu for loading control points and projection information from an OziExplorer map CompeGPS imp and Touratech TTQV cal files as well as saving your control point information to world TFW JGW etc files Options Menu The Options menu allows you to setup various options related to the rectification process as described below o Rectification Method the Rectification Method submenu allows you to select which rectification method hence the name to apply to the entered control points Different methods are available based on how many control points have been entered The various methods are as follows Automatic the Automatic select automatically selects the best rectification method that is available based on the number of control points that have been entered This is the default method and should rarely need to be changed Linear the Linear rectification method is used when only two control points are entered This is the simplest of the rectification methods and is equivalent to supplying a world file for the image This method does not allow for any distortion or rota
402. nual Customize Collar Bounds i Crop Northern Boundary at 39125000 Degrees W Crop Southem Boundary at 00 Degrees Cancel iY Crop Western Boundary at 4375000 Degrees iM Crop Eastern Boundary at 42500 Degrees Initialize Bounds with Bounds of Selected 4rea Feature Enter the boundaries of the data not including the collar in the overlay in the spaces above The coordinates need to be in decimal degrees with the datum being the same as the datum that the overlay is in No data outside these bounds will be shown The Crop to Manually Specified Boundary in Native Layer Projection Units option allows you to specify a crop boundary in the native units of the selected overlay When selected this option will display the Customize Collar Bounds dialog pictured above to allow specifying the bounds to crop to The Crop a Specified Number of Pixels Around the Edges of the Layer option allows you to specify a number of pixels to crop of each edge of the selected overlay s The Snap to Manually Specified Degree Boundary option allows you to specify that the collar for the selected overlay will be on some degree boundary like an even degree of 0 5 degrees etc This way you can setup cropping for a collection of maps that are all similarly aligned The Crop to Previously Selected Polygon s option specifies that you want to crop to the crop polygon s area previously applied to the selected layer s using the Crop to Currently Selected Po
403. o be entered This rectification method performs a Delaunay triangulation for the control points and will exactly preserve the location of each entered control point Occasionally the Triangulation method generates some odd results around the edges of the rectified image If this happens try to enter more control points around the edge of the image or change your rectification method to Polynomial e Resampling Method the Resampling Method submenu allows you to select how the source image pixels will be resampled to create the rectified imagery These settings simply control which resampling method is applied initially for rectified images This can be changed later in the Overlay Control Center Nearest Neighbor simply pick the closest pixel from the source image for each pixel in the rectified image This can result in some blockiness Bilinear Interpolation performs a weighted average of the four closest pixels in the source image to determine the color for a pixel in the rectified image Table of Contents 106 Global Mapper User s Manual e Auto Name GCPs this setting controls whether or not you will be prompted to enter a name for each ground control point GCP entered Disabling this allows you to specify a name for each GCP but can interrupt workflow Unless you have a specific need to name your GCPs we would recommend turning this option on e Display GCP Labels this setting controls whether or not the names of each gro
404. o be displayed instead The URL field is the most important piece of this dialog This is where you specify the address of the ECW file to load The URL should begin with the prefix ecwp with the remainder being a valid path to an ECW file served using ER Mapper s Image Web Server software When you ve completed entering information about the new web link press the OK button to complete your entry and have it added to the web link tree in the Load Image From Web dialog Pressing the Edit Link button allows the user to edit the currently selected web link Note that the built in web links cannot be edited Pressing the Delete Link button will delete the currently selected web link or group from the web link tree Table of Contents 18 Global Mapper User s Manual If you get an error message indicating that your settings have been updated to support the ECWP protocol whenever you try to load an ECW layer from the web you need to download and install the latest ECW ActiveX plugin from _http demo ermapper com ecwplugins DownloadIEPlugin htm Open All Files in a Directory Tree Command The Open All Files in a Directory Tree command allows the user to open all of the files matching a user specified filename mask under a user selected directory You will first be prompted to select a folder from which to load the files After selecting the folder you will be prompted to enter a filename mask for all of the files that you would like to a
405. o export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Float Grid Command The Export Float Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Float Grid format file The Float Grid file will consist of a 4 byte IEEE floating point number for each elevation sample in the file starting at the top left corner and proceeding across then down In addition to the elevation data file an ESRI format hdr file and prj file will also be generated There is also an option to allow exporting slope values in degrees or percent slope if selected or slope directions in bearings where 0 is north 90 is east etc rather than elevation values at each sample location When selected the command displays the Float Grid Point Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid Table of Contents 34 Global Mapper User s Manual spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Geosoft Grid Command The Export Geosoft Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a Geosoft Binary Grid format file When selected the command displays the Geosoft Grid Export O
406. obal Mapper User s Manual Solid with Minus Signs on Left EG Solid with Minus Signs on Right EG Solid with Plus Signs on Left fo Solid with Plus Signs on Right a a ee ee ES F F F H Solid with Dots on Left Solid with Dots on Right oe cs Solid with Ts on Right Solid with Rectangles on Left Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 316 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Rectangles on Right Solid with Squares on Left Solid with Squares on Right Half Circles Tightly Spaced Left Only Half Circles Tightly Spaced Right Only Cop Half Circles Widely Spaced Left Only Half Circles Widely Spaced Right Only Solid with Diamonds on Left Solid with Diamonds on Right Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 317 Global Mapper User s Manual Se es ee Se oe V Track Opens Towards End of Null Line A TA A a ELILE V Track Opens Towards Start of Null Line gt Pe PP eS C Track Opens Towards End of Line C Track Opens Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards Start of Line Arrow Track Points Towards End of Line V Track Opens Towards End of Solid Line V Track Opens Towards Start of Solid Line Solid with Xs Through Line Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 318 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid with Diamond
407. objects select the Feature Info icon from the Toolbar or select Tools Feature Info from the menu bar Press and release the left mouse button near the objects s to be picked Holding down the P key when left clicking causes only area features at the clicked location to be considered If left clicking on a picture point with an associated image by default just the image will be displayed but holding the Ctrl key when clicking will cause the normal feature info dialog to be displayed When an object is picked it will be highlighted and a feature info dialog picture below will be displayed Right clicking the mouse button cycles through each of the elements located near the selection point displaying the information in the dialog box Table of Contents 188 Global Mapper User s Manual W Feature Information Name NFR Dr Feature Type Residential Road Geometry 4 vertices Length 1908 ft Map Name KS Wyandotte Description hborhood and rural road city street unseparated Right click on an entry for more options i e open UAL ete Attribute CFEC FA_ADDA_L TO_ADDR_L FR_AD0DA_A TO_ADDR_A PLACE _L Kansas City PLACE_F Kansas City COUNT y_ L Wyandotte Edit Delete Vertices Copy to aa As you can see you can view a lot of information about a selected object in the Feature Info dialog The object s name description geometry information including length and enclosed area when applicable attribute value list an
408. of Contents 270 Global Mapper User s Manual e QUAD_NAME DLGO only specifies the quadrangle name to store in the header of the DLG O file If not quadrangle name is specified Global Mapper will attempt to automatically determine one based on the loaded data e EXPORT_DWG_LABELS DWG only specifies that object labels will be exported as attributes in the DWG file Typically you want to set this to YES unless you are working with a software package that cannot handle DWG files with attributes Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES will cause feature labels to be discarded on export EXPORT_DXF_LABELS DXF only specifies that object labels will be exported as attributes in the DXF file Typically you want to set this to YES unless you are working with a software package that cannot handle DXF files with attributes Leaving out this parameter or setting it to anything but YES will cause feature labels to be discarded on export DWG_TEXT_SIZE DWG only specifies the multiplier value to apply to text sizes when exporting DWG file Use this to control how large text is in the exported file DXF_TEXT_SIZE DXF only specifies the multiplier value to apply to text sizes when exporting DXF file Use this to control how large text is in the exported file SHAPE_TYPE works for any required for SHAPEFILE only specifies the vector object type area line or point to export For formats other than SHAPEFILE i
409. oint features are separately indexed Projection Specification Table of Contents 301 Global Mapper User s Manual A projection specification parameter has a value that can specify a projection in the following ways e PRJ Filename the value is the full path to a PRJ file that specifies the projection to use e Defined Projection Name the value is the name assigned to a projection previously defined with the DEFINE PROJ command e EPSG Code the value is an EPSG code either just the raw code or a code with EPSG in front of it like EPSG 4326 e WKT PRJ String the value is a WKT projection string Crop Merge and Reproject 4 USGS DRGs into new GeoTIFF and JPEG files GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 UNLOAD_ALL Import the four 24K DRGs that we want to merge We use the CLIP _COLLAR option to indicate that we want the collar to be automatically removed from the DRGs when they are imported IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITY 039094B2 TIF N TYPE AUTO ANTI_ALIAS NO AUTO_CONTRAST NO CLIP_COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE_MAP NO IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITY 039094A1 TIF TYPE AUTO ANTI_ALIAS NO AUTO_CONTRAST NO CLIP_COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE_MAP NO IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITY 039094A2 TIF TYPE AUTO ANTI_ALIAS NO AUTO_CONTRAST NO CLIP_COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE_MAP NO IMPORT FILENAME C DATA DRG KANSAS CITY 039094B1 TIF TYPE AUTO ANTI_ALTAS NO AUTO_CONTRAST NO CLIP_COLLAR AUTO TEXTURE_MAP NO Load
410. ombine bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y width in x width in y e LAT_LON_BOUNDS specifies the combine bounds in latitude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_ BOUNDS specifies that the operation should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to export to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER _BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by Table of Contents 244 Global Mapper User s Manual should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER_BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom FILL_GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and
411. on Grid from Loaded 3D Vector Data GENERATE EQUAL VAL AREAS Generates Area Features from Equal Values in Elevation Terrain Layers GENERATE LAYER BOUNDS Generates a Layer with Bounding Area Features for each Loaded Layer e GENERATE PATH PROFILE Generate a 3D Path Profile and Save it to a XYZ File GENERATE REPORT Generates a Report on the Loaded Vector Features GENERATE WATERSHED Generate Watershed from Elevation Data GLOBAL MAPPER SCRIPT Script Header Line IMPORT Import Data From a File IMPORT ARCHIVE Import Data From an Archive File zip tar gz etc IMPORT ASCH Import Generic ASCII Data from a File IMPORT DIR TREE Import All Data Files in a Directory Tree IMPORT_TERRASERVER Deprecated Terraserver USA MSRMAPS COM Servers Down as of May 1 2012 IMPORT WMS Import WMS Layer JOIN TABLE Joins Attributes from a File to a loaded Vector Layer LAYER LOOP END Ends a Loop of Commands Over Loaded Layers LAYER LOOP START Start a Loop of Commands Over Loaded Layers Table of Contents 239 Global Mapper User s Manual LOAD PROJECTION Loads a New Global Projection From a PRJ File LOAD STYLE FILE Loads a Style Type File gm_style LOAD TYPE FILTER Loads a Type Filter from a GMF Global Mapper Filter File e PLAY SOUND Plays a Beep or a Specified Sound File RESTORE LAST SAVED VIEW Restores Last Saved View RUN COMMAND Runs a Command Line SAVE CURRENT VIEW Sav
412. on of the two layers if not specified Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 You can also specify as a percentage of the default resolution by adding a percent For example to get half the detail your double the spatial resolution value so you would use SPATIAL_RES 200 200 e SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 e PIXEL_SIZE specifies the desired size in pixels of your export Use this instead of SPATIAL_RES if you know exactly how many pixels in size your export should be The format is PIXEL_SIZE widthxheight For example to make your export have dimensions of 1024 pixels wide by 768 pixels tall use PIXEL_SIZE 1024x768 e FORCE_SQUARE_ PIXELS if this value is set to YES the spatial resolution of the resultant raster file will be set so that the x and y pixel size are the same with the minimum default size being used for both e GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the
413. on position extensions to the header for Marta Systems are automatically added if applicable When selected the command displays the PCX Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 45 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PGM File Command The Export PGM File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a PGM grayscale grid file These grid files can be used with any software application that supports PGM files When selected the command displays the PGM Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export PLS CADD XYZ File Command The Export PLS CADD XYZ File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a PLS CADD XYZ format grid file These grid files can be used with the PLS CADD software application When selected the command displays the PLS CADD XYZ
414. on reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Point Styles Point Type Features Symbols Basic Symbols Geology Point Styles Using the Point Styles panel users can configure what symbol will be used to display points of a given type In addition the Show Labels for Points of This Type option allows a user to turn point labels off on a type by type basis The Custom Symbols section allows users to create new symbols from their own bitmap and icon files which they can then use as the symbol to display for a given type Global Mapper s Point Type Features are listed in the Global Mapper Point Type Features table Symbols are listed in the Global Mapper Symbols table Global Mapper recognizes two field attributes as containing information for the display appearence of a Point Type They are GM TYPE Address Label POINT SYMBOL Dot Red Point Type Features Global Mapper Built In Point Type Features Point Type Symbol Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 329 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 330 E Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 331 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 332 Symbols Global Mapper Scripting Reference
415. on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom e SAMPLING METHOD elevation and raster only specifies the sampling method to use when resampling this layer The following values are supported DEFAULT Use either automatic resampling based on export or layer resampling depending on setting of global flag about whether to resample on export AUTO Automatically select a resampling method based on how the export resolution and bounds compare to the original layout for a layer For example if you export to a lower resolution a box averager of appropriate size may be used automatically LAYER Use the sampling method set for each layer The list of SAMPLING METHOD values for the IMPORT command Click here for list can also be specified to use a particular sampling method for all layers being exported e GEN_WORLD_FILE specifies that a world file should be generated in addition to the image file Use GEN_WORLD_FILE YES to turn on e GEN_TAB_FILE GEOTIFF and PNGonly specifies that a MapInfo TAB file should be generated in addition to the image file Use GEN_TAB_FILE YES to turn on e GEN_PRJ_FILE specifies that a projection PRJ file should be generated in addition to the data file Use GEN_PRJ_FILE YES to turn on e GEN_AUX_XML_FILE specifies that an ESRI aux xml projection file sh
416. onStyle If that value is empty the default setting from Google Earth will be used Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Landmark Graphics Command The Export Landmark Graphics command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Landmark Graphics format file When selected the command displays the Landmark Graphics Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Lidar LAS Command The Export Lidar LAS command allows the user to export any loaded 3D vector data sets like 3D point clouds loaded from other LAS files to new Lidar LAS format files If the source data came from a Lidar format file like a LAS or MrSid Lidar file the attributes from the original data will be maintained For other points in addition to the base position and elevation if there is an INTENSITY attribute available for the point the value of that attribute will be exported as the intensity for the point in the exported LAS file If you choose the Lidar LAS option then a compressed LASzip LAZ file will be created This offers lossless compression for Lidar data that makes your Lidar files much smaller When selected the command displays the Lidar LAS Export O
417. ond area by first selecting the area s that you want to cut from another area make into an island then right click and select the Cut Selected Area s from Another Area Add Islands menu option You will then need to left click in the area feature that you would like to cut the selected area s out of Splitting Areas into Two New Area Features You can split an existing area feature into two new area features by selecting the two vertices across which you would like to split the area then right clicking and selecting the Split Selected Area at Selected Vertices menu option This will generate two new area features by splitting the selected area feature across the segment between the two selected vertices Note in some situations you will get invalid areas or no result at all so be careful to select vertices for which the connected segment does not cross outside of the area or intersect any island areas Cropping Features to Selected Area Features You can crop any loaded features to one or more selected area features by first selecting the area feature s to crop to then right clicking and selecting the Crop Loaded Features to Selected Area s option This will display a dialog allowing you to choose which types of features to crop whether or not to mark the original features as deleted and what layer to put the cropped results in Note that any features that are completly enclosed in the cropped area and thus not cropped will just stay in th
418. onfiguation dialog will be used COORD_DELIM XYZ_GRID only specifies the delimeter between coordinates e COMMA coordinates are separated by commas FIXED_WIDTH coordinates are stored in fixed width columns SEMICOLON coordinates are separated by semicolons SPACE coordinates are separated by space characters TAB coordinates are separated by tab characters BYTES_PER_SAMPLE BIL ERDAS and GEOTIFF only specifies how many bytes to use per elevation sample in the BIL IMG or vertical GeoTIFF file Valid values are 2 bytes 16 bits and 4 bytes 32 bits If this value isn t specified 2 bytes are used USE_BIG_ENDIAN BIL only specifies that elevation values written to BIL files should use big endian Motorola byte order rather than the default little endian Intel byte order USE_ESRI_HDR BIL only specifies that the ESRI hdr format should be used for the export Use USE_ESRI_ HDR YES to enable POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL for exception POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape n
419. ontains controls allowing you to control the color intensity brightness darkness color transparency blending anti aliasing and color shading of the selected layers Table of Contents 165 Global Mapper User s Manual Display Alter Hevation Values Feathering Projection Color Intensity t0 Translucency Can You See Through it 100 0 Transparent Opaque Transparency Transparent Set Transparent Color How Similar Must Colors be to Make Transparent 0 Exact _ Fuzzy Blend Mode No Blend Resampling Bilinear Interpolation a Shader Default Shared Shader z The Color Intensity setting controls whether displayed pixels are lightened or darkened before being displayed It may be useful to lighten or darken raster overlays in order to see overlaying vector data clearly The Translucency setting controls to what degree you can see through the overlay to overlays underneat the overlay The default setting of Opaque means that you cannot see through the overlay at all Settings closer to Transparent make the overlay increasingly more see through allowing you to blend overlapping data The Blend Mode setting controls how an overlay is blended with underlying overlays in addition to the Translucency setting These settings allow Photoshop style filters to be applied to overlays resulting in often stunning results What you get from a particular set of overlays from a particular ble
420. ontents 228 Global Mapper User s Manual Connect Points to Selected Lines with Shortest Path Line If one or more points and one or more lines are selected the Connect Selected Points to Selected Lines with New Lines option will appear in the Advanced Feature Creation sub menu of the right click menu When selected this option will create a line segment from each point to the closest point on any of the selected lines features Table of Contents 229 Global Mapper User s Manual GPS Menu The GPS Menu offers the following commands e Start Tracking GPS e Stop Tracking GPS Keep the Vessel On Screen e Show Course Line e Draw Range Ring Around Vessel e Vessel Color e Vessel Size e Vessel Shape o Setup e Information e Manage GPS Vessels e View NMEA Data Log e Mark Waypoint e Mark Waypoint from Averaged Position e Clear Tracklog e Record Tracklog e Save Tracklog e Simplify Reduce Tracklogs when Saved e Send Raster Maps to Connected Garmin Device Global Mapper provides the ability to track the position of a serial GPS device connected to your computer s serial port or USB via a serial to USB convertor or a Garmin USB GPS device connected to your computer s USB port in real time over the top of any loaded mapping data For serial GPS devices the GPS device must communicate in either NMEA 0183 v2 x or Garmin binary format in order to be compatible with Global Mapper When tracking a GPS device you
421. ool 7 The Pan Grab and Drag command selects the Pan tool as the current tool To change the center point of the image without changing the magnification depress the left mouse button drag the view to the desired location then release the left mouse button to redraw the view at the new location If you just want to recenter on a new location without dragging just click the left mouse button at the new desired location and the view will be recentered on that location this provides the functionality of the old Recenter Tool CLL Measure Tool cal The Measure command selects the measure tool as the current tool Table of Contents 185 Global Mapper User s Manual To find the distance between along a path on the display or the enclosed area of a set of points choose the Measure Tool icon from the toolbar or select Tools Measure from the menu bar 1 Left click on the point to begin the measurement Move the mouse which will draw a line to the point where the measurement should stop 2 Repeat step 1 until you have defined the entire path or area that you wish to measure 3 Right click the right mouse button and select Stop Measuring from the list using a left click Notice that Stop Measuring and Close polygon choices are now grayed out The measurement s will be displayed on the left side of the status bar below 4 In order to change measurements right click and choose a new unit using a left click You may con
422. or Garmin devices will also work Table of Contents 67 Global Mapper User s Manual for Lowrance exports so if you provide custom classifications via the MP_TYPE attribute the type mapping should work for Lowrance exports as well The LCM export only has support for a limited set of types Feature types that are not supported for LCM export will not be added to the generated LCM file so it is important to use a built in type or a type with a custom MP_TYPE value that is supported when exporting to the LCM format The following is a basic list of the types of features that are supported e Area Types Lakes Oceans Parks Swamp Wetland Urban Areas e Line Types Political Boundaries Contours Railroads Roads Trails Streams Rivers e Point Types Airport Boat Ramp Campground Car Repair City Church Department Store Shopping Gas Station Fuel Hospital Navaids Buoys Pharmacy Post Office Restaurant School Water Features Spring Stream Lake Name Wrecks As the Lowrance format contains some type settings that cannot be captured with just a simple Global Mapper type selection or through the assignment of a MP_TYPE attribute you can also use a LMC_TYPE attribute to provide a specific Lowrance type to use for some types Here is a partial list of the supported LMC_TYPE attribute values e Depth Contour Line Types 0x50 black thickness 1 0x51 blue thickness 1 0x52 d
423. or TMS source type then the OSM TMS Tile Source Defintion dialog pictured below is displayed allowing you to setup the source You need to specify the base URL where the data for the tiled source can be found this should be the folder under which the folders for each zoom level are stored You can also provide a URL with variables named x column y row and z zoom scale in the URL so that you can setup the URL however your data source requires rather than using the default expected URL setup If accessing a source setup similar to Bing Maps tiles you might need to use the quadtree filename Use quad to do this This replaces the x y and z values Finally the Bing Maps Table of Contents 16 Global Mapper User s Manual RESTful services supports accessing via the zoom scale z and a latitude and longitude value in the tile Use lat and lon to include the latitude and longitude of the center point of the tile in your custom URL You also must select whether the source uses PNG or JPG image files and provide the maximum zoom level and bounds of the data source Tile Source Definition Base Data URL Specify the base URL or file path for the image files making up the tile source This should be the path to the folder containing the folders for each zoom level ttp figmdemo keyhole com query request ImageryMaps amp channel 10798version 20 NOTE You can provide a full custom URL with the X column Y row and Z zoom s
424. or US lm Resolution JOIN_TABLE The JOIN_TABLE command joins the attributes from a table file to the features of a loaded vector layer The following parameters are supported by the command e LAYER NAME vector layer to join the attributes to e FILENAME file that contains the attributes to join to the vector layer features e JOIN_FILE_ATTR_NAME name of the file attribute to join on e JOIN_LAYER_ATTR_NAME name of the layer attribute to join on e FILE_DELIM string that delimits the values in a text file LAYER_LOOP_END The LAYER _LOOP_END command ends a loop of commands over loaded layers See the LAYER LOOP START command for details LAYER_LOOP_START The LAYER _LOOP_START command begins a loop of commands over load layers You can loop over all layers or just those matching a particular filename mask You end a loop over the files in a folder using the LAYER_LOOP_END command Note that it is also possible to nest loops For any commands found within a LAYER_LOOP_START LAYER_LOOP_END pair defining a loop the following special character sequences the LAYER part can be changed using the VAR_NAME_PREFIX parameter can be used anywhere examples of what the values will be based on a current layer filename of C data my_file dem are listed e LAYER_DIR full path to current file value is C data e LAYER_FNAME_W_DIR full path and filename of current file value is C data my_file dem e LAYER_FNA
425. ore in the Lidar LAS file for the vertical coordinate system for the elevations If nothing is supplied the default one if any for the supplied VERT_CS_CODE will be used e FILE SOURCE_ID LIDAR_LAS only specifies a File Source ID numeric value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used e GLOBAL_ENCODING LIDAR_LAS only specifies a Global Encoding numeric value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used e SYSTEM_ID LIDAR_LAS only specifies a System ID value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used e GEN_SOFTWARE LIDAR_LAS only specifies a Generating Software value to store in the exported LAS file header If not specified and one of the input files is a LAS file with this value specified it will be used Otherwise Global Mapper will be used e INC_COLOR LIDAR_LAS only specifies that a color value should be included with each point sample from the loaded raster layers or from the original points if they were Lidar points with a color value Use INC_COLOR YES to enable FORCE_EXIT The FORCE_EXIT command immediately shuts down Global Mapper without going through the normal shut down process This is useful if you are running a Glob
426. ore than 8 bits per color channel will defualt to using the linear min max strecth contrast adjustment mode rather than the standard deviation adjustment e Never Automatically Contrast Adjust Images on Load if checked this option disables the automatic contrast adjustment of imagery with more than 8 bits per color channel on import e Minimize Main Window During Exports if checked this option causes the main map window to automatically be minimized during most export operations e Terrain Export Specify Bounds as Pixel is Area if checked this option specifies the the bounding box that you provide when exporting to new terrain gridded elevation formats will be specifed as pixel is area i e via coordinates of the edges of the grid cells rather than the default of pixel is point 1 e coordinates refer to center of outer grid cells rather than outer edges of cells e BIL Format Ask if 16 bit Files are Imagery if checked this option will cause the user to be prompted to choose whether 16 bit BIL files that are encountered are elevation or imagery files If not checked any 16 bit BIL files will be assumed to be elevation files e DGN Import Cells as Point Features if checked this option causes cell features in DGN v8 and later files that have an associated point location to just be loaded as a single point feature rather than the collection of features specified by the cell e DGN Add DGN Color Number to Feature Description if
427. orkspace File from Selected Layer s This option allows you to generate a workspace just containing the selected layer s and their display options This workspace can later be loaded with the File gt Load Workspace menu command e Create Map Catalog from Selected Layer s This option allows you to generate a map catalog file containing the selected layer s This map catalog can later be loaded with the File gt Open Data File menu command e ROUGHNESS Create Roughness Grid from Land Cover Layer This option allows you to generate a grid and optionally areas of roughness length values from a land cover layer When you select this option the following dialog appears allowing you to setup the roughness calculation Setup Roughness Length alculatio Roughness Table Select the table to use for converting the color grid values in the selected layer to roughness length values Choose an appropriate table based on the type of land cover data that you have loaded CORINE Land Cover Summer Roughness Press Help for information on how to create custom roughness tables Shader Default Shared Shader bi The roughness grid is useful for wind power applications and can be exported to a WindSim GWS file as a roughness layer or the roughness areas can be exported to a WaSP map file Several land cover data sets useful for roughness length calculation like CORINE NLCD and VCF have built in roughness conversion tables availab
428. ort should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS 8 4 GRID_OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID_TYPE_ parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE specifies that the size of the grid cells should be maintained over sample spacing This means that if you specify a grid of 4 rows and 5 columns each grid cell will be exactly 25 of the total export height and 20 of the total export width The sample spacing may be slightly smaller than what is specified in order to achieve this By default the sample spacing is exactly maintained and each grid cell may be slightly larger than specified to maintain an integer number of exported cells Use GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE YES to enable Table of Contents 258 Global Mapper User s Manual e GRID_NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTIAL for sequential numeric naming starting at 1 SEPARATE for separate prefix appending by row and colu
429. ort very slowly or become Unavailable at any time Wie have no control over this Once the data to download is defined Global Mapper will automatically download the most appropriate layer for display as you zoom in and out This way you can see an overview of the data when zoomed out with more detail becoming available when you zoom in You can also export this data in full resolution to any of the supported raster export formats such as GeoTIFF JPG or ECW The most appropriate detail level for the export sample spacing will be used to obtain the source data for the export Each data source load will appear as a separate layer in the Overlay Control Center Each entry can have it s display options modified just like any other raster layer to drape it over elevation data blend it with other layers etc You can use the Add New Source button to add new online sources of imagery from WMS Web Map Service WCE Web Coverage Service OSM OpenStreetMap Tiles Google Maps organized tiles or TMS Tile Map Service sources When you press the button a dialog appears allowing you to choose the type of source to add If you select the WMS or WCS option then the Select WMS Data Source to Load dialog pictured below is displayed This dialog allows you to specify the URL of a WMS or WCS data source and select what layer s to add as an available data source on the Select Online Data Source to Download dialog The URL that you should specify is the G
430. ossless Compression this option causes the lossless compression method to be used when generating Global Mapper Grid files If it is not checked some minor loss of data in areas of high terrain relief will be allowed in order to achieve a higher compression ratio Use Other Source Files As Filler causes all selected source files to be loaded and made available during export to fill holes in the main file being converted This is useful when you have a collection of files that are being reprojected and you do not want to have a sliver around the edge of each new file filled with the background color when the source data does not make a perfect rectangle You can even mark some files to only be used as filler by right clicking on them in the Files list and selecting the appropriate option in the popup menu Use Tile Layout ADVANCED USERS ONLY specifies that any exported GeoTIFF or JPEG2000 files should be organized in tiles For GeoTIFF if this isn t checked the default strip organization will be used Table of Contents 85 Global Mapper User s Manual You can also right click on the list of files to convert and choose to save that list of files to a text file This can be a convenient way to start a Global Mapper script to do other processing on the files Other right click options include the ability to remove all archive files like zip and tar gz from the list and to fill the source files list with files listed in a text file Note
431. ot any extra text displayed below road icons like alternate names for the road are displayed The Only Highlight Border of Selected Area Features option allows you to change the rendering style for area features selected with the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools so that only the border of the area is highlighted and the center is left unfilled The Mark Sides of Road with Addressing Information option allows you to have the sides of roads with recognized address numbering information to be marked with a series of parallel lines extending from the road on the side s with known address information This provides a visual way to see where addressing information is available The Hide Display Labels that are Partially Offscreen option allows you to hide any feature labels that don t entirely fit on the screen This can be useful when exporting vector data to a raster format and also gridding the export into multiple pieces This option should allow a seamless result in that case The Add MODIFIED_DATE to Modified Vector Features option controls whether or not a MODIFIED_DATE attribute is automatically added to vector features when they are changed in some way The Iconize Road Names on Import Some Formats option controls whether or not the specified name for road line types is checked on import to see if it should result in an iconized road name display such as for interstates and major highways This is only done for formats which do not already h
432. ou wish to change the ground units that the sample spacing is specified in you need to change the current projection by going to Contig gt Projection Click Here to Calculate Spacing in Other Units Compare Value if Applicable 0 The Combine Terrain Layers Options panel displayed above allows the user to select the name to assign to the newly generated layer select the layers to combine to make the new layer select the operation to perform when combining the new layer and select the vertical units and sample spacing of the new layer The available operations are described below e Addition values from each layer are added to each other e Subtraction Difference Signed value in new layer is assigned to the difference between the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Subtraction Difference Unsigned value in new layer is assigned to the magnitude absolute value of the difference between the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Average Elevation value in new layer is assigned to the average of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Minimum Elevation value in new layer is assigned to the smaller of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer e Maximum Elevation value in new layer is assigned to the larger of the value in the first layer and the value in the second layer Multiply Values value in new layer is assigne
433. ough the dialog each time Enter Strike and Dip Parameters m Strike Azimuth Specify the strike azimuth direction in degrees where North is 0 East ts 90 South it 180 and West is 270 The dip azimuth will be offset 90 degrees clockwise right of from the strike azimuth Azimuth 45 degrees relative to True North Dip Value 20 Modify Location Symbol Geology Dip Bedding Medium Black A Descriptions Rock Duteropping Feature Layer User Created and Modified Features Cancel Create Regular Grid of Area Features of User Specified Size Orientation After selecting the Create Regular Grid of User Specified Size Orientation popup menu option you can proceed to select the anchor point top left corner of your grid by left clicking at the desired location You can cancel creation of the point s at any time by pressing the Escape key or right clicking After selecting the anchor point for your grid the Grid Setup dialog pictured below appears and allows you to setup the size count naming and orientation of your grid cells Pressing the Anchor Point button allows you to edit the location of your anchor point You can also choose to create lines rather than areas and to create points at the grid edges if you want which is useful for creating your own labeled grid over the map for just a certain sub area Table of Contents 210 Grid Setup Grid Placement Orientation Rotation Angle Clockwise Numbe
434. ould be generated in addition to the data file Use GEN_AUX_XML_FILE YES to turn on e PALETTE specifies the palette image type to use If not specified a 24 bit RGB image will be generated KEEP SOURCE The exported file will use the some color configuration if possible as the file being exported Note that this option is only available if you have only a single layer loaded for export OPTIMIZED BMP ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only The palette generated will be an optimal mix of up to 256 colors that will closely represent the full blend of colors in the source images This option will generate the best results but can more than double the export time required if any high color images are present in the export set HALFTONE BMP ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only use a 256 color halftone palette spread over the color spectrum DOQ_DRG BMP ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only use a 256 color palette optimized for combined grayscale DOQs and USGS DRGs Table of Contents 264 Global Mapper User s Manual DRG BMP ERDAS GEOTIFF and PNG only use a 256 color palette optimized for the colors found in USGS DRGs e GRAYSCALE use a 256 color grayscale palette BW BMP GEOTIFF only creates a black and white 1 bit per pixel image BLACKISMIN GEOTIFF only creates an 8 bit per pixel grayscale image with no color map stored in the image Black will be stored as zero with varying shades of gray up to white with a value of
435. ow much of the full HSV range is to be used Increasing this value leads to color wraparound Custom Shaders The Custom Shaders section allows the user to manage any custom shaders that they may have Custom shaders allow the user to control exactly how elevation data is rendered so that the desired result can be obtained Pressing the New button displays the Custom Shader dialog pictured below which allows the user to create a new custom shader Pressing the Edit button display the same dialog allowing the user to edit the currently selected custom shader The Delete button removes the currently selected custom shader Table of Contents 139 Global Mapper User s Manual o Custom Shader Name Boundary Shader Elevation Slope Colors Cancel GE 3000 000000 meters D 5000 000000 meters 0 000000 meters 0 000000 meters 500 000000 meters _ 1000 000000 meters PR 2500 000000 meters Change Color Change Elevation Delete Elevation Evenly Space Elevations Starting at Arbitrary Base Elevation New Elevation Height Slope 0 2 dae Add Initialize From Other Shader Initialize From Palette File Initialize From Surfer CLA File Save to Surfer CLA File if Blend Colors Between Elevation Slope Values Seale Shader to Loaded Elevation Values The Custom Shader dialog allows the user to specify how they want elevation data to be rendered The Name field provides a place to enter the name to
436. ows the user to export any loaded line and point vector data sets to an Orca XML format file When selected the command displays the Orca XML Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Table of Contents 70 Global Mapper User s Manual Export OSM OpenStreetMap org XML Command The Export OSM OpenStreetMap org XML command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to an OSM XML format file that can be used to provide new data to the OpenStreetMap org web site When selected the command displays the OSM XML Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Platte River WhiteStar Geographix File Command The Export Platte River Whitestar Geographix File command allows the user to export any loaded area features to a Platte River Digitizer Whitestar Geographix Township Range ASCII format file These files can be used with several applications When selected the command displays the Platte River Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup t
437. ows you to override the default band assignment for a MULTIBAND export Use the following format to specify what band from what layer to use for a given export band lt output_band gt lt input_band gt lt layer_filename gt So for example to assign the 4th infrared band in an export from the Ist red band in a previously loaded file name C data input_file tif use the following parameter BAND_EXPORT_SETUP 4 1 c data input_file tif Note that you would include a separate BAND_EXPORT_SETUP parameter for each output band that you want to setup If you leave off the filename then you all loaded data will be considered as input with just the input to output band assignment being updated e GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in the export projection The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 e GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with each tile having the given size in pixels samples The value should be specified as cell pixel width cell pixel height For example if you want to tile the export into cells that are 800 pixels wide by 600 pixels tall you would use GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE 800 600 e GRID
438. pacings of all the currently loaded elevation overlays When selected the nterpolate to Fill Small Gaps option specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being exported will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with an elevation for the point in question This is useful when data sets do not line up exactly and so have small gaps in between them Table of Contents 102 Global Mapper User s Manual Image Rectification Georeferencing The Image Rectification feature in Global Mapper allows you to load and work with any JPG PNG or TIFF imagery regardless of whether or not spatial positioning information is provided with it For example you could scan in an image of a map to a JPG file use the File gt Rectify Imagery menu command to enter the coordinates of several points on that image and then load it into Global Mapper properly overlaid with any other loaded data Click Here for a Video Tutorial provided by www globalmapperforum com Once you have rectified an image in Global Mapper you can then export it to any of the supported export formats to obtain a fully rectified image that can then be immediately loaded into numerous other imaging and GIS packages If you find that after rectifying a file that you want to modify the rectification you can simply select the layer in the Overlay Control Center then right click and select the Modify Layer Position Projection option to bring up the r
439. parency to 35 the FILL_ALPHA field attribute value should be set equal to 89 0 35 x 255 89 25 GM_TYPE Anchorage Area BORDER_COLOR RGB 255 0 255 BORDER_WIDTH 1 BORDER_STYLE Comb Right Only FILL COLOR RGB 255 0 255 FILL STYLE No Fill FILL ALPHA 8 9 Area Types Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 304 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which areas can be seen Any area whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Snow or Glacier Area will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Area Types Border Border Border eee eee Bee Width Style Color wfe E _ a C a C p Neu DUN p oe a a a a 0 0 0 Null Solid Solid County subdivision 128 128 128 Solid Coverage Quad Coverage uad No Fill om fl 5 Intermittent Dry Lakebed 5 Water Pattern Intermittent Water Pattern Null 0 0 0 132 130 255 Null 0 0 0 Intermittent Lake 132 130 255 Null 0 0 0 Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 305 Global Mapper User s Manual Int ou Intermittent Tno Water 132 130 255 Null 0 0 0 Stream River Pattern Intertidal Area Solid Fill 192 240 188 Null 0 0 0 No Fill 0 0 0
440. pecifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the export will be cropped to all polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH specifies that if a POLYGON_CROP_FILE is specified that contains multiple polygons the operation will generate a separate export for each polygons in that file rather than just the best fit polygon See the POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY and POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR options for naming and other options when using this parameter Use POLYGON _CROP_USE_EACH YES to enable POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY specifies that if the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter is specified that each export should just be cropped to the bounding box of each polygon rather than the actual boundary of the polygon Use POLYGON_CROP_BBOX_ONLY YES to enable only cropping to the bounding box POLYGON_CROP_NAME_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual name of the attribute from the polygon features to use for naming or the special values lt Area Display Label gt or lt Area Source Filename gt If no value is provided the exported files will be sequentially numbered e POLYGON_CROP_FOLDER_ATTR used to control the filenames generated when cropping to multiple polygons using the POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH parameter This should be the actual Table of Contents 262 Global Mapper User s Manual
441. per display window If a GPS device is found which has a valid GPS fix you will see a triangular vessel appear in the Global Mapper view at the location reported by the GPS device The vessel will point in the current direction of travel as reported by the GPS device Stop Tracking GPS The Stop Tracking GPS command tells Global Mapper to stop tracking any connected GPS devices Keep the Vessel On Screen If the Keep the Vessel On Screen option is checked the main view will automatically pan when the GPS vessel approaches the edge of the view to keep the vessel in the view Show Course Line Table of Contents 231 Global Mapper User s Manual If the Show Course Line option is checked a line will be drawn from the GPS vessel in the direction that the GPS is headed Draw Range Ring Around Vessel If the Draw Range Ring Around Vessel option is checked a range ring some user specified radius in size will be drawn around the GPS vessel Mark Waypoint Use the Mark Waypoint or Mark Waypoint from Averaged Positioncommand to save a point feature at the current GPS location When selected this command will display a dialog allowing you to specify any additional desired attributes and or drawing styles that you would like to associate with the waypoint If you select the Averaged Position option Global Mapper will start averaging locations received until you choose to stop averaging at which point you will be presented with the dialog des
442. plate file copied to the new file verbatim including any feature data in the template file If selected the Create as Marine Map option specifies that the created MP file will be marked as a marine map and marine features will be used if appropriate Note that the Marine version of cGPSMapper is required to create marine maps The Make All Point Features Searchable controls whether or not all point features in the final map created from the MP file should be searchable on the GPS device If the Create Transparent Map option is selected the map will be marked as transparent and any data under the map will show through If selected the Save All Attributes Even Non MP Attributes option specifies that all attributes from exported features will be included in the exported MP file rather than just those attributes recognized for that feature type by the MP format Most users won t ever need to use this When Global Mapper exports loaded vector data to a MP file it will automatically attempt to determine the best type to save in the MP file based on the classification of the feature in Global Mapper If no type mapping is known the name of the assigned Global Mapper classification will be used for the Type value in the MP file If you updated your RenTypes txt file in your cGPSMapper folder with the type names and the appropriate type number you can make this work as well You can also manually specify the type number to use for a feature by adding
443. pply multiple criteria all of which must be true in order for the lines to be considering for combining The following parameters are supported by the command e CREATE AREAS FROM_LINES controls whether or not area features will be created from connected lines or just new line features The default is CREATE_AREAS_ FROM_LINES NO Use CREATE AREAS FROM_LINES YES to create new areas rather than lines e FILENAME filename of the layer to assign types to If an empty value is passed in all loaded vector layers will be updated You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer updated Table of Contents 242 Global Mapper User s Manual e COMPARE_STR specifies a comparison operation to perform to see if a line feature is one that needs to be considered The format is attr_name attr_value or attr_name attr_value for equals and not equals comparisons respectively For example if you have an attribute named CFCC and you want to match when the value of that attribute starts with an A you can use COMPARE_STR CFCC A as your parameter You can add multiple COMPARE_STR parameters to a single command to combine multiple criteria for your search If you would like to compare against a feature label rather than an attribute use lt Feature Name gt for your attribute name To compare against a feature type name rather
444. pported iconized road name like I 35 or US40 and when you press OK you will be prompted whether or not to display an icon for the road name This allows you to generate a nice iconized display for most highway types If you would like to split point and area labels up onto multiple display lines you can add the newline escape sequence n to your display label You will then be prompted to split your label onto multiple lines when you save the changes If editing an area or line feature the Vertices button will appear allowing you to edit the vertices of the selected feature including working with per vertex elevations for 3D features The Feature Type selection allows you to choose which Global Mapper classification to assign to the feature You can also choose to create a new Global Mapper type with the Create New Type button The Feature Layer selection allows you to choose which layer that the feature should be assigned to You can choose an existing layer the User Created and Modified Features layer or you can create an entirely new layer to add the feature to A layer corresponds to a single entry in the Control Center The Feature Style section allows you to modify the drawing style of the selected feature Selecting the Use Default Style for Selected Feature Type option will cause the currently configured style for the Feature Type Table of Contents 215 Global Mapper User s Manual from the Area Line or Point Styles tab of the
445. ppropriate zones and projection and create the a toc table of contents file for the data as well as the individual frame files as specified by the MIL STD 2411 RPF MIL PRF 89038 CADRG and MIL PRF 89041 CIB specifications A large number of defined chart types and scales resolutions are available for export When selected the command displays the CADRG CIB Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel pictured below which allows the user to select the chart type resolution and other parameters and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 31 Global Mapper User s Manual CADRG CIB RPF Export Options CADRG CIB RPF Options Export Bounds CADRG City Graphics 1 20 000 Export CADRG Map Scale 122A or CIB Resolution mnie 20000 Frame File Folder Name BSDRG File Version Eo Producer DMASC Defense Mapping Agency Systems Center iti Save Scale Hevation Legend Grid if Displayed Save Vector Data if Displayed Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DEM Command The Export DEM command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a native format USGS DEM file When selected the command displays the DEM Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a Ge
446. ptions dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing to use a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export GeoTIFF Command The Export GeoTIFF command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation data sets to a GeoTIFF format file When selected the command displays the GeoTIFF Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a GeoTIFF Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 35 Global Mapper User s Manual Geol lFF Export Options Geo TIFF Options Gridding Export Bounds File Type C 24bit RGB Full Color May Create Large Files Black and White 1 bit per pixel Multi Band F bits per Band topes Bands Blevation 16 bit integer samples C Hevation 32 bit floating point samples Palette mage Ontmzed Palette f m Sample Spacing Scale j Kais 30 meters 0 meters i Always Generate Square Pixels f you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the curent projection by going
447. ptions dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export LMN Spectra Line Management Node Command The Export LMN Spectra Line Management Node command allows the user to export any loaded line features to a LMN format file for use in applications that support the LMN format Attributes named FEATURE_GROUP FEATURE_TYPE and FEATURE_REP are recognized for this export and will be used if present to fill in the appropriate data fields in the exported file When selected the command displays the LMN Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Lowrance LCM Command The Export Lowrance LCM MapCreate command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Lowrance LCM format file for use in Lowrance brand GPS devices This allows you to create custom maps for Lowrance devices from your data Type assignment will be done based on the built in type assignments In addition the MP_TYPE attribute classification used for Polish MP exports f
448. r For example to export at 1 50 000 scale use EXPORT_SCALE 50000 e DPI GEOTIFF BMP and JPG only or with EXPORT_SCALE parameter specifies the DPI dots per inch value to save in the generated file s For example use DPI 300 to specify that the DPI for this file is 300 By default no DPI value will be written out e KML_MIN_LOD_PIXELS KML only specifies how large layer has to be in pixels before it will show up in Google Earth e KML_MAX_LOD_PIXELS KML only specifies how large layer has to be in pixels before it will stop showing up in Google Earth The default value of 1 which means that a layer will never go away once it is displayed e KML_FADE_EXTENT_MIN KML only specifies at what number of pixels in size that the image will start fading out This value should be between KML_MIN_LOD_PIXELS and KML_MAX_LOD_PIXELS The fade will be such that the image is 100 opaque at KML_FADE_EXTENT_MIN and completely transparent at KML_MIN_LOD_PIXELS e KML_FADE_EXTENT_MAX KML only specifies at what number of pixels in size that the image will start fading out This value should be between KML_MIN_LOD_PIXELS and KML_MAX_LOD_PIXELS The fade will be such that the image is 100 opaque at KML_FADE_EXTENT_MAX and completely transparent at KML_MAX_LOD_PIXELS e KML_RASTER_FORMAT KML only specified which raster image format to use when creating tiles for KML KMZ files The valid options are JPG PNG and TIFF For example add KML_ RASTE
449. r FILENAME _ATTR_LIST and FILENAME_INCLUDE_ATTR_NAME parameters to control which attributes are compared to and in what order and how the filename is generated from those attributes and their values Use SPLIT_BY_ATTR YES to split your export so that all features with the same values for each of the specified attributes is in the same file FILENAME_ATTR_LIST contains a comma delimited list of attributes to use when naming files exported when using the SPLIT_BY_ATTR YES parameter If you would like to filter the results to only where an attribute has a specified value do that with an equal sign like FILENAME_ATTR_LIST lt Feature Name gt My Label ATTR_I My Attr Val You can also use rather than to match on any feature with an attribute value not equal to the specified value If you need to match on a value that may contain a comma use FILENAME_ATTR instead FILENAME_ATTR contains a single attribute to use when naming files exported when using the SPLIT_BY_ATTR YES parameter If you would like to filter the results to only where an attribute has a specified value do that with an equal sign like FILENAME ATTR lt Feature Name gt My Label You can also use rather than to match on any feature with an attribute value not equal to Table of Contents 274 Global Mapper User s Manual the specified value e FILENAME_INCLUDE_ATTR_NAME specifies that the attribute name specified in the FILENAME_ATTR_LIST parameter should be included a
450. r command allows the user to export any loaded data sets to a comma delimited ASCII XY Color file Each valid sample will be represented as follows note for grayscale export there will just be a single grayscale value x coordinate y coordinate red blue green When selected the command displays the XY Color Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export XYZ Grid Command The Export X YZ Grid command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a comma delimited ASCH XYZ file Each grid point will be represented as follows actual coordinate delimiter is configurable Table of Contents 53 Global Mapper User s Manual x coordinate y coordinate z coordinate When selected the command displays the XYZ Grid Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export
451. r dim bright looking data sets The Vertical Exaggeration setting is used to control the exaggeration of relief features The Hill Shading Shadow Darkness setting is used to control how dark that hill shading is allowed to make shaded areas By default the value of O allows shaded areas to go all the way to black By moving this slider to the right you can cause shadowing to be capped in high relief areas thus allowing the use of other controls to better bring out detail in low relief areas The Hill Shading Highlight from Direct Light setting is used to display a whitened highlight area in terrain areas that are getting direct sunlight based on the lighting angle selected The slider controls the amount of whitening highlight applied to those direct sunlight areas To enable the display of water on elevation data sets check the Show Water On Elevation Data option The Water Transparency controls the clarity of displayed water if configured to display water Clearer water shows more underlying relief to show through while opaque water allows none The Water Level setting controls the level at which water is displayed The default is set at an elevation of 0 meters above sea level Use this to simulate different flood and sea level change scenarios The Water Color options allows you to set the color of the water The default is blue Shader Options The Shader Options panel pictured below controls options for the display of elevation data usi
452. r of Grid Rows Number of Grid Columns Grid Cell Width Grid Cell Height V Create Lines Instead of Areas I Create Points at Grid Line Endpoints Anchor Point Grid Naming C Sequential Numbering Row Major Order Separate Row Column Letters or Numbers Bows Numbers Letters Reverse Start ggg Prefix With l A Step i Suffix With N Columns Numbers Letters Reverse Start 3 Prefix with C Step 1 Suffix with E Reverse Naming Columns First Then Rows Prepend 0 to Numbers to Make Same Length M Separate Rows and Columns with Underscore cee Create Points Spaced Along Area and Line Features You can create new point features evenly spaced along a selected area and line features by right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation submenu option Create Point Features Spaced Along Selected Feature s This will present a dialog allowing you to specify the spacing to use then create new point features at the specified interval along the line Create Line by Connecting Selected Point Features You can create a new line feature by connecting selected point features by right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation submenu option Create Line from Selected Point Features This will find a path from the selected points starting at the first selected point and then adding the closest point to each end until all of the point are connected then create a line feature from
453. rary Lighthouse Little Blue X Lodging Marina Mine No Symbol Park Phone Picnic Area Post Office Resturant Restroom Rock Scenic View School Shopping sfalelelmfmfel lolol sfele x efale e e cavomma ap shen et Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 373 Global Mapper User s Manual sen a cn veo fe e roma OR Symbols Geology Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 374 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Built In Symbols Symbol 2X Sym Details Geology Arrow Medium Aqua Geology Arrow Medium Black Geology Arrow Medium Green Geology Arrow Medium Red Geology Arrow Small Aqua Geology Arrow Small Black Geology Arrow Small Green Geology Arrow Small Red Geology Cleavage Medium Aqua Geology Cleavage Medium Black Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 375 Global Mapper User s Manual Geology Cleavage Medium Green Geology Cleavage Medium Red Geology Cleavage Small Aqua Geology Cleavage Small Black Geology Cleavage Small Green Geology Cleavage Small Red Geology Dip Bedding Medium Aqua Geology Dip Bedding Medium Black Geology Dip Bedding Medium Green Geology Dip Bedding Medium Red Geology Dip Bedding Small Aqua PPP P
454. rate e PDF_FILL_PAGE specifies whether the PDF export should fill the page or be cropped to the exact bounds specified Use PDF_FILL_PAGE YES to enable or PDF_FILL_PAGE N0O to disable e PDF_FONT_SCALE specifies the scale factor to apply to text For example use PDF_FONT_SCALE z2 0 to double the size of text e PDF_SYMBOL_SCALE specifies the scale factor to apply to point symbols and icons For example use PDF_SYMBOL_SCALE 2 0 to double the size of symbols e VECTOR_ONLY specifies that only vector layers should be exported to the PDF file Use VECTOR _ONLY YES to enable e SAVE_GRID_LINES specifies that if grid line display is enabled that the grid lines should be saved Specify SAVE_GRID_LINES NO to disable this option If it s not specified the the grid lines will be Table of Contents 260 Global Mapper User s Manual saved if enabled e SAVE _SCALE_AND_LEGEND specifies that the distance scale and elevation legend if applicable and enabled for display on the Configuration dialog should be exported to the generated PDF file Specify SAVE_SCALE_AND_LEGEND N0O to disable this option If it s not specified the current view settings will be used GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the export bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the export bounds in u
455. rce that creates shadows on elevation data The valid range of values is 0 0 90 0 with 0 0 meaning a light source at the horizon and 90 0 meaning a light source directly overhead e LIGHT_AZIMUTH this sets the direction angle of the light source that creates shadows on elevation data The valid range of values is 0 0 360 0 with 0 0 meaning a light source from the top of the screen i e north 90 0 meaning from the right i e east etc e SHADE_DARKNESS this sets the minimum black level that a shadow can create The valid range of values is 0 255 with O allowing complete blackness from a shadow and 255 allowing no shadow at all e SHADE_HIGHLIGHT this sets the level of white highlight applied to terrain areas directly facing the sun light angle The valid range of values is 0 255 with O applying no highlight and 255 making the direct areas always brightened completely to white e ENABLE_WATER this setting controls whether or not water will be displayed on top of elevation values at or below the currently configured water level Use YES to enable water display and NO to disable water display e WATER_COLOR this setting controls the color that water drawn on top of elevation data is rendered in The format of this value is RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt For example to use a water color of blue use WATER COLOR RGB 0 0 255 e WATER_LEVEL this setting specifies the height in meters below which water should b
456. rd Intl 1924 HUNGARIAN DATUM 1972 6237 GRS19 7dndonesia 1974 IGN72 GRANDE TERRE NEW CALEDONIA 6634 International 1909 Hayford Ind 1924 Built in Datums 384 Ww lO pk NO as 1 IA TIO ON Global Mapper User s Manual INDIAN BANGLADESH Unknown Everest 1830 INDIAN MEAN VALUE Unknown Everest 1830 INDIAN NEPAL G Everest 1956 S INDIAN THAILAND Unknown Everest 1830 INDIAN 19546289 Bverest 1830 INDIAN 1975240 Everest 1830 INDONESIA 19746238 GRS1967 Indonesia 1974 IRENETIS 73 osoo S ISN93 ICELAND 6659 GRSI9BO S JAD2001 JAMAICA 2001 65s wass o JAD69 JAMAICA 199 Clarke 1866 JGD2000 QAPAN o2 soso S KOREAN 1985 162 Bessel 840 WGS84 S KOREAN 1995 6166 WGS84 6737 GRS 1980 KRASOVSKY 1940 _ Unknown Krassovsky o o LA CANOA VENEZUELA 6247 international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 LE POUCE 1934 MAURITIUS 6699 Clarke 1880 RGS LEIGON GHANA 650 COwkeisso O LISBON LISBOA 1937 DLx 6207 international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 LKS92 LATVIA S o GRS9BO S LUZON PHILIPPINES 653 Clarke 1866 MPORALOKO GABON 62 6 Clakei880 6259 International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 MERCHICH MOROCCO 62 1 Clakei880 MGI AUSTRIA Ena Bessol 840 MGICROATIA SERBIA 6R Bessel 1840 MGISLOVENIA 6n Bessel 84d MINNA CAMEROON 6263 Clarke 1880 MINNA NIGERI O OB Clarke 1880 MN COUNTY ANOKA 6152 MN County Anoka Built i
457. re contents of a specified template file should be copied to the new file rather than just the header portion of the template file MP_IMAGE_ID POLISH_MP only specifies the image ID value that should be stored in the resultant mp file If you don t specify this value or you specify a value of O a new value that has not been used before will automatically be generated DGN_UNIT_RESOLUTION DGN only specifies the unit resolution to use in an exported DGN file The default is 10000 0 DGN_GLOBAL_ORIGIN_LL DGN only specifies whether the global origin of the exported DGN file should be set to the lower left of the design plane rather than at the center of the design plane Use DGN_GLOBAL_ORIGIN_LL YES to move the global origin to the lower left DGN_REPLACE_DARK_COLORS DGN only specifies whether the color of dark lines should automatically be replaced with white on export to make them more visible on a dark background Use DGN_REPLACE_DARK_COLORS YES to enable this option OVERWRITE_EXISTING specifies that existing files should be overwritten The default is OVERWRITE_EXISTING YES so use OVERWRITE_EXISTING NO to skip exporting files that already exist SPLIT_BY_LAYER SHAPEFILE only specifies that the export should generate a separate Shapefile for each layer type in the input data SPLIT_BY_ATTR specifies that the export should generate a separate file for each set of attributes values in the input data Use the FILENAME_ATTR and o
458. re is being used they can specify an atmospheric correction value to be used The atmospheric correction value is useful when determining the view shed for transmitting waves whose path 1s affected by the atmosphere For example when modeling microwave transmissions a value of 1 333 is typically used to emulate how microwaves are refracted by the atmosphere The Sample Spacing section allows the user to specify the spacing of elevation samples when calculating the view shed The sample spacing controls the interval at which elevation samples are examined to determine visibility Smaller values result in more accurate but more slowly generated view sheds The Fresnel Zone Specification section allows you to have the view shed analysis also check that a certain portion the Percent Clear value of the first Fresnel zone for a transmission of a particular frequency is clear The typical standard is that good visibility requires that at least 60 the default of the first Fresnel zone for the specified frequency be clear of obstructions If you specify a maximum Fresnel zone percentage clear other than 100 only those locations where the minimum percentage of the Ist Fresnel zone that is clear is between your specified percentages will be marked Table of Contents 197 Global Mapper User s Manual as visible The Free Space Path Loss Calculation section allows you to display the power at any given location taking free space path loss into account
459. rea Fill Patterns Global Mapper Fill Patterns Fill Pattern n L B Backwards Diagonal Cross Hatch Cross Hatch Diagonal Cross Hatch Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 311 Global Mapper User s Manual Forward Diagonal Cross Hatch Horizontal Hatch Vertical Hatch Intermittent_Water_Pattern Black _Cross_ Pattern Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 312 Global Mapper User s Manual Black Dot_ Pattern Area Border Styles Global Mapper Border Styles Border Style Dash Dot Dot Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 313 Global Mapper User s Manual E Eo Comb Left Only Ea Comb Right Only Cu Comb Long Teeth Left Only ot Comb Long_Teeth Right Only EG Comb Widely Spaced Left Only EG Ea E Comb Widely Spaced Right Only Comb Long amp Short Teeth Left Only Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 314 Global Mapper User s Manual Comb Long amp Short Teeth Right Only Comb Double Teeth Left Only Comb Double Teeth Right Only Comb Triplet Left Only oe Ka Rake Narrow Spaced Left Only Rake Narrow Spaced Right Only Rake Widely Spaced Left Only Rake Widely Spaced Right Only Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 315 Gl
460. reas this option specifies that each exported file will be cropped to any area features selected with the Feature Info or Digitizer Tools If this option is selected no output file will be generated for any input file that does not intersect any of the selected crop areas e Export Areas Export Lines and Export Points these options respectively control whether area line and or point shapefiles are generated from the source vector data files At least one of these options must be selected o Fill Small Gaps in Data this option specifies whether or not small gaps in the elevation or raster file being exported will be filled by interpolating between nearby known values o Force Square Pixels in Output causes the newly created files to have square pixels in whatever projection they are created in This allows the files to be used with the widest variety of other software packages many of which do not correctly handle non square pixels Generate Projection PRJ File causes a projection file describing the ground reference system of the output file to be generated for each output file in addition to the output file itself The PRJ file will have the same name as the output file with the prj extension Table of Contents 84 Global Mapper User s Manual e Generate World File causes a world file describing the location of the output file to be generated for each output file The world file will have the same name as the output file with
461. reas that they were connected to or select any line features that share a vertex with the selected area s Selecting Vertices If the Show Area and Line Vertices option is enabled Shift V is a keyboard shortcut to toggle this setting you can also select individual vertices on area and line features You must select vertices before options allowing you to work with individual vertices in area and line features appear in the right click options menu Selected vertices will be shown on the display with a circle around them To select vertices simple left click near a vertex to select the closest one if any are nearby or drag a box to select all vertices within the box The same behavior modifications occur as described above if the CTRL and or SHIFT keys are pressed when selecting If you hold down the S key when left clicking only vertices from already selected lines or areas will be considered Pictured below is a screen capture showing a line feature and several of its vertices selected with a right click popup menu opened to show the available options Table of Contents 213 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper REGISTERED EE File View Tools Search Help Edit Line Feature Move Line Feature Delete Line Feature Move Selected Vertices Join Selected Vertices Delete Selected vertices Set Position of Selected vertices Insert Vertex into Selected Line Hide Grea and Line vertices Clear Current Selection Create
462. reate Watershed Areas Showing Drainage to Streams option to enable creating watershed areas If you would like to discard any short stream segments that don t have any other streams flowing into them i e short little stub streams feeding into a main trunk check the option to Discard Stream Starts Less than Some Length This will remove any short little stream stubs that are below the specified distance threshold in meters Many terrain data sets will contain depressions in the data where flow would terminate unless allowed to fill the depression and spill into the surrounding terrain The Depression Fill Depth section controls how deep of a depression will be filled before it is considered a basin and flow is allowed to terminate there The depression fill depth value will automatically be filled in with some guess at a good value based on the range of loaded elevation values but you might want to modify this especially if you have relatively flat terrain with a lot of depressions Note that it can take a while to fill particularly deep depressions When trying to determine a a good value to use for the depression fill depth you should think about how high of an embankment or dam that you might encounter that you want to allow water to fill up to the top of and pour over or also how deep of a small pond or puddle to fill and allow spilling out of You can also check the option to Save DEM to Global Mapper Grid File After Filling Depressions to save
463. report file on the data in one or more loaded layers broken down by a particular attribute value feature name or type or just a single line report about all features The report will include the count of area line and point features matching the specified criteria as well as the total combined length of the line features and combined covered area of the area features The following parameters are supported by the command e OUTPUT_FILENAME specifies the name of the text csv file to write the report results to e FILENAME filename of the layer to generate the report for If an empty value is passed in all layers that were created by the script such as those from a GENERATE_CONTOURS command will be used to generate the report You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer be used If no FILENAME parameter is provided the report will cover all available vector layers e REPORT_ATTR specifies what to use to divide up the report into categories See special Attribute Name parameter details If no REPORT_ATTR parameter is provided or the value is empty only a single line concerning all matching features will be generated in the report e COMPARE_STR specifies a comparison operation to perform to see if a feature is one that needs to be included in the report The format is attr_name attr_value For example i
464. res Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 367 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Built In Point Type Features Point Type Symbol Address Label Dot Red Amusement Center Amusement Center Anchorage Marina Boat Ramp Boat Ramp Bottom Conditions Do O t Building School Campground Campground Cemetery Cemetery Church Church Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 368 t t t D D D D O ot ot ot ot Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 369 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 370 Global Mapper User s Manual Symbols Global Mapper Built In Symbols ymbol 2x Sym Details B Amusement Center A A ED DP X Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 371 Global Mapper User s Manual Big Yellow X Boat Ramp Bridge Bullseye Campground Cemetry Church Cliff S Danger Area Deer w D E a Diag Crosshair Red Diag Crosshair Yellow pod Dot Dot Blue Dot Green Dot Red Dot White Dot Yellow Elevation Shaded Fish EHRE pu op AT Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 372 Global Mapper User s Manual Fuel Geyser Golf Hospital Lib
465. ress Information from Roads to Selected Point s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause each point to be examined to find the nearest line feature and if it contains addressing information for the address of the nearest point on the line to the point feature to be stored as address attributes with the point feature A dialog will appear to prompt you for how far from each point that you want to search for a line feature with addressing information The following attribute names for line features are recognized as containing address information e FR_ ADDR_R R_FROM_ADR starting address number on the right side of the road e FR_ADDR_L L_FROM_ADR starting address number on the left side of the road e TO_ADDR_R R_TO_ADR ending address number on the right side of the road e TO_ADDR_L L_TO_ADR ending address number on the left side of the road e PLACE_R R_CITY city or town on the right side of the road e PLACE_L L_CITY city or town on the left side of the road e STATE_R R_STATE state or province on the right side of the road e STATE_L L_STATE state or province on the left side of the road e ZIP_R R_ZIP R_PCODE postal code on right side of road e ZIP_L L_ZIP L_PCODE postal code on left side of road e COUNTRY_R R COUNTRY country on right side of the road e COUNTRY_L L_COUNTRY country on left side of the road e PARITY_R R_PARITY numeric parity value on right side of road A
466. reversed e g if there are 4 rows and numeric naming is selected the rows will be named 4 3 2 1 instead of 1 2 3 4 The user also has the option of specifying the letter number to start naming at as well as the option to specify a prefix for each column and row number for each tile and the option to specify by what value numeric names should change by step for each successive row or column If the Reverse Naming option is checked the column name will come before the row name in the export filename otherwise the row name will be before the column name If the Prepend 0 to Numbers to Make Same Length option is checked the longest number will be found for both the column and row names and all other column row names will have 0 s prepended to make them all the same length The same applies to column row names using letters if the Prepend A to Letters to Make Same Length option is checked If the Create Folders for Each Row or Col if Reversed option is checked a separate output sub folder will be created for each row or column that is exported preventing too many files from being placed in a single folder The Separate Rows and Columns with Underscore option causes an underscore to be used to separate row and column values in the output filenames If not checked then no separator character will be used The Grid Cell Overlap section allows the user to specify that the generated grid cells should overlap each other by a certain percentage of the
467. rojection on the Projection tab of the Configuration dialog r Hevation Grid No Data Distance Criteria This setting controls how far from a known data point that an elevation grid cell has to be before it is considered invalid The default setting assumes all gid points are valid Lower values make the valid grid stay tighter around known data points Tight Loose M Use 3D Line Features as Constraints i e Breaklines M Flatten 3D Area Features M Taper 3D Area Features Using Curve Value 0 6 Ignore Zero Hevations Save Triangulation Network TIN as a Vector Layer Heights Relative to Ground Using Loaded Grid Layers Fill Entire Bounding Box Instead of Just Inside Convex Hull Export Grids Directly to Global Mapper Grid Files Rather Than Displaying in the Main Map View Use with Gridding Tab options to Allow Gridding of Very Large Data Sets The following options are also available when generating the grid e Use 3D Line Features as Constraints i e Breaklines If this option is checked any line and area features that have elevation values associated with them will be treated as constraints breaklines This will ensure that elevation values along the line area boundary will be consistent with the elevation that should be along the line e Flatten 3D Area Features If you have any area polygon features with elevation in the selected layers that you are gridding they will be treated as flattened areas rather than
468. rol Center should take precedence over all else when drawing This means that if a vector layer is before a raster layer in the Overlay Control Center s draw order that vector layer will draw underneath that raster layer if they overlap The Set Default Font Face option allow you to choose what font face should be used for all feature label displays where the font has not been explicitly set to something else for the feature The Set Default Font Character Set option allow you to choose what character set should be used for fonts that are still set to the default for their type Change this to allow default display of non European character sets like Cyrillic Russian or Japanese The Render Area and Line Vertices option specifies whether each vertex along area and line features should be displayed with a large dot The Always Render Vertices for Selected Features option specifies whether each vertex along area and line features selected with the Digitizer Edit Tool should be displayed with a large dot Use this option rather than the Render Area and Line Vertices option above to only display vertices for features that you are actively editing in order to prevent excessive clutter on the map The Render Dots at Line Endpoints option specifies whether or not the start and end vertices of line features will be displayed with a large dot You can use this instead of the Render Area and Line Vertices option if you just want to see line endpoints rath
469. rom a GENERATE_CONTOURS command will be unloaded You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer unloaded You can also pass in the full description of the loaded layer to use in case you want to unload a layer not loaded from a file VAR_LOOP_END The VAR_LOOP_END command ends a loop of commands over a range of numeric values See the VAR LOOP START command for details VAR_LOOP_START The VAR_LOOP_START command begins a loop of commands over a range of numeric values or through a sequence of characters This can be used as a simple counter or for more powerful things like custom gridding using coordinate values and naming exported files using the coordinates Note that it is possible to nest loops and use different variable names for each loop to build complex filenames For any commands found within a VAR_LOOP_START VAR_LOOP_END pair defining a loop the current value of the loop variable will be available as a variable name By default this will be 7 COUNTER but you can use the VAR_NAME parameter see below to make it whatever name that you want By default some generic numeric formatting will be provided i e whole numbers won t have a decimal or any leading O s but you can also provide custom formatting for the numeric value as a C style format string like you would pass to a printf command using the VAL_
470. rom the surface by drawing a thin line from the surface to the point Use KML_POINT_EXTRUDE YES to enable e GEN_MULTI_PATCH SHAPEFILE only specifies that area features exported to a Shapefile should be stored as multi patch features rather than areas Use GEN_MULTI_PATCH YES to enable e ADD_LAT_LON CSV only specifies that lat lon columns should be added to a CSV export Use ADD_LAT_LON YES to enable e EXPORT_HEADER CSV only specifies whether or not the header line for CSV files should be written Enabled by default use EXPORT_HEADER NO to disable Table of Contents 275 Global Mapper User s Manual e VERSION LOWRANCE_USR only specifies which version of USR file to create Must be 3 or 4 By default VERSION 3 is used e LAS_VERSION LIDAR_LAS only specifies what version of LAS file to write out This would be 1 1 1 2 1 3 or 1 4 If you don t specify a version the lowest version that will support all of the provided options will be used typically 1 1 or 1 2 e VERT_CS_CODE LIDAR_LAS only specifies the vertical coordinate system 1 e vertical datum to store in the LAS file to specify what the elevations are referenced to Use the EPSG code like 5103 for NAVD88 If you don t specify a value and the source files used all use the same known system that will be used Note that no vertical datum conversion is done this is just to supply metadata e VERT_CITATION LIDAR_LAS only specifies the text description to st
471. rst Fresnel zone for the specified frequency be clear of obstructions If Fresnel zone clearance is being selected the specified percentage of the first Fresnel zone will be drawn on the line of sight analysis dialog as a dotted line underneath the straight sight line The Earth Curvature section allows the user to specify whether they want to take the curvature of the earth into account while performing the line of sight calculation In addition when earth curvature is being used they can specify an atmospheric correction value to be used The atmospheric correction value is useful when determining the line of sight for transmitting waves whose path is affected by the atmosphere For example when modeling microwave transmissions a value of 1 333 is typically used to emulate how microwaves are refracted by the atmosphere Selecting the Exclude Endpoints when Finding Minimum Clearance options causes the first and last 5 of the elevations along the profile to be ignored when finding the minimum clearance point After setting up the line of sight calculation in the dialog and pressing the OK button the line of sight will be displayed in the path profile window pictured below Along with the line depicted the actual line of sight the position and vertical separation of the minimum clearance of the line of sight will be displayed with a Table of Contents 193 Global Mapper User s Manual dashed red line in the path profile window E Path Pro
472. rt Contours at Minimum Hevation Instead of at Firs Interval Multiple Within Specified Range r Resolution The resolution affects fidelity with which contours are generated Larger numbers result in less detailed contour lines that take up less space Typically you l just want to accept the defaults Mads 30 meters Y as 30 3 meters f you wish to change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need to change the curent projection by going to Contig gt Projection Generate Area Features Colored Based on the Current Hevation Shader in Addition to Contours Generate Spot Hevations at Min Max Elevations Interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data IY Append Unit Labels m or to Blevation Labels M Smooth Contour Lines Areas to Improve Appearance Export Contours Directly to Package Files Rather Than Displaying in the Main Map View Use with Grdding Option to Allow Contouring of Very Large Areas ADVANCED Create Contours Where Elevations Pass Down to Contour Value Rather Than as They Go Down From One Good for Shoreline Generation 1 The Contour Options panel displayed above allows the user to set the contour interval and units as well as the grid spacing to use when generating the contours You can also restrict the elevation range within which contour lines are generated by default all loaded elevation values are considered In addition options are available to generate isoheight area fe
473. s e MySQL Spatial e Oracle Spatial e PostGIS PostgreSQL e Spatialite SQLite Global Mapper can import raster data from and export raster data to the following spatial databases e Esri ArcSDE Geodatabase e Esri File Geodatabase e Esri Personal Geodatabases NOTE In order to import data from an Esri ArcSDE geodatabase or export data to any Esri geodatabase you must have installed and licensed a copy of Esri ArcGIS 9 3 1 or higher Support for Esri Geodatabases is only available in the 32 bit version of Global Mapper You can install the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of Global Mapper side by side and they can share a license Loading Data from a Spatial Database There are two ways to load data from a spatial database 1 Specify the connection parameters for the spatial database connection This applies to all of the enterprise databases ArcSDE MySQL Oracle and PostGIS Use the Connection Manager to define spatial database connections You can access this functionality by choosing Open Spatial Database from the File menu 2 Specify the file that contains a Spatialite database sqlite an Esri file gdb or personal geodatabase mdb or an Esri ArcSDE geodatabase connection definition sde Use Esri ArcCatalog or ArcMap to create an ArcSDE geodatabase connection file Choose Open Data File s from the File menu to perform this task Connectar Mame Authentication User Name Password dii Tstctte ttt eeteeeteet
474. s a watershed created from a collection of USGS DEMSs In it you can clearly see the stream network as well as the drainage areas for each stream segment Table of Contents 182 Global Mapper User s Manual File Edit View Tools Search GPS Help eNO LABEL gt Stream Height 261 585 meters lt blue springs 4 dem gt BLUE SPRINGS MO Find Ridge Lines Command The Find Ridge Lines command allows the user to analyze the loaded terrain data to find significant ridge lines The ridge line calculation is based heavily on the watershed generation algorithm so see that for details on how it works The main difference is that the ridge line operation simply inverts the terrain and where streams of water would form are now the ridge lines in the inverted terrain Table of Contents 183 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the Ridge Line Options Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the ridge line determination process Ridge Line Options Ridge Line Options Bounds Description r Resolution The resolution affects fidelity with which the terrain is sampled to find ridge lines Larger numbers result in a less detailed result but it will generate more quickly Typically you ll just want to accept the defaults Mads 30 meters Y axis 30 meters f you wish to change the ground units that the resolution is specified in you need to change the current projec
475. s along Line Solid with Empty Diamonds along Line Solid with Circles along Line Solid with Empty Circles along Line Solid with Arrow Pointing to Start a Solid with Arrow Pointing to End Solid with Empty Circle at Start Solid with Empty Circle at End Solid with Black Edges Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 319 Global Mapper User s Manual Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 320 Global Mapper User s Manual BUILT IN LINE TYPES AND DRAWING STYLES This section reviews the area line and point styles built into Global Mapper e Line Styles Line Type Features Drawing Styles Line Styles Upper line shows line types normal appearance Lower line shows how line type appears when Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In option is checked and display is zoomed in Global Mapper s View gt Background Color color designation influences which lines can be seen Any line whose color is the same as the Global Mapper Backgrond Color will not be seen Example for a white Background Color RGB 255 255 255 the Processing Closure Line will not be visible Global Mapper Built In Line Types Drawing Line or Style Width Airport Runway pst oan Alley or Driveway jst fos Arterial Road ps 2 owe Bathymetric Contour js 2 roms Intermediate Bathymetric Contour Major os fo 130 oS l 1 2 2 Bathymetric Contour
476. s and are ignored by the script processing engine This means that you can use C or C style comments like or at the start of your line ADD_MEASURE_ATTRS The ADD_MEASURE_ATTRS command allows you to add update feature measure attributes to all of the line and area features in a loaded vector layer The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer to update If an empty value is passed in all layers that were created by the script such as those from a GENERATE_CONTOURS command will be updated You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer updated CALC_ATTR The CALC_ATTR command allows you to calculate a new attribute value or update the value for an existing attribute for features in a layer based on a source attribute including things like the feature label or type and a second value The second value can be a specified string or number or the value from another attribute of the feature The following parameters are supported by the command e FILENAME filename of the layer to update If an empty value is passed in all loaded vector layers will be updated You can also pass in the value USER CREATED FEATURES when running a script in the context of the main map view or loading a workspace to have the User Created Features layer updated If you don
477. s is selected the Apply Elevations from Terrain Layers to Selected Features option will appear on the right click option menu Selecting this option will add an ELEVATION attribute to each selected point feature containing the elevation value at each point location from the top most terrain layer at that location Any selected line or area features that have a valid elevation from loaded terrain at each vertex location will have a set of per vertex elevations added to the feature containing the elevation at each vertex from the loaded terrain layers Generating a 3D Path Profile from a Selected Line or Area Feature If gridded elevation data i e DEMs is loaded the Generate Path Profile From Line option will appear when a single line or area feature is selected Selecting this option will display the Path Profile Line of Sight dialog with a 3D path profile of the elevations under the path that the selected feature follows In addition if the selected line area is a 3D feature with per vertex elevations those elevations will be displayed as a separate line on the path profile Calculating View Sheds at Multiple Point Locations If gridded elevation data 1 e DEMs is loaded the Calculate View Sheds at Selected Point s option will appear when one or more point features are selected Selecting this option will display the View Shed dialog allowing you to setup the parameters for performing a view shed calculation centered on each selected point featur
478. s of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export HF2 HFZ Command The Export HF2 HFZ command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an HF2 HFZ format file When selected the command displays the HF2 HFZ Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Idrisi Command The Export Idrisi command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to an Idrisi file When selected the command displays the Idrisi Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing and format a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export JPG Command The Export JPG command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a JPG file When selected the command displays the JPG Export Options dialog which allows the user to s
479. s part of the filename when using SPLIT_BY_ATTR YES to split your export into a separate file for each set of attributes e KML_AREA_DISPLAY_ABOVE_TERRAIN KML only specifies that area features with associated elevation value should be displayed at height above the terrain surface in Google Earth Use KML_AREA_DISPLAY_ABOVE_TERRAIN YES to enable e KML_AREA_ELEVS_RELATIVE KML only specifies that the elevation values associated with 3D area features are relative to the terrain surface rather than relative to sea level Use KML_AREA_ELEVS_RELATIVE YES to enable e KML_AREA_EXTRUDE KML only specifies that 3D area features displayed in Google Earth should be extruded from the surface to create volumetric objects like buildings Use KML_AREA_ EXTRUDE YES to enable e KML_AREA_ FAKE HEIGHTS KML only specifies that fake elevation values should be assigned to area features exported to ensure that the draw order remains correct in Google Earth This may be necessary to keep overlapping area features drawing correctly Use KML_AREA_ FAKE HEIGHTS YES to enable e KML_AREA_TRANSLUCENCY KML only specifies how see through filled area features will be in the generated KML file The values should range from 1 to 100 and represent a opacity percentage with 100 being completely opaque and 1 being almost completely transparent The default value is KML_AREA_TRANSLUCENCY 75 e KML_FOLDER_ATTR KML only specifies the name of a feature attribute to u
480. s still highly compressed Note that if a different quality value has been selected on the GeoTIFF export dialog in the user interface the last used value there Table of Contents 266 Global Mapper User s Manual will be the default e TARGET_COMPRESSION ECW and JPEG2000 only specifies the target compression ratio to use when creating the ECW image The default value is 10 which strikes a good balance between image quality and compression The higher the value the smaller the resulting image will be at the expense of image quality INC_VECTOR_DATA specifies whether or not loaded vector data should be rendered and exported to the generated image Use a value of YES to indicate that vector data should be used Any other value will result in vector data NOT being saved to the file FILL_GAPS specifies that small gaps in between and within the data sets being exported will be filled in by interpolating the surrounding data to come up with a color for the point in question This option is off by default specify FILL_GAPS YES to turn it on POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the export should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be exported will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL or POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a
481. s tags in the resulting file Note that this can significantly slow down your export in some cases If the Set Global Origin to the Lower Left of Design Plane Rather than the Center of the Design Plane option is set the global origin is set to the minimum valid negative values rather than at 0 0 as is standard If the Replace Dark Line Colors with White option is set any lines that are near black in color will be replaced with a white line automatically This is useful for getting dark colored lines to show up when the exported DGN file is viewed in an application that uses a black background Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DLG O Command The Export DLG O command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a native format USGS DLG O Digital Line Graph Optional format file Table of Contents 57 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the DLG O Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a DLG O Options panel which allows the user to set up the banner name DCU digital cartographic unit or quad name and category name a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export If possible the fields on the DLG O Options panel are automatically filled in with the best guesses available based on the currently load
482. s to New Files r Export Format E JPEG GeoTlFF 24 bit RGB Image Uncompressed roa Regardless of which options you select you will then be allowed to rectify each image in turn using the Image Rectfier dialog while is described in detail later As you rectify each image it will get added to the Reference Images view in the Image Rectifier dialog allowing you to select ground coordinates from it for subsequent images This allows you to ensure a good fit between adjacent data files If you selected to save the image s to JPG or GeoTIFF image s the new files will be written after you have rectified ALL of the selected files This is extremely useful as you can setup the rectification parameters for numerous images then let the sometimes lengthy rectification and saving process happen while you do something else All newly rectified files will be created in the same directory as the original images with _rectified appended just before the file extension The original imagery will remain intact and unchanged Image Rectifier Dialog Table of Contents 104 Global Mapper User s Manual E image Rectifier Automatic 039094A3_bluespringsMO TIF File Options Entire Image Zoomed View Click for Piel Coordinates i 1 ae oe qma gen Ti i ON F Hs Taps verre i r 3 i Fe pee Ue tee a Reference Images Load F rie ii va PAL ni ee oS in wee SS zt i a A ie ji te Smi 4 x
483. se for the folder name in the generated KML file By default the export will check for a KML_FOLDER attribute with the name of a folder to use e KML_HTML_DESC_TEXT KML only specifies a HTML text string describing what to use for the description for each feature exported to a KML file To add a quote mark inside your description text use two single quotes rather than a double quote as the latter would terminate the parameter value e KML_LINE_DISPLAY_ABOVE_TERRAIN KML only specifies that LINE features with associated elevation value should be displayed at height above the terrain surface in Google Earth Use KML_LINE_DISPLAY_ABOVE_TERRAIN YES to enable e KML_LINE_ELEVS_ RELATIVE KML only specifies that the elevation values associated with 3D line features are relative to the terrain surface rather than relative to sea level Use KML_LINE_ELEVS_RELATIVE YES to enable e KML_POINT_DISPLAY_ABOVE_TERRAIN KML only specifies that point features with associated elevation value should be displayed at height above the terrain surface in Google Earth Use KML_POINT_DISPLAY_ABOVE_TERRAIN YES to enable e KML_POINT_ELEVS_RELATIVE KML only specifies that the elevation values associated with 3D Point features are relative to the terrain surface rather than relative to sea level Use KML_POINT_ELEVS_RELATIVE YES to enable e KML_POINT_EXTRUDE KML only specifies that 3D point features displayed in Google Earth should be extruded f
484. shed analysis and raster draping When selecting this option the Create Elevation Grid dialog will appear after setting up the ASCII file import options to allow setting up the gridding process The Coordinate Column Order section allows the user to specify in what order the coordinates are found on coordinate lines in the file Coordinates can either be x followed by y e longitude then latitude or the reverse You can also load files with WKT well known text coordinate strings allowing line polygon and point feature coordinates all on a single line MGRS military grid reference system coordinate strings can also be loaded Elevation values if any are always assumed to come after the x and y values The Fields to Skip at Start of Line setting controls what field index column the coordinates start in For example if the x and y coordinates are in the 3rd and 4th columns set this value to 2 so that the coordinates will be grabbed from the appropriate place The Coordinate Format option allows you to specify how coordinate values are stored The default option supports several formats including using the exact decimal representation for the coordinate and automatic recognition of separated latitude longitude degree values such as DD MM SS with a large variety of supported separating characters Support also exists for packed decimal Table of Contents 11 Global Mapper User s Manual degree values in the formats DDMMSS S and DDMM M
485. sing the Gridding tab to split the operation into smaller pieces By directly exporting the results to GMG files you can create elevation grids that normally would not all fit into memory Metadata Pressing the Metadata button displays metadata for the selected overlay The actual metadata dialog displayed depends on the type of the selected overlay The metadata dialog for a SDTS DLG is shown below Table of Contents 151 Global Mapper User s Manual lt TROICATD DDF gt lt 01 gt CRUZ BAY I ROADS AND TR Ea standard ID SPATIAL DATA TRANSFER STANDARD Standard Version 1994 JUNE 10 standard Doc Ref FIPS PUB 173 1 Profle ID SOTS TOPOLOGICAL VECTOR PROFILE Profile Version Profile Doc Ref FIPS 173 1 BART 4 Title CRUZ BAY vl TRANSPORTATION Data ID Data Structure DLG Map Date 1982 Creation Date 19970113 Scale 24000 Composites y Vector Geometry Y Vechor Topology Y Raster W Ext Spatial Ref 1 Features Level 4 Projection LTM DATUM NAD 27 CONUS UNIT meters Options Pressing the Options button displays a dialog containing the available display options for the selected overlay s Options can be set on multiple raster or elevation overlays at the same time The available display options depend on the type of the selected overlays The following display options are used e Vector Data Options Feature Types Labels Elevations Tab Area Styles Tab Line
486. sparent symbols from PNG ICO GIF and 32 bit alpha BMP files as well as symbols from JPG images You can also add vector symbols from EMF DXF and GM_SYM Global Mapper Symbol files GM_SYM files are simply ASCII text files that the File gt Open Generic ASCII Data File menu command couuld load with 0 0 being the center of the symbol and the coordinates specified as pixels with X increasing to the right and Y increasing to the top of the symbol Vector symbols will scale much more cleanly than symbols based on images Table of Contents 133 Global Mapper User s Manual Configuration General Vector Display Area Styles Line Styles Point Styles Vertical Options Shader Options Projection Foint Types Right Click for More Options Spot E Elevation Spot Sounding Strike and Dip Swimming Area Tower Unclassified Point Feature Unknown Point Feature I Show Labels for Points of This Type Select Label Font Restore Default Style Restore Default Style For All Types pastor Symbals i Oil amp Gas Abandoned apprai Oil amp Gas Abandoned drilling well loc Oil amp Gas Abandoned EOR ail amp Gas Abandoned gas Add Symbol Remove ial ne If you press the Select Label Font button the font selection dialog pictured below for the selected point type will appear This dialog allows you to select the font to use for the point as well as set up other label display options for th
487. splay in the correct order without this option checked If point features are drawn above the terrain the Extrude Points option allows you to control whether or not a thin line is drawn from the terrain surface at the location of the point to the floating symbol above the terrain surface Enabling this option makes it easier to locate exactly where a point lies relative to the surface The Filled Area Translucency section allows the user to control the degree to which filled polygons are see through in the created file The Feature Descriptions section allows you to setup what is contained in the description for each feature in the generated file You can choose to include only the feature description and links to any files associated with a feature you can choose to add attributes to this or you can choose to provide your own HTML text to use for the feature description If you use the HTML text option you can embed the values of attributes from the feature in the text by enclosing the attribute name in percent signs like 7ATTR_NAME In addition to the name of attributes you can also specify lt Feature Name gt lt Feature Desc gt lt Feature Type gt lt Longitude gt or lt Latitude gt as the attribute name to get the feature display label description type name point longitude or point latitude embedded in the result If you need to embed an actual percent sign in your result simply use two percent signs consecutively as an escape seq
488. splayed in the prompt dialog Use PROMPT YES to enable e PROMPT_TEXT specifies the text to show if PROMPT YES is provided Here is an example of a DEFINE_VAR command used to define a directory path for later use and then its subsequent use DEFINE_VAR NAME DATA DIR VALUE c temp export test IMPORT FILENAME DATA_DIR blue_springs opt For example you could use the following inside a directory loop to change the output path DEFINE _VAR NAME OUT_FNAME VALUE SFNAME_W_DIR REPLACE STR OLD_PATH NEW_PATH SUB_FOLDER DIR_LOOP_END The DIR_LOOP_END command ends a loop of commands over all of the folders within a directory See the DIR LOOP START command for details DIR_LOOP_START The DIR_LOOP_START command begins a loop of commands over all of the folders within a directory and optionally its subdirectories that match one or more filename masks This is a powerful feature allowing you to do things like easily batch convert a collection of files or perform any other supported operation over a collection of files You end a loop over the files in a folder using the DIR_LOOP_END command Note that it is also possible to nest loops For any commands found within a DIR_LOOP_START DIR_LOOP_END pair defining a loop the following special character sequences can be used anywhere examples of what the values will be based on a current filename of C data my_file dem are listed e DIR full path to current file value is C dat
489. sults list when you right click there will be an option to combine those line features into new line features if the selected lines connect at their endpoints Options for copying the selected features to the clipboard and selecting the selected search results with the Digitizer Tool for further editing will also appear if any results are selected ADVANCED USERS You can change the default search string from to whatever you want by creating a new registry string value with the desired default search string at HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper DefaultVectorSearchStr Search and Replace The Search and Replace command allows for searching for a particular text string in the attributes and name of loaded features and replacing that with some other text string When you select the command the Search and Replace dialog pictured below is displayed allowing you to setup the search and replace operation search and Replace Select the attribute to search on lt Feature Hame Bi Search Text Isl Enter the test to search for Enter to match on any non empty value Drive Replace Text Enter new test to replace the search value with A single wildcard character can be used for appending or prepending text to the current value being searched Dr Search and Replace Test Close Table of Contents 93 Global Mapper User s Manual When searching you can either enter a Search Text value of the string to match on
490. t Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vector Spatial Database Command The Export Vector Spatial Database command allows the user to export any loaded vector data to a table in a Spatial Database Global Mapper can export vector data to the following spatial databases e Esri Enterprise Geodatabase ArcSDE e Esri File Geodatabase e Esri Personal Geodatabase e MySQL Spatial e Oracle Spatial e PostGIS PostgreSQL Export WAsP MAP File Command The Export WAsP MAP File command allows the user to export loaded line and area features to a WAsP MAP format file for use with the WAsP Wind Analysis and Application Program application http www wasp dk Only those line features with an elevation and or valid roughness attributes will be exported Only those area features with valid roughness attributes will be exported Valid roughness attributes consist of a ROUGH_L and a ROUGH_R attribute containing numeric values for the left and right roughness for the feature If neither Table of Contents 79 Global Mapper User s Manual of those attributes exist but a RV ROUGHNESS or ROUGH attribute is available that value will be used for both the left and right roughness for that feature When selected the command displays the WAsP MAP Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the port
491. t Export Bing Maps Virtual Earth Tiles Command The Export Bing Maps Virtual Earth Tiles command allows the user to export any loaded data to JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required for display in using the Microsoft Bing Maps Virtual Earth interface This command will create both the image tiles and a sample HTML file for displaying the data with the Bing Maps Virtual Earth interface You can just load the HTML file into your web browser to view the data once the export is over You can also customize the HTML file however you need to When you select the command the Bing Maps Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in your web browser the zoom level setup the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 50 Global Mapper User s Manual Virtual Earth Export Options Bing Maps Virtual Earth Options Export Bounds Data Set Name Blue Springs DEM Zoom Level Setup Select the resolution to use for the maximum detail level in the exported tiles The default selection will preserve full detail for any loaded rasterelevation data set Level 13 T meters frie Number of Zoom Levels to Use 5 Tile Image File Format JPG Good for Imagery f PNG Good for Scan
492. t be connected to the Internet in order to access the user s group Register Global Mapper Command Table of Contents 96 Global Mapper User s Manual The Register Global Mapper command displays the Registration dialog which allows the user to enter their registration name and code they obtained after purchasing a license for Global Mapper Check for Updates Command The Check for Updates command checks to see if a newer version of Global Mapper than the current version is being used If so a dialog describing the new version is displayed Automatically Check for Updates at Startup Command The Automatically Check for Updates at Startup command controls whether or not Global Mapper ever automatically checks for a new version automatically when you start it About Global Mapper Command The About Global Mapper command displays the About Global Mapper dialog which contains version and contact information for Global Mapper Table of Contents 97 Global Mapper User s Manual Export Bounds Panel Options Export Bounds he Draw a Box Lat Lon Degrees North Wiest South E ast Global Projection Geographic LatitudeLongitude arc Morth Vi est South E ast Comer w Size Global Projection Geographic Latitude Horth Vi et width Height MGRS Military Grid Reference System Bounds Top Lett Bottom Aight Crop to Selected Area Feature Fito Las
493. t Click Recenters and Zooms Other View this option controls whether or not Ctrl Left Clicking in the Zoomed or Reference Image view just recenters the other view if possible or if it also zooms the other view to the same approximate extents Entire Image View The Entire Image View portion of the Image Rectifier dialog displays as you might expect a view of the entire image being rectified Any ground control points GCPs will also be depicted on this view with a big red X The current portion of the image being displayed in the Zoomed View section will be highlighted as well You can use the mouse in the Entire Image View to control what portion of the image is visible in the Zoomed View Clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the Entire Image View will cause the Zoomed View to be recented on the click position Dragging a rectangle with the left mouse button will cause the Zoomed View to recenter and zoom to the box If you also hold down the CTRL key when clicking the left mouse button the Reference Image view will also be recentered on the associated point if there have been enough control points entered to convert the coordinates Zoomed View The Zoomed View portion of the Image Rectifier dialog allows the user to pan and zoom around the image as well as select pixel coordinates for control point entry Any ground control points GCPs will be depicted in this view as well with a big red X You can drag a box with the left mous
494. t Exported Bourde The Export Bounds panel provides several different method for specifying the subset of the currently loaded data that the user wishes to export Each of these methods is described below Note that regardless of the method used to specify the bounds the exported data will be generated in the currently selection global projection All Loaded Data All currently loaded data that is compatible with the current export type will be exported This is the default selection All Data Visible On Screen All data that is currently visible in the Global Mapper view window will be exported Lat Lon Degrees Allows the user to specify the subset to export as a bounding box in latitude longitude coordinates The default values automatically filled in are the lat lon bounds of all currently loaded compatible data Global Projection Allows the user to specify the subset to export as a bounding box using coordinates in the currently selected global projection system The default values automatically filled in are the bounds of all loaded compatible Table of Contents 98 Global Mapper User s Manual data Corner w Size Global Projection Allows the user to specify the subset to export by entering the northwest corner of the bounding box to export followed by the width and height of the desired area to export The coordinates entered must be in the currently selected global projection system The default values automatically filled
495. t RGB Layout 3 Sbit Bands C Multiband i bits per Band ies Bands Sample Spacing is 2 1599999999996 arc degrees gt 1600000000000 arc degrees IW Always Generate Square Pixels f you wish to change the ground units that the spacing is specified in you need to change the curent projection by going to Config gt Projection Vertical Units METERS m Sa E dze Motoral E pte lHriger Eigenaar for Elevations W Generate a World File BLW file for BIL Generate ERS ERMapper Header File Use ESRI Arc HDR File Format Short Format Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export BMP Command The Export BMP command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a 24 bit RGB BMP file When selected the command displays the BMP Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export BSB Marine Chart Command Table of Contents 30 Global Mapper User s Manual The Export BSB Marine Chart command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a palette based up to
496. t Terragen Terrain File Command 0 Export Vertical Mapper MapInfo Grid File Command 0 Export Vulcan3D Triangulation File Command 0 Export XYZ Grid Command 0 Export ZMap Plus Grid File Command Export Raster Imagery Format 0 Export BIL BIP BSO Command 0 Export BMP Command 0 Export BSB Marine Chart Command 0 Export CADRG CIB RPF Command 0 Export ECW Command 0 Export Erdas Imagine Command 0 Export GeoTIFF Command 0 Export Idrisi Command 0 Export JPG Command 0 Export JPG2000 Command 0 Export KML KMZ Command 0 Export NITF Command 0 Export PCX Command Export PNG Command 0 Export RAW Command 0 Export XY Color Command Export Vector Format 0 Export AnuDEM Contour Command 0 Export Arc Ungenerate Command 0 Export CDF Command 0 Export CSV Command 0 Export Delft 3D LDB Command Export DeLorme Text File Command 0 Export DGN Command 0 Export DLG O Command Table of Contents Global Mapper User s Manual 0 Export DXF Command 0 Export DWG Command 0 Export Esri File Geodatabase Table Command 0 Export Esri Personal Geodatabase Table Command 0 Export Garmin TRK PCX5 File Command Export Garmin WPT PCX5 File Command 0 Export GeoJSON Javascript Object Notation Command Export GOG Generalized Overlay Graphics Command 0 Export GPX Command Export Hypack Linefile Export InRoads ASCI Command 0 Export KML KMZ Command 0 Export Landmark Graphics Command Export Lidar LAS Command 0 Export Lidar LAZ Compressed LAS Command 0
497. t Use an Attribute Value for Name this option specifies that the original or edited display label associated with a feature should be used for display and not a label based on an attribute value or custom string o Use Selected Attribute Value for Name specifies that the value of the selected attribute will be used as the display label for the feature If the feature already had a label and the Keep Original Label if Non Empty option is checked the original label will be used rather than the attribute value e Use Multiple Attributes for Name allows you to choose one or more attributes to combine to create the display label as well as provide custom prefix suffix and separator strings If the feature already had a label and the Keep Original Label if Non Empty option is checked the original label will be used rather than the attribute value Table of Contents 153 Global Mapper User s Manual e Use Custom Formatting String for Name allows you to provide a custom formatted string that can contain any free form text and attribute values embedded as 7 ATTR_NAME You can use the name of any feature attribute as ATTR_NAME or special attributes like lt Feature Name gt lt Feature Desc gt lt Feature Layer Name gt etc For example to create a display label from the original feature label the layer name and an attribute named FCODE you could use the following lt Feature Name gt Layer Name lt Feature Layer Name gt Featur
498. t into cells that are at most 800 pixels wide by 600 pixels tall you would use GRID_TYPE_PIXEL_SIZE_MAX 800 600 GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS 8 4 GRID_OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID_TYPE_ parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE specifies that the size of the grid cells should be maintained over sample spacing This means that if you specify a grid of 4 rows and 5 columns each grid cell will be exactly 25 of the total export height and 20 of the total export width The sample spacing may be slightly smaller than what is specified in order to achieve this By default the sample spacing is exactly maintained and each grid cell may be slightly larger than specified to maintain an integer number of exported cells Use GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE YES to enable GRID_NAMING specifies how to name tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles The value should be SEQUENTI
499. t map view bounds The saved view can later be restored by using the Restore Last Saved View command This feature allows you to save a view at one spot then pan and zoom around and load additional data then restore your view to the saved spot in one simple operation Restore Last Saved View The Restore Last Saved View command restore the map view to the location last saved using the Save Current View command Table of Contents 90 Global Mapper User s Manual Restore Last Drawn View The Restore Last Drawn View command restore the map view to the view that was last drawn on the main map You can use this to back up threw recently drawn view locations and zoom levels Name and Save Current View The Name and Save Current View command associates the current map view bounds with a user specified name The saved view can later be restored from a list of named views using the Restore Named View command This feature allows you to save multiple views with descriptive names then easily restore those views at a later time Restore Named View The Restore Named View command allows you to restore a previously saved map view You can save map views for later restoration using the Name and Save Current View command Search Menu The Search menu currently provides the following commands e Search By Name e Search By Attributes Name and Description e Search and Replace e Find Address e Find Features with Duplicate Attribute Values S
500. t suffix either m or ft should be appended to the numeric label of generated features By default this is enabled so specify INC_UNIT_SUFFIX NO to turn unit suffixes off This is useful if the data the contours are being generated over doesn t actually represent elevation e SMOOTH_CONTOURS specifies whether or not generated contour line and area features should have smoothing applied to improve appearance This option is enabled by default Use SMOOTH_CONTOURSE NO to disable smoothing e CREATE_ON_WAY_DOWN specifies whether contours are created as the terrain passed from a higher elevation to a contour height CREATE_ON_WAY_DOWNE YES or the default way of being created when the terrain passes from a contour height to lower elevation values CREATE_ON_WAY_DOWNENO e POLYGON_CROP_FILE specifies the full path and filename of a vector file containing a polygon feature to which the operation should be cropped If multiple polygons are found in the specified file the polygon which has the largest intersection with the data to be combined will be used as the crop polygon see POLYGON_CROP_USE_ALL or POLYGON_CROP_USE_EACH for exceptions e POLYGON_CROP_NAME specifies the name of a polygon shape previously defined using the DEFINE SHAPE command to which the export should be cropped The coordinates in the shape need to have been provided in whatever projection the new terrain layer will be in i e the current projection e POLYGON_CROP_USE_
501. t to YES or TRUE the feature will be treated as a closed area feature if it has at least three vertices e ISLAND if this is set to YES or TRUE the feature will be treated as an island of the previous closed parent area feature if it has at least three vertices If there are no previous parent areas this attribute will be ignored e FONT_NAME specifies the name e g Arial Times New Roman etc of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature e FONT_COLOR specifies the color of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature The values must be formatted according to the guidelines layed out for the COLOR attribute in order to be recognized e FONT_ANGLE specifies the angle in degrees of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this point feature e FONT_SIZE specifies the point size of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature e FONT_HEIGHT_METERS specifies the height in meters of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature Using this causes the actual point size of the font to vary as you zoom in and out e FONT_CHARSET specifies the numeric character set of the font to use when displaying the display label if any for this feature These correspond to the Windows character set enumeration Click here for more instructions on creating generic ASCII data files with features
502. t up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export ADVANCED USERS You can change the accuracy value exported in DTED files by specifying your own string value up to 4 characters in length at HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper DTEDAccuracy The collection system value up to 12 characters in length can be specified at HKEY_ CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper DTEDCollectionSystem Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF 3D Face File Command The Export DXF 3D Face File command allows the user to export any loaded gridded elevation data sets to a DXF 3D Face file When selected the command displays the DXF 3D Face Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export DXF Mesh Command The Export DXF Mesh command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to a 3D DXF Mesh file When selected the command displays the DXF Mesh Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding
503. ta be in the current view projection or you can save everthing with latvlon coordinate values C Use Currently Selected View Projection f Saye Data in Geographic Lat Lon Projection Cancel Help Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export CSV Command The Export CSV command allows the user to export any loaded point data sets to a CSV Comma Separated File file When selected the command displays the CSV Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Options panel which allows the user to set up options such whether or not to include an elevation attribute for each point as well as whether to include the name of each column in the file as the first row in the file There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded point data they wish to export Table of Contents 55 Global Mapper User s Manual If you choose to Export Separate Lat Lon Coordinates for Each Point the LATITUDE and LONGITUDE attributes that are created will use the current Position Display Format setting on the General tab of the Configuration dialog for formatting those values if you also have the option checked to Format lat lon coordinates with Position Display Format ADVANCED USERS In Global Mapper v11 02 and later you can customize the number of decimal digits written out for the X and Y coordinates for a CSV export by
504. tain Export Bounds Instead of Sample Spacing if checked this option specifies that when exporting a raster elevation format and the bounding box for the export is not an exact multiple of the Table of Contents 123 Global Mapper User s Manual specified sample spacing for the export the sample spacing will be adjusted to be slightly smaller rather than the default of adjusting the export bounds up to the next sample spacing boundary e Automatically Anti Alias Raster Layers When Loaded if checked this option specifies that raster imagery scanned map layers will have bilinear resampling enabled automatically when loaded to smooth appearance If not checked then the default nearest neighbor i e no resampling option will be used e Don t Automatically Interpolate Terrain Layers on Load if checked this option specifies that gridded elevation layers will not have the default bilinear resampling enabled automatically when loaded to smooth appearance but instead will use the nearest neighbor i e no resampling option e Use Current Screen Bounds by Default when Exporting if checked this option specifies that the default choice on the Export Bounds tab when exporting should be to use the current screen bounds rather than exporting all loaded data e Default Contrast Adjustment to Linear Min Max Stretch if checked this option specified that layers that come in with automatic contrast adjustment enabled by default primarily imagery with m
505. tarted with Global Mapper and cGPSMapper Fantastic Guide to Creating Garmin format Maps using Global Mapper cGPSMapper and the other supporting applications required to get your data into a Garmin unit as a new map The Export Polish MP command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to Polish MP format files The Polish MP format is the input format used by the cGPSMapper application which creates custom maps for Garmin GPS units When selected the command displays the Polish MP Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Map Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export m E r 7 i Polish MP Export Options Map Options Gridding Export Bounds Map Name Tiger Test Copyright Global Mapper Image ID 0 for automatic o m Map Detail Less e More Generating a map with more detail results in a larger map that can represent smaller variations in the data Less detailed maps will have less resolution but will be smaller and show up earier when zooming in Use the rightmost setting for routable maps z Template File M Use Template MP File for Map Settings C Data capsmapper test MP Select File This option allows you to use an existing MP file to specify the map creation options to use This allows Full control over all availa
506. tary Deleted Line Digitizer Tool Line Dry Stream or River Femy Route New Type i Edit Type Delete Type Attributes Drawing Style Solid Line Width f pice Line Color Label Display M Show Labels for Lines of This Type Set Fok Center Labels for Lines of This Type Restore Defaut Style Restore Defaut Style For All Types M Display Roads As Fat Lines When Zoomed In Appl li Point Styles REFERENCE GUIDE ALERT Built In Point Types and Symbols A graphical reference guide to the point types and symbols built in to Global Mapper Table of Contents 132 Global Mapper User s Manual The Point Styles panel pictured below allows the user to configure what symbol will be used to display points of a given type and at what angle if any to rotate the symbol when displaying it on the map Symbols can be rotated relative to either the map display where O degrees is always straight up or relative to true north where 0 degrees always points directly to the North Pole Rotated symbols are good for use in geology maps and for adding things like north arrows to your maps You can also press the Scale button to scale a point symbol to make it larger or smaller For example to double the size of a symbol use a scale of 2 0 whereas to make a symbol half its original size use a scale of 0 5 You can also specify a symbol size in meters This will automatically scale the point so that it is alwa
507. ted a database click the OK button to continue by specifying Spatial Database Export Options The Cancel button quits the process of exporting data to a spatial database The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Creating a Spatialite Database Esri File Geodatabase or Personal Geodatabase for Export Use the Create Database Dialog to specify the location and name for a new Spatialite database Esri file geodatabase or personal geodatabase Create Spatialite Database Location Browse Name con Heo Type the full path of the folder where the new database will be located in the Location field or use the Browse button to choose a folder from the file system Type the database name in the Name field You do not need to add a file extension one will be created automatically based on the kind of database being created Once you have entered both the location and database name click the OK button to create the database The Cancel button quits the process of exporting data to a spatial database The Help button displays the Global Mapper help for this dialog Table of Contents 117 Global Mapper User s Manual Spatial Database Export Options Use the Spatial Database Export Options Dialog to specify the table name s and data extents to be used for this data export A spatial database table is restricted to a single geometry type This dialog allows you to specify table names for polygon l
508. ted by the command e FILENAME filename of the map catalog to create update e CREATE_IF_EMPTY specifies whether or not the map catalog gmc file should be created if it doesn t already exist The default is YES If you specify the FILENAME of a map catalog file that doesn t exist and have CREATE_IS_EMPTY NO provided nothing will be done and an error will be logged e ZOOM_DISPLAY specifies when the maps in the map catlaog should be displayed and when it should be hidden based on the display zoom scale This command will be formatted as a name from the list below followed by 2 numeric paramters For example use ZOOM_DISPLAY SCALE 25000 0 to have a map display only when zoomed in below 1 25000 scale ALWAYS always display the map The numeric parameters are ignored e PERCENT display the map when the map bounding box is a certain percentage of the screen size For example use ZOOM_DISPLA Y PERCENT 0 10 0 to display the map when its bounding box is at least 10 of the screen size PIXEL_SIZE display the map when each display pixel is less than some number of meters in size For example use PIXEL_SIZE SCALE 10 0 to display the map when the current display resolution is 10 meters per pixel or less higher resolution SCALE display the map when the current display is at or below a certain scale For example use ZOOM_DISPLA Y SCALE 25000 0 to display the map when the current draw scale is at or below 1 25000 SCA
509. th 90 is east etc f Specify Using COGO Coordinate Geometry COGO N 45w 500 meters Help Specity your COGO information by starting with a H or then pour angle then a or E then your distance For example H 21472 4 340 f Specity Using Quadrant Bearing Distance One Handed Entry Quadrant Bearing E Distance ite Enter quadrant press Enter then Bearing Enter and Distance Enter OMS degree minute second Values Specified in Decimal Degrees Close Path using Compass Rule when Completing Feature Don t Include Start Location in the Feature ie Start Point is Tie Point Only i Use Grid Bearing Rather Than Bearing Relative to True North List of Entered Distance Bearnng LOGO Values Distance Bearnng or LOGO Easting Morthing Set Start Position Selected Start Point 385951558 4321143464 500 meters at 180 385951558 4320643 584 Remove Last Point N 45 S00 meters 385498 089 4520997 053 Load from File Closure Distance 382 7 m Save to File One Handed Entry of Values You can achieve very fast entry of large collections of distance bearing of quadrant distance bearing values by simply using the number pad and pressing Enter after each value This will take you to the next field and finally add the point when you press Enter on the last field This will also take you back to the first field to allow continuously adding points with only one hand keeping your other hand free to mark your pl
510. th Area Iso height Area Ise height Area Lake lt 0 5 sq mi Le B i i IOG mi mm Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128 64 0 0 0 0 346 Global Mapper User s Manual Lake 1 5 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o B C Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 347 Lake 10 30 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Lake 100 250 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Lake 250 500 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Lake 30 100 Solid Fill sq mi 0 0 211 Lake 5 10 sq mi Solid Fill 0 0 211 Lake Unknown Area Solid Fill 0 0 211 n Solid Fill 220 212 148 255 247 181 Global Mapper User s Manual hm eo E o A neto Marne Info Area No Fill Area of GEE GEE GEE Major National Park 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 0 Major State Park Map Catalog Layer Bounds Solid 0 0 0 255 255 0 Backwards e YY rit YY Ys att YW Uf Ui Diagonal 255 0 255 Gy i Cross Hatch Measurement SOT ONAL 255 0 0 Hatch Misc Manmade Solid Fill 255 64 64 Null Structure Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 348 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Fill 0 235 0 ccna tere Solid Fill 255 128 0 OET Solid
511. that are currently recognized by Global Mapper when generic ASCII text files are read see the links below the list for more complete lists e NAME or LABEL the value associated with an attribute of either of these names will be used as the feature name e DESC DESCRIPTION LAYER or TYPE the value associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the feature description e GM_TYPE the value associated with an attribute with this name or any of the description names listed above will be used to attempt to assign a classification other than the default for each feature Table of Contents 12 Global Mapper User s Manual The value must match one of the classification names in Global Mapper to work It will also work for user created custom types e ELEVATION HEIGHT or DEPTH the value associated with an attribute of any of these names will be used as the feature s elevation e SYMBOL POINT SYMBOL or POINT_SYMBOL the values associated with an attribute of any of these names will be compared against the names of the symbols available in Global Mapper including any custom symbols If a match is found that symbol will be used for the point feature These attribute names are ignored for line features You can also specify custom dot and square symbol colors and sizes without having to add your own custom bitmaps for those symbols Use names of the form DOT_CUSTOM_ SIZE _ RED _ GREEN _ BLUE and SQUARE_CUSTOM_ SIZE _ RE
512. the P key when clicking to select the feature may be used to select the topmost area feature at a location This is useful for selecting area features that may be overlaid by a line or point feature It s functionally equivalent to using the Vector Display tab of the Configuration dialog to enable only the Select From Areas option a temporary selection filter Table of Contents 212 Global Mapper User s Manual If you are planning on moving lots of features you can speed up the process by holding down the ALT key when selected features and or vertices Doing this will cause you to automatically put into move mode when selecting new features and or vertices You can also select area line and point features within selected area features by first selecting one or more area features using the previously described methods then right clicking and selecting the appropriate option under the Advanced Selection Options submenu This makes it easy to find and edit all of the point line and or area features within some other area feature s When working with island and parent areas there are also some options available under the Advanced Selection Options submenu that make it easy to select all of the island areas associated with selected parent areas and to also deselect the parent area for a selected island area You can also select lines or points within selected areas or also select any area that share a vertex with the selected area s or any a
513. the WGS84 coordinates for at least 2 coordinates in the new datum The format of each line would be as follows deg_longitude_in_new_datum deg_latitude_in_new_datum deg_longitude_in_WGS84 deg_latitude_in_WG lt S Table of Contents 142 Global Mapper User s Manual The Abbreviation field is what will be displayed for the datum name in the status bar If your datum uses a prime meridian other than Greenwich enter the longitude of the meridian used relative to Greenwich in the Prime Meridian entry box The datum information will be stored in the custom_datums txt file in the Global Mapper Application Data folder see the Help gt About dialog for the location of this folder so to share your datums just copy that file to that folder on another user s computer If a needed ellipsoid is not built in to Global Mapper use the Add Ellipsoid button to add a new one or Edit Ellipsoid to edit an existing custom ellipsoid definition Create New Datum Datum Name BUKIT RIMPAH Abbreviation Optional BUBIT Prime Meridian Degrees E Use 0 0 for Greenwich Ellipsoid Spheroid Selection Bessel 184 Add Ellipsoid Edit Ellipsoid Datum Transformation Method 3 parameter Molodensky Transformation C parameter Bursa alfe Transformation C Custom Shift Based on Control Point File Shifts to WE See meters Rotation to WO S84 arc seconds Shift 384 Y Shift jbb4 Z Shift EE Scale Comection to Wa Sed par
514. the appropriate world file extension for the output type 1 e TFW for GeoTIFF JGW for JPEG etc Include Display Labels as Attributes causes DXF attributes containing the name of the vector object to be associated with DXF POLYLINE entities As some software packages cannot handle attributes in DXF files you may have to turn this option off with the associated loss of information to get your exported DXF files to work with some packages Include Feature Attributes in DBF causes the attributes other than layer and elevation of each feature if any to be stored in the DBF file associated with the generated Shapefile In addition selecting this option will cause the DLG 3 attribute codes matching each feature to be stored in the DBF file Include Feature Names in DBF causes the name of each feature if any to be stored as a NAME attribute in the DBF file associated with the generated Shapefile Make Single Color Transparent allows the user to select a single color to treat as transparent in the source data files e Minimize Window During Conversion this option causes the main map window to immediately be minimized when the batch conversion operation begins and stay that way until the operation completes e Never Anti Alias Pixels Interpolate this option disables anti aliasing interpolation even for those layers to which it would normally be applied by default like gridded elevation layers or imagery being reproject
515. the depression filled terrain to a GMG file so you can load that for future watershed operations to avoid having to fill depressions again The Operations at Selected Locations section allows you to perform additional flow and drainage network delineation based on line and point features selected in the Digitizer Tool The Create Watershed Areas Showing Drainage to Selected Line s option will calculate a drainage watershed area for each selected line feature showing which portion of the loaded terrain drains to the immediate vicinity within the specified flow threshold of the selected line This is useful to see what drains to something like a road feature The Create Watershed Areas Showing Drainage to Selected Point s option will calculate a drainage watershed area for each selected point feature showing which portion of the loaded terrain drains to the immediate vicinity i e within the specified flow threshold of the point location of the selected point The Trace Flow from Selected Point s Water Drop Analysis option will cause a separate arrowed line to be generated starting at each selected point feature showing where a drop of water placed at that point location will flow to The Trace Flow from Selected Line s option will cause an area feature to be generated showing all areas that a particular line feature will drain to This is useful for determining something like where a leak from a pipeline might leak to The screenshot below show
516. the file on the lines preceding the coordinate data for a feature If elevations are being exported Global Mapper first looks for an elevation associated with the vertex being exported If no elevation is associated with the vertex Global Mapper then checks all loaded elevation grid data in reverse order of display to see if any of them have an elevation at the vertex location If so that elevation is used ADVANCED USERS In Global Mapper v11 02 and later you can customize the number of decimal digits written out for the X and Y coordinates for a Simple ASCII Text export by creating a DWORD registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Global Mapper ASCHExportCoordPrecision For example set this value to 6 to get 6 decimal digits for each X Y and Z coordinate Table of Contents 77 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Vector Spatial Database Command The Export Vector Spatial Database command allows the user to export any loaded vector data to a table in a Spatial Database Global Mapper can export vector data to the following spatial databases e Esri Enterprise Geodatabase ArcSDE e Esri File Geodatabase e Esri Personal Geodatabase e MySQL Spatial e Oracle Spatial e PostGIS PostgreSQL NOTE In order to export data to any Esri Geodatabase you must have installed and licensed a copy of Esri ArcGIS 9 3 1 or higher If you do not have ArcGIS instal
517. tinue to change the measurement display by selecting different units The distance will be displayed in kilometers meters miles or feet for a line and in square feet square meters square miles acres or hectares for areas Note that if you place a point along your measurement that you do not want you can press Ctrl Z to remove the last placed point in the measurement You can also save a measurement to a separate feature by right clicking and selecting Save Measurement from the list that pops up You can then export these measurements to new vector files such as Shapefiles or DXF or modify them with the Digitizer Tool There is also an option to copy the measurement text to the clipboard when you right click Global Mapper REGISTERED File View Tools Search GPS Help allele alalalaz i ea 4 oe E i Co x Seg Len 46 7 m Seg Brg 53 7 Total Len 239 m Enclosed 4rea 0 477 acres GEO NADSS 96 74097857 40 84180457 40 841805 N If you have gridded elevation data loaded under the measurement you can also calculate the Cut and Fill volume either within the measurement area or within some distance of the measurement line To do this simply right click then select the Measure Volume Cut and Fill option that appears Selecting this option will display the Setup Volume Calculation Parameters dialog pictured below which allows you to set up the volume measurement Table of Contents 186 Glob
518. tion The Print Bounds panel allows the user to select exactly what area to print the default is the current screen contents This panel behaves just like the Export Bounds panel found on most export dialogs Print Preview Command The Print Preview command allows the user to preview what a printout of the contents of the current view window would look like Print Setup Command The Print Setup command allows the user to setup their printer for printing the current view window Exit Command The Exit command closes the Global Mapper application View Menu The View menu offers the following commands e Toolbars Shows or hides the toolbar s Favorites Toolbar e Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar e Background Allows user to change the background color e Center on Location Allows user to recenter the view on a location e Properties Displays Dialog with Properties of Current Map View e Full View Zooms such that all loaded data is visible e Zoom In Zooms in on loaded data by a factor of 2 e Zoom In Micro Zooms in on loaded data by a small amount e Zoom Out Zooms out on loaded data by a factor of 2 e Zoom Out Micro Zooms out on loaded data by a small amount Table of Contents 87 Global Mapper User s Manual e Zoom To Scale Zooms the current view to a given scale e Zoom To Spacing Pixel Size Zooms the current view to a given pixel size e Zoom To Selected Features Zooms to features selected with Digitizer
519. tion The value should be specified as cell width cell height For example if you are exporting in a metric projection and want to tile the export into cells that are 10 000 meters wide by 5 000 meters tall you would use GRID_TYPE_CELL_SIZE 10000 0 5000 0 GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS specifies that the export should be gridded into multiple tiles with a given number of rows and columns of tiles The value should be specified as number of rows number of columns For example if you want to tile the export into a grid of 8 rows each 4 tiles across you would use GRID_TYPE_ROWS_COLS 8 4 GRID_OVERLAP specifies how much to overlap tiles when gridding an export into multiple tiles This is a percentage value from 0 to 100 and only applies when on of the GRID_TYPE_ parameters is used For example to make your grid tiles overlap by 5 of the grid tile size use GRID_OVERLAP 5 0 The default value is 0 0 meaning that the tiles do not overlap GRID_KEEP_CELL_SIZE specifies that the size of the grid cells should be maintained over sample spacing This means that if you specify a grid of 4 rows and 5 columns each grid cell will be exactly 25 of the total export height and 20 of the total export width The sample spacing may be slightly smaller than what is specified in order to achieve this By default the sample spacing is exactly maintained and each grid cell may be slightly larger than specified to maintain an integer number of exported cells Use GRID_K
520. tion such as line vector drawings and paper map scans such as DRGs The generated PNG file will be of the 24 bit variety o Geo TIFF TIFF is a lossless format that is supported by many GIS packages Saving the screen to a TIFF with this command generated a 24 bit uncompressed TIFF In addition all georeferencing data is stored in a GeoTIFF header attached to the TIFF making the image completely self describing Table of Contents 23 Global Mapper User s Manual e Windows Bitmap BMP BMP is a widely support format on Windows platforms Saving the screen to a BMP results in a 24 bit uncompressed image The width and height of the generated image in pixels are specified in the Image Size panel By default the size of the Global Mapper view pane are used Using these values will generate an image that exactly matches what you see You can change these values to generate a more or less resolute image with the obvious tradeoff of size vs quality Checking the Generate World File option results in a world file being generated in addition to the image The world file will be generated in the same directory as the image and will have the same primary name as the image The filename extension will depend on the selected image type JPEG jpgw PNG pnew TIFF tfw BMP bmpw Checking the Generate Projection PRJ File option results in a projection file being generated describing the ground reference system of the created image The projection
521. tion allows the user to choose whether the newly created output files should have the same file name as the source file they were created from Use Source File Name option or whether the more readable quadrangle name if available or layer descripiton should be used as the file name for the newly created output file Use Quad Name or Description option If the Use Source File Name option is selected you can also specify an additional text string to append to each new filename to identify it The Projection section allows the user to choose whether or not each newly created output file should either use the same projection as the file that it was created from Use Source File Projection option or if each file should use a projection specified by pressing the Projection button If the user selects to specify an output projection and they select a zoned projection like UTM or Gauss Krueger they will have the option on the projection selection dialog to have the best zone for the center of the output map automatically used if they select the Automatically Select Best Zone option in the Zone box on the projection selection dialog The Setup Gridding i e Tiling button displays a dialog allowing the user to specify if and how to break up each file being converted into multiple new files This option is only available when converting to a raster or gridded elevation format The Setup Sample Spacing button displays a dialog allowing the user to choose to e
522. tion by going to Config gt Projection Ridge Line Threshold z Specify how much ground area or how many cells must be downstream of a cell to be considered part of a ridge line Larger values result in only more major idges being classified as ridge lines i Ridge Cell Count 15000 Ridge Drainage Area Square Meters a m Depression Fill Depth n Specify the maximum depth of depression in the terrain data that will be filled to facilitate creating the flow network for idge detection Reduce this for faster results 11 5 meters l Save DEM to Global Mapper Grid File After Filling Depressions M Keep Ocean Elevations i e 0 meters at Zero interpolate to Fill Small Gaps in Data I Smooth Ridge Lines to Improve Appearance Measure Volume Between Surfaces Command The Measure Volume Between Surfaces command allows the user to calculate the volume between 2 terrain surfaces When selected the command displays a dialog allowing you to select the 2 layers to calculate the volume between as well as the region within which to do the volume calculation Table of Contents 184 Global Mapper User s Manual Tools Menu The Tools Menu offers the following commands e Zoom Allows the user to zoom in on a specific point in the display e Pan Grab and Drag Drag the view to a new location e Measure Measures length as well as an enclosed area e Feature Info Chooses an object to display its attributes
523. tion in the image but often works well if the correct projection is selected for the image Helmert the Helmert or similarity rectification method requires at least two controls points to be entered This rectification method is useful if you need to maintain the original shape of data after a transformation This method will only be used if you explicitly select it from the list of rectification methods Affine the Affine rectification method requires at least three controls points to be entered This rectification method calculates a best fit to a simple equation of the control points entered This method can account for some degree of rotation and distortion but not with a high degree of accuracy Because a best fit approximation is used some of your ground points may move a little in order to minimize the error among all control points Polynomial the Polynomial rectification method requires at least four control points to be entered This rectification method calculates a best fit to a more complex polynomial equation described the transformation from pixel space to ground coordinate space Because a best fit approximation is used some of your ground points may move a little in order to minimize the error among all control points If you have 6 or more control points a second order N 2 polynomial will be used to transform the points Triangulation the Triangulation rectification method requires at least five control points t
524. tions from Optimi When selected the command displays the Optimi Terrain Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export OSM TMS Tiles Command The Export OSM OpenStreetMaps org and Export TMS Tiles commands allows the user to export any loaded data to JPG or PNG files tiled in the configuration required for display in using either the OSM OpenStreetMaps org or TMS Tile Map Service naming and tiling standards This command will create both the image tiles and a sample HTML file for displaying the data within a web browser You can just load the HTML file into your web browser to view the data once the export is over but you will likely want to customize it to your needs When you select the command the OSM Tiles Export Options dialog pictured below appears allowing you to setup the export This dialog allows you to specify the display name of the map set in your web browser the zoom level setup the format of the imagery and some additional options There is also an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 44
525. tmap BMP file In addition the generated image can be generated in a higher resolution than the screen to provide greater fidelity Also a world file for georeferencing in other software packages as well as a projection PRJ file describing the native ground reference system of the image can be optionally generated as well Unlike the raster export commands described later the Capture Screen Contents to Image command also saves any vector overlays drawn to the screen Selecting the Capture Screen Contents to Image command from the menu displays the Screen Capture Options dialog shown here Screen Capture Options Screen Capture Image Format C Windows Bitmap BMF m Image Size Width Pixels i 037 Height Pixels 260 Restore Default Size if Generate World File M Generate Projection PRJ File Generate Tet Metadata File Crop to Loaded Map Data The Image Format section allows the user to select the format of the image to generate Different formats have their own unique strenghts and weaknesses which make choosing the best format vary depending on the desired end results The supported formats are e JPEG JPEG is a lossy format that achieves excellent compression on images with a lot of color variation such as pictures of real world objects and shaded elevation data o PNG Portable Network Graphic PNG is a lossless format that achieves excellent compression on images without a lot of color varia
526. tment with Other Layers The Color Balance sliders allow you modify the relative amounts of red green and blue in the image thus allowing precise control over the color balance in the image The Contrast Adjustment options are used to adjust the contrast of imagery The Linear Percentage Stretch contrast adjustment method applies a standard deviation contrast adjust to each color channel in the image You can specify how many standard deviations from the mean that the range is stretch to for rendering although you ll generally want to stick with the default of 2 This is particularly useful for improving the display of dark or satellite imagery such as IKONOS images and is required for the display of imagery with more than 8 bits per color channe The Linear Min Max Stretch method finds the minimum and maximum values in each color channel and stretches that range to a range of 0 to 255 For most imagery with 8 bits or less per color channel this will have no effect but can produce a good result for high color imagery The Share Contrast Adjustment with Other Layers checkbox allows you to specify that the calculated contrast adjustment used should be based on all loaded raster layers that have contrast adjustment enabled rather than just the color histogram for this single layer This is enabled by default and provides consistent results when adjusting the contrast for multiple mosaiced images Cropping Tab The Cropping tab pictured belo
527. to Area Features Splitting Areas into Two New Area Features Cropping Features to Selected Area Features Cropping Splitting Line Features to Area Features Splitting Area Features Against Line Features Moving Selected Point Features to the Nearest Point on Selected Line Features e Copying Features Cut Copy Paste e Snapping to Existing Features When Drawing e Snapping Vertically Horizontally When Drawing e Un doing Digitization Operations e Additional Feature Operations Adding Elevation Values from Terrain to Features Generating a 3D Path Profile from a Line or Area Feature Calculating View Sheds at Multiple Point Locations Calculating Elevation Statistics for Selected Features Calculating Cut and Fill Volumes for Area and Line Features Global Energy Mapper only Insert a Pad Site Template Global Energy Mapper only Creating a Flattened Site Plan Working with Feature Measurements G e Length Enclosed Area Table of Contents 202 Global Mapper User s Manual Automatically Inserting Vertices at Line Intersections Finding Non Connected Line Endpoints 1 e Connectivity Checks Finding Nearby Points Flattening Terrain Using Area Features Adding Address Information to Points from Nearby Road Features Adding Coordinate Attributes to Point Features Adding Attributes to Features from Other Featuresmike 1460 Counting Features Contained within Area Features Converting Areas with Isla
528. to Lidar LAS format files If you choose the Lidar LAS option then a compressed LASzip LAZ file will be created This offers lossless compression for Lidar data that makes your Lidar files much smaller When selected the command displays the Lidar LAS Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the grid spacing and vertical units a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export NITF Command The Export NITF command allows the user to export any loaded raster vector and elevation grid data sets to a NITF National Imagery Transmission Format file When selected the command displays the NITF Export Options dialog which allows the user to setup the export The dialog consists of a General options panel which allows the user to set up the pixel spacing a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Optimi Terrain File Command The Export Optimi Terrain File command allows the user to export any loaded elevation grid data sets to an Optimi Terrain format grid file These terrain files can be used with applica
529. to export any loaded point data sets to a Tom Tom OV2 format file for use in creating POI databases for Tom Tom GPS devices Table of Contents 78 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the Tom Tom OV2 Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export Tsunami OVR Command The Export Tsunami OVR command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a Tsunami OVR format file for use in the Tsunami software package When selected the command displays the Tsunami OVR Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export UKOOA P 190 Command The Export UKOOA P 190 command allows the user to export any loaded 3D line and point vector data sets to an UKOOA P 190 format file When selected the command displays the UKOOA Export Options dialog which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to expor
530. tributes from that area to the line s attribute list Counting Features Contained within Area Features If one or more area features are selected the Add Attributes with Count of Points and Lines in Selected Area s option will appear in the right click menu Selecting this option will count the number of point and line features completely contained within each selected area and add the counts for each area to the attribute list for the area as LINE COUNT and POINT_COUNT attributes This can be handy for doing something like counting all of the points within the loaded areas then setting up the drawing style for the areas based on the new POINT_COUNT attribute on the Area Styles tab of the Options dialog for the layer that the areas are in so you can color based on how many points were in each area Converting Areas with Islands to Single Vertex List If one or more area features with separate islands holes within them are selected the Create Single Vertex List Area From Selected Area s With Islands option will appear in the Advanced Feature Creation sub menu of the right click menu When selected this option will connect all of the islands holes within the selected parent areas into a single vertex list and replace the original parent island area with a new area that contains just that single vertex list This is useful for converting areas with islands into a form that software that cannot handle areas with holes can make use of Table of C
531. ts of an Options panel pictured below and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded data they wish to export Table of Contents 76 Global Mapper User s Manual ASCII Export Options Options Coordinate Offset Scale Gridding Export Bounds Coordinate Separator C Semicolon t Tab Feature Separator C None Blank Line C Custom use n for newline t for tab Coordinate Order X Longitude Easting Coordinate First Then Y C Y Latitude Northing Coordinate First Then X M Export Elevations for Each Vertex M Include Feature Attributes Before Coordinate Data Include Drawing Style Attributes Before Coordinate Data Generate PRJ Projection File Cancel spp Help The Options panel allows the user to specify what character to user to separate the x y and z coordinates of each vertex In addition the user can specify that they wish to separate each vector feature with a blank line or some other custom separator text The Coordinate Order section allows the user to control the order in which the X easting longitude and Y northing latitude coordinates are exported The export of elevation data is controlled with the Export Elevations option The Include Feature Attributes Before Coordinate Data and Include Drawing Style Attributes Before Coordinate Data options respectively control whether or not feature attributes or feature drawing style information is saved to
532. ts per milion Scale ppr The Planar Units pull down select the ground units to use with the projection The Zone selection allows you to select the zone for use with the UTM State Plane Gauss Krueger and other zoned projections For those projections that require additional parameters to fully define them the Attributes table allows you to enter the values for each applicable parameter You can save the currently selected projection to a PRJ file using the Save to File button Previously saved PRJ files can be loaded using the Load from File button By default the PRJ file will be saved in the newer WKT well known text format used by most products There is an Advanced Option on the General tab of the Configuration dialog allowing the older ESRI PRJ format to be exported instead if you would like If for some reason a WKT representation of the projection cannot be generated the old ESRI PRJ format will be written out instead Table of Contents 143 Global Mapper User s Manual The Init From EPSG button allows you to initialize a projection definition based on a numeric EPSG projected coordinate system definition There are numerous built in EPSG code definitions but by no means is there an exhaustive set You can add your own EPSG code definitions or modify built in ones by modifying the epsg_codes txt file installed in your Global Mapper installation folder The format is described in the file header You must re start Global
533. ttempt to load After selecting a filename mask all files under the selected folder which match the filename mask and are recognized by Global Mapper as a known data type will be loaded The filename mask supports the and wildcard characters The default mask of will check all files under the selected folder You can also cause data to only be loaded from selected folders as well For example if you had a large collection of folders with data split up into 1x1 degree blocks with the folder names depecting the 1x1 degree block they held you could use a directory name mask to load only those blocks that you wanted For example you might use a mask of N4 W10 tif to load all TIFF files between N40 and N50 and W110 and W100 You can also specify multiple masks if you need more than one to describe the set of files that you would like to load Simply separate the masks with a space Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location The Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location command allows the user to open any supported data file format for display at a fixed location on the screen rather than at a fixed location on the earth This is particularly useful for loading things like bitmaps for legends and logos The loaded data will be used for screen display export and printing operations Selecting the Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location command first prompts you to select a file to load then displays the Fixed Screen Location Setup dialog pict
534. u ve completed drawing the area the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the area The perimeter and enclosed area of the area feature will be added as default attributes The units for these measurements can be modified on the General tab of the Configuration dialog See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the area the Digitizer Tool will remain in the area creation mode so you can simply start left clicking to draw another area or right click to choose a different mode You can also create new area features from selected line features by selecting a collection of lines then right clicking and selecting the Advanced Feature Creation Options gt Create New Area Feature s from Selected Line Feature s menu command This will attempt to connect the selected line features to build area features All line features will be connected as far as possible then closed to create a new area feature When you select this option the dialog shown below will appear allowing you to setup the rules governing how areas will be formed The rules have the following meanings e Only Connect Lines that Match the Attributes of the Line Being Connected To If checked this option indicates that line features will only connect to other line features that have compatible labels descriptions and attributes
535. ual sign Individual parameter value pairs should be separated by spaces If a pair requires spaces internal to the value quotes may be used around the entire value For example for a filename with spaces the pair could look like FILENAME c my documents test tif Parameters that expect a value of YES or NO to enable or disable functionality can starting with v13 1 be enabled with just the parameter name So rather than saying FLAG_PARAM_NAME YES you can just say FLAG_PARAM_NAME to get the same behavior as specifying yes Command lines typically consist of one line each To extend a command to another line use the backslash character at the end of the line There are a few exceptions to this including the DEFINE PROJ and DEFINE SHAPE commands and the looping functionality provided by the DIR LOOP START and DIR LOOP END commands Batch Mode Operation Table of Contents 240 Global Mapper User s Manual You can run a Global Mapper script file automatically be passing it on the command line to the Global Mapper exe file The script file will be run with no user interface displayed and Global Mapper will immediately exit when the script file completes processing This allows you to easily run Global Mapper scripts from another application or from a DOS batch file Note that your script files need to have an extension of gms for this to work Comments Any lines that begin with the forward slash character are considered comment
536. ude longitude degrees There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of westmost longitude southernmost latitude easternmost longitude northernmost latitude e LAYER_BOUNDS specifies that the import should use the bounds of the loaded layer s with the given filename For example to import to the bounds of the file c test tif you would use LAYER_BOUNDS c test tif Keep in mind that the file must be currently loaded e LAYER _BOUNDS_EXPAND specifies that the operation should expand the used LAYER_BOUNDS bounding box by some amount The amount to expand the bounding rectangle by should be specified in the current global projection For example if you have a UTM meters projection active and want to expand the bounds retrieved from the LAYER BOUNDS parameter by 100 meters on the left and right and 50 meters on the top and bottom you could use LAYER_BOUNDS_EXPAND 100 0 50 0 You can also specify a single value to apply to all 4 sides or supply 4 separate values in the order left top right bottom Here is an example of an IMPORT_WMS command that pulls in NAIP imagery within 5 km of Blue Marble s headquarters IMPORT_WMS WMS_SERVER_URL http isse cr usgs gov arcgis services Combined USGS_EDC_Ortho_NAIF WMS_SERVICE WMS WMS _LAYER 0 ADDRESS 397 WATER ST GARDINER ME RADIUS 5 Table of Contents 294 Global Mapper User s Manual LAYER_DESC NATIP Color Imagery f
537. uence The following additional options are also available e Character Encoding this option controls the character encoding value encoded in the header of the KML file You will typically just keep the default of 1so 8859 1 but if your loaded data includes text encoded with a different character set like UTF 8 you can select that or even type in your own encoding if something else fits your data best o Create Compressed KMZ File if this option is checked a compressed KMZ file will automatically be created This will result in much smaller files and is highly recommended unless you plan on manually editing the export result yourself in a text editor o Hide Point Features by Default When Loading File if this option is checked all of the point features exported to the file will be hidden by default in Google Earth so as not to clutter up the display with a bunch of point icons e Use Displayed Point Symbols Rather than Push Pins for Points if this option is checked each point feature will be rendered with the same symbol displayed in Global Mapper rather than using the default push pin symbol from Google Earth This will result in a separate PNG file for each symbol used in the output file being included with the output data to provide the symbols e Display Area and Line Labels if this option is checked each exported line or area feature with a display label will also be marked with a clickable placemark displaying the label for that
538. ulation See special Attribute Name parameter details e VALUE specifies the value to use as the 2nd value of the calculation For numeric operations this must be a number e SEP_STR specifies the string to use to separate the source attribute and 2nd value when appending or prepending text If not provided the default is no separator at all Here is a sample of creating a new elevation attribute in feet from an elevation attribute ELEV_M in meters including with an appended unit string GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT VERSION 1 00 Create new ELEV_FT attribute with attribute in feet in any loaded layers CALC_ATTR TYPE MULTIPLY NEW_ATTR ELEV_FT SOURCE_ATTR ELEV_MT VALUE 3 2808 Append the unit name to the new attribute CALC_ATTR TYPE APPEND NEW_ATTR ELEV_FT SOURCE _ATTR ELEV_FT VALUE ft COMBINE_LINES The COMBINE_LINES command allows you to combine connected lines features based on one or more attribute or label values You can choose to combines in just a single loaded layer or in all loaded vector laeyrs You can either create new line features from the connected lines or using the CREATE AREAS FROM_LINES parameter instead create new area features by connecting the lines into closed shapes The newly created features will be placed in a new layer and have the current projection If creating lines any lines that are connected to another line will be marked as deleted You can also supply multiple COMPARE_STR parameters to a
539. und control point GCP will be displayed in the Zoomed and Reference Image views e Remember Last Projection this setting controls whether or not to initialize the projection to the last used rectification projection when rectifying new data If this is not enabled the projection will always default to Geographic Arc Degrees WGS84 e Add Control Points at Corner Points this option allows you to easily create a control point at each corner of the layer being rectified If enough other control points have already been entered to do a rectification the new corner control points will automatically be initialized with the best guess at the ground projected location otherwise they will be initialized with dummy values e Display Transformation Equations this option displays the actual transformation equations used for transforming this image based on the selected rectification method and the entered control points Note that this is only available if enough control points have been entered for a transformation to be calculated and if the transformation method is based on a simple set of equations e Show Crosshairs Across Entire Map this option controls whether or not crosshair lines are displayed across the entire Zoomed View and Reference Image views o Automatically Save GCP File When Done this option will automatically prompt the user to save a GCP file when they select the OK or Apply button to complete a rectification operation o Ctrl Lef
540. unds panel that allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to export data to any format Export CDF Command The Export CDF command allows the user to export any loaded vector data sets to a CDF Common Data Format file Table of Contents 54 Global Mapper User s Manual When selected the command displays the CDF Export Options dialog pictured below which allows the user to set up the export The dialog consists of a CDF Options panel which allows the user to set up the attribute code to assign to features and the text size in the export file and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export If the Use Default Attribute for All Features option is checked the attribute selected in the Default Attribute Code panel will be used for all features Otherwise the selected attribute will only be used for those features whose Global Mapper classification could not be automatically mapped to one of the CDF attributes CDF Export Options COF Options Export Bounds Default Attribute Code Di and Gas Fields Use Default Attribute Code for All Features Text Size 8 pt font 40 feet high text Smaller SS Larger Projection Use the options below to control what projection the data exported to the package file will be in You can choose to either esport the da
541. up the export The dialog consists of a DGN Options panel a Gridding panel and an Export Bounds panel which allows the user to set up the portion of the loaded vector data they wish to export Table of Contents 56 Global Mapper User s Manual DGN Export Options DGN Options Gridding Export Bounds Text Size Smaller Left Bigger Right 1 00 Unit Resolution 0000 Generate Projection PRJ File i Generate 3D DGN File if 3D Features Present Generate Tags for Feature Attributes m Set Global Origin to the Lower Left of Design Plane Rather than at the Center of the Design Plane Replace Dark Line Colors with White This is Useful if the Exported DGH File will be Used in Other Software that Uses a Default Black Background i Cancel spp Help The Text Size section allows the user to control how large display label text will be in the created file The Unit Resolution value is used to specify the resolution unit saved in the DGN file If the Generate PRJ File option is checked a prj projection file describing the projection of the coordinates in the file will automatically be created If the Generate 3D DGN File if 3D Features Present option is checked the entire DGN file will be marked as 3D and any features that have a elevation data associated with them will be stored as 3D features If the Generate Tags for Feature Attributes option is checked any attributes associated with exported features will be saved a
542. ured below This dialog allows the user to specify the size and position of the data relative to the screen export printout Table of Contents 19 Global Mapper User s Manual Fixed Screen Location Setup Setup Fired View Location Size on Map View i Fed Percentage of View Width 25 of view width Fired Percentage of View Height x of view height Orginal Pixel Size Horizontal Position 10 accel of view width from Left Edge of View C Right Edge of View Center of View Vertical Position inches from sa Top Edge of View Bottom Edge of View Center of View M Always Draw Layer on Top of Other Layers Unload All Command The Unload All command unloads all overlays and clears the screen Create New Map Catalog Command The Create New Map Catalog command allows you to create a map catalog A map catalog is a collection of map files which are grouped together to allow for easy loading viewing and export Layers in a map catalog will be loaded and unloaded as needed for display and export potentially greatly reducing the load tme and memory requirements for working with very large collections of data Upon selecting this command and selecting the file to save the map catalog to the Modify Map Catalog dialog shown below will be displayed allowing you to add files to the catalog control at what zoom level data layers are loaded for display and setup how the map bounding boxes are
543. urs Must be specified in conjunction with MIN_ELEYV in order to restrict the range of contour generation to anything other than the full range of loaded elevation values SPATIAL_RES specifies spacing of grid points used to determine contour position A smaller grid spacing results in higher fidelity but larger contours Typically you ll want to use the default value which is the minimum spatial resolution of all loaded data Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to use a grid with a 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 You can also specify as a percentage of the default resolution by adding a percent For example to get half the detail your double the spatial resolution value so you would use SPATIAL_RES 200 200 SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the contour bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The
544. ust be at least two For example to create 1000 points use POINT_COUNT 1000 You can use the POINT_SPACING parameter rather than this to specify how far apart sample points should be e POINT_SPACING specifies the point spacing in meters to use between sample points along the path For example to create points spaced 10 meters apart use POINT_SPACING 10 0 e START_POS specifies the start position for the path profile The coordinates must be given in the current global coordinate system For example if UTM if the current projection you might specify and easting northing as follows START_POS 480000 43 10000 e END_POS specifies the end position for the path profile The coordinates must be given in the current global coordinate system For example if UTM if the current projection you might specify and easting northing as follows START_POS 480000 43 10000 e ADD_LAND_USE_CODES specifies whether to query loaded LULC data sets for the land use code at each point and to include that land use code after the elevation Use ADD_LAND_USE_CODES YES to turn on adding land use codes for each point e APPEND_TO_FILE specifies that the elevations between the start and end locations should be appended to the file specified if it already exists rather than a new file being created Use APPEND_TO_FILE YES to enable e ADD_BLANK_LINE specifies that a blank line will be added to the file if APPEND_TO_FILE YES is added to the command and the file was
545. value of 1 means odd parity addresses are all odd a value of 2 means even parity address are all even and a value of 3 means there is not parity addresses can be even and odd For any other value the parity will be automatically determined e PARITY_L L_PARITY numeric parity value on left side of road A value of 1 means odd parity addresses are all odd a value of 2 means even parity address are all even and a value of 3 means there is not parity addresses can be even and odd For any other value the parity will be automatically determined Only the start and end address number are absolutely required for the side of a road to have addressing in addition to the road having a name Adding Coordinate Attributes to Point Features Table of Contents 227 Global Mapper User s Manual If one or more point features are selected the Add Coordinate Attributes to Selected Point s option will appear when right clicking Selecting this option will cause X and Y attributes to be added or updated if they already exist to the selected points with the value being the coordinates of the points in the current projection system Adding Attributes to Features from Other Features There are multiple ways to assign attributes to features from other features This includes applying attributes to areas from points in those areas applying attributes to points from the area they are in and applying attributes to lines from area features they ar
546. vation at the cursor location You can get information about a portion of the profile a sub path by left clicking to start a sub path definition then left clicking again at the end of your desired sub path Details about the sub path like length elevation change and slope will then be displayed on the bottom of the profile window Right clicking on the profile window brings up an options menu allowing the user to change the start and end positions select the units meters or feet to display the elevations in configure display of the path profile and display a dialog containing details about the path These options are also available under the Options menu on the dialog The File menu contains options allowing you to save the path profile line of sight data to a file The individual options are described below Table of Contents 191 Global Mapper User s Manual The Save To Bitmap option allows registered users to save the contents of the path profile window to a Windows bitmap BMP file for use in other applications The Save to BMP and Display on Main Map View option allows registered users to save the contents of the path profile window to a Window bitmap BMP file and then display that BMP at a fixed location on the main map view This is the equivalent of using the Save to Bitmap menu command then closing the dialog and using the File gt Open Data File at Fixed Screen Location menu command in the main map view The Save CSV
547. w Null 0 0 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 S gt gt 308 Global Mapper User s Manual Null Orchard or Solid Fill 255 128 0 Plantation R gt _ Solid Null m D Null Null D ame ps Scattered Trees Null Null Sand Pattern 255 255 0 Solid Fill m a A a Aa E OC MC CER ar at a ee a Pa a i a EES Diagonal Scrub Area a a TSA ET Bel ak teeta a an a a a eee ak dee ee C Hatch e E Eee ie ross Hatc Pa a E AM MM A My MM MM MMe SECRETE E Eee ee M A Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 309 0 255 0 Null 0 128 128 Null Global Mapper User s Manual Small Metro omal Wletre Area Solid Fill 255 247 181 Area Null 0 0 0 Snow or Glacier Snow or Glacier Solid Fill 255 255 255 Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 tate No Fill 0 0 0 A _ _ Survey Section No Fill 0 0 0 _ C O Unclassified Jnclassified Area Feature Null 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Null 0 0 0 No Fill 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Area Feature Unknown Area Unknown Area Type No Fill 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Type VIEW Era View bhed Coverage Area No Fill 0 0 0 Solid 0 0 0 Coverage Area Global Mapper Scripting Reference Aerial View Of Address Aerial House View 310 Global Mapper User s Manual Solid Fill 125 191 167 1 ORLAR RLAR LA LAA LA a Backwards Wooded Area f AG ELEI Diagonal 165 145 97 1 Null PERAR R EAL AAAA AA Cross Hatch A
548. w allows you to crop the selected overlay s to a particular boundary including support for automatically removing the collars from USGS DRG topographic maps Table of Contents 158 Global Mapper User s Manual Raster Options Palette Feathering Color Grade Projection Display Color Contrast Adjustment Cropping Collar Cropping Clipping No Cropping Clipping C Crop to Manually Specified Lat Lon Boundary m Crop to Manually Specified Boundary in Native Layer Frojection Units Crop a Specified Number of Pixels Around the Edges of the Layer Left Top P Right a Bottom E p C Snap to Manually Specified Degree Boundary Crop to Curently Selected Polygon s The Automatically Crop Collar DRG BSB etc option is used to automatically remove the collar from loaded raster data if the collar is in a recognized format Most frequently it is used to removes the white border around a DRG the small black collar around a 3 75 minute DOQQ or the map collar around a BSB marine chart This allows you to seamlessly view a collection of adjacent BSB DRG or DOQQ files The Crop to Manually Specified Lat Lon Boundary option allows you to specify a lat lon boundary in the native datum of the selected overlay to crop the overlay to When selected this option will display the Customize Collar Bounds dialog pictured below to allow specifying the bounds to crop to Table of Contents 159 Global Mapper User s Ma
549. w terrain layer FEET export in US feet DECIFEET export in 10ths of US feet METERS export in meters DECIMETERS export in 10ths of meters CENTIMETERS export in centimeters e SPATIAL_RES specifies spatial resolution Defaults to the minimum spatial resolution of the two layers if not specified Should be formatted as x_resolution y_resolution The units are the units of the current global projection For example if UTM was the current global projection and you wanted to export at 30 meter spacing the parameter value pair would look like SPATIAL_RES 30 0 30 0 You can also specify as a percentage of the default resolution by adding a percent For example to get half the detail your double the spatial resolution value so you would use SPATIAL_RES 200 200 e SPATIAL_RES_METERS specifies spatial resolution to use in meters The value in meters will automatically be converted to the curent view export projection units For example to do an export at 2 0 meter spacing or as close as you can get to that in the current units use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 2 0 or to do an export at 1 0 meters in X by 1 5 meters in Y use SPATIAL_RES_METERS 1 0 1 5 e GLOBAL_BOUNDS specifies the combine bounds in units of the current global projection There should be 4 values in a comma delimited list following the parameter name The values should be in order of minimum x minimum y maximum x maximum y e GLOBAL_BOUNDS_SIZE specifies the c
550. will dragging will result in an ellipse For Rectangular Square features the default shape is a rectangle and holding down the SHIFT key will force the dragged shape to be square If you hold down the T key when left clicking to start the shape the start point will be treated as the top left corner of the feature rather than the center of the shape feature If you choose the 3 point area or line rectangle creation options you enter a special mode for easily drawing rotated rectangles Just left click to start the rectangle then left click again at the end of the first side then left click again when the rectangle shape is what you want to create it Once the shape is to your liking release the left mouse button and the Modify Feature Info dialog will appear allowing you to setup the label classification drawing style and attribution for the new feature See Editing Feature Attributes and Drawing Styles for more details Once you have completed have completed creating the shape the Digitizer Tool will remain in the selected shape creation mode so you can simply start drawing a new shape or right click to choose a different mode Create Strike and Dip Geology Related Features After selecting the Create Strike and Dip Point popup menu option you can proceed to select the location of your new point by left clicking at the desired location If you drag the cursor in the direction of the strike then Table of Contents 209 Global
551. will just be used with no additional export time being required e Grayscale Palette This palette consists of 256 scales of gray ranging from black to white e DRG Optimized Palette This palette is optimized for the exporting USGS DRG data The palette consists of only the standard DRG colors e DRG DOQ Optimized Palette As the name suggests this palette is optimized for exporting a mixture of USGS DRG data and grayscale satellite photos i e USGS DOQs The palette consists of the 14 standard DRG colors with the remaining 242 colors being a range of gray values ranging from black to white o Halftone Palette The palette consists of a blend of 256 colors evenly covering the color spectrum This palette is the best choice when exporting anything but DRGs and grayscale satellite photos o Custom Palette from File This option allows the user to choose a pal file describing the palette to use for the export A pal file should be a text file with one line per color with the red green and blue color components for each color in the palette separated by a comma You can save a pal file for an existing palette based file by opening the Overlay Control Center selecting the palette based layer press Options then the Transparent Color button then selecting the option to save a color palette file 24 bit RGB Create a full 24 bit color image with no palette This will create the best resulting image but will also take the most space e K
552. y use maximum value found in 4x4 box MAX_5X5 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 5x5 box e MAX_6X6 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 6x6 box MAX_7X7 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 7x7 box e MAX_8X8 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 8x8 box e MAX_9X9 terrain layers only use maximum value found in 9x9 box MIN_2X2 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 2x2 box e MIN_3X3 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 3x3 box MIN_4X4 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 4x4 box MIN_SXS terrain layers only use minimum value found in 5x5 box MIN_6X6 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 6x6 box MIN_7X7 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 7x7 box MIN_8X8 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 8x8 box MIN_9X9 terrain layers only use minimum value found in 9x9 box e ANTI_ALIAS DEPRECATED use SAMPLING_METHOD instead elevation and raster only specifies whether to remove jagged edges by making a subtle transition between pixels Turning off this option helps maintain the hard edges of the pixels as they are rasterized Use ANTI_LALIAS YES to turn on Anything else turns it off e CONTRAST_MODE raster only specifies the type of contrast adjustment to apply to the data NONE no contrast adjustment applied this is the default PERCENTAGE apply a percentage contrast
553. y of tasks Click here for a guide to the scripting language Selecting the Run Script command from the menu displays the Script Processing dialog shown here Se ript Processing Script File GLOBAL_MAPPER_SCRIPT YERSION 1 00 UNLOAD ALL DEFINE PROJ PROJ_NAME GEQ WOase4 Projection GEOGRAPHIC Wi Se 0 000000 0 000000 Script Results Run Script in the Contest of the Main View Le Use Already Loaded Data Run Script Close The Script File pane displays the currently loaded script file To load a new script file for processing press the Load Script button at the bottom left corner of the dialog If you would like the script file to make use of data already loaded in the main view and to also affect what is displayed in the main view check the Run Script in the Context of the Main View option prior to running the script To run the loaded script file press the Run Script button Any warning error or status messages generated while running the script will be output to the Script Results pane When you are done processing scripts press the Cancel button to close the dialog Table of Contents 22 Global Mapper User s Manual Note Only registered users of Global Mapper are able to run Global Mapper script files Capture Screen Contents to Image Command The Capture Screen Contents to Image command allows user to save the current contents of the Global Mapper window to a JPEG PNG Geo TIFF or Windows Bi
554. yford In 1924 ED50 NORWAY OFFSHORE S62 6230 International 1909 Hayford In 1924 ED50 SICILIA 6230 intermational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 ED50 SPAIN PORTUGAL 6230 __ International 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 ED50 TURKEY 620 intermational 1909 Hayford Ind 1924 ED79 o O OB Oteationa 1967 ED87 o 623I international 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 6229 Helmert1906 EGYPT GULF OF SUEZ 650TL_ 6706 Helmet 1906 ESTIONIA 1997 O oo ORs S O ETRF2000 RDN 6326 GRS1980 O O O i O ETRS89 6258 GRS1980 FD 1958 RAQ o OO O2 Caen RGD O O O i FINLAND HAYFORD 6123 intemational 1909 Hayford Ind 1924 FORT MARIGOT ST MAARTEN 6621 International 1909 Hayford In 1924 GDA 94 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1994 6283 GRS1980 O Z O GDM2000 MALAYSIA 6m4 GRS1980 O O O GGRS87 GREECE 621 GRS1980 O O O i O GOOGLE MAPS SPHERE RADIUS 6378137 Unknown Sphere Radius 6378137m GRS80 ELLIPSOID 6326 GRS1980 O Z O Z O o O GUADELOUPE 1948 6622 intermational 1909 Hayford Intl 1924 GUAM 19 3 O O O 5 Oae S HARTEBEESTHOEK 1994 S AFRICA HERAT NORTH AFGHANISTAN 6255 International 1909 Hayford In 1924 HERMANNSKOGEL Unknown Besselt84t O O o HJORSEY 1955 665g interational 1909 Hayford In 1924 HONG KONG 1963 __ 6738 ntermational 1909 Hayford In 1924 HONG KONG 1980 66u intermational 1909 Hayford Ind 1924 HU TZUSHAN 626 intemational 1909 Hayfo
555. ype to assign to matching line features POINT_TYPE specifies the name of the Global Mapper point type to assign to matching point features ATTR_VAL specifies the attribute value to update and what value to assign to it The format is attr_name attr_value For example if you want to set the value of an attribute named CFCC to A34 use ATTR_VAL CFCC A34 You can add multiple ATTR_VAL parameters to a single command to provide multiple attribute value pairs or labels to add update If you would like to update the feature label rather than an attribute use lt Feature Name gt for your attribute name COMPARE_STR specifies a comparison operation to perform to see if a feature is one that needs to be updated The format is attr_name attr_value or attr_name attr_value for equals and not equals comparisons respectively For example if you have an attribute named CFCC and you want to match when the value of that attribute starts with an A you can use COMPARE _STR CFCC A as your parameter You can add multiple COMPARE_STR parameters to a single command to combine multiple criteria for your search See special Attribute Name parameter details for other special allowed attribute names e COMPARE_NUM specifies that any comparisons that are done against numeric values should be Table of Contents 249 Global Mapper User s Manual numeric rather than alphabetic Use COMPARE_NUM YES to enable e ATTR_TO_DELETE specifies the name of an attribut
556. ys the specified number of meters tall on the map regardless of zoom level The symbol selection list also includes several option at the top of the list to select symbols of common shapes like dots squares diamonds etc with a user specified size and color In addition the Show Labels for Points of This Type When Present option allows user to turn point labels off on a type by type basis The Custom Symbols section allows users to create new symbols from their own bitmap and icon files which they can then use as the symbol to display for a given type The New Type button allows the user to create a new point feature type and specify how it should be displayed The Edit Type button allows the user to edit point types that were previously created with the New Type button and the Delete Type button allows the user to remove point types that were previously created with the New Type button With the Attributes button you can specify a set of default attributes and values to use for new features of this type created using the Digitizer Tool If you right click on the list of types a menu will appear allowing you to save and restore your style settings using a Style file This provides an easy way to setup a set of styles to use then restore them at a later date for use with a particular set of data The Custom Symbols section allows you to add new point symbols that will be available for display from your own files This includes support for tran

Global Mapper User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents